Yamaha DDK-7 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: DDK-7

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Owner’s Manual

DDK

v1.1

(1)B-11 1/2

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on

it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden

loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke

should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used

for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord Location

(1)B-11 2/2

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from

the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in

the instrument overheating.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes

of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume

controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel

or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the

instrument or other property, or operational failure.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

Saving and backing up your data

• Always save data to a USB ﬂash memory or other external media, in order to

help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating

error.

Backing up the external media

•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you

save your important data onto two external media.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or

modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

The name plate of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit.

The serial number of this product may be found on or near the name

plate. You should note this serial number in the space provided below

and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid

identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Accessories

• Owner’s Manual

•Power cord

Congratulations!

You are the proud owner of a ﬁne electronic keyboard, the DDK-7.

The Yamaha DDK-7 combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art

digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical

versatility.

In order to make the most of your DDK-7 and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to

read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described.

Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Main Features

Wide Variety of Registration Menus page 21

The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 288 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the

DDK-7 for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six

basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to ﬁt

your own performance needs.

Richly textured, four-layer AWM Voices and High Quality Digital

Effects

pages 25

and 53

The DDK-7 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices – 415 altogether – created with the

AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. The authentic touch response keyboard lets you

play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there

are 183 different effect types in 15 categories that you can apply to each Voice section —letting you enhance

and even completely change the character of the Voices, without having to use the Voice Edit features.

Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 61

The exceptionally of wide selection of 274 rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your

performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) – such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and Break

– that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional.

Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into ﬁve instrument parts, providing basic

backing as well as embellishments.

Comprehensive input and output connectors ideal for live

performance

page 215

Since the DDK-7 is equipped with two types of AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and SUB, you can select outputs for

each part. This lets you add an external effect to a speciﬁc part, or adjust the volume balance among the parts

with an external mixer—allowing you to build up your own system and create just the sound you want.

Large, 6.5-inch TFT-LCD with Intuitive Touch Panel Operation page 13

This large LCD display not only lets you clearly see a wide selection of settings and parameters at almost any

angle, it also serves as a touch control panel — letting you intuitively make selections and adjust settings

simply by touching the screen! Once you touch a setting, you can even adjust it in ﬁner detail if necessary with

the Data Control dial.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or

with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without

limitation, all computer software, styles ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized

use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of

• Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio ﬁles is strictly prohibited except

for your personal use.

•Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.

• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of

their respective companies.

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may

appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

• The pan ﬂute and sitar, shown in the displays of the DDK-7, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of

Musical Instruments.

• This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format

music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their

producers or composers originally intended.

The DDK-7 is compatible with the following formats.

“GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System

Level 2” is a standard speciﬁcation that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data

compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice

parameters, and integrated effect processing.

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha

speciﬁcally to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over

Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major

enhancement of the GM speciﬁcally to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations,

as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.

The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single

uniﬁed format.

Appendix

Connections

Transpose

and Pitch Controls

Controllers

Rhythm Program

Voice Edit

Music Data Recorder

(M.D.R.)

Registration Memory

Rhythm/

Keyboard Percussion

Voice Controls

and Effects

Organ Flutes

Voices

Quick Introductory

Guide

Contents

Accessories ..............................................................4

Main Features ...........................................................5

Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Front Panel ................................................................8

LCD Display/Display Select ....................................10

Overview .................................................................10

1 Quick Introductory Guide . . . . . . . . . . 11

Getting Started........................................................11

Using the LCD Display............................................13

LCD Display Settings ..............................................16

Voice Display ..........................................................18

Registration Menu ...................................................21

Confirming the Version of Your DDK-7....................24

Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7).........................24

2 Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Voices for each keyboard .......................................25

Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons .................27

Voice List.................................................................33

3 Organ Flutes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

4 Voice Controls and Effects . . . . . . . . . 41

Selecting from the Voice Condition display ............42

Selecting from the panel .........................................47

Effect List ................................................................53

5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . 61

Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button..............61

Rhythm List .............................................................69

Accompaniment......................................................71

Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord

(A.B.C.) ...................................................................72

Melody On Chord (M.O.C.).....................................74

Keyboard Percussion..............................................75

6 Registration Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Storing Registrations...............................................90

Selecting Registrations ...........................................92

Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory 94

Initializing Registration Memory ..............................95

Registration Shift .....................................................95

Unifying a specific parameter...............................101

Copying Registrations...........................................104

7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) . . . . . 106

Calling Up the M.D.R. Display ..............................106

Using the LCD Display..........................................107

Formatting External Media ....................................112

Selecting a Song...................................................113

Recording .............................................................117

Changing the Song Name ....................................120

Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)...123

Recalling Recorded Registrations ........................128

Playing Back a Song.............................................130

Displaying the Score.............................................135

Other Functions (Tools).........................................137

8 Voice Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Voice Structure......................................................144

Editing a Voice ......................................................145

Saving the edited Voice ........................................152

Quitting Voice Edit.................................................153

Recalling an Edited Voice .....................................153

9 Rhythm Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation ....154

Rhythm Pattern Program .......................................155

Rhythm Sequence Program ..................................190

Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data

to External Media ..................................................199

10 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Footswitches .........................................................200

Foot Pedal .............................................................203

Expression Pedals.................................................211

11 Transpose and Pitch Controls . . . . 214

12 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Accessory Jacks and Controls .............................215

Connecting Headphones or External System .......217

Connecting a Pedal Unit .......................................221

Connecting a Foot Pedal.......................................221

Connection with Computer....................................222

Connecting External Devices................................223

MIDI.......................................................................227

MIDI Control ..........................................................230

13 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

XG Voice & Drum List............................................232

XG Drum Map .......................................................237

MIDI Data Format ..................................................240

Troubleshooting ....................................................255

Specifications........................................................258

Index .....................................................................260

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Panel Layout

Front Panel

UPPER 1, 2

(page 25)

SUSTAIN button

(page 50)

REGIST MENU

(page 21)

RHYTHM/

KEYBOARD PERCUSSION

(page 61)

USB TO DEVICE terminal

(page 216)

[M.] (Memory) button

(page 90)

Registration memory

(page 90)

LOWER 1, 2

(page 26)

LCD display/

DISPLAY SELECT

(page 10)

PEDAL 1, 2

(page 26)

LEAD 1, 2

(page 25)

13 14 15 16

123

REVERB button

(page 47)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

MASTER VOLUME

dial (page 12)

[D.] (Disable) button

(page 92)

45678910 12

POWER switch

(page 12)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

LCD Display/Display Select

Overview

1 LCD display (touch-panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13

2 DATA CONTROL dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15

3 [VOICE DISPLAY] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 18

4 [REGIST MENU] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 21

5 [FOOT SWITCH] button . . . . . . . . . .pages 96, 200

6 [MDR] button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 106

7 [INTERNET] button

*The Internet Direct Connection service is only available in

Japan. The DDK-7 cannot be connected to the Internet in

other countries due to unavailability of the service.

8 [UTILITY] button . . . . . . . pages 16, 211, 214, 230

9 [PROGRAM] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 145

) [SUSTAIN] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50

! [REVERB] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 47

@ [U. ORGAN FLUTES] button. . . . . . . . . . . page 38

# [L. ORGAN FLUTES] button . . . . . . . . . . . page 38

$ [ROTARY SP SPEED] button . . . . . . . . . . page 51

345 678 9)! @#$

AC INLET jack (page 215)

Upper keyboard

Lower keyboard

USB TO DEVICE terminal (page 215)

MIC jack (page 215)

Front Panel

(page 8)

TO PEDAL connector (page 216)

FOOT PEDAL jacks (page 216)

PHONES jack (page 215)

I/O connectors (page 216)

USB/MIDI terminals (page 216)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life, we

recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows you in the simplest

possible manner how to start playing your DDK-7.

Connect the power cord.

First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC INLET on the DDK-7, then

plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.

Connect the speakers or headphones.

Since the DDK-7 has no built-in speakers, you will need to monitor the sound

of the instrument by using external equipment. Connect a set of headphones,

powered speakers, or other playback equipment as required.

Contents

1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

2 Using the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

• Changing the Display Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

• Pressing Buttons on the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

• Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display

Sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

3 LCD Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

• Selecting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

• Muting the Touch Panel Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

• Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

4Voice Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

5 Registration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

• Selecting Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

• Registration Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

6 Conﬁrming the Version of Your DDK-7 . . . . . . . . 24

7Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7) . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Getting Started

Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the DDK-7. The required voltage

is printed on the name plate of the DDK-7. Yamaha products are

manufactured speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area where they are to

be sold. If you intend to use the instrument in another location, or if any

doubt exists about the supply voltage, please consult with a qualiﬁed

technician.

AC INLET jack

Reference Pages

Using Headphones

(page 217)

Playing the Sounds of the

DDK-7 Through an External

Audio System (page 218)

Using a mixer for live

performance (page 218)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Turn the power on.

Make sure the volume settings of the DDK-7 and external devices are turned

down to the minimum.

Turn the power on by pressing the [POWER] switch on the DDK-7 front panel,

then turn the power on the ampliﬁers.

When powering down the setup, make sure to switch off the power of the

external device (or lower its volume) before switching off the DDK-7.

Set the MASTER VOLUME control.

The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of

the entire instrument.

Now that you've set up the DDK-7 properly, you're ready to begin playing it.

The Expression Pedal on the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit can be used to control the

volume with your foot as you play.

Speaker (Left)

OUTPUT R

PHONES

Speaker (Right)

L/L+R

Do not use the instrument/

device or headphones for a

long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable

volume level, since this can

cause permanent hearing

loss.

Even when the power

switch is turned off,

electricity is still ﬂowing to

the product at the minimum

level.

Reference Page

Power-on Procedure

(page 219)

For turning the power on or off.

NOTE

when you connect an

external audio device to the

AUX OUT jacks, the output

level is ﬁxed and cannot be

controlled.

Decreasing

the volume

Increasing

the volume

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

This instrument features a special touch panel that allows you to change the parameters

by simply touching the ‘virtual’ buttons or sliders on the display. (Please note that two

or more parameters cannot be operated simultaneously.)

You can also use the Data Control dial to make ﬁne changes to the parameter value

shown in the display.

Changing the Display Page

There are some oval-shaped numbered buttons at the top right of the display. Pressing

these buttons changes the “page” of the display. The selected page’s button turns

orange.

Using the LCD Display

NOTE

When cleaning the display,

use a soft, dry cloth.

Do not use any sharp or

hard tools to operate the

touch panel. Doing so may

damage the display.

Page 1

Page 2

Press this button to select Page 1

Press this button to select Page 2

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Pressing Buttons on the Display

There are three types of buttons: those that select a function, those that switch a

function on/off, and those that open a list or menu of parameters. To select the desired

function, simply press the button in the display directly.

For switching on/off or opening a parameter list, see the instructions below.

To switch the function on or off:

You can independently mute each Voice section in the Voice Display, each

accompaniment part in Rhythm Menu display, and each Element in the Voice Edit

display.

To open the parameter list:

When you press the button, a parameter list will appear in which you can select the

desired parameter.

Off, or mute (button is grayed out) On

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display

Sliders

You can adjust some parameters such as Volume, Reverb, Pan and so on, by using the

‘virtual’ sliders in the display. There are two ways to move the slider in the display:

touching it directly, and using the Data Control dial. We suggest that you touch the

display slider when making coarse adjustments and use the Data Control dial for ﬁne

adjustment.

Touching the display slider directly:

Press a point in the slider to which you want to adjust the parameter value. The slider

will move to the point you pressed. Also, by sliding your ﬁnger up or down while

holding down the display slider, you can change the parameter value.

Using the Data Control dial:

Touch on/above the slider in the display to enable the parameter and set a rough value,

then turn the Data Control dial.

To control Pan, you can move the horizontal slider in the same way as vertical sliders.

Slider will move to the point you touch

Slider will follow your ﬁnger

DATA CONTROL

Touch here to enable the parameter

Blue mark

DATA CONTROL

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Here you can change the display settings: displayed language (English or Japanese),

touch panel sound, and display brightness.

Selecting the Display Language

The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default

setting is English.

Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the

Utility Display.

Press the [GLOBAL] button to call up the GLOBAL Page.

Press the desired button, (Japanese) or [English].

LCD Display Settings

NOTE

The settings in the Utility

Display are automatically

saved when another display

is called up.

LANGUAGE

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Muting the Touch Panel Sound

The DDK-7 is set by default with the touch panel sound turned on, giving you audio

feedback when you press a button or control. If you want to mute the touch panel

sound, follow the procedure below.

Press [UTILITY] button to call up GLOBAL Page of the Utility

Display.

Press the [OFF] button of the TOUCH PANEL SOUND to mute the

sound.

To turn the sound on again, select [ON] in Step #2.

Adjusting the Display Brightness

You can adjust the display brightness to a comfortable, easy-to-read level.

Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the

Utility Display.

Move the LCD BRIGHTNESS slider by touching it directly or

using the Data Control dial.

Higher settings make the display brighter and lower settings make it darker.

TOUCH PANEL SOUND

DATA CONTROL

LCD BRIGHTNESS

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

You can visually conﬁrm the currently assigned Voices to each keyboard, currently

selected rhythm, Registration Shift, and so on, in the Voice Display.

How to call up the Voice Display:

The Voice Display always appears when the DDK-7 is turned on. To call up the Voice

Display from any other display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button.

The Voice Display consists of four different pages that can be switched by pressing the

[1], [2], [3] or [4] button at the top right of the display.

Voice Display

564

Switching the Display Pages

Voice Display [Page 1]

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

1 Voice Sections

Shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section. You can also mute speciﬁc

Voice section by pressing its button (the button is grayed-out).

2 RHYTHM

Shows the currently selected rhythm.

3 A.B.C. MODE

Shows the mode of the Auto Bass Chord.

4 TEMPO

Shows the current rhythm tempo.

5 BAR/BEAT

Shows the bar/beat when the rhythm is playing.

6 REGISTRATION

Shows the current position of the Registration Shift.

You can conﬁrm the parameter values (for example, Reverb, Volume, Pan) for each

Registration Memory simultaneously. Moreover, you can unify a speciﬁc parameter

used in various Registration Memories at one time. See page 101 for the details.

Reference Page

Selecting a Voice (page 27)

Reference Page

Selecting a rhythm (page 61)

Reference Page

Auto Bass Chord (page 72)

Reference Page

Adjusting the tempo

(page 67)

Reference Page

Registration Shift (page 95)

Voice Display [Page 2]

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

The Registrations stored to the Registration number can be copied to another

Registration number for each individual section. See page 104 for the details.

Determines the Melody On Chord modes. See page 74 for details.

Voice Display [Page 3]

Reference Page

Registration Memory

(page 90)

Voice Display [Page 4]

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

A “Registration” consists of panel settings including the selected Upper Keyboard

Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices, Pedal Voices, rhythm and so on. The Registration

Menu button includes 288 Registrations, specially suited for playing in a different

music style.

Selecting Registrations

Press the [REGIST MENU] button to call up the Registration

Menu display.

Select the desired registration category with the category

buttons in the display.

Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example,

if you want to play Jazz, press the [JAZZ & LATIN] button. For details on the

Registration Menu, see page 23.

Registration Menu

NOTE

Additional basic

Registrations are preset on

the Registration Memory

locations from 1 to 16. See

page 90 for details.

Live Performance

Basic

Pops & Rock

Dance & Ballad

Jazz & Latin

Symphony & World

456

1 23

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Select the desired Registration by pressing the appropriate

button on the display.

One display page contains 12 Registration buttons. Pressing the numbered

buttons in the display changes the display pages, letting you select up to 48

Registrations from one Registration category button.

The color of the selected Registration name changes to orange, indicating that it

has been selected, and the Auto Bass Chord mode is shown at the bottom of the

display.

Play your favorite song with the selected Registration.

Change the display pages here.

Reference Page

Auto Bass Chord (page 72)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Registration Menu List

Page

LIVE PERFORMANCE

BASIC POPS & ROCK DANCE & BALLAD JAZZ & LATIN

SYMPHONY & WORLD

Bell Pop Piano Simple 8 Beat 1 Dynamic 8 Beat Organ Ballad Blow On Sax Fanfare

AOR Piano Simple 8 Beat 2 NY Ballad Dramatic Ballad Sax Ensemble String Orchestra

Ballad Stack Light Step British Pop Love Ballad Moonlight Romantic Violin

Rockin’on Piano Sunny Pop 8 Beat Modern Smooth Lead Big Band Baroque

Ballad Piano Kids March 1 Rock Band Pop Ballad Clarinet Swing Flute&Harp

LA Fusion Kids March 2 Detroit Pop Guitar Ballad Jazz Combo Serenade

70’s Pops Kids March 3 Techno Pop Acoustic Ballad Medium Jazz Fast March

Pop E.Piano Synth. Rock Sheriff Reggae Healing Guitar Organ Session Wild West

Prism E.Piano Symphonic March 1 Rock&Roll Chillout Guitar Combo Vienna Waltz

Kool E.Piano Symphonic March 2 Power Rock Sweetheart 1 Tender Ballad Polka

Spacey E.Piano Bluegrass 60’s Guitar Rock Sweetheart 2 Jazz Waltz Chanson Club

Smooth E.Piano Sea Carnival Unplugged Slow & Easy Five-Four Theatre Organ

60’s Soul Basic Waltz Motor City Euro Trance Big Band Samba Flamenco

Classic Jazz Org Brass Ensemble Lovely Shufﬂe 6/8 Trance Mambo Brass Pop Flamenco

Organ Band Pure Waltz Gospel Shufﬂe Cool Hip Hop Mambo Tenor Mexican Dance

Bump Organ Rococo Ensemble Joyful Gospel Latin House Montuno Mariachi

Kool Dist. Organ Pop Cha Cha Frankly Soul Dance Beat Bossa Nova Celtic Dance

Rock Dist. Organ Comical Rumba Soul Euro Dance Pop Pop Bossa Folk Step

Organ Funk Comical Samba Gospel UK Pop Sweet Rumba Italiano

Progressive Rock Toy Orchestra 6/8 Soul Jive Beguine Musette

Lounge Organ Charleston Hit Pop Disco Queen Cha Cha Cha Country

60’s Cheap Organ Winter Swing New Country Disco Soul Mellow Groove Hawaiian

Sunset Reggae Snow Waltz 1 Eternal Pop Pop Disco Modern R&B Chinese Nocturne

Hard Rock Organ Snow Waltz 2 Ground Beat Hot Disco Dixieland Jazz Japanese Sound

70’s Crossover Alpine Polka *A Bounce Pop *A Ibiza *A Jungle Drum *A Orchestra March*A

East Coast Brass Alpine Polka *B Bounce Pop *B Ibiza *B Jungle Drum *B Orchestra March*B

Fat Analog Synth Alpine Polka *C Bounce Pop *C Ibiza *C Jungle Drum *C Orchestra March*C

Club Jazz Alpine Polka *D Bounce Pop *D Ibiza *D Jungle Drum *D Orchestra March*D

Distor. Guitar Dream Ballad *A Blues Jam *A Power House *A Jazz Club *A Pasodoble *A

Tricky Guitar Dream Ballad *B Blues Jam *B Power House *B Jazz Club *B Pasodoble *B

Wow Guitar Dream Ballad *C Blues Jam *C Power House *C Jazz Club *C Pasodoble *C

Flange Clavi. Dream Ballad *D Blues Jam *D Power House *D Jazz Club *D Pasodoble *D

Pop Fusion Lead Pops Orchestra*A Evergreen Waltz*A Dance Latino *A Afro Session *A Tango *A

AOR Lead Pops Orchestra*B Evergreen Waltz*B Dance Latino *B Afro Session *B Tango *B

Sweet Fusion Pops Orchestra*C Evergreen Waltz*C Dance Latino *C Afro Session *C Tango *C

Retro Pop Pops Orchestra*D Evergreen Waltz*D Dance Latino *D Afro Session *D Tango *D

Sweep Pad Kids On Stage *A 16 Beat Pop *A Twilight Disco*A ChaCha Grandee*A Show Time *A

Pop Ballad Kids On Stage *B 16 Beat Pop *B Twilight Disco*B ChaCha Grandee*B Show Time *B

Fat Pad Kids On Stage *C 16 Beat Pop *C Twilight Disco*C ChaCha Grandee*C Show Time *C

Deep Pad Kids On Stage *D 16 Beat Pop *D Twilight Disco*D ChaCha Grandee*D Show Time *D

Oriental Pad Galaxy March *A Top Gear Rock *A Love Song *A 3/4 Fast Jazz *A Majestic Sound*A

Spacious Piano Galaxy March *B Top Gear Rock *B Love Song *B 3/4 Fast Jazz *B Majestic Sound*B

70’s Flute Pad Galaxy March *C Top Gear Rock *C Love Song *C 3/4 Fast Jazz *C Majestic Sound*C

Screen Ballad Galaxy March *D Top Gear Rock *D Love Song *D 3/4 Fast Jazz *D Majestic Sound*D

Brass Pad SE *A Southern Pop *A Movie Ballad *A Twilight Sax *A Orchestra Swing*A

Pop Rock Brass SE *B Southern Pop *B Movie Ballad *B Twilight Sax *B Orchestra Swing*B

Dance Brass SE *C Southern Pop *C Movie Ballad *C Twilight Sax *C Orchestra Swing*C

World Strings SE *D Southern Pop *D Movie Ballad *D Twilight Sax *D Orchestra Swing*D

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

You can conﬁrm the version of your DDK-7 by the following procedure.

Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the

Utility Display.

Press the [Version] button in the display.

The Version dialog appears in the display. Pressing [OK] closes the dialog.

All current settings including Registration Memory, User Voices, User Rhythms, and

LCD Display settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful

when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save your

important data to external media, such as USB ﬂash memory.

Turn off the power.

While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back

on.

Release the ENDING [1] button after Voice Display appears.

If you don’t want to reset the LCD Display settings, you can initialize only Registration

settings. See page 95 for more information.

Conﬁrming the Version of Your DDK-7

Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7)

Reference Page

Saving Registrations

(page 123)

Reference Page

Initializing Registration

Memory (page 95)

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Voices

The DDK-7 features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the

Upper Keyboard and Lower Keyboard. If you connect the Pedal Unit to the DDK-7, you can

use any of these voices also on the Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are available on

the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and

Pedalboard each have two Voice sections.

A total of 415 voices can be selected on the display which you can call up by pressing

the Voice section buttons on the front panel.

Voices for the Upper Keyboard

Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing

together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and Lead

Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel.

Contents

1Voices for each keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons . . . . . . .27

• Selecting a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

• Changing the Voice volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

3Voice List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Voices for the Upper Keyboard

Voices for

the Lower Keyboard

Voices for Pedalboard

Voices for each keyboard

Upper Keyboard Voice 1

Upper Keyboard Voice 2

Lead Voice 1

Lead Voice 2

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Lead Voice 1 and 2 sound only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more

keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for “lead” or solo

instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone.

Voices for the Lower Keyboard

Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing

together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section

can be selected from the panel.

Voices for Pedalboard

Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together:

Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel.

Pedal Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more pedals are played, by

default.

Lower Keyboard Voice 1

Lower Keyboard Voice 2

Reference Page

POLY (page 43)

Pedal Voice 1

Pedal Voice 2

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections,

instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 (UPPER 1) are given here.

Selecting a Voice

Press the [UPPER 1] button.

The voice menu of the currently selected category is shown in the display.

Select the desired instrument category with the category buttons

in the display.

You can also choose the “User” category to select a User voice you have created.

Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons

Voice menu

Reference Page

Voice Edit (page 144)

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

For example, to call up Piano 1, select the Piano category.

The name of the selected category (Piano) is displayed on the upper left. The

Voice name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned

Voice and is irrelevant to the Voice menu below.

Select the desired Voice name (Piano 1, for example) from the

Voice menu.

The Voice menu contains many Piano Voices, more than can ﬁt on one display

page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons in the

display.

The color of the selected Voice name changes to orange, indicating that it has

been selected.

Changing the Voice volume

There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the panel

and using the volume slider in the display. The VOLUME buttons let you make coarse

adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you ﬁne control.

Reference Page

Voice List (page 33)

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse)

Press one of the VOLUME buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired

level for each Voice.

The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a

maximum of full volume.

Using VOLUME slider in the display (ﬁne)

Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again (or pressing the Voice name of the

selected Voice in the display) calls up the Voice Condition Display.

To set the volume, touch the VOLUME slider in the display or use the Data Control

Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).

DATA CONTROL

Volume slider

NOTE

Depending on the volume

value (set by the slider), two

adjacent VOLUME lamps

may be lit at the same time,

indicating an intermediate

position.

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display. Pressing it a second

time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive presses alternate between the

two displays.

When the Voice Condition display is shown, pressing [VOICE MENU] button on

the display also calls up the Voice Menu.

From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as

Pan, Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition

display, see page 42.

CAUTION

Turning the DDK-7 off

erases all panel settings

you have made.

If you wish to keep the

panel settings you have

made, save them to a USB

ﬂash memory or other

external media before

turning the DDK-7 off

(page 94).

About the To Lower function

Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can

also be played on the Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER] button in each

section is on. When [TO LOWER] is on, the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice cannot be

played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively.

The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section.

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

About the Solo function

The Lead Voice 2 section features an exclusive Solo function. Solo lets you

instantly switch to a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance, muting

all other Upper Keyboard Voices. If you connect an optional Foot Pedal to the

DDK-7, you can control the solo function without taking your hands from the

keyboards.

Select the Voice that you wish to play solo in the Lead Voice

2 section.

In this condition, all the Voices for Upper Keyboard (Upper Keyboard

Voice 1 and 2, and Lead Voice 1 and 2) can be played.

Press the [SOLO] button in the Lead Voice 2 section.

This sets Solo to standby status.

Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility Display.

Press the [F. PEDAL] button at the top right of the display to call up the

FOOT PEDAL Page.

Reference Page

Foot Pedal (page 203)

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Press the [SOLO] button in the display.

Select the [SOLO] button in the left side of the display if you are using the (1

VOLUME) of the FOOT PEDAL jacks, or select in the right side if you are

using (2 SUSTAIN).

The Solo function is assigned to the Foot Pedal, and the polarity is

selected automatically.

In this condition (Solo on), all Voices set to the Upper Keyboard except

for Lead Voice 2 are playable on the Upper Keyboard.

To temporarily turn Solo on as you play, press the Foot

Pedal and hold down.

In this condition, only the Lead Voice 2 is playable on the Upper Keyboard.

(All other voices are muted.) Each time you press the Foot Pedal (Solo on)

you can play only Lead Voice 2, and each time you release it (Solo off) you

can play all Voices except Lead Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard.

Notes on using Solo

•Some Registration Menu settings reverse the polarity of the Foot Pedal for the

Solo function. In this condition, the situation described above is reversed. In

other words, each time you press the Foot Pedal you can play all Voices except

Lead Voice 2, and each time you release it you can play only Lead Voice 2 on the

Upper Keyboard. To return the polarity to its original setting, press the [-]

button in the display.

•Pressing the Foot Pedal while holding down a key will not turn Solo on for

that key. Solo will active when the next key is played after pressing the Foot

Pedal.

• Lead Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more keys are

played. However, in the Solo mode, Lead Voice 2 sounds for the last key

played.

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

This list shows all available Voices on the DDK-7. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list

indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Voice Menu.

Voice List

Category/

Voice Name

Preset

Feet

Preset

Effect 1

Preset

Effect 2

STRINGS/VIOLIN

1 Strings 1 8’ THRU THRU

Strings 2 8’ THRU THRU

Strings 3 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Strings 4 8’ THRU THRU

Strings 5 8’ THRU THRU

Strings 6 8’ THRU THRU

Strings 7 8’ DELAY LR THRU

Strings 8 8’ THRU THRU

Strings 9 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Chamber Strs 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Chamber Strs 2 8’ THRU THRU

Chamber Strs 3 8’ THRU THRU

Chamber Strs 4 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

2 Pizzicato Strs 1 8’ THRU ROOM S

Pizzicato Strs 2 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S

Pizzicato Strs 3 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S

Pizzicato Strs 4 8’ BASEMENT ROOM S

Tremolo Strings 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

3 Strings1&7 8’ THRU THRU

Strings2&Viola 8’ THRU THRU

Strings3&4 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Strings7&Violin5 8’ THRU THRU

Violin5&Cello 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Octave Strings 1 8’ THRU THRU

Octave Strings 2 8’ THRU THRU

4Violin 1 8’ THRU THRU

Violin 2 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Violin 3 8’ THRU THRU

Violin 4 8’ THRU THRU

Violin 5 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Violin 6 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Viola 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Cello 1 8’ RESONATOR THRU

Cello 2 8’ THRU THRU

Pizzicato Violin 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S

CONTRABASS

1 Contrabass 1 8’ THRU THRU

Contrabass 2 8’ THRU THRU

Contrabass 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Contrabass 4 8’ THRU THRU

Contrabass 5 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Acoustic Bass 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Acoustic Bass 2 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Pizzicato Bass 1 8’ THRU THRU

Pizzicato Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU

BRASS/TRUMPET

1 Brass Section 1 8’ THRU THRU

Brass Section 2 8’ THRU THRU

Brass Section 3 8’ THRU THRU

Brass Section 4 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Brass Section 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Brass Section 6 8’ THRU THRU

Trombone Sec 1 16’/8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Trombone Sec 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Trombone Sec 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Trombone Sec 4 16’/8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Trombone Sec 5 16’/8’ THRU HALL 1

2 Brass1&Trp6 8’ THRU THRU

Brass2&Trp6 8’ ST 2BAND EQ THRU

Horn 1&4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ HALL 1

Octave Brass 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Octave Brass 2 8’ DELAY LR THRU

Octave Brass 3 8’ THRU THRU

Octave Brass 4 8’ THRU THRU

Octave Brass 5 8’ THRU THRU

Octave Brass 6 8’ THRU THRU

Octave Brass 7 8’ ECHO THRU

3Trumpet 1 8’ THRU THRU

Trumpet 2 8’ THRU THRU

Trumpet 3 8’ THRU THRU

Trumpet 4 8’ THRU THRU

Trumpet 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Trumpet 6 8’ THRU THRU

Trumpet 7 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Muted Trumpet 1 8’ THRU THRU

Muted Trumpet 2 8’ THRU THRU

Muted Trumpet 3 8’ PHASER 1 THRU

Flugel Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU

Flugel Horn 2 8’ THRU THRU

4Trombone 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ THRU

Trombone 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Trombone 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Trombone 4 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Muted Trombone 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Muted Trombone 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ PHASER 1

Category/

Voice Name

Preset

Feet

Preset

Effect 1

Preset

Effect 2

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

5 Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU

Horn 2 8’ THRU THRU

Horn 3 8’ THRU THRU

Horn 4 8’ THRU THRU

Horn 5 8’ THRU THRU

Horn 6 8’ THRU THRU

Muted Horn 8’ THRU THRU

6Tuba 1 16’ ST 2BAND EQ THRU

Tuba 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Euphonium 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Brass Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU

Brass Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU

Brass Bass 3 8’ THRU THRU

WOODWIND/FLUTE

1 Flute 1 8’ THRU THRU

Flute 2 8’ THRU THRU

Flute 3 8’ THRU THRU

Flute 4 8’ THRU THRU

Piccolo 4’ THRU THRU

Recorder 1 4’ THRU THRU

Recorder 2 4’ THRU THRU

Ocarina 4’ THRU THRU

Whistle 4’ ST 2BAND EQ AMBIENCE

2 Clarinet 1 8’ THRU THRU

Clarinet 2 8’ THRU THRU

Clarinet 3 8’ THRU THRU

Clarinet 4 8’ THRU THRU

Bass Clarinet 16’/8’ THRU THRU

3 Oboe 1 8’ THRU THRU

Oboe 2 8’ THRU THRU

Oboe 3 8’ THRU THRU

Oboe 4 8’ THRU THRU

Oboe 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

English Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU

English Horn 2 8’ THRU THRU

Bassoon 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Bassoon 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Bassoon 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU

4 Alto Sax 1 16’/8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Alto Sax 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Tenor Sax 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Tenor Sax 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Tenor Sax 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Soprano Sax 1 8’ THRU THRU

Soprano Sax 2 8’ THRU THRU

Baritone Sax 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Category/

Voice Name

Preset

Feet

Preset

Effect 1

Preset

Effect 2

5 Sax Ens 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Sax Ens 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Sax Ens 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Woodwind Ens 1 8’ THRU THRU

Woodwind Ens 2 8’ THRU THRU

Woodwind Ens 3 8’ THRU THRU

Woodwind Ens 4 8’ THRU THRU

TUTTI

1 Strings&Winds 8’ THRU THRU

Strings&Brass 1 8’ THRU THRU

Strings&Brass 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU

Strings&Horn 8’ THRU THRU

Brass&Sax 1 8’ THRU THRU

Brass&Sax 2 8’ THRU THRU

Brass&Sax 3 8’ THRU THRU

Brass&Winds 8’ THRU THRU

2Orchestra Hit 8’ THRU THRU

CHOIR

1 Choir 1 8’ THRU THRU

Choir 2 8’ THRU THRU

Choir 3 8’ THRU THRU

Choir 4 8’ THRU THRU

Choir 5 8’ THRU THRU

Choir 6 8’ THRU THRU

Choir 7 8’ THRU THRU

Choir 8 8’ THRU THRU

Choir 9 8’ THRU THRU

2Vocal 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU

PAD

1 Smooth Pad 1 8’ THRU THRU

Smooth Pad 2 4’ THRU THRU

Smooth Pad 3 8’ THRU THRU

Smooth Pad 4 8’ DELAY LR THRU

Smooth Pad 5 8’ DELAY LR THRU

Smooth Pad 6 8’ THRU THRU

Smooth Pad 7 4’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY

Smooth Pad 8 8’ XG CHORUS 1 XG HM ENHNCE

2 Resonance Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE TEMPO CROSS

Resonance Pad 2 8’ XG FLANGER 3 CROSS DELAY

Resonance Pad 3 8’ ENS DETUNE CROSS DELAY

Resonance Pad 4 4’ CELESTE 2 DELAY LR

Resonance Pad 5 8’ SYMPHONIC DELAY LR

Resonance Pad 6 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 CROSS DELAY

Resonance Pad 7 8’ DELAY LR PHASER 1

Resonance Pad 8 8’ DELAY LR TEMPO CROSS

Resonance Pad 9 8’ V_FLANGER ECHO

Resonance Pad 10 8’ DELAY LR XG CHORUS 1

Resonance Pad 11 8’ COMPRESSOR DELAY LR

Category/

Voice Name

Preset

Feet

Preset

Effect 1

Preset

Effect 2

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

3 Bell Pad 1 8’ CELESTE 1 DELAY LR

Bell Pad 2 8’ XG CHORUS 3 CROSS DELAY

Bell Pad 3 8’ XG CHORUS 3 DELAY LR

Bell Pad 4 8’ XG CHORUS 4 DELAY LR

Bell Pad 5 8’ CHORUS 1 XG DLY LCR

Bell Pad 6 8’ XG CHORUS 2 DELAY LR

Bell Pad 7 8’ XG CHORUS 2 DELAY LR

Bell Pad 8 8’ XG AT PAN 1 DELAY LR

Bell Pad 9 4’ XG 3BAND EQ DELAY LR

4 Space Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE DELAY LR

Space Pad 2 8’ XG FLANGER 1 DELAY LR

Space Pad 3 8’ DELAY LR XG FLANGER 1

Space Pad 4 16’ PITCH CHANGE DELAY LR

Space Pad 5 8’ XG CHORUS 1 DELAY LR

Space Pad 6 8’ V_FLANGER TALKING MOD

5 Noisy Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE DELAY LR

Noisy Pad 2 8’ ENS DETUNE TALKING MOD

Noisy Pad 3 8’ XG FLANGER 2 DELAY LR

Noisy Pad 4 8’ ECHO XG FLANGER 2

Noisy Pad 5 8’ EQ DISCO CANYON

SYNTH

1 Synth Lead 1 8’ CELESTE 1 TEMPO DELAY

Synth Lead 2 8’ ODRV+DELAY PHASER 1

Synth Lead 3 8’ ER 1 DELAY LR

Synth Lead 4 8’ XG CHORUS 4 THRU

Synth Lead 5 8’ XG CHORUS 3 TEMPO CROSS

Synth Lead 6 8’ XG CHORUS 4 XG DLY LCR

Synth Lead 7 8’ GM CHORUS 3 DELAY LR

Synth Lead 8 8’ V_DIST SOFT DELAY LR

2 Pop Lead 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY

Pop Lead 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE TEMPO CROSS

Pop Lead 3 8’ CMP+OD+TDLY ENS DETUNE

Pop Lead 4 8’ PITCH CHANGE TEMPO DELAY

Pop Lead 5 8’ DELAY LR THRU

Pop Lead 6 8’ XG HM ENHNCE ECHO

Pop Lead 7 16’/8’ DELAY LCR THRU

3 Synth Cla 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY

Synth Cla 2 8’ ENS DETUNE DELAY LR

Synth Cla 3 8’ XG 3BAND EQ DELAY LR

Synth Cla 4 8’ DELAY LR ENS DETUNE

Synth Cla 5 8’ ENS DETUNE XG DLY LCR

Synth Cla 6 8’ XG FLANGER 3 DELAY LR

Synth Sax 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR

Synth Trumpet 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR

Synth Violin 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LCR

Category/

Voice Name

Preset

Feet

Preset

Effect 1

Preset

Effect 2

4 Synth Brass 1 8’ PITCH CHANGE THRU

Synth Brass 2 8’ THRU THRU

Synth Brass 3 8’ THRU THRU

Synth Brass 4 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU

Synth Brass 5 8’ XG 3BAND EQ THRU

Synth Brass 6 8’ XG 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 4

Synth Brass 7 8’ COMPRESSOR THRU

Synth Brass 8 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR

Synth Brass 9 8’ CROSS DELAY THRU

Synth Brass 10 8’ ENS DETUNE CROSS DELAY

Synth Brass 11 8’ REVERS GATE DELAY LR

Synth Brass 12 8’ ST 3BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS

Synth Brass 13 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE

5 Synth Strs 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1

Synth Strs 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1

Synth Strs 3 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY

Synth Strs 4 8’ XG 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1

Synth Strs 5 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY

Synth Strs 6 8’ PHASER 1 ER 1

Synth Strs 7 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY

6 Synth Bell 1 8’ XG CHORUS 1 TEMPO DELAY

Synth Bell 2 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 THRU

Synth Bell 3 8’ ST 3BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY

Synth Bell 4 8’ XG HM ENHNCE XG SYMPHONIC

Synth Bell 5 8’ CROSS DELAY TUNNEL

Synth Bell 6 8’ XG HM ENHNCE XG SYMPHONIC

Synth Bell 7 8’ CROSS DELAY TUNNEL

Synth Decay 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS

Synth Decay 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE

Synth Decay 3 8’ AMBIENCE REVERS GATE

Synth Decay 4 8’ HM ENHANCER AMP SIM

ORGAN

1 Pipe Organ 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Pipe Organ 2 8’ THRU THRU

Pipe Organ 3 8’ THRU THRU

Pipe Organ 4 8’ THRU THRU

Pipe Organ 5 8’ THRU THRU

Harmonica 1 8’ THRU THRU

Harmonica 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU

Harmonica 3 8’ DELAY LR THRU

Category/

Voice Name

Preset

Feet

Preset

Effect 1

Preset

Effect 2

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

2 Theatre Organ 1 8’ TREMOLO 2 HM ENHANCER

Theatre Organ 2 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Theatre Organ 3 8’ GT TREMOLO 1 HM ENHANCER

Theatre Organ 4 8’ TREMOLO 2 HM ENHANCER

Theatre Organ 5 8’ TREMOLO 2 XG HM ENHNCE

Theatre Organ 6 8’ THRU THRU

Theatre Organ 7 8’ TREMOLO 2 THRU

Theatre Organ 8 8’ THRU XG HM ENHNCE

Accordion 1 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU

Accordion 2 8’ THRU THRU

Accordion 3 8’ THRU THRU

Accordion 4 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU

Bandoneon 8’ THRU THRU

Reed Organ 8’ THRU THRU

3 Jazz Organ 1 16’ 2WAY ROT SP THRU

Jazz Organ 2 16’ ROTARY SP 1 THRU

Jazz Organ 3 16’ TREMOLO 1 XG ROTARY SP

Jazz Organ 4 16’ TREMOLO 1 ROTARY SP 1

Jazz Organ 5 16’ ST 3BAND EQ BASEMENT

Jazz Organ 6 16’ ST 3BAND EQ XG ROTARY SP

Jazz Organ 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ROTARY SP 1

Jazz Organ 8 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG ROTARY SP

Jazz Organ 9 16’ ST 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 2

4 Pop Organ 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TREMOLO 1

Pop Organ 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 1

Pop Organ 3 8’ XG 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 1

Pop Organ 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DIST+2ROT SP

Pop Organ 5 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 DIST+2ROT SP

Rock Organ 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ODRV+ROT SP

Rock Organ 2 8’ V_DIST SOFT DUAL ROTSP 2

Rock Organ 3 8’ COMP+DIST ROTARY SP 1

5 Organ Bass 1 8’ THRU THRU

Organ Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU

Organ Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU

Organ Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU

PIANO

1 Piano 1 8’ THRU THRU

Piano 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU

Piano 3 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Honkytonk Piano 8’ LO-FI ST 3BAND EQ

Harpsichord 1 8’ THRU THRU

Harpsichord 2 8’ THRU THRU

Clavichord 8’ AMBIENCE THRU

Category/

Voice Name

Preset

Feet

Preset

Effect 1

Preset

Effect 2

2 DX E.Piano 1 8’ CHORUS 2 THRU

DX E.Piano 2 8’ ENS DETUNE THRU

DX E.Piano 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ CELESTE 4

DX E.Piano 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS

Stage E.Piano 1 8’ THRU THRU

Stage E.Piano 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ CHORUS 1

Stage E.Piano 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ EP AUTO PAN

Stage E.Piano 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE

Stage E.Piano 5 8’ XG TREMOLO XG CMP+DIST

Stage E.Piano 6 8’ ST 2BAND EQ EP PHASER 3

3 Stack E.Piano 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG SYMPHONIC

Stack E.Piano 2 8’ HM ENHANCER ENS DETUNE

Clavi 1 16’ THRU THRU

Clavi 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ TOUCH WAH 2

GUITAR

1 Nylon Guitar 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Nylon Guitar 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU

Steel Guitar 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ HM ENHANCER

Steel Guitar 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU

12Str Guitar 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG HM ENHNCE

Jazz Guitar 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Jazz Guitar 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU

Harp 1 8’ THRU THRU

Harp 2 8’ THRU THRU

Harp 3 8’ ER 1 THRU

2 Elec Guitar 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ SYMPHONIC

Elec Guitar 2 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ V_DIST SOFT

Elec Guitar 3 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ ST OVERDRIVE

Elec Guitar 4 16’/8’ ODRV+T DLY THRU

Elec Guitar 5 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ V_DIST SOFT

Muted Guitar 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY

Distortion Gtr 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ WAH+OD+T DLY

Distortion Gtr 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ V_DST H+TDLY

Distortion Gtr 3 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ DIST+T DLY

3 Banjo 8’ THRU THRU

Mandolin 8’ THRU THRU

Pedal Steel Gtr 8’ THRU THRU

PERCUSSION

1Vibraphone 1 8’ THRU THRU

Vibraphone 2 8’ HM ENHANCER AUTO PAN

Marimba 1 8’ THRU THRU

Marimba 2 8’ THRU THRU

Xylophone 4’ THRU THRU

Glockenspiel 1 4’ THRU THRU

Glockenspiel 2 4’ THRU THRU

Category/

Voice Name

Preset

Feet

Preset

Effect 1

Preset

Effect 2

Voices

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

2 Celesta 1 4’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Celesta 2 4’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Music Box 1 4’ THRU THRU

Music Box 2 4’ HM ENHANCER STAGE 2

Chime 1 4’ AMBIENCE THRU

Chime 2 8’ AMBIENCE HALL L

Chime 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ PLATE 2

TIMPANI

1 Timpani 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1

Timpani 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 2

Timpani Roll 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1

Timpani Roll 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 2

Timpani Roll 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1

ELECTRIC BASS

1 Fingered Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU

Fingered Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU

Fingered Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU

Fingered Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU

Fingered Bass 5 16’ THRU THRU

Slap Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU

Slap Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU

Slap Bass 3 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG PCH CHG 1

Slap Bass 4 16’ M BAND COMP THRU

2 Picked Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU

Picked Bass 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE

Picked Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU

Picked Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU

Fretless Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU

Fretless Bass 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE

SYNTH BASS

1 Funk Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU

Funk Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU

Funk Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU

Funk Bass 4 16’ ENS DETUNE THRU

Funk Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG FLANGER 1

Funk Bass 6 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE

Funk Bass 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG HM ENHNCE

Funk Bass 8 16’ THRU THRU

Funk Bass 9 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE

Funk Bass 10 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE

2 Dance Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU

Dance Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU

Dance Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU

Dance Bass 4 16’ ST 2BAND EQ HM ENHANCER

Dance Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE

Dance Bass 6 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE

Dance Bass 7 16’ THRU THRU

Dance Bass 8 16’ HM ENHANCER FLANGER 1

Category/

Voice Name

Preset

Feet

Preset

Effect 1

Preset

Effect 2

3 Smooth Bass 1 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE

Smooth Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU

Smooth Bass 3 16’ ST 2BAND EQ FLANGER 1

Smooth Bass 4 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE

Smooth Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE

Smooth Bass 6 16’ THRU THRU

Smooth Bass 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE

WORLD

1 Pan Flute 1 8’ THRU THRU

Pan Flute 2 8’ THRU THRU

Bagpipe 8’ THRU THRU

Dulcimer 8’ THRU THRU

Shakuhachi 8’ THRU THRU

Yokobue 4’ THRU THRU

Shamisen 8’ THRU THRU

Koto 8’ THRU THRU

Taishokoto 4’ THRU THRU

2 Erhu 1 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU

Erhu 2 8’ THRU THRU

Sheng 8’ THRU THRU

Zheng 8’ THRU THRU

Pipa 8’ THRU THRU

Nay 8’ THRU THRU

Surnay 8’ THRU THRU

Oud 8’ THRU THRU

Sitar 8’ THRU THRU

Kamanche 8’ THRU THRU

3 Steel Drum 8’ THRU THRU

Log Drum 8’ THRU THRU

Kalimba 8’ THRU THRU

Category/

Voice Name

Preset

Feet

Preset

Effect 1

Preset

Effect 2

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Organ Flutes

The DDK-7 has an Organ Flutes feature that allows you to create your own organ Voices,

giving you access to an unlimited combination of organ sounds. With this function, you can

recreate all of the classic organ sounds by adjusting the ﬂute footage levels and the

percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs. There are nine ﬂute footage settings,

with three additional footage settings for the attack sound.

Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons (UPPER or LOWER).

The Flute Footage Levers appear on the display.

Press the ON/OFF button in the display to turn the Organ Flutes

function on by selecting “ON”.

To turn off the Organ Flutes function, press the same button a second time to

select “OFF”. The lamp of the [U. ORGAN FLUTES] or [L. ORGAN

FLUTES] button on the panel lights up when the Organ Flutes function is on.

The lamp turns off when the function is off.

Select the wave type for the Organ Flute Voice.

Selecting [SINE] button produces a clean, clear sound and selecting

[VINTAGE] produces a gritty, slightly distorted sound.

FOOTAGE Page

Organ Flutes

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Adjust ﬂute footage settings (over a range of 0 – 8).

The Flute footage levers can be adjusted by directly touching the display. The

Data Control dial cannot be used. Play the keyboard and listen to the changes in

the sound as you adjust the footage levels.

Press the [ATTACK/VOLUME] button in the upper right on the

display to adjust the volume and attack settings.

1 ATTACK

Determines the level of each volume in the percussive portion of the Voice. Footage

settings are 4', 2-2/3' and 2'. The LENGTH lever determines the duration of the

attack sound.

2 RESP. (Response)

Determines the overall speed of the keyboard response. Moving the lever downward

makes the keyboard response slower, creating a pipe organ effect.

3 MODE

Determines which notes in a held group of notes are given an attack sound.

This parameter is common to both Upper and Lower Organ Flute Voices.

FIRST: Only the ﬁrst note played will have attack. All other notes played while

the ﬁrst is held have no attack.

EACH: All notes played have an attack sound.

4 REVERB

Reference Page

Reverb (page 47)

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. When the reverb

depth in the REVERB Page 1 control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have

no effect.

5 VOLUME

Determines the overall volume of the Organ Flute Voice. The volume balance of the

individual footages is maintained. A minimum setting here produces no Organ Flute

sound.

4 5

ATTACK/VOLUME Page

Organ Flutes

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Press the [EFFECT] button in the upper right on the display to

adjust the Rotary Speaker settings.

1 EFFECT TYPE

Select the Rotary Speaker (tremolo) effect type. Pressing the button for which the effect

type (or “OFF”) is displayed calls up a list of the effect types. Select the desired type

from the list.

To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.

2 EFFECT Parameters

Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.

Press the ON/OFF button in the FOOTAGE Page to cancel the

Organ Flutes function by selecting “OFF”.

EFFECT Page

Reference Pages

Effect List (page 53)

Rotary Speaker (page 51)

Select the desired effect type

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

The DDK-7 is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the

sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects.

Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound.

However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the

controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital.

The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice

sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied

differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section,

independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system.

✻

Priority is applied only for Lead Voice 2.

Controls and Effects Reference

page

for

changing

the settings

Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied

Upper Keyboard Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Pedalboard

Upper

Keyboard

Voice 1, 2

Organ Flute

Voice

Lead Voice 1, 2

Lower

Keyboard

Voice 1, 2

Organ Flute

Voice

Pedalboard

Voice 1, 2

Selecting from the Voice Condition display

Pan page 42 O—O O—O

Touch Tone page 42 O—O O—O

Pitch page 43 O—O O—O

Feet page 43 O—O O—O

Reverb (send level) page 43 OOOOOO

Brilliance page 43 O—O O—O

Volume page 43 OOOOOO

Priority* page 43 —— O

✻

———

Poly (Pedal

polyphonic mode)

page 43

—————O

Vibrato page 44 O—O O—O

Touch Vibrato page 45 O—O O—O

Lead Slide page 45 O—O———

Transpose page 45 O—OO—O

Tune page 45 O—OO—O

Effect (1/2) page 46

(Rotary

Speaker only)

(Rotary

Speaker only)

Selecting from

the panel

Reverb page 47 O

Sustain page 50 OOOOOO

Rotary Speaker page 51

Contents

1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

2 Selecting from the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3 Effect List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again (or press

the name of the selected Voice in the display). The Voice Condition display appears.

Voice Condition Display for each Voice has four pages that can be switched by pressing

[1] – [4] buttons at the top right of the display.

In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including panning, touch tone

and volume. The displays of the various Voice sections have slight differences in their

functions.

1 PAN

Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are

available.

2 TOUCH TONE

The Touch Tone function gives you expressive control over the volume and timbre of a

Voice. All Voices are provided with this expressive function, making it possible to

perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal changes of actual instruments.

Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial Touch and After Touch.

2 -1 INITIAL touch

Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the

keys. The harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the

timbre will become.

Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect.

Range: 0 – 14

2 -2 AFTER touch

Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys

after playing them.

The harder you press down on the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter

the timbre will become.

Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect.

Range: 0 – 14

Selecting from the Voice Condition display

2 -1 2 -2 3

76 8 2-1 2 -2 345 76 9

Voice Condition [Page 1]

NOTE

Initial Touch may not be

effective on some organ

Voices.

NOTE

After Touch has no effect on

percussive Voices (such as

piano or vibraphone),

percussion sounds, or some

organ Voices.

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

3 PITCH

Controls pitch according to the play style of After Touch.

AFTER touch

Controls the pitch according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing

them.

The minimum setting produces no effect at all. Higher (positive) settings make

the pitch higher according to the pressure and lower (negative) settings make the

pitch lower. The setting of +14 or -14 results in the widest pitch change.

Range: -14 – +14

4 FEET

Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide

setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. PRESET is the original (factory) setting.

5 REVERB

Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section. When the REVERB

control in the Reverb Page 1 is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.

See page 47 for details.

6 BRILLIANCE

Adjustment of the Voice tone, brighter or mellower. Range is from -3 to +3. Higher

settings makes the voice tone brighter.

7 VOLUME

Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 29 for more information.

8 PRIORITY (only for the Lead Voice 2)

Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top.

LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played

simultaneously.

TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played

simultaneously. When the Solo mode is on, Lead Voice 2 sounds according to

Last mode, regardless of the setting made here.

9 POLY (only for Pedal Voices)

Allows you to switch the pedal polyphonic mode on or off. Setting POLY to on

switches the normally monophonic pedal Voices to polyphonic play. This makes it

possible to play the Pedalboard in various expressive ways, such as playing legato or

playing intervals and chords.

Keep in mind that you cannot exceed the total maximum polyphony: 14 notes for all

sections, Upper, Lower and Pedal.

Reference Page

Solo function (page 31)

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

The items included in this page differ between the Lead Voice sections and the other

sections. SLIDE (

3) only applies to Lead Voice 1 and 2.

1 VIBRATO

The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and

more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some

Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected.

1 - 1 PRESET/USER

Selecting PRESET calls up the original

(factory) vibrato settings for the Voice.

When PRESET is selected, DELAY,

DEPTH and SPEED parameters cannot

be edited.

Selecting USER lets you adjust the vibrato

settings for yourself.

1 - 2 DELAY

Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and

the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato

onset.

Range: 0 – 14

1 - 3 DEPTH

Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more

pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect.

Range: 0 – 14

1 - 4 SPEED

Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of

the vibrato.

Range: 0 – 14

1 -2 1 -3 1 -4 3 -1 3 -2

1 -1

4 5

Voice Condition [Page 2]

Delay

Speed

Depth

Vibrato Control

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

2 TOUCH VIBRATO

Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply

vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you press down

the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth

cannot be controlled, no matter how hard you press the keys.

3 SLIDE (only for Lead Voices)

Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective

within a one-octave range for Lead Voices. Slide has no effect when playing notes

beyond a one-octave range. By connecting an optional Foot Pedal to the DDK-7, you

can use it to control the slide function.

3 - 1 ON/OFF

On/Off switch the Slide effect.

3 - 2 TIME

Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. Higher settings makes

the slide speed slower.

Range: 0 – 14

4 TRANSPOSE

Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section. Range is from -6 to +6.

5 TUNE

Determines the ﬁne pitch settings (detune) for each Voice section, producing a richer

sound. Each step represents a 1-cent change in pitch.

Range: -64 – +63

NOTE

Touch Vibrato is not applied

to the Pedal Voices.

Reference Page

Controlling Lead Slide (with

Foot Pedal); (page 206)

Reference Page

Transpose (for entire

instrument); (page 214)

Reference Page

Pitch (for entire instrument);

(page 214)

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

You can edit the effect parameters from these two displays. Both displays have the same

contents. You can select two effects for each Voice section with these displays (Voice

Condition Pages 3 and 4).

1 EFFECT 1 (Page 3)/EFFECT 2 (Page 4)

Selects the effect category. Pressing the effect button on the display calls up the effect

category list. Select the desired effect category in the list.

By selecting [PRESET] in the list, the original (factory) effect category for the selected

Voice is automatically set. Selecting [THRU] bypasses the effect (no effect is added to

the selected Voice).

2 TYPE 1 (Page 3)/ TYPE 2 (Page 4)

Determines the type of the effect. Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the

effect type list, corresponding to the selected effect category. Select the desired effect

type in the list.

If you have selected the [PRESET] category, the effect type cannot be edited.

After changing the effect type, the effect parameter below is automatically changed

corresponding to the selected effect type.

3 Effect Parameters

Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.

Voice Condition [Page 3, 4]

Reference Page

Effect List (page 53)

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

The Reverb, Sustain and Rotary Speaker displays are called up by pressing the

respective buttons on the panel.

Reverb

Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in

a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice sections,

or adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and accompaniment separately.

To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb pages:

Press the REVERB button, located to the left of the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The

Reverb display appears.

Use the [REVERB] button to switch the reverb on/off.

The Reverb display consists of four pages.

DEPTH:

Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level of the reﬂected sounds.

When this parameter is set to the minimum, the settings in the pages that follow have

no effect.

Range: 0 – 24

Selecting from the panel

REVERB [Page 1]

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

1 TYPE

Determines the reverb type for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice.

Several types can be selected: Room, Hall, Stage, and so on.

Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the Reverb Type list.

The list contains many reverb types, more than can ﬁt on one display page. To change

the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons [1] or [2] in the display. Select

the desired reverb type in the list. After changing the reverb type, the TIME parameter

below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected reverb type.

2 TIME

Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice.

Higher settings increase the reverberance.

Range: 0.3s – 30.0s

3 ORGAN

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. This parameter

corresponds to the REVERB slider contained in the ATTACK/VOLUME Page of the

Organ Flute display.

Range: 0 – 24

321

REVERB [Page 2]

Reference Page

Effect List (page 53)

Press the number buttons to change the display pages.

Reference Page

Organ Flutes (page 38)

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Determines the amount of reverb effect applied to each Voice section.

Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in Voice Condition Page 1 of the

respective Voices.

Range: 0 – 24

1 TYPE

Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and

microphone signal.

2 TIME

Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard

percussion, and microphone signal.

Range: 0.3s – 30.0s

3 RHYTHM

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm (with PERCUSSION slider)

and accompaniment (with ACCOMPANI. slider). Each slider corresponds to the

REVERB slider in the Rhythm Condition display.

Range: 0 – 24

4 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion.

Range: 0 – 24

REVERB [Page 3]

32 41

REVERB [Page 4]

Reference Page

Connecting a Microphone

(page 224)

Reference Pages

Changing the rhythm reverb

(page 68)

Keyboard Percussion (page

75)

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Sustain

The sustain effect, selectable for the each Voice section, causes Voices to gradually fade

out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings are

independent for each Voice section, providing maximum expressive control.

The optional Foot Pedal can also be used to switch sustain on/off for voice sections

other than Pedal Voice 1 and 2.

To add sustain to the Voices and call up the Sustain page:

Press the SUSTAIN button, located to the left of the panel, to set the sustain. The

Sustain display appears.

The Sustain display consists of two pages.

The display shows the on/off status and the current sustain length values for each Voice

section. The values here must be set high enough for the sustain effect to be noticeable.

Press the ON/OFF button in the display to select “ON” above the Voice section name

for which you want to apply sustain. To turn sustain off, press the same button a

second time to select “OFF”.

To adjust the sustain length value, use the display sliders. If you set the highest value

(HOLD), some Voices such as organ or synth will sound continuously even when the

keys are released.

The lamp of the [SUSTAIN] button lights up when you turn on the Sustain effect for

one of the Voice sections in the Sustain display. When you turn off the Sustain effect

for all Voice sections in the Sustain display, the lamp turns off. Remember to check

whether the sustain effects are on or off in the Sustain display before you start to play.

Range: 0 – 12, HOLD

Reference Page

Foot Pedal (page 203)

SUSTAIN Display

Switches the sustain function on/off

Sustain length value

NOTE

If you change the Voice

when the sustain length is

set to HOLD and the keys

are released, the Voice only

changes after you play

another key.

NOTE

The minimum setting results

in no sustain. Turning

sustain “OFF” automatically

resets the sustain length to

be the default setting.

NOTE

When the sustain length is

set to HOLD, previously

played note(s) may be cut

off by subsequently played

notes.

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rotary Speaker

Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect.

The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with either the front

panel button. The Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by turning on

the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button. The following procedure is needed to use the

Rotary Speaker effect.

Select the Rotary Speaker effect from the desired Voice.

When you want to set Rotary Speaker to one of the Voice section, you can select the

effect category of Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition Display Page 3 or 4.

See page 46 for details.

When you want to set Rotary Speaker for the Organ Flute Voice, select the effect

type in the EFFECT Page. See page 40 for details.

Select “Rotary Speaker” here.

Select an effect type other than [OFF].

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker.

Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel.

The ROTARY SPEAKER display appears. The settings in this display are

common to all Voice sections.

1 SPEED

Determines the speed of the speaker rotation.

Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz

2 MODE

Determines the slow/stop mode when [ROTARY SP SPEED] button is off. If [SLOW]

is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button on the panel.

If [STOP] is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off when you turn off the button

on the panel.

Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect

in real time from the panel.

Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel.

You can control Rotary Speaker on/off from the panel. An optional Foot Pedal,

or the Footswitch on the Pedal Unit can also be used to switch the effect on/off.

See page 203 for details.

ROTARY SPEAKER Display

Reference Page

Footswitches (page 200)

Foot Pedal (page 203)

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

REVERB

Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound,

recreating the subtle ambience and depth of actual

performance spaces and rooms.

DELAY

Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or

echoes. This is also useful for creating rhythmic

repeats in the sound.

Effect List

Effect Type Effect Type

HALL 1 PLATE 2

HALL 2 WHITE ROOM

HALL 3 TUNNEL

HALL M CANYON

HALL L BASEMENT

ROOM 1 XG HALL 1

ROOM 2 XG HALL 2

ROOM 3 XG ROOM 1

ROOM 4 XG ROOM 2

ROOM S XG ROOM 3

ROOM M XG STAGE 1

ROOM L XG STAGE 2

STAGE 1 XG PLATE

STAGE 2 GM PLATE

PLATE 1

Parameter

Value Description

Time 0.3 - 30.0 s Determines the decay time of

the reverb.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

the original sound (dry) and

the effect sound (wet).

Effect Type

DELAY LCR

XG DLY LCR

DELAY LR

ECHO

CROSS DELAY

TEMPO DELAY

TEMPO ECHO

TEMPO CROSS

Parameter Value Description

L DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec

Echo: 0.1 - 371.5

msec

Determines the time that

elapses between the original

sound and the delayed

repeat in the left channel.

R DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec

Echo: 0.1 - 371.5

msec

Determines the time that

elapses between the original

sound and the delayed

repeat in the right channel.

C DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec

Echo: 0.1 - 371.5

msec

Determines the time that

elapses between the original

sound and the delayed

repeat in the center of the

stereo image.

L>R

Delay Time

0.1 - 743.0 msec

32nd - 4th

Determines the time for the

sound to move from left to

right (when using Cross

Delay). When using Tempo

Cross, this determines the

time (in note values) to match

the tempo of the rhythm/

song.

R>L

Delay Time

0.1 - 743.0 msec

32nd - 4th

Determines the time for the

sound to move from right to

left (when using Cross

Delay). When using Tempo

Cross, this determines the

time (in note values) to match

the tempo of the rhythm/

song.

DelayTime 16th - 2nd

Echo: 32nd - 4th

When using Tempo Delay,

this sets the time between

delayed repeats to match the

tempo of the rhythm/song.

InputSelect L, R, L&R Determines the input

conﬁguration.

Feedback

Delay Time

0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the feedback

time of the delayed repeats.

The larger the value, the

longer the time between

delayed repeats. (For Delay

LR, the left and right

channels can be set

independently.)

Feedback

Delay 1

0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the ﬁrst feedback

delay time of the L/R delay.

Feedback

Delay 2

0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the second

feedback delay time of the

L/R delay.

Feedback

Level

-63 - +63 Determines the amount of

delayed repeats in the

sound. When this is set to

0%, the delayed repeat from

the second time will not

sound.

L Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the feedback

level in the left channel.

R Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the feedback

level in the right channel.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

original sound and the effect

sound.

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

ER/KARAOKE

Produces early reﬂections without the subsequent

reverb, or a deep echo effect like that used in Karaoke

sing-along applications.

CHORUS

Creates a warm effect as if several of the same sound

were playing at once. Makes the overall sound richer,

“fatter” and more animated.

FLANGER

This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect,

similar to Chorus but with a brighter more resonant

sound.

Effect Type

ER 1

ER 2

GATE REVERB

REVERS GATE

KARAOKE 1

KARAOKE 2

KARAOKE 3

Parameter Value Description

Type S-H, L-H, Rdm,

Rvs, Plt, Spr

Determines the early

reﬂection type. The response

of the early reﬂections varies

depending on the type.

Room Size 0.1 - 7.0 Determines the room size.

The higher the value the

longer the ER.

Type Type A, Type B Determines the reverse gate

type.

DelayTime 0.1 - 400 msec Determines the time that

elapses between the original

sound and the delayed

repeat.

Feedback

Level

-63 - +63 Determines the amount of

delayed repeats in the

sound. When this is set to

0%, the delayed repeat from

the second time will not

sound.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

the original sound and effect

sound.

Effect Type Effect Type

CHORUS 1 GM CHORUS 4

CHORUS 2 FB CHORUS

XG CHORUS 1 CELESTE 1

XG CHORUS 2 CELESTE 2

XG CHORUS 3 CELESTE 3

XG CHORUS 4 CELESTE 4

GM CHORUS 1 SYMPHONIC

GM CHORUS 2 XG SYMPHONIC

GM CHORUS 3 ENS DETUNE

Parameter Value Description

LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of

oscillation, or the speed of

the wavering effect.

LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of

oscillation, or the amount of

the wavering effect.

Input Mode Mono, Stereo Determines the input

conﬁguration.

Detune -50 - +50 cent Determines the amount of

detuning (or pitch shifting) is

applied to the delayed

repeats.

L DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the time that

elapses between the original

sound and the delayed

repeat in the left channel.

R DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the time that

elapses between the original

sound and the delayed

repeat in the right channel.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

the original sound and the

effect sound.

Effect Type

FLANGER 1

FLANGER 2

XG FLANGER 1

XG FLANGER 2

XG FLANGER 3

GM FLANGER

V_FLANGER

TEMP FLANGER

DYNA FLANGER

Parameter Value Description

LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz

16th - 4th*8

Determines the frequency of

oscillation, or the speed of

the wavering effect. When

using Tempo Flanger, this

determines the speed (in

note values) to match the

tempo of the rhythm/song.

LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of

oscillation, or the amount of

the wavering effect.

FEEDBACK

LEVEL

-63 - +63

-100% - +100%

Determines the amount of

output sound (with the

ﬂanging effect) that is

returned to the input. The

larger the value, the more

complex and pronounced the

ﬂanging effect becomes.

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

PHASER

Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre

changes and a pronounced up/down ﬁlter sweep

effect.

TREMOLO/AUTO PAN

This periodically changes the volume and has the

effect of moving the sound image both front and

back, and left and right.

LFO Wave Triangle, Sine,

Random

Determines the waveform:

triangular wave, sine wave or

random.

Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity.

The higher the value the

greater the change.

Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at

which effect begins to be

applied.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the original

sound and the effect sound.

Effect Type

PHASER 1

PHASER 2

EP PHASER 1

EP PHASER 2

EP PHASER 3

TEMPO PHASER

DYNA PHASER

Parameter Value Description

LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz

16th - 4th*8

Determines the frequency of

oscillation, or the speed of

the wavering effect. When

using Tempo Phaser, this

determines the speed (in

note values) to match the

tempo of the rhythm/song.

LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of

oscillation, or the amount of

the wavering effect.

Phase Shift 0 - 127 Determines the phase

relationship between the

processed signal and the

original. This changes the

sound characteristics of the

Phaser effect.

Feedback

Level

-63 - +63 Determines the amount of

output sound (with the

phasing effect) that is

returned to the input. The

larger the value, the more

complex and pronounced the

phasing effect becomes.

Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity.

The higher the value the

greater the change.

Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at

which effect begins to be

applied.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

the original sound and the

effect sound.

Parameter Value Description

Effect Type Effect Type

TREMOLO 1 ORGAN TREMOLO

TREMOLO 2 AUTO PAN

XG TREMOLO XG AT PAN 1

EP TREMOLO XG AT PAN 2

GT TREMOLO 1 EP AUTO PAN

GT TREMOLO 2

Parameter Value Description

LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the tremolo

speed.

LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of the

Tremolo effect.

AM Depth 0 - 127 Determines the amount of

volume change.

PM Depth 0 - 127 Determines the amount of

pitch change in the sound.

Input Mode Mono, Stereo Determines the input

conﬁguration.

L/R Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of

panning between the left and

right channels.

F/R Depth 0 - 127 Front/rear. Determines the

depth of the front and rear

panning effect. This controls

both level and pitch at the

same time.

Pan L<->R, L->R, L<-R,

Lturn, Rturn, L/R

Determines the Auto Pan

type. (“L<->R” is a sine wave

and “L/R” is a sawtooth

wave.)

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

original sound and the effect

sound.

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

ROTARY SPEAKER

This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ

sounds) recreates the rich, animated pulsing sound of

a rotating speaker horn.

DISTORTION

This effect adds distortion to the sound.

Effect Type Effect Type

XG ROTARY SP DUAL ROTSP 2

ROTARY SP 1 DIST+ROT SP

ROTARY SP 2 ODRV+ROT SP

ROTARY SP 3 AMP+ROT SP

ROTARY SP 4 DIST+2ROT SP

ROTARY SP 5 ODRV+2ROT SP

2WAY ROT SP AMP+2ROT SP

DUAL ROTSP 1

Parameter Value Description

EQ Low Freq. 32 - 2.0k Hz Determines the central

frequency of the low

frequency range that is

boosted or cut.

EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over

which the low frequency

range is boosted or cut.

EQ Middle

Freq.

100 - 10k Hz Determines the central

frequency of the middle

frequency range that is

boosted or cut.

EQ Middle

Gain

-12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over

which the middle frequency

range is boosted or cut.

EQ Hi.Freq. 500 - 16k Hz Determines the central

frequency of the high

frequency range that is

boosted or cut.

EQ Hi.Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over

which the high frequency

range is boosted or cut.

Low/High

Balance

L63>H - L<H63 Determines the volume

balance between low and

high speakers.

MIC L-R Angle 0 - 180deg Determines the L/R angle of

the apparent microphone.

Dist. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of

distortion. The higher the

value the greater the amount

of distortion.

Amp. Type Off, Stack, Combo,

Tube

Determines the ampliﬁer type

simulated.

Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount of

distortion.

Effect Type Effect Type

DIST HARD 1 V_DIST HARD

DIST HARD 2 V_DIST SOFT

DIST SOFT 1 COMP+DIST

DIST SOFT 2 XG CMP+DIST

ST DIST HARD AMP SIM

ST DIST SOFT XG AMP SIM

OVERDRIVE ST AMP SIM 1

ST OVERDRIVE ST AMP SIM 2

XG DIST XG ST AMP

XG ST DIST

Parameter Value Description

Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount or

degree of distortion in the

sound.

Amp. Type Off, Stack, Combo,

Tube

Determines the type of

ampliﬁer that is simulated.

LPF Cutoff 1.0 - 18kHz, Thru Determines the cutoff

frequency of the low pass

ﬁlter. Frequencies above this

value are cut or ﬁltered out.

OutputLevel 0 - 127 Determines the level or

volume of the processed

sound.

EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount of EQ

boost or cut in the low

frequency range.

EQ Middle

Gain

-12 - +12 dB Determines the amount of EQ

boost or cut in the mid

frequency range.

Overdrive 0 - 100% Determines the depth of

overdrive. The higher the

value the greater the amount

of distortion.

Device Transistor, Vintage,

Dist 1, Dist 2, Fuzz

Determines the device that

will create distortion:

Transistor, VintageTube,

Distortion, Fuzz and so on.

Speaker Flat, Stack, Combo,

Twin, Radio,

Megaphone

Determines the simulated

speaker type: Flat, Stack,

Combo, Twin, Radio,

Megaphone and so on.

Presence 0 - 20 Values in the higher range

can give vocals more

presence.

Comp.

Threshold

-48 - -6 db Determines the input level at

which compression begins to

be applied.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

the original sound and the

effect sound.

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

DISTORTION+

A combination of Distortion and Delay.

WAH

This uses an automatic up/down ﬁlter sweep to

change the timbre of the sound, producing a

“wahwah” sound.

Effect Type Effect Type

DIST+DELAY V_DIST H+DLY

ODRV+DELAY V_DIST S+DLY

XG DIST+DLY DIST+T DLY

XG ODRV+DLY ODRV+T DLY

CMP+DIST+DLY CMP+DST+TDLY

CMP+ODRV+DLY CMP+OD+TDLY

XG CMP+DT+DL V_DST H+TDLY

XG CMP+OD+DL V_DST S+TDLY

Parameter Value Description

Dist. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of

distortion. The higher the

value the greater the amount

of distortion.

Dist. Out Level 0 - 127 Determines the output level

of the distorted sound.

L DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the time that

elapses between the original

sound and the delayed

repeat in the left channel.

R DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the time that

elapses between the original

sound and the delayed

repeat in the right channel.

Delay

Feedback

-63 - +63 Determines the amount of

delayed repeats in the

sound.

Comp.

Threshold

-48 - -6db Determines the input level at

which compression begins to

be applied.

DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec

16th - 2nd

Determines the time that

elapses between the original

sound and the delayed

repeat. When using Tempo

Delay series such as DIST+T

DLY, this determines the

speed (in note values) to

match the tempo of the

rhythm/song.

Overdrive 0 - 100% Determines the depth of

overdrive. The higher the

value the greater the amount

of distortion.

Device Transistor, Vintage,

Dist 1, Dist 2, Fuzz

Determines the device that

will create distortion:

Transistor, VintageTube,

Distortion, Fuzz and so on.

Speaker Flat, Stack, Combo,

Twin, Radio,

Megaphone

Determines the simulated

speaker type: Flat, Stack,

Combo, Twin, Radio,

Megaphone and so on.

Presence 0 - 20 Values in the higher range

can give vocals more

presence.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

original sound and the effect

sound.

Effect Type Effect Type

AUTO WAH TC WAH+ODRV

XG AUTO WAH XG TC WAH+OD

TOUCH WAH 1 CLAVI TC WAH

TOUCH WAH 2 EP TOUCH WAH

AT WAH+DIST WAH+DST+TDLY

XG AT WH+DST WAH+OD+T DLY

AT WAH+ODRV WAH+DIST+DLY

XG AT WAH+OD XG WH+DST+DL

TC WAH+DIST WAH+ODRV+DLY

XG TC WH+DST XG WH+OD+DLY

Parameter Value Description

LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the speed of the

Wah effect.

LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of the

Wah effect.

Cutoff 0 - 127 Determines the central

frequency that the wah ﬁlter

acts upon.

Resonance 1.0 - 12.0 Determines the frequency

bandwidth (around the

central frequency set in

Cutoff above) that the wah

ﬁlter affects.

Dist. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of

distortion. The higher the

value the greater the amount

of distortion.

Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of

distortion. The higher the

value the greater the amount

of distortion.

Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the degree to

which the wah ﬁlter is

affected by your playing

touch.

DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec

16th - 2nd

Determines the time that

elapses between the original

sound and the delayed

repeat. When using Tempo

Delay series, this determines

the time (in note values) to

match the tempo of the

rhythm/song.

Delay

Feedback

-63 - +63 Determines the amount of

delayed repeats in the

sound.

Dist. Out Level 0 - 127 Determines the output level

of the distorted sound.

Output Level 0 - 127 Determines the output level

of the effect-applied sound.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

the original sound and the

effect sound.

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

DYNAMIC

This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the

overall dynamic range of the sound, and has a gain

control–letting you make soft sounds louder, and thus

give more “punch” to the sound.

EQ/ENHANCER

This effect boosts or cuts speciﬁc frequency bands,

allowing you to shape the tone of the sound as

required by the mix.

Effect Type

M BAND COMP

COMPRESSOR

NOISE GATE

Parameter Value Description

Type Normal, Low, Mid,

High, Low/High,

Low/Mid, Mid/High,

FullBit, Wild, Attacky,

LowEnd, Hard, Basic

Determines the compressor

type.

EQ Low Gain -63 - +63 Determines the amount of

low-frequency gain (boost or

cut).

EQ Middle

Gain

-63 - +63 Determines the amount of

mid-frequency gain (boost or

cut).

EQ Hi.Gain -63 - +63

Determines the amount of

high-frequency gain (boost or

cut).

Attack 1 - 40 msec Determines how soon the

compression effect is

applied, once the

compressor has been

triggered (as a result of

Threshold below).

Release 10 - 680 msec Determines how soon the

compressor returns to its

normal gain, once the trigger

signal drops below the

Threshold point.

Threshold multi-band

compressor:

-32 - +32

compressor:

-48 - -6 dB

Noise Gate:

-72 - -30 dB

Determines the level of the

input signal required to

trigger the compressor.

Signals at a level below the

Threshold pass through

unaffected; signals at and

above the Threshold are

compressed.

Ratio 1.0 - 20.0 Determines the amount of

compression of the sound

(for signals passing the

Threshold). This is expressed

as a ratio

–

the change in

output signal relative to the

change in input. The range

here is 1/1 (no change in

output signal, hence no

compression) to 20/1. Higher

ratios result in greater

compression.

OutputLevel 0 - 127 Determines the overall output

of the compressed signal.

Use this to bring up the

overall level after you've

reduced the dynamic range

with compression.

Effect Type

ST 2BAND EQ

ST 3BAND EQ

XG 3BAND EQ

EQ DISCO

EQ TEL

HM ENHANCER

XG HM ENHNCE

Parameter Value Description

EQ LowFreq. 50 - 2.0k Hz

ST2BandEQ:

32 - 2.0k Hz

Determines the central

frequency of the low

frequency range that is to be

boosted or cut.

EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over

which the low frequency

range is boosted or cut.

EQ Middle

Freq.

100 - 16k Hz Determines the central

frequency of the middle

frequency range that is to be

boosted or cut.

EQ Middle

Gain

-12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over

which the middle frequency

range is boosted or cut.

EQ M Width 0.1 - 12.0 Determines the bandwidth or

the range of frequencies

around the speciﬁc middle

frequency that is to be

boosted or cut. Lower values

let you narrow in on a speciﬁc

frequency, while higher

values select a broader

range of frequencies to be

affected.

EQ Hi.Freq. 500Hz - 16 kHz Determines the central

frequency of the high

frequency range that is to be

boosted or cut.

EQ Hi.Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines how much

increase/ decrease the wave

frequency point of EQ high

frequency.

HPF Cutoff 500Hz - 16 k Hz Determines the cutoff

frequency of the low pass

ﬁlter. Frequencies above this

value are cut or ﬁltered out.

Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount or

depth of the Enhancer effect.

Mix Level 0 - 127 Determines how much of the

processed enhanced sound

is mixed together with the

original sound.

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

PITCH CHANGE

This effect changes the pitch.

MISCELLANEOUS

Creates special effects.

AMBIENCE

IMPULSE EXP

RESONATOR

VOICE CANCEL

TALKING MOD

LO-FI

DYNA FILTER

Effect Type

PITCH CHANGE

XG PCH CHG 1

XG PCH CHG 2

Parameter Value Description

Pitch -24 - +24 Determines the amount of

pitch change in semitones.

Pitch Fine 1 -50 - +50 Fine pitch adjustment to

detune the sound and create

a chorus effect.

Pitch Fine 2 -50 - +50 Fine pitch adjustment to

detune the sound and create

a chorus effect.

Initial Delay 0.1 - 400 msec Determines the time that

elapses between the original

sound and the early

reﬂections.

Feedback

Level

-63 - +63 Determines the amount of

delayed repeats in the

sound. When this is set to

0%, the delayed repeat from

the second time will not

sound.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

original sound and the effect

sound.

Effect Type

AMBIENCE

IMPULSE EXP

RESONATOR

VOICE CANCEL

TALKING MOD

LO-FI

DYNA FILTER

DYNA RINGMOD

RING MOD

ISOLATOR

Parameter Value Description

DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the delay time.

Output Phase Normal, Invers Determines the phase of the

effect sound.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

original sound and the effect

sound.

Parameter Value Description

Density 0.159 - 22.61 msec Determines the density.

Dispersion 4.028 msec - 4.000

sec

Determines the resonance

time.

Wet Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the

effected sound.

Parameter Value Description

Type Type1 - 6 Determines the type.

Decay Time 4.028 msec - 4.000

sec

Determines the length of

reverberation.

LPF Cutoff 28.5Hz -

21.6 kHz (Thru)

Determines the cutoff

frequency of the Low Pass

Filter. The portion of the

signal above the speciﬁed

frequency is cut.

Dispersion 0 - 16 Determines the resonance

time.

Wet Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the

effected sound.

Parameter Value Description

Low Adjust 0 - 26 Determines the frequencies

in the lower portion of the

middle range that are

attenuated.

High Adjust 0 - 26 Determines the frequencies

in the upper portion of the

middle range that are

attenuated.

Parameter Value Description

Vowel a, i, u, e, o Determines the speciﬁc

vowel used for the “talking”

effect.

Drive 0 - 127 Determines the effect depth.

OutputLevel 0 - 127 Determines the output level

of the effect-processed

sound.

Parameter Value Description

Sampling

Control

44.1 kHz - 345.0 Hz Determines the sampling

frequency.

Word Length 1 - 127 Determines the resolution or

roughness of the sound.

Filter Type Thru, PwrBass,

Radio, Tel, Clean,

Low

Determines the ﬁlter type.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

original sound and the effect

sound.

Parameter Value Description

Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity.

The higher the value the

greater the change.

Voice Controls and Effects

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

DYNA RINGMOD

RING MOD

ISOLATOR

THRU

Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing.

Level Offset 0 - 127 Determines the offset values

of the ﬁlter frequency. The

offset value affects the ﬁlter

frequency when no control

signals are received.

Filter Type LPF (12 dB),

LPF (18 dB),

LPF (24 dB),

HPF, BPF, BEF

Determines the ﬁlter type.

Resonance -16 - +111 The higher the value, the

more sharp the frequency

response curve is.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

original sound and the effect

sound.

Parameter Value Description

Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the modulation

sensitivity for the input

change.

Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at

which effect begins to be

applied.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

original sound and the effect

sound.

Parameter Value Description

Frequency 0.7 - 5002.6 Hz Determines the frequency for

the Amplitude Modulation.

Frequency

Fine

0 - 127 Determines detailed

adjustment of the Amplitude

Modulation.

LFO Wave Triangle, Sine Selects a triangular wave or

sine wave as the wave for

modulation.

LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the wave depth.

The higher the value, the

greater the effect.

Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of

original sound and the effect

sound.

Parameter Value Description

On/Off Off, On Determines the on/off status

for the effect.

Low Mute Off, On Mute switch for the low

frequency range.

Middle Mute Off, On Mute switch for the mid

frequency range.

High Mute Off, On Mute switch for the high

frequency range.

Low Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the

low frequencies.

Middle Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the

mid frequencies.

High Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the

high frequencies.

Parameter Value Description

Effect Type

Thru

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

This DDK-7 features 274 different real rhythms featuring actual

drum and percussion sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment

functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and

completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the

selected rhythm. Moreover, the DDK-7 has a Keyboard Percussion

feature that allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from

the Upper, Lower keyboard and Pedalboard.

A total of 274 rhythms can be instantly selected from the Rhythm Menu Display

which is called up by pressing the RHYTHM button.

Selecting a rhythm

In the explanation below, 16Beat 1 in the POPS category is selected as an example.

Press the Rhythm button in the RHYTHM section on the front

panel.

The Rhythm Menu is displayed.

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Contents

1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button . . . .61

• Selecting a rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

• Operating the rhythm from the panel . . . . . . . . . .64

• Changing the rhythm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

• Adjusting the tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

• Changing the rhythm reverb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

2Rhythm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

3 Accompaniment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

4Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord

(A.B.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

5 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

6 Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

• Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . 75

• Preset Keyboard Percussion List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

• Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

• Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings

. . . . . . 82

• Detailed settings for each percussion instrument 84

• Kit Assign List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button

Rhythm button

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Select the desired Rhythm category with the category buttons in

the display.

You can also choose the “User” category to select a User rhythm you have created

in the Rhythm Pattern Program.

For example, to call up 16Beat 1, select the POPS category.

The name of the selected category (Pops) is displayed on the upper left. The

Rhythm name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned

Rhythm and is irrelevant to the Rhythm menu below.

Select the desired rhythm name from the Rhythm menu.

The Rhythm menu contains many Pops rhythms, more than can ﬁt on the

display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons

in the display.

The color of the selected rhythm name changes to orange, indicating that it has

been selected.

Rhythm category

Reference Page

Rhythm Pattern Program

(page 155)

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm Structure

Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of

the basic rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up

the beats while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm

is played back.

INTRO

This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be

selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro ﬁnishes playing, the

rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.

MAIN

This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that

can be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of

several measures repeats indeﬁnitely.

FILL IN

This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a

repeating rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the

selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure

pattern of Fill In ﬁnishes playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main

section.

Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit

Selected Main section’s lamp is lit

Selected Fill In section’s lamp ﬂashes

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Operating the rhythm from the panel

You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the

buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic

interest and “spice” to your performance.

To start/stop the rhythm:

START

The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed.

To stop the rhythm, press the button again.

SYNCHRO START

The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.”

The rhythm starts when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or

Pedalboard.

When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button,

pressing this button again stops the rhythm.

BREAK

This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break

section is selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break

pattern ﬁnishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.

ENDING

This is used for the ending of the song. There are three Ending sections that can be

selected with the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons. When the ending is ﬁnished, the

rhythm automatically stops.

The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected

Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

INTRO

Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds

a short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm.

First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press the

[START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start

the rhythm.

While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display

shows the countdown to the ﬁrst measure of the pattern.

For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern

in 4/4 time, the display at right appears:

ENDING

Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically

adds an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm.

When you press the Ending button while rhythm is

playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the

ending phrase is played. You can have the ending gradually

slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again, while the ending

is playing.

To switch the rhythm sections:

You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN/

FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section’s lamp (above the button) is lit.

To use the Fill In patterns:

As you play the DDK-7 along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected MAIN/

FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the

selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) ﬂashes.

When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The Auto

Fill In function is set in the Rhythm Condition display.

Pressing the [RHYTHM] button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of

the selected rhythm in the display again) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display.

When Auto Fill is set to ON in the left side of the display, the Fill In pattern is

automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections.

NOTE

When an Intro or Ending

pattern is playing, the Lower

Keyboard cannot be played.

NOTE

Pressing the ENDING [1]

button during playback of

the Main section will ﬁrst call

up the ﬁll in pattern, then the

Ending 1 pattern.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

To use the Break patterns:

As you play the DDK-7 along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK]

button.

Moreover, you can start/stop the rhythm and switch the sections by using the

Footswitch or optional footpedal. See page 201 for details.

Changing the rhythm volume

There are two ways to set the rhythm volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the

panel and using the volume slider in the display. The volume buttons let you make

coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you ﬁne control.

Using VOLUME buttons on the panel

(coarse):

Press the VOLUME buttons of the rhythm on the panel to

set the desired level. The buttons have seven volume

settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a

maximum of full volume.

Using VOLUME slider in the display (ﬁne):

Pressing the rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of the

selected rhythm in the display again) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display.

To set the volume, touch the PERCUSSION VOLUME slider in the display or use the

Data Control Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).

DATA CONTROL

NOTE

Depending on the volume

value (set by the slider), two

adjacent VOLUME lamps

may be lit at the same time,

indicating an intermediate

position.

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Adjusting the tempo

You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing

the TEMPO buttons. Pressing the right

button increases the tempo and pressing the

left button decreases it. Each rhythm has its

original (preset) tempo. Press the TEMPO

buttons simultaneously to restore the tempo

to the original setting.

TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per

minute.

The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute.

Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press [PRESET TEMPO] button in the

display to restore the tempo to the original setting.

When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator changes function to a BAR/

BEAT indicator.

On the BAR/BEAT indicator, the number on the left indicates the current bar or

measure and the one on the right indicates the number of the beat in each bar.

Increasing

the tempo

Decreasing

the tempo

TEMPO Indicator

Bar (measure) Beat

BAR/BEAT Indicator

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

You can also see the Tempo and Bar/Beat indications in the Voice Display. In the Voice

Display, both Tempo and Bar/Beat can be seen in one display.

Changing the rhythm reverb

You can adjust the amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the percussion sounds

used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display.

When the Reverb depth for the entire instrument in Reverb Display Page 1 is set to the

minimum, the setting here will have no effect.

Range: 0 – 24

Reference Page

Voice Display (page 18)

Reference Page

Reverb (page 47)

DATA CONTROL

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm List

MARCH

Marching Band 1

Marching Band 2

Marching Band 3

Alpine March

6/8 March 1

6/8 March 2

6/8 Kids

6/8 Organ March

Broadway

SF March

Wild West

Baroque

WALTZ

Vienna Waltz

Orchestra Waltz

Simple Waltz

Gentle Waltz

Guitar Serenade

Snow Waltz

Classic Waltz

Mariachi

Alpine Waltz

Musette

Jazz Waltz 1

Jazz Waltz 2

Jazz Waltz 3

Jazz Waltz 4

Modern Waltz

Pop Waltz

Country Waltz

SWING&JAZZ

Big Band 1

Big Band 2

Big Band 3

Big Band 4

Big Band 5

Big Band 6

Big Band 7

Big Band Bop

Orch. Big Band

Orchestra Swing

Movie Panther

Jungle Drum

Jazz Club

Simple Swing

Acoustic Jazz

Medium Jazz

Fast Jazz

Combo Swing

Cool Combo

Light Swing

Afro Cuban 1

Afro Cuban 2

Bebop

Five-Four

Jazz Ballad 1

Jazz Ballad 2

Movie Swing

Piano Trio

Midnight Swing

Slow Jazz

Moonlight 1

Moonlight 2

Winter Song 1

Winter Song 2

Foxtrot

Slowfox

Quickstep

Dixieland 1

Dixieland 2

Dixieland Jazz

Ragtime

Charleston

Guitar Swing

POPS

8Beat Light 1

8Beat Light 2

8Beat Light 3

8Beat Light 4

Folk Rock 1

Folk Rock 2

60’s 8Beat

Asian Pops

Unplugged 1

Unplugged 2

Unplugged 3

8Beat Adria

Bubblegum Pop

70’s 8Beat

Tijuana

SingerSongWriter

Surﬁn’ 8Beat

Finger Pickin’

Heart Beat

Guitar Pop

2 British 16Beat

16Beat 1

16Beat 2

16Beat 3

16Beat 4

Fusion Shufﬂe 1

Fusion Shufﬂe 2

Jazz Pop

16Beat Shufﬂe 1

16Beat Shufﬂe 2

Pop Shufﬂe

Eurovision Pop

British Pop

Sing Along

Simple Shufﬂe 1

Simple Shufﬂe 2

Simple Shufﬂe 3

R&B

Blues Rock

Motor City

Soul 1

Soul 2

16Beat Soul

Frankly Soul

Gospel Funk

Jazz Funk

Funk Beat 1

Funk Beat 2

Detroit Pop 1

Detroit Pop 2

New R&B

Modern R&B

New Gospel

Cool Blues

Gospel Shufﬂe

Gospel Sisters

Amazing Gospel

6/8 Blues

Slow Blues

6/8 Soul

Blues Shufﬂe

LATIN

Samba

Big Band Samba

Light Samba 1

Light Samba 2

Pop Samba 1

Pop Samba 2

Bossa Nova 1

Bossa Nova 2

Bossa Nova 3

Pop Bossa

Mambo 1

Mambo 2

Salsa 1

Salsa 2

Montuno

Calypso

Cha Cha Cha

Big Band Cha Cha

Pop Cha Cha

Rumba

Pop Rumba

Fast Rumba

Guitar Rumba

Beguine 1

Beguine 2

Cuban Bolero

Tango 1

Tango 2

Tango Orchestra

Tango Milonga

WORLD MUSIC

Bolero

Flamenco

Pop Flamenco

Pasodoble

Polka 1

Polka 2

Banda Polka

Irish Dance

Tarantella

Sirtaki

Enka

Reggae

Happy Reggae

Sheriff Reggae

Shufﬂe Reggae

Bluegrass 1

Bluegrass 2

Hoedown

Country 2/4

Country Shufﬂe

Country Band

Hawaiian

Mexican Dance

This list shows all available rhythms on the DDK-7. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list

indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

•

BALLAD

Power Ballad

Dramatic Ballad

Movie Ballad 1

Movie Ballad 2

Secret Service

Carpenters Pop

Romantic Ballad

Love Song

16Beat Ballad 1

16Beat Ballad 2

16Beat Ballad 3

Easy Ballad

Guitar Ballad 1

Guitar Ballad 2

Guitar Ballad 3

Organ Ballad

Chart Ballad

Analog Ballad

Pop Ballad

8Beat Modern

Chillout

Slow&Easy

6/8 Slow Rock 1

6/8 Slow Rock 2

6/8 Orchestra 1

6/8 Orchestra 2

6/8 Ballad

Acoustic Ballad

ROCK

Power Rock

Southern Rock

60’s Rock 1

60’s Rock 2

Hard Rock 1

Hard Rock 2

Rock Shufﬂe 1

Rock Shufﬂe 2

Tears Rock 1

Tears Rock 2

Soft Rock

British Rock

Country Rock 1

Country Rock 2

New Country

Cowboy Rock

Rock&Roll 1

Rock&Roll 2

Skifﬂe

Caribbean Rock

R&R Shufﬂe

Jive

Boogie Woogie

DANCE

Ibiza 1

Ibiza 2

Euro Trance

Disco Teens

Techno Party

Club Dance

Dream Dance

Club House

UK Pop

US Disco

Swing House

US Pop

US Hip Hop

Classic Hip Hop

Trip Hop

Chart Pop

Ground Beat

Hip Hop Groove

Hip Hop Pop

Hip Hop Light

Euro Hip Hop

Latin DJ’s

Club Latin

Latin Disco 1

Latin Disco 2

Garage

6/8 Trance

80’s Dance

Pop Beat 1

Pop Beat 2

Funky Dance

Disco Philly 1

Disco Philly 2

70’s Disco 1

70’s Disco 2

Disco Funk

Disco Chocolate

Dance Pop

Table 1:

Certain rhythms created for use with slow, soft

Songs or for Songs that do not use a bass part at the

beginning, may not have drum sections. To use

these rhythms, refer to the following information.

Some sections of the following nine rhythms are

conﬁgured with accompaniment only; they do not

contain any drum or percussion.

Some sections of the following ﬁve rhythms do not

contain an Auto Bass part. This means that even

though the Auto Bass Chord is turned on, the bass

part will not sound.

•Guitar Serenade in the WALTZ category

•Folk Rock 1 in the POPS category

•Unplugged 1 in the POPS category

•Pop Flamenco in WORLD MUSIC category

•New Country in the ROCK category

Category Rhythm Section

MARCH

6/8 Organ March Main A, Main B

Baroque All sections except Intro 1

WALTZ

Simple Waltz Ending 1

Guitar Serenade All sections except Intro 1

WORLD

MUSIC

Banda Polka Main A, Fill In A

Hoedown Ending 1

Mexican Dance Main A, Fill In A

BALLAD Dramatic Ballad Main A

ROCK R&R Shufﬂe Ending 1

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental

embellishments when rhythms are used.

Accompaniment controls are selected from the Rhythm Menu and Rhythm Condition

display.

Select the desired rhythm name in the display.

At the bottom of the display, there are seven part buttons, such as Chord 1,

Chord 2, Pad, and so on. These parts, with the exception of Main Drum and

Add Drum, are Accompaniment parts.

Turn the desired parts on.

The Accompaniment consists of ﬁve parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1,

and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding

button in the display.

If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound.

CHORD 1/CHORD 2:

These are the rhythmic chord backing parts.

PAD:

This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as

strings and organ.

PHRASE 1/PHRASE 2:

These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song,

such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.

Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending

on the selected rhythm and rhythm section.

Accompaniment

Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns.

When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do

not sound. Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add

drum has additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine.

Accompaniment parts

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the

Accompaniment.

Pressing the rhythm button on the panel again calls up the Rhythm Condition

display.

The two sliders at the right side of the display can control the Accompaniment

volume and reverb. Touch the slider in the display or use the Data Control dial

to adjust the volume/reverb.

The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the DDK-7

to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely new

dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your

disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment

patterns.

Before using the A.B.C. function, turn Pedal Poly off. If Pedal Poly is set to on, the bass

pattern of the A.B.C. will not sound.

To set the A.B.C. function:

Select the A.B.C. modes in the Rhythm Condition Display.

Automatic Accompaniment

– Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)

DATA CONTROL

Reference Page

POLY (page 43)

Rhythm Condition Display

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

1 A.B.C. MODE

OFF:

Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.

SINGLE FINGER:

The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different

chord/bass combinations. You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by

simply using one, or at most, two or three ﬁngers to play the chords. The chord

produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower

keyboard.

Key of C

Major chords:

Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s

name).

Minor chords:

Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it.

7th chords:

Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it.

Minor 7th chords:

Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white

key to the left of it.

Playing single ﬁnger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous

chords to your performance.

FINGERED CHORD:

The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords

played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in

the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the

Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play

only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the

basis of the previously played chord.

Key of C

Playing ﬁngered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous

chords to your performance.

CUSTOM A.B.C.:

The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode. It allows

you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing a note

on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard.

Cm7

C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7

CaugCm maj7 Cdim Cdim7 Csus4

Cm7-5C7sus4 C6 Cm6 Cadd9

NOTE

When playing certain chords

(aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and

m6), make sure to play the

root of the chord as the

lowest note in that chord.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

2 MEMORY

LOWER:

When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep

playing even after you release your ﬁngers from the Lower keyboard, while the rhythm

plays.

PEDAL:

When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing

even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays.

(In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass

accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your

ﬁngers from the Lower keyboard.

When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/Pedal

Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your ﬁngers from Lower keyboard stops

the rhythm.

The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the

melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords

you play on the Lower keyboard – or from the chords that are played for you, if you use

Automatic Accompaniment. Melody On Chord has three different modes, each

providing a different set of harmonics to accompany the melody played. Melody On

Chord can also be controlled with the Footpedal.

To set the M.O.C. function:

Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button, then call up the Page 4 by using the Page

buttons.

The Melody On Chord display appears.

Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)

Voice Display [Page 4]

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

M.O.C. MODE

OFF:

Cancels the Melody On Chord function.

Mode 1:

Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played.

Mode 2:

Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range close to the melody played.

Mode 3:

Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range relatively distant from the melody

played.

Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s volume

is set to the appropriate value. Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voices.

The Keyboard Percussion function features many types of drum and percussion

sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard.

Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard

Percussion lets you play the preset drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned

beforehand to the keys), while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the

drum sounds to any key or pedal you wish.

Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion

Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each

Voice’s volume to MIN.

Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the

[K.B.P.1] or [K.B.P.2] button.

The Keyboard Percussion (K.B.P.) Display appears.

Pressing the [K.B.P.1] button calls up the Preset 1 kit on the Upper/Lower

keyboards, and pressing [K.B.P.2] button calls up the Preset 2 kit on the

Pedalboard.

Reference Page

Controlling Melody On Chord

(with Footpedal); (page 207)

Keyboard Percussion

NOTE

In the Voice Display, each

Voice section can be muted

(page 19).

NOTE

Two Keyboard Percussion

sets, [K.B.P.1] and [K.B.P.2],

can be played at the same

time by setting both buttons

to on.

Reference Page

Connecting a Pedal Unit

(page 221)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Select the desired percussion kit.

As a default, Multi Kit is assigned to the keyboards but you can change the kit

from a total of 16 different kits. Pressing the Kit button on the display calls up

the Percussion Kit List. Choose the desired Kit within the list.

For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the Preset Keyboard

Percussion List on page 77.

Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard

Percussion.

Two sliders in the K.B.P. display determine the reverb and volume settings.

The settings here determine the reverb/volume for the entire Keyboard

Percussion setup, not for each percussion instrument. You can, however, adjust

each percussion instrument’s reverb/volume (page 84).

Play some notes on the keyboards.

The message “Are you sure you want to clear all assignments and setup data?” may

appear when you change the kit. Select [CLEAR] to clear all assignments (made in

the ASSIGN Page) and detailed settings (made in the SETUP Page) and call up the

selected kit on the panel. Select [CANCEL] to call up the selected kit without

erasing the assignments and detailed settings.

DATA CONTROL

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Preset Keyboard Percussion List

: Indicates the keys of the DDK-7 keyboard and DDKU-P7.

*The 10 kits, Standard Kit 2 – Symphony Kit, have the same sound assignments as Standard Kit 1.

Multi Kit Standard Kit 1 - Symphony Kit

Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK)

Bass Drum Heavy - Kick -

SD Brush Roll - Side Stick Surdo Mute

Snare Drum Heavy - Snare Surdo Open

SD Brush Shot 1 Claves Hand Clap Hi Q

SD Reverb 1 - Snare Tight Whip Slap

Snare Drum Light - Floor Tom L Scratch H

Tom 3 Synth Tom 3 Hi-Hat Closed Scratch L

Snare Drum Rim 1 Concert BD Floor Tom H Finger Snap

Tom 2 Synth Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Click Noise

Hi-Hat Close Bass Drum Heavy Low Tom Metronome Click

Tom 1 Synth Tom 1 Hi-Hat Open Metronome Bell

Hi-Hat Open Bass Drum Light Mid Tom L Seq Click L

Ride Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - Mid Tom H Seq Click H -

Synth Tom 3 SD Brush Roll - Crash Cymbal 1 Brush Tap -

Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - High Tom Brush Swirl -

Synth Tom 2 SD Brush Shot 1 - Ride Cymbal 1 Brush Slap -

Orchestra Cymbal SD Reverb 1 - Chinese Cymbal Brush Tap Swirl -

- Snare Drum Light - Ride Cymbal Cup Snare Roll -

Synth Tom 1 Tom 3 - Ta mbourine Castanet -

- Snare Drum Rim 1 - Splash Cymbal Snare Soft -

Tom 2 - Sticks -

Hi-Hat Close - Kick Soft -

Tom 1 - Open Rim Shot -

Hi-Hat Open - Kick Tight -

Ride Cymbal 1 - Kick Bongo H

Orch Snare Drum - Side Stick Bongo L

Crash Cymbal 1 - Snare Conga H Mute

Snare Drum Roll - Hand Clap Conga H Open

Orchestra Cymbal - Snare Tight Conga L

Orch Cymbal Roll - Floor Tom L Timbale H

Tr iangle Mute - Hi-Hat Closed Timbale L

Tambourine - Floor Tom H Agogo H

Tr iangle Open - Hi-Hat Pedal Agogo L

Castanet - Low Tom Cabasa

Cowbell 1 - Hi-Hat Open Maracas

Timbale 1 Low - Mid Tom L Samba Whistle H

Timbale 1 High - Mid Tom H Samba Whistle L

Wood Block Low - Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short

Conga Low - High Tom Guiro Long

Wood Block High - Ride Cymbal 1 Claves

Conga High - Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H

Bongo Low - Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L

Agogo Low - Tambourine Cuica Mute

Bongo High - Splash Cymbal Cuica Open

Agogo High - Cowbell Tr iangle Mute

Cuica Low - Crash Cymbal 2 Tr iangle Open

Hand Claps - Vibraslap Shaker

Cuica High - Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells

Shaker - - Bell Tree

- -



DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2

Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK)

Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call -

Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak -

- - Door Slam -

String Slap - Scratch Cut -

- - Scratch H 3 -

- - Wind Chime -

- - Telephone Ring -

- - - -

- - - - - -

Flute Key Click - - CarEngnIgnition - -

- - - Car Tires Squeal - -

- - - Car Passing - -

- - - Car Crash - -

- - - -

Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call Burst

Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak Roller Coaster

- - Door Slam Submarine

String Slap - Scratch Cut -

- - Scratch H 3 -

- - Wind Chime -

- - Telephone Ring -

- - - -

- Shower - Laugh

- Thunder - Scream

- Wind - Punch

- Stream - Heart Beat

- Bubble - Foot Steps

- Feed - -

- - - -

Flute Key Click - CarEngnIgnition -

- - Car Tires Squeal -

- - Car Passing -

- - Car Crash -

- - Siren -

- - Tr ain -

- - Jet Plane -

- - Starship -

- Dog - Machine Gun

Horse Laser Gun

Bird Tweet Explosion

- Firework

- -

Ghost -

Maou -

- -



Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Arabic Kit Pop Latin Kit

Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK)

Kick Soft - Bongo H Open 1 f -

Side Stick - Bongo H Open 3 f -

Snare Soft - Bongo H Rim -

Arabic Hand Clap - Bongo H Tip -

Snare Drum - Bongo H Heel -

Floor Tom L - Bongo H Slap -

Hi-Hat Closed - Bongo L Open 1 f Hand Clap

Floor Tom H - Bongo L Open 3 f -

Hi-Hat Pedal - Bongo L Rim -

Low Tom - Bongo L Tip -

Hi-Hat Open - Bongo L Heel Conga H Tip

Mid Tom L - Bongo L Slap Conga H Heel

Mid Tom H Nakarazan Dom - Timbale L Open Conga H Open -

Crash Cymbal 1 Cabasa - - Conga H Mute -

High Tom Nakarazan Edge - - Conga H SlapOpen -

Ride Cymbal 1 Hager Dom - - Conga H Slap -

Crash Cymbal 2 Hager Edge - - Conga H SlapMute -

Duhulla Dom Bongo H - Paila L Conga L Tip -

Tambourine Bongo L - Timbale H Open Conga L Heel -

Duhulla Tak Conga H Mute - - Conga L Open -

Conga H Open - Conga L Mute -

Conga L - Conga L SlapOpen -

Zagrouda H - Conga L Slap -

Zagrouda L - Conga L Slide -

Kick Soft Katem Dom Bongo H Open 1 f Cowbell Top

Side Stick Katem Tak Bongo H Open 3 f -

Snare Soft Katem Sak Bongo H Rim -

Arabic Hand Clap Katem Tak Bongo H Tip -

Snare Drum Doff Tak Bongo H Heel Guiro Short

Floor Tom L Tab la Dom Bongo H Slap Guiro Long

Hi-Hat Closed Ta bla Tak 1 Bongo L Open 1 f -

Floor Tom H Ta bla Tik Bongo L Open 3 f -

Hi-Hat Pedal Ta bla Tak 2 Bongo L Rim Tambourine

Low Tom Tabla Sak Bongo L Tip -

Hi-Hat Open Ta bla Roll Edge Bongo L Heel -

Mid Tom L Ta bla Flam Bongo L Slap -

Mid Tom H Sagat 1 Timbale L Open Maracas

Crash Cymbal 1 Tabel Dom - Shaker

High Tom Sagat 3 - Cabasa

Ride Cymbal 1 Tabel Tak - Cuica Mute

Crash Cymbal 2 Sagat 2 - Cuica Open

Duhulla Dom Rik Dom Paila L -

Tambourine Rik Tak 2 Timbale H Open -

Duhulla Tak Rik Finger 1 - -

Cowbell Rik Tak 1 - -

Duhulla Sak Rik Finger 2 - Tr iangle Mute

Claves Rik BrassTremolo - Tr iangle Open

Doff Dom Rik Sak Paila H -

- Rik Tik - Wind Chime

- -



DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion

You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your

original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 8. The

User setting saved in User memory location can be called up by using the [K.B.P.1] or

[K.B.P.2] buttons.

In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with

[K.B.P.1] button.

Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the

[K.B.P.1] button.

The K.B.P. display appears.

Press [USER 1] on the display.

This procedure assigns User 1 to the [K.B.P.1] button. You can call up the User 1

setting the next time you press the [K.B.P.1] button.

Select the desired percussion kit.

See page 76 for selecting the kit.

Press the [ASSIGN] button at the top right of the display to call

up the ASSIGN Page.

In the ASSIGN Page, you can assign speciﬁc drum sounds to any of the keys.

Select the desired drum instrument that you wish to assign to a

key.

Select the desired drum instrument category with the category buttons in the

display. The drum instrument menu of the selected category appears.

Reference Page

Kit Assign List (page 86)

Drum Instrument Category

Drum Instrument Menu

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal by

simultaneously holding down the desired instrument name in the

display and pressing the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is

to be assigned.

When the assignment is complete, the key name and instrument name is

displayed at the top of the display. The assignments are saved to the User

memory selected in Step 2 (in this example, User 1).

Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your

own User Keyboard Percussion set.

To erase one instrument:

Simultaneously hold down the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page) and

press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.

NOTE

Though eight User Keyboard

Percussion setups can be

created, they cannot be

memorized to Registration

Memory. Only on/off data and

the Keyboard Percussion

Menu are memorized to

Registration Memory.

The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is automatically saved

when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, the square at

the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds. Do not turn the

power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being saved.

The key to which the instrument is to be assigned

Instrument Name

Press the key.

Hold down the Instrument name…

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

To erase all instruments:

You can clear all assignments using the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page).

Press, then release the [CLEAR] button. The following display

appears, prompting conﬁrmation of the operation.

Press [CLEAR] in the display to erase all data. When [CLEAR] is

selected, a “Completed” message momentarily appears on the

display.

Press [CANCEL] in the display to abort the operation.

Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings

You can copy the Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the User locations, or copy from

one User location to another. In the instructions below, Preset 1 is copied to User 1.

Press the [K.B.P.1] button to copy Preset 1.

To copy Preset 1, select the [K.B.P.1] button; to copy Preset 2, select the

[K.B.P.2] button. To copy either User location, select button [K.B.P.1] or

[K.B.P.2].

Press the [MENU] button at the top right of the display to call up

the MENU Page.

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Within the Menu buttons, select the User location as the

destination — for example, User 1.

Press the COPY [FROM] button in the display. A list appears,

letting you select the copy source location.

Select the copy source (Preset 1 here) from the list.

A message appears, prompting conﬁrmation of the operation.

Press the [COPY] button in the display to copy Preset 1. When

[COPY] is selected, a “Completed” message momentarily

appears in the display.

Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Detailed settings for each percussion instrument

You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each

instrument. The settings here are system settings that cannot be memorized to

Registration memory.

Turn off the volume of the relevant keyboard (the keyboard to

which the instrument to be changed is assigned).

Press the [SETUP] button at the top right of the K.B.P. display to

call up the SETUP Page.

Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be

changed is assigned).

The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its

settings.

1 PAN

Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image. Seven

pan positions are available.

2 PITCH COARSE

Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by 100 cents.

Range: -64 – +63

3 PITCH FINE

Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by one cent, allowing more

detailed tuning of the instrument than PITCH COARSE (

2).

Range: -64 – +63

4 REVERB

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument.

Range: 0 – 24

5 VOLUME

Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument.

Range: 0 – 24

2345 6

The name of the

selected instrument

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

6 RESET

Initializes settings such as pan, pitch, and reverb to their default values.

Pressing the [EXECUTE] button calls up the following display, prompting

conﬁrmation of the operation.

Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to restore (initialize) the default settings.

When [EXECUTE] is selected, a “Complete” message momentarily appears on the

display.

Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Kit Assign List

Multi Kit

CYMBAL

Crash Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 2

Crash Cym Mute

Ride Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal Cup

Orchestra Cymbal

Orch Cymbal Roll

Orch Cymbal Mute

Cymbal March

Cym Brush Shot

Tam -Ta m

HI-HAT

Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Close

Hi-Hat Pedal 1

Hi-Hat Pedal 2

Analog HH Open

Analog HH Close

SNARE DRUM

Snare Drum Light

Snare Drum Heavy

Snare Drum Rim 1

Snare Drum Rim 2

SD Accent 1

SD Accent 2

SD Reverb 1

SD Reverb 2

Synth Snare Drum

Orch Snare Drum

Snare Drum Roll

Analog SD

SNARE BRUSH

SD Brush Shot 1

SD Brush Shot 2

SD Brush Roll

TOM

Tom 1

Tom 2

Tom 3

Tom 4

Tom Brush Shot 1

Tom Brush Shot 2

Tom Brush Shot 3

Tom Brush Shot 4

Synth Tom 1

Synth Tom 2

Synth Tom 3

BASS DRUM

Bass Drum Light

Bass Drum Heavy

Bass Drum Attack

Synth Bass Drum

Bass Drum March

Concert BD

Analog BD Short

Analog BD Long

CONGA/BONGO

Conga High

Conga Low

Conga Slap

Conga Muff

Conga Slide

Bongo High

Bongo Low

Bongo Slap

Bongo Mute

CUICA/SURDO

Cuica High

Cuica Middle

Cuica Low

Tamborim Open

Tamborim Mute

Surdo Open

Surdo Mute

Surdo Rim

Surdo Muff

TIMBALES/COWBELL

Timbale 1 High

Timbale 1 Low

Timbale 2 High

Timbale 2 Low

Timbale 3 High

Timbale 3 Low

Timbale 4 High

Timbale 4 Low

Cowbell 1

Cowbell 2

Cowbell 3

Cowbell 4

PERCUSSION 1

Cabasa

Shaker

Maracas High

Maracas Low

Guiro Short

Guiro Long

Wood Block High

Wood Block Mid

Wood Block Low

Claves

Castanet

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Agogo High

Agogo Low

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Windbell Down

Windbell Up

Tambourine

Pandeiro

Bells

Hand Claps

Finger Snap

Scratch

Noise Percussion

PERCUSSION 3

Kotsuzumi 1

Kotsuzumi 2

Kotsuzumi 3

Kotsuzumi 4

Ohtsuzumi 1

Ohtsuzumi 2

Taiko 1

Taiko 2

Ohdaiko 1

Ohdaiko 2

Kakegoe 1

Kakegoe 2

Kakegoe 3

Standard Kit 1

CYMBAL

Crash Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal Cup

Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Snare

Snare Tight

Snare Soft

Snare Roll

Side Stick

Open Rim Shot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

Floor Tom L

Floor Tom H

Low Tom

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

BASS DRUM

Kick

Kick Tight

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

Conga H Open

Conga L

Conga H Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Standard Kit 2

CYMBAL

Crash Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal Cup

Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Snare Short

Snare Tight H

Snare Soft 2

Snare Roll

Side Stick Light

Open Rim Shot H

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

Floor Tom L

Floor Tom H

Low Tom

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

BASS DRUM

Kick Short

Kick Tight

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

Conga H Open

Conga L

Conga H Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Hit Kit

CYMBAL

Crash Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal Cup

Hi-Hat Open 2

Hi-Hat Closed 2

Hi-Hat Pedal 2

SNARE DRUM

Snare Ambient

Snare Tight 2

Snare Electro

Snare Roll

Stick Ambient

Snare Pitched

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

Hybrid Tom 1

Hybrid Tom 2

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Hybrid Tom 3

Hybrid Tom 4

Hybrid Tom 5

Hybrid Tom 6

BASS DRUM

Kick Tight H

Kick Wet

Kick Tight L

PERCUSSION 1

Conga H Open

Conga L

Conga H Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine Light

Castanet

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Room Kit

CYMBAL

Crash Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal Cup

Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Snare Snappy

Snare Tight Snap

Snare Soft

Snare Roll

Side Stick

Open Rim Shot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

Tom Room 1

Tom Room 2

Tom Room 3

Tom Room 4

Tom Room 5

Tom Room 6

BASS DRUM

Kick

Kick Tight

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

Conga H Open

Conga L

Conga H Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Rock Kit

CYMBAL

Crash Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal Cup

Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Snare Rock

Snare Rock Tight

Snare Noisy

Snare Roll

Side Stick

Open Rim Shot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

Tom Rock 1

Tom Rock 2

Tom Rock 3

Tom Rock 4

Tom Rock 5

Tom Rock 6

BASS DRUM

Kick Gate

Kick 2

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

Conga H Open

Conga L

Conga H Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Electro Kit

CYMBAL

Crash Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal Cup

Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Snare Noisy 2

Snare Noisy 3

Snare Snap Elec

Snare Roll

Side Stick

Open Rim Shot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Reverse Cymbal

TOM

Tom Electro 1

Tom Electro 2

Tom Electro 3

Tom Electro 4

Tom Electro 5

Tom Electro 6

BASS DRUM

Kick Gate Heavy

Kick Gate

Kick 3

PERCUSSION 1

Conga H Open

Conga L

Conga H Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Scratch H 2

Scratch L 2

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Hi Q 2

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Analog Kit

CYMBAL

Crash Analog

Crash Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal Cup

Hat Open Analog

Hat Close Analog

Hat Close Anlg 2

SNARE DRUM

Snare Analog

Snare Analog 2

Snare Noisy 4

Snare Roll

Side Stick Anlg

Open Rim Shot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Reverse Cymbal

TOM

Tom Analog 1

Tom Analog 2

Tom Analog 3

Tom Analog 4

Tom Analog 5

Tom Analog 6

BASS DRUM

Kick Analog

Kick Anlg Short

Kick 3

PERCUSSION 1

Conga Analog M

Conga Analog L

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Conga Analog H

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell Analog

Claves 2

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas 2

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Scratch H 2

Scratch L 2

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Hi Q 2

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Dance Kit

CYMBAL

Crash Analog

Crash Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal 1

Ride Analog

Ride Cymbal Cup

Hi-Hat Open 3

Hi-Hat Closed 3

Hat Close Anlg 3

SNARE DRUM

Snare Clap

Snare Dry

Snare Techno

Reverse Dance 2

Side Stick Anlg

Rim Gate

Snare Analog 3

Snare Analog 4

Vinyl Noise

Reverse Cymbal

TOM

Tom Dance 1

Tom Dance 2

Tom Dance 3

Tom Dance 4

Tom Dance 5

Tom Dance 6

BASS DRUM

Kick Techno

Kick Techno L

Kick Techno Q

PERCUSSION 1

Conga Analog M

Conga Analog L

Conga Analog H

Bongo Analog H

Bongo Analog L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell Dance

Claves 2

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas 2

Vibraslap Analog

PERCUSSION 2

Kick Dance 1

Kick Dance 2

Dance Breath 1

Dance Breath 2

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine Anlg

Hi Q 2

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Dance Perc 3

Dance Perc 4

Snare Dance 1

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Dance Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch Dance 1

Scratch Dance 2

Dance Perc 2

Hi Q Dance 1

Dance Perc 1

Reverse Dance 1

Jazz Kit

CYMBAL

Crash Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal Cup

Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Snare Jazz L

Snare Jazz M

Snare Jazz H

Snare Roll

Side Stick Light

Open Rim Shot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

Floor Tom L

Floor Tom H

Low Tom

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

BASS DRUM

Kick Jazz

Kick Tight

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

Conga H Open

Conga L

Conga H Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Brush Kit

CYMBAL

Crash Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal Cup

Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Brush Slap 3

Brush Tap 2

Brush Slap 2

Snare Roll

Side Stick Light

Open Rim Shot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

Tom Brush 1

Tom Brush 2

Tom Brush 3

Tom Brush 4

Tom Brush 5

Tom Brush 6

BASS DRUM

Kick Jazz

Kick Tight

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

Conga H Open

Conga L

Conga H Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Symphony Kit

CYMBAL

Hand Cymbal

Hand Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Chinese Cymbal

Hand Cymbal S

Hand Cymbal 2 S

Ride Cymbal Cup

Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Band Snare

Band Snare 2

Snare Soft

Snare Roll

Side Stick

Open Rim Shot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

Floor Tom L

Floor Tom H

Low Tom

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

BASS DRUM

Gran Cassa Mute

Gran Cassa

Kick Soft 2

PERCUSSION 1

Conga H Open

Conga L

Conga H Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

SFX Kit 1

SFX

Cutting Noise 1

Cutting Noise 2

String Slap

Flute Key Click

Shower

Thunder

Wind

Stream

Bubble

Feed

Ghost

Maou

Dog

Horse

Bird Tweet

SFX Kit 2

SFX 1

Phone Call

Telephone Ring

Wind Chime

Door Squeak

Door Slam

Scratch Cut

Scratch H 3

Laugh

Scream

Punch

Heart Beat

Foot Steps

SFX 2

CarEngnIgnition

Car Tires Squeal

Car Passing

Car Crash

Siren

Train

Jet Plane

Starship

Burst

Roller Coaster

Submarine

Machine Gun

Laser Gun

Explosion

Firework

Arabic Kit

ARABIC 1

Nakarazan Dom

Nakarazan Edge

Hager Dom

Hager Edge

Zagrouda H

Zagrouda L

Arabic Hand Clap

Duhulla Dom

Duhulla Tak

Duhulla Sak

Doff Dom

Doff Tak

ARABIC 2

Katem Dom

Katem Tak

Katem Sak

Tabla Dom

Tabla Tak 1

Tabla Tak 2

Tabla Sak

Tabla Tik

Tabla Roll Edge

Tabla Flam

Tabel Dom

Tabel Tak

ARABIC 3

Sagat 1

Sagat 2

Sagat 3

Rik Dom

Rik Tak 1

Rik Tak 2

Rik Sak

Rik Tik

Rik Finger 1

Rik Finger 2

Rik BrassTremolo

CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM

Crash Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal 1

Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

Snare Drum

Snare Soft

Side Stick

TOM/BASS DRUM

Floor Tom L

Floor Tom H

Low Tom

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION

Conga H Open

Conga L

Conga H Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Cowbell

Claves

Cabasa

Tambourine

Pop Latin Kit

CONGA

Conga H Tip

Conga H Heel

Conga H Open

Conga H Mute

Conga H SlapOpen

Conga H Slap

Conga H SlapMute

Conga L Tip

Conga L Heel

Conga L Open

Conga L Mute

Conga L SlapOpen

Conga L Slap

Conga L Slide

BONGO

Bongo H Open 1 f

Bongo H Open 3 f

Bongo H Rim

Bongo H Tip

Bongo H Heel

Bongo H Slap

Bongo L Open 1 f

Bongo L Open 3 f

Bongo L Rim

Bongo L Tip

Bongo L Heel

Bongo L Slap

PERCUSSION 1

Timbale H Open

Timbale L Open

Paila H

Paila L

Cowbell Top

Tambourine

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Cuica Open

Cuica Mute

Cabasa

Shaker

PERCUSSION 2

Triangle Open

Triangle Mute

Wind Chime

Hand Clap

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and

LCD, providing a convenient way to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while

you’re playing, with the simple touch of a single button on the Registration Memory panel.

The buttons are conveniently located between the Upper and Lower keyboards for easy

access while playing. Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch

on the Pedal Unit, or optional Foot Pedal. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also

be saved to a USB ﬂash memory or other external media.

Various types of basic Registrations have been programmed to the numbered Registration

Memory buttons, 1 – 16. When you record your own Registration settings to a numbered

button, the preset Registration for that button will be overwritten and erased as a result.

When you initialize the Registration Memory (page 95), the preset settings will be recalled

and your own Registration setting(s) will be erased and replaced with the factory defaults.

Newly created Registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory panel

buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB ﬂash

memory or other external media for future recall.

Create your original Registration.

While holding down the [M.] (Memory) button in the Registration

Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish

to save your Registration.

When the Registration is stored, the numbered button ﬂashes momentarily.

13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D

Contents

1 Storing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

2 Selecting Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

3Saving the Registration data to USB ﬂash memory

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

4 Initializing Registration Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

5 Registration Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

• Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

• Conﬁrming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

6 Unifying a speciﬁc parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

7 Copying Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Storing Registrations

Reference Pages

Selecting a Voice (page 27)

Selecting a Rhythm

(page 61)

Voice Controls and Effects

(page 41)

13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.

2. Press desired numbered button.

1. While holding down [M.] button...

When recording Registration settings, the square at the top left of the

display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Registration is

currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Registration is

being saved.

Registration Memory

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Functions and settings that cannot be memorized:

The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number.

• Pitch (page 214)

• MIDI Control settings (fpage 230)

• Mic. Volume (page 225)

• AUX OUT settings (page 220)

• Mic. Reverb (page 225)

• LCD related settings (page 16)

• Score related settings except Next Page (page 125)

The following settings common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and

cannot be stored individually for each number.

• Transpose (page 214)

• Attack mode in Organ Flute Voices (page 39)

• Registration Shift (page 95)

• Auto Fill setting (page 65)

• Reverb type (page 48)

• User Voices (page 152)

• User rhythms (page 179)

• User Keyboard Percussion (page 80)

• Rhythm Sequences (page 190)

• Disable setting (page 92)

• Disable mode (page 93)

• Next Page setting of score setting (page 125)

Reference Page

Saving Registrations as

Registration Data (File)

(page 123)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to

select.

•You can also recall Registrations by using the Foot Controllers. This function is called

“Registration Shift” (page 95).

•You can also program the Registrations to change automatically at speciﬁc points

within the Rhythm Sequence. This function is called “Registration Sequence”

(page 195).

Selecting Registrations

Reference Page

Controlling the Registration

Shift (page 210)

Using the [D.] (Disable) button:

Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you select

different Registration Memory buttons. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button allows

you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on

throughout all your Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if

you want to.

The particular settings that do not change when the [D.] (disable) button is on

depend on the Disable mode setting. For details on the Disable mode, see “Selecting

Disable Mode” on page 93.

7 8 9 10 11 12 D.

Disable button

Registration Memory

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Selecting Disable Mode:

The Disable mode enables you to select what is to be disabled when the [D.]

(Disable) button is on. There are two Disable modes: NORMAL (rhythm menu,

tempo, etc. are disabled) and TEMPO (only tempo is disabled).

Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the

Utility Display.

Press the [GLOBAL] button to call up the GLOBAL Page.

Press the DISABLE MODE [NORMAL] or [TEMPO] button.

NORMAL

When the Electone is set to the NORMAL mode and the [D.] (Disable) button is

on, the following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration

Memory number.

• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm

reverb

• Rhythm reverb time

•Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of

Accompaniment parts

• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory

• M.O.C. mode

•Second expression pedal control for rhythm tempo

TEMPO

When the Electone is set to the TEMPO mode and the [D.] (Disable) button is on,

the rhythm tempo will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory

number.

Disable Mode

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

You can save your Registration Memory settings to an external storage device, such as

USB ﬂash memory, with sixteen Registrations comprising a single ﬁle.

The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB ﬂash

memory. For details about using other external storage devices, see chapter 7, Music

Data Recorder (M.D.R.).

Insert a USB ﬂash memory into the USB TO DEVICE terminal on

the left side of the DDK-7.

Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the M.D.R. display.

Select the song to which you want to save the Registration data

(page 113).

Press [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the

Registration Edit display.

Press the [SAVE] button in the display.

A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved.

When the operation is completed, the message closes.

Saving the Registration data to USB ﬂash

memory

Reference Page

Saving Registrations as

Registration Data (File);

(page 123)

Reference Page

Recalling Recorded

Registrations (page 128)

Reference Page

Changing the Song Name

(page 120)

Registration Memory

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Deleting all Registration data (including Registration Memory and Registration Shift

settings, User rhythms, Rhythm Sequence data, and User Voices) in Registration

Memory initializes the Registration Memory. Be careful when using this operation,

since it erases all your existing data. In order to avoid inadvertently losing your

important data, save it to an external storage device.

Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the GLOBAL

Page in the Utility display.

Press the [INITIALIZE] button on the top left in the display.

The message “Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data?” appears.

Press [INITIALIZE] to actually initialize the data. When the operation is

complete, the DDK-7 will be restarted.

Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation.

The Registration Shift function allows you to change Registrations without taking your

hands from the keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, or

optional Foot Pedal, you can “jump” to a speciﬁed Registration or step through the

panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you specify.

Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the Regist

Shift display. You can also view and check the Registration Shift mode in the Voice

Display.

Initializing Registration Memory

Reference Page

Factory Set (Initializing the

DDK-7); (page 24)

Registration Shift

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift

display

Connect the Pedal Unit (DDKU-P7) or optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5) to the

instrument.

If you want to use the Foot Pedal, set the desired parameters in the Regist Shift display

explained in this section, then assign the Regist Shift function to the Foot Pedal. Refer

to the section “Controlling Registration Shift” on page 210.

Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift

display

Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel.

Press the [RIGHT] button at the top right of the display to call up

the RIGHT Page (Regist Shift display).

1 OFF

Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When you select OFF, you cannot change

Registrations by using the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal.

2 SHIFT

In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal

selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical order. After the last

Registration is reached, the function ‘wraps around’ to select the ﬁrst preset again. The

numbered buttons light up as they are selected.

Reference Pages

Footswitches (page 200)

Foot Pedal (page 203)

DDKU-P7 FC4 FC5

REGIST SHIFT Display

Registration Memory

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

3 JUMP

Pressing the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal jumps to select the

designated panel Registration.

You can set the Jump “destination” with buttons in the display or the Data

Control dial.

4 USER

In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal

selects Registrations according to the order you’ve speciﬁed.

To set the User Registration order:

1 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory

section.

2 Press the [SET] button in the display.

The Registration number appears in the display, indicating that the Registration is

entered.

3 Repeat the above procedure #1 through #2 to set the Registration

order.

1 POSITION

These are cursor controls used to move the cursor (colored orange) along the Registration

row in the display. Entered Registration numbers are shown in boxes, while the numbers in

the row above indicate the position in the sequence (in other words, the number of

successive presses of the Right Footswitch). Up to 80 steps (Registrations) can be

memorized.

Moves the cursor to the ﬁrst position.

Moves the cursor one step to the left.

Moves the cursor one step to the right.

Moves the cursor ﬁve steps to the right.

Registration number of the destination

Registration row

NOTE

When the cursor is

positioned at “-”, Footswitch,

or an optional Foot Pedal

does not work.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

2 DATA

These are data controls used to enter and delete Registration numbers in the Registration

row.

SET: For initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the Registration row,

or for replacing a number at the current cursor position.

To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will

light), then press [SET] in the display. The entered Registration number will appear in the

Registration row. After using SET to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among

the numbers.

INSERT: For inserting a Registration number just before the current cursor position.

To perform the operation, ﬁrst move the cursor to a numbered position. Then, press the

desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will light), and press [INSERT]

in the display. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other

numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers.

Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s capacity of

80. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the

operation cannot be executed.

DELETE: For deleting a Registration number at the current cursor position. To delete the

unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and press [DELETE] in the

display.

CLEAR: For erasing all current user Registration Shift settings.

After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting conﬁrmation of the operation.

Select [CLEAR] to clear all data. The message “Clear all data” momentarily appears in the

display and returns to the previous display.

Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.

SHIFT END

Determines how to end the Registration shift function.

STOP: Selects the last Registration and quits the operation.

TOP: After the last preset is reached, the ﬁrst preset is called up again, starting the sequence

over again from the beginning.

NEXT REGIST: After the last preset is reached, the next Registration data in the Song is

called up. This function is available only when two or more Registration data sets are saved

in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a song with more than sixteen

Registrations.

The Shift End mark ( ) will automatically be put at the end of the Registrations you

entered when Top or Next Regist is selected as the Shift End.

Reference Page

Saving Two or More

Registration Banks to One

Song (page 124)

NOTE

When you play the song

using Next Regist. function,

always press the [F] (Play)

button in the M.D.R. display

to start the song and activate

these functions.

The [CUSTOM] (Custom

Play) button will not activate

the Next Regist. function.

NOTE

If the next Registration data

contains User voices, the

DDK-7 may produce no

sound for a few seconds

while loading the

Registration.

Registration Memory

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

Conﬁrming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice

Display

You can conﬁrm the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display, Page 1.

Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call up the Voice

Display.

The Registration Shift mode is shown at the bottom right of the display.

Registration Shift, OFF:

The current Registration number is displayed.

Registration Shift, in “SHIFT” mode:

The current Registration number (left) and the next number (right) are

displayed.

Current Registration

Next Registration

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

100

Registration Memory

Registration Shift, in “JUMP” mode:

The current Registration number (left) and the destination number (right) will

be displayed. You can change the destination number even in the middle of the

performance by using the buttons in the display or the Data Control

dial.

Registration Shift, in “USER” mode:

Indicates the current position of the Registration Shift. You can change the

Registration by moving the cursor (in orange) right/left, using the displayed

buttons or the Data Control dial. This is handy if you’ve inadvertently advanced

the shift setting in the middle of your performance. The user Registration

settings cannot be edited here.

Moves the cursor to the ﬁrst position.

Moves the cursor one step to the left and selects the next Registration.

Moves the cursor one step to the right and selects the previous Registration.

Moves the cursor ﬁve step to the right and selects the Registration.

Destination number

can be changed.

Registration Memory

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

101

In the Voice Display, Page 2, you can conveniently “unify” a speciﬁc parameter used in

different Voice groups at one time. This is useful when you are changing, for example,

the Voice Brilliance setting for the Upper Keyboard and want the same setting to be

applied to the entire instrument.

Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel.

Press the [2] button at the top right of the display to select

Page 2.

Press the PARAMETER button (indicates the currently selected

parameter) in the display to select the desired parameter for

changing.

The Parameter Select pop-up menu appears, letting you select the desired

parameter.

Unifying a speciﬁc parameter

Available parameters

• Reverb • Rhythm Reverb • Volume

• Panning • Brilliance • Sustain

Parameter

Part

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

102

Registration Memory

Select the parameter and part in the Parameter Select pop-up

menu. After selecting the desired parameter, the pop-up menu

automatically closes.

The amount of the selected parameter for each Registration is shown in the

display.

Select the targeted Registration numbers and turn them on.

Press the targeted Registration in the display and turn it on with the SETTINGS

buttons: ALL ON, ALL OFF, ON, OFF, and SELECT.

ALL ON: Selects all Registration memory numbers.

ALL OFF: Cancels all Registration memory numbers.

ON: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “ON.”

OFF: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “OFF.”

SELECT: Turns on the Registration memory numbers that contain the same Voice as

the one which is currently set in the Registration at the cursor position. The targeted

Registration numbers are underlined.

Parameter

value for each

Registration

Selected

parameter

Parameters in Registrations set to ON will be changed.

Registration Memory

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

103

Uniﬁes the currently turned-on parameter’s values.

You unify the relevant parameter values in each Registration memory number or

offset them. Keep in mind that you cannot restore the original data once you

change the parameter’s value.

Unifying the currently turned-on parameter’s value:

Pressing [SET] uniﬁes the currently turned-on parameter’s values to the one in

the currently selected Registration (at the cursor position). A message appears

prompting you to conﬁrm the operation.

To continue the operation, select [UNIFY]. Select [CANCEL] to abort the

operation.

Offsetting the currently turned-on parameter’s value.

Pressing the [+]/[-] buttons in the display or using the Data Control dial offsets

the currently turned-on parameter’s value. If you select Pan as the parameter,

[

E]/[F] buttons are shown instead of [+]/[-].

If you change the value, and if parameter values for some Registration memory

number reach the maximum or minimum, the following message appears.

In this case, pressing [OK] continues the operation, ignoring those parameters at

maximum or minimum value. Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

104

Registration Memory

In the Voice Display, Page 3, you can copy a Registration stored to a speciﬁc

Registration Memory number to another number on a speciﬁc section basis (Voices,

rhythm, keyboard percussion). (The function is called Regist Section Copy.) This is

useful, for example, when you want the upper keyboard Voice 2 in Registration

number 2 to be the same as the upper keyboard Voice 1 in Registration number 1.

Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call up the

Voice Display.

Press the [3] button at the top right of the display to call up

Page 3.

Press the COPY FROM [REGIST] number button and select the

Registration number that you wish to copy.

To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button.

Copying Registrations

Registration number

Registration Memory

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

105

Press the COPY FROM [SECTION] button and select the Regist

Section that you wish to copy.

To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button.

In the same way, select the COPY TO Registration number and

Regist Section.

The COPY TO Regist Section depends on the Regist Section selected for COPY

FROM.

Press the [COPY EXECUTE] button at the bottom right in the

display.

The following display appears, prompting conﬁrmation of the operation.

Press the [COPY] button in the display to copy the Registration

and a message momentarily appears in the display indicating

that the Registration has been copied.

Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.

Section

NOTE

If you change the source

Regist Section after

changing the destination

Regist Section the

destination may

automatically change to the

section selected as the

source Regist Section.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

106

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

The Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) is a sophisticated recording system built into the DDK-7 that

lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB ﬂash memory or other

external media. If you install the optional ﬂoppy disk drive such as the UD-FD01 to the DDK-7,

you can record your performances/settings to ﬂoppy disks. Before using an external media such

as USB ﬂash memory, carefully read “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal”

section on page 111.

Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. All operations related

to the M.D.R., such as recording and playing your performances, can be done in the

M.D.R. display.

Contents

1 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

2 Using the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

• Song Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

• Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

• Using USB Storage Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

3 Formatting External Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

4 Selecting a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

• Search a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

5 Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

• Recording Your Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

• Re-recording (Retry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

• Recording each part separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

• Punch-in Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6 Changing the Song Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)

123

•

Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song

124

• Replacing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

• Next Regist (Registration) Settings (Changing the order

of the Registration data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

8 Recalling Recorded Registrations. . . . . . . . . . . 128

9 Playing Back a Song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

• Playing Back the Selected Part(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

• Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

• Changing the Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

• Repeat Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

10 Displaying the Score. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

• Changing the score contents and settings. . . . . . . 136

11 Other Functions (Tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

• Song Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

• Song Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

• Converting to XG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

• Converting to EL format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

• Converting from EL format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

• Checking the Remaining Memory/media ID. . . . . . 143

Calling Up the M.D.R. Display

NOTE

The items shown in the

display and their order differ

depending on the

connected external media.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

107

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the M.D.R. display is open exits

from the M.D.R. display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the

[MDR] button again to recall the M.D.R. display.

All the instructions in this chapter are related to the M.D.R. display. To call up the M.D.R.

functions and the M.D.R. display, press the [MDR] button.

The M.D.R. display consists of two display pages: the SONG Page and the TOOLS

Page. In the SONG Page, you can select a song, then play it back or record it. The

TOOLS Page has a variety of song utility operations, such as copy, delete, rename, etc.

Pressing the [SONG] or [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display switches

between the SONG Page and the TOOLS Page.

1 Current Media/Folder

Displays the currently selected media and folder(s). The left side of the indication

(before “:/”) shows the particular media and the right side shows the path with

currently selected folder name at the end. For example, “USB 01:/Folder1/” indicates

that the folder named “Folder1” contained in the USB ﬂash memory is selected.

2 Media/Folder/Song List

Displays the media, folders or songs. Up to 120 folders can be displayed (5 folders at

once).

3 Scroll Buttons

If the Media/folder/Song List contains more than 5 media/folders/songs, you can scroll

through the display with these buttons.

4 SETTINGS

Displays/changes the settings for the currently selected song.

5 UP

Selects the higher layer folder or media. For example, when “USB 01:/Folder1/”

(Folder1 in the USB ﬂash memory) is selected, pressing the [UP] button selects “USB

01:/” (USB ﬂash memory).

Using the LCD Display

89)!# $%^&*@

23 5547 76

SONG Page TOOLS Page

Reference Page

Setting a Song (page 114)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

108

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

6 IN

Selects the next lower (or deeper) layer folder or media. For example, when “USB 01:/

Folder1/” (Folder1 in the USB ﬂash memory) is selected, pressing the [IN] button

selects “USB 01:/Folder1/SONG/” (the SONG folder contained in Folder1 of the

USB ﬂash memory.

7 SEARCH

Search for the song/folder in the selected media.

8 Elapsed Time

Displays the elapsed time when recording/playing back a song (up to 59 min. 59 sec.).

9 Song Control

Controls song recording, playback, etc.

) CUSTOM PLAY

Records/plays back only the performance data of the selected songs. Using this button

does not recall the Registration data.

! SCORE

Displays the selected song’s score.

@ REGIST EDIT

Displays the Regist (Registration) Edit display for the selected song’s Registration data.

# CREATE FOLDER

Creates a new folder in the Media/Folder/Song List. Up to 120 folders can exist in one

media or within a single upper folder. Pressing this button calls up the New Folder

display in which you can enter the desired name. Enter the name and press the [OK]

button to create a new folder. The method for entering a folder name is the same as

that of the song name. See page 120.

$ CHANGE NAME

Changes the folder/song name.

% COPY

Copies the selected media/folder/song.

^ DELETE

Deletes the selected folder/song.

& CONVERT

Converts the selected song for use on the EL-series Electone, such as EL-900 or other

instruments, or converts songs recorded on EL-series Electone for use on the DDK-7.

Songs can be converted to XG format, EL format, or from EL format.

* INFORMATION

Displays remaining memory in the media is shown, as well as whether or not the media

has an ID when a USB storage device is selected and displays information such as the

title and composer when a song is selected. The information to be displayed depends

on the songs.

Reference Page

Search a Song (page 114)

Reference Pages

Recording Your

Performance (page 117)

Playing Back a Song

(page 130)

Reference Page

Displaying the Score

(page 135)

Reference Pages

Saving Registrations as

Registration Data (File)

(page 123)

Recalling Recorded

Registrations (page 128)

Reference Page

Changing the Song Name

(page 120)

Reference Page

Song Copy (page 137)

Reference Page

Song Delete (page 139)

Reference Pages

Converting to XG

(page 140)

Converting to EL format

(page 141)

Converting from EL format

(page 142)

Reference Pages

Checking the Remaining

Memory/media ID

(page 143)

About Protected Songs

(page 129)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

109

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

If media cannot be found:

Press the button until the button is grayed out.

The Media List will be displayed. If there are more than ﬁve media selections,

scroll through the display with the Scroll buttons (page 107) to display the

desired media.

If songs cannot be found:

Check the current media/folder (page 107).

If the desired song is stored in the currently displayed folder, use

the Scroll buttons (page 107) to display the song.

If the desired song is stored in a different folder, use the

and buttons to select the folder in which the desired

song is stored.

If you are not sure of the folder in which the desired song is stored, search a song

by using SEARCH function.

Song Icons

These icons are shown when you select a media, folder, and song.

NOTE

If the message “Registration

data will be initialized” is

displayed when you select a

folder, press [OK] button

(media is not initialized). The

message will appear when

recalling the protected

song.

Indicates media such as a USB ﬂash memory or ﬂoppy disk. This icon is

displayed in the Media/Folder List.

Indicates a folder.

Indicates that write-protect or copy-protect is effective for the media.

Indicates that performance data is contained in the song.

Indicates an XG-compatible song.

Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 129 for more information.

Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 129 for more information.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

110

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Media Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files

Folders:

A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple songs in

groups. If you’ve saved hundreds of songs to a USB ﬂash memory, it may be difﬁcult

to ﬁnd the desired song quickly. Organizing your songs in folders, with similar

songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier

to ﬁnd the songs you want.

Songs:

A song is the DDK-7 data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single

song can contain a variety of data, including the recorded performance,

Registrations, and so on.

Files:

A ﬁle is an element of data in a song. For example, a single song consists of various

ﬁles, such as Registration ﬁles and performance ﬁles. The following ﬁles are created

with the M.D.R. (The extension will not appear in the DDK-7 display. They will,

however, be displayed on a computer.)

In addition, one ﬁle (extension: .name) is automatically created in each folder for

organization/maintenance of the folder contents. It does not appear on the DDK-7

display.

Song

Song 2

Song 1

Song Song Song

Folder A

Song 4

Folder B

Creating folders

USB ﬂash memory

Files in the song

File Explanation Extension

Performance data This ﬁle contains performance data, played on the

keyboards and pedals of the DDK-7.

.mid

Registration data This ﬁle contains Registration settings, User Voices,

User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences.

.b00

XG-converted data This ﬁle contains XG song data, for which Electone

performance data is converted to XG-compatible

format.

.mid

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

111

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal

This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal,

be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below.

NOTE

For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.

■ Compatible USB devices

• USB storage devices (ﬂash memory, ﬂoppy disk drive, hard

disk drive, etc.)

• USB hub

The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially

available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of

USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device

for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page:

http://download.yamaha.com/

NOTE

Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse

cannot be used.

■ Connecting USB device

• When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE

terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is

appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction.

• When connecting a USB cable, Use it less than 3 meters.

•If you intend to connect two or three devices at the same time

to a terminal, you should use a USB hub device. The USB hub

must be self-powered (with its own power source) and the

power must be on. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error

message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub

from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument

and re-connect the USB hub.

• Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you

can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the

instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of

USB 1.1.

Using USB Storage Devices

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device (external media), you can save data you’ve created to the

connected device, as well as read data from the connected device.

■ The number of USB storage device to be

used

Up to two USB storage devices can be connected to the USB TO

DEVICE terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The number of

USB storage devices that can be used simultaneously with

musical instruments even when a USB hub is used is a maximum

of two.)

■ Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a

message may appear prompting you to format the device/ media.

If so, execute the Format operation (page 112).

The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not

contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially

when connecting multiple USB storage media.

■ To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply

the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If

you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to

disable write-protect.

■ Connecting/removing USB storage device

Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the

instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and

Delete operations).

Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB

storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too

often. Doing so may result in the operation of the

instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument

is accessing data (such as during Save, Copy, Delete, and

Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device

(shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB

connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and

do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may

corrupt the data on either or both devices.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

112

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

If you ﬁnd that you are unable to use new, blank external media (such as ﬂoppy disks or

USB ﬂash memory) or old one that have been used with other devices, you may need

to format them. Formatting erases all the data in the media and makes it ready to

record. The data erased by formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not

the media contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the

operation. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage

media.

Connect the media to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up

the TOOLS Page.

Press the button repeatedly if necessary until the button

is grayed out.

Select the desired media you want to format.

To format a USB ﬂash memory, select [USB XX] (USB 01, USB 02, etc.). To

format a ﬂoppy disk, select [USB-FD01].

Press the [FORMAT] button in the display.

A message appears, prompting conﬁrmation of the operation. Select

[FORMAT] to format the media, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.

Formatting External Media

NOTE

Before purchasing a USB

ﬂash memory device, please

consult your Yamaha dealer,

or an authorized Yamaha

distributor for advice, or see

the Yamaha website (http://

download.yamaha.com/).

NOTE

The indications USB 1, USB

2, etc. will be displayed

depending on the number of

the connected media.

NOTE

“USB-FD01” appears in the

display only when a ﬂoppy

disk drive has been installed

to the DDK-7.

Do not remove the media

while formatting.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

113

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

In the M.D.R. display, you can select a blank song to which you want to record your

performance or save the Registration settings, or you can select a desired song for

playback.

In the M.D.R. display, songs in the currently selected media are displayed. First call up

the desired media (and folder, if necessary) in the display, then select the desired song.

Check the currently selected media at the top of the display.

Conﬁrm that the desired media is displayed at the top of the display.

For information on selecting the desired media, see page 109.

Press desired song button in the display.

Referring to the song name and icons, select the desired song. The selected song

button is highlighted in orange.

Selecting a Song

Do not remove the media

while the instrument is

accessing the media. (If

you are using a USB ﬂash

memory which has a lamp,

the lamp will ﬂash when

the instrument is

accessing the USB ﬂash

memory.)

Currently selected media/folder

Reference Pages

Changing the Song Name

(page 120)

Song Icons (page 109)

Song containing data

Blank song (containing no data)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

114

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Search a Song

Search for a desired song by using the Search function.

Insert the media containing the desired song/folder.

Select the desired media and/or folder in the Media/Folder List.

About the [SETTINGS] button

Pressing the button calls up a display of the currently selected song, letting

you conﬁrm the tempo and parts that are played when playing the song.

When playing back the song (by pressing the [F] button), only those parts that

are set to “PLAY” in the display actually play at the indicated tempo (over a range of

50% to 200% of the original tempo when recording). If the song contains no

performance data, all parts are set to “OFF.” Pressing the [PART SAVE] button

saves each part playback setting (the tempo is not saved).

Reference Pages

Playing Back the Selected

Part(s) (page 131)

Changing the Tempo

(page 132)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

115

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Press the [SEARCH] button in the display.

Press the [KEYWORD] button.

Enter the folder/song name for searching.

If necessary, press the [DELETE] button so that the previous key word can be

deleted, then enter the new key word. (See page 120 for instructions on

changing the song name.)

Press the [OK] button.

The search will begin, and the detected folder/song name will be shown on the

display.

NOTE

Previous searched data can

be shown on the display.

However, the data does not

appear if you’ve turned off

the power, removed the

media or saved the song

after performing the search

operation.

Previous key word

NOTE

This function does not

distinguish between capital

and lowercase letters.

NOTE

When searching for XG

songs, entering the

extension “.mid” is

unnecessary.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

116

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Conﬁrm the detected folder/song name.

Press the desired folder/song.

The display will automatically exit from the SEARCH display and the selected

folder/song appears.

If nothing is detected, try the search again by using another name (see step 4 above).

Detected folder/song list

Detected number

Displayed data number

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

117

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Recording Your Performance

Set the desired Registrations on the DDK-7. Make all the DDK-7 settings necessary

for the song you will record. This means entering the all Registrations you will need for

the entire performance in the Registration Memory. Make sure also to select the

Registration that you will use at the beginning of the song.

Insert a media to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Select a blank song for recording your performance.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

If you want to overwrite an existing song already containing performance data,

you will need to delete it beforehand.

Press the [SONG] button at the top right of the display to call up

the SONG Page, then select the [I] (Record) button.

The following display appears, indicating that you can record your performance.

Press the [F] (Play) button.

An hourglass icon appears at the bottom left of the display, indicating that

Registration data is currently being read.

After the hourglass disappears, begin playing.

When you ﬁnish playing, press the [

] (Stop) button in the

display.

The recording is ﬁnished and the LCD returns to the M.D.R. display. The song

to which your performance is recorded is automatically named “SONG_XXX”

(XXX indicates song number). You can change the song name as desired. (For

details, see page 120.)

Recording

Never attempt to eject the

media or turn the power off

during recording, reading

and playing back.

NOTE

If a message appears

indicating there is not

enough free space in media,

press the [CANCEL] button,

then delete any

unnecessary songs if

possible or insert new

media. To continue

recording your performance

on media that does not have

enough space, press the

[CONTINUE] button.

Do not remove the media

from the DDK-7 while data

is being recorded (while

the hourglass icon or

other message is shown).

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

118

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Re-recording (Retry)

If you make a mistake during recording, you can re-record the song from the

beginning.

Press the [I] (Record) button while the song is still running.

This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the

song.

Press the [F] (Play) or [CUSTOM PLAY] button to begin

rerecording the song.

Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously

recorded performance with the newly recorded performance.

Recording each part separately

You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets

you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration

changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the song.

Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 Voices can be recorded separately, though,

the Lead Voice 2 Voices will be included in the performance data of the Upper

Keyboard. The following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to

the song using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper

Keyboard.

Follow steps 1 – 3 on page 117 to call up the Rec Standby

display.

Select the parts for recording.

Each pressing of a part button switches the status: PLAY, OFF, and REC.

PLAY: Playback the parts that have been recorded.

OFF: Recording or playback is not active.

REC: Records the part.

If you set the Upper part to “REC,” the performance on the Upper Keyboard

(including Lead Voice 1 Voices) is recorded. Setting Lead to “REC,” however,

records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to

“REC” at the same time; neither can the Lower and Keyboard Percussion parts

be recorded at the same time.

NOTE

Pressing the [J] (Stop)

button cancels the

rerecording and records the

previous performance.

NOTE

When you record the

Keyboard Percussion, make

sure that the [K.B.P.1] or

[K.B.P.2] button is set to on.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

119

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

The following setting lets you record only Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard

parts.

Press the [F] (Play) button, and start playing after the

hourglass icon disappears.

Press the [J] (Stop) button when you are ﬁnished with your

performance to stop recording.

Now you’ve recorded the ﬁrst parts of your performance.

Press the [I] (Record) button to set up recording of the next

part—Upper part in this case.

A message appears prompting conﬁrmation of operation. Select

[OVERWRITE] to overwrite and the Rec Standby display appears.

Select the parts for recording.

Set the next parts you want to record (in this case, the Upper part) to “REC.”

Also set the part already recorded (in this case Lower and Pedal parts) to “PLAY,”

so you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones.

Change the playback tempo for the selected part.

The playback tempo can be set over a range of 50% to 200% of the original.

The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower

tempo while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.

Press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button to start recording of the new

part or parts (Upper part).

Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The [CUSTOM

PLAY] button is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for

recording, and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback.

While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the

Upper Keyboard.

When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically

stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of

the previously recorded parts.

NOTE

You should also set the

Control button to “REC,” in

order to record Registration

changes and expression

pedal operation.

NOTE

Use the TEMPO [RESET]

button in the display to reset

the tempo to its original

value (100%).

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

120

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Punch-in Recording

This lets you re-record a speciﬁc phrase or section which you don’t want to use, either

that of a speciﬁc part(s) or all parts.

Select the song which contains the phrase you want to change.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press the [F] (Play) button to start playback of the song.

Press the [K] (Pause) button at the point you want to execute

punch-in recording.

Press the [I] (Record) button.

The recording display appears, indicating that the Music Data Recorder is ready

to record.

Set the parts which you want to change to “REC” status and

other parts to “PLAY.”

Press the [F] (Play) button to start punch-in recording. Play the

new phrase, as you want it to be changed.

Press the [J] (Stop) button to quit the punch-in recording as

soon as you reach the end of the phrase.

You can name the song, such as giving it a title or indicating the date on which it was

recorded. However, song names of the EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900, cannot

be changed.

Select the song whose name you want to change.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up

the TOOLS Page.

NOTE

This function is best used

when the phrase to be

rerecorded has deﬁnite

beginning and end points,

with slight pauses before

and after.

Changing the Song Name

NOTE

When you change the name

of an XG song, the

extension (.mid) cannot be

changed.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

121

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Press the [CHANGE NAME] button.

The following display appears.

Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [E][F]

buttons in the display or the Data Control dial.

Select the desired character type: alphabet, upper or lowercase,

or symbol.

Select the desired character for entry.

A song name can contain up to 50 characters.

After ﬁnished, select [OK] to actually enter the name.

The LCD will return to the TOOLS Page display.

DATA CONTROL

Cursor

NOTE

If you select Japanese as

the Language in the Utility

display (page 16), you can

also select Japanese

language characters

(hiragana and kanji, normal

size katakana, half size

katakana, full size alphabet,

and full size symbols).

NOTE

An XG song name can

contain up to 46 characters.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

122

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

To delete the entered character:

Move the cursor to the character you want to delete.

Press the [DELETE] button at the bottom right in the display.

The character is deleted.

To convert into kanji (Japanese language):

This applies only if you are using the (Kana-Kan) button in Japanese.

When the input “Hiragana” characters are shown in the reverse

display (highlighted), press the (kanji-conversion) button

one or several times to convert to the characters into the

appropriate kanji.

• The reversed area can be changed by the [E][F] buttons in the display or

the Data Control dial.

• The converted area can be cleared at once by pressing the (cancel)

button.

To actually enter the change, press the [OK] button or enter the

next character. To enter the hiragana character itself (without

converting it), press the (delete) button.

DATA CONTROL

Cursor

A “name is not available” message may appear when you press the [OK] button to

ﬁnish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and you

should enter another name.

The following names cannot be used. (“xx” indicates numbers.)

MDR_xx.EVT ELS_SONG.NAM MDR_xxx.TMP TMP

MDR_xx.MID MDR_xxx.MID REG_xxx.TMP TMP.E02

MDR_xx.Bxx REG_xxx.B00 ELS_SONG.TMP

MDR_xx.Vxx SONG_xxx SONG_xxx.C02

SONG.NAM

NOTE

Songs are ordered in the

following sequence: symbol,

number, alphabet, hiragana,

kanji, other symbols. Names

with an asterisk (*) at the top

are exceptions to this rule.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

123

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

You can also record Registrations by themselves, without recording a performance.

Bulk data, including Registration Memory and Registration Shift settings, Rhythm

Patterns (User rhythms) Rhythm Sequence data, and User Voices, are also saved in the

operation.

First create your original settings you want to save then select

the destination (blank song).

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the

Regist (Registration) Edit display.

Press the [SAVE] button in the display.

A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved.

After the message disappears, exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit display by

pressing the [CLOSE] button and return to the SONG SELECT Page. The

song to which the Registration is recorded is automatically named “SONG

XXX” (XXX indicates song number).

Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)

13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.

Registrations 1 – 16 stored to

the numbered buttons are

saved together as a bank.

Save

Registrations

new song

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

124

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song

When you want to use more than 16 Registration numbers, you can save additional

Registration banks to a single song, with the following procedure.

First create the original settings you want to save, then select the

destination song.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the

Regist (Registration) Edit display.

The Registration data which has previously been saved to the song is shown.

Press the lowest blank (empty) Registration button.

Press the [SAVE] button.

The Registration data will be added. When you play back this song, the top

Registration bank in this display will be loaded to the DDK-7. You can also

change the order of the Registration bank. See page 125.

13 14 15 16

1234

5678 910 1211

13 14 15 16

1234

5678 910 1211

13 14 15 16

1234

5678 910 1211

REG:01 Registration

REG:02

Registration to be added

REG:50

Registration to be added

Add

Reference Pages

Next Regist. (page 98)

Programming a Registration

Sequence (page 195)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

125

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Replacing Registrations

The M.D.R. also lets you change the Registrations of an existing song without

changing the performance data. In advance, you need to create the original Registration

that will replace the old one.

Select the song for which you wish to replace the Registrations.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the

Regist (Registration) Edit display.

The Registration bank which has been saved to the song is shown.

Select the Registration data you wish to replace.

Press the [SAVE] button.

A message appears, prompting conﬁrmation of overwriting the Registration

bank. Select [OVERWRITE] to overwrite (replace), or select [CANCEL] to

abort the operation.

Next Regist (Registration) Settings (Changing the order

of the Registration data)

When playing back a song which uses more than 16 Registration numbers, you can use

two or more Registration banks saved in a single song and recall them one by one as

you play the song. This function is called Next Regist (Registration).

If you want to use the Next Regist (Registration) function, you’ll have to make one of

the following settings in advance:

•Set the Registration Shift mode to User, and select Next Regist (Registration) as

the Shift End, in advance. See page 95 for the details.

• Enter the Next Regist (Registration) data in the Registration Sequence. See

page 196 for the details.

Save the desired Registrations to a song.

For instructions on saving two or more Registration banks to a song, see page 124.

Select the song containing the Registrations for which you want

to change the order.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

NOTE

If the next Registration data

contains User voices, the

DDK-7 may produce no

sound for a few seconds

while the Registration is

being loaded.

REG_001

M16 M1 M16

REG_002

NOTE

If the Next Regist

(Registration) function is

used while the rhythm is

being played back, the

sequence data and User

rhythm will not change.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

126

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG Page to call up the

Regist (Registration) Edit display.

Change the Registration order, in the order you want to recall.

First select the speciﬁc Registration bank you want to edit, then move, copy or

delete the selected data as needed to change the order.

1 Registration Data List

From this list, select the Registration you want to move, copy or delete. The selected

Registration is highlighted in orange. When more than ﬁve Registration banks are

saved in the song, a scroll button is available for scrolling through the

Registration Data List.

2 MOVE

Moves the selected Registration bank up or down.

3 DATA TO BE LOADED

When loading the Registration bank to the panel, select the desired data you want to

load. For more information, see page 128.

4 LOAD

Loads the selected Registration bank to the panel/keyboards. After loading, press one of

the Registration Memory button and play the keyboard to check the Registration.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

127

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

5 SAVE

Saves the current panel settings as a Registration bank in the song. The currently

selected Registration in the Registration Data List (

1) will become the destination

location.

6 COPY

Copies the currently selected Registration to the lowest blank location in the

Registration Data List.

7 DELETE

Deletes the currently selected Registration bank in the Registration Data List.

Exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit display by pressing the

[CLOSE] button at the top right of the display.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

128

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers can be easily loaded back to

the DDK-7 by the following procedure. The M.D.R. independently recalls the

following ﬁve types of data:

• REGIST

• USER VOICE

• K.B.P.

• USER RHYTHM

• SEQUENCE

You can select and recall the desired data independently.

Insert the appropriate media and select the song you want to

load back to the DDK-7.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Regist

(Registration) Edit display.

Select the Registration you want to load to the DDK-7.

Using the ﬁve “DATA TO BE LOADED” buttons, select the desired

data you want to load.

Recalling Recorded Registrations

NOTE

When you load the

Registration data by using

the Next Regist function, all

data will be loaded no matter

which buttons you select

here.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

129

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Press the [LOAD] button.

A message appears, prompting conﬁrmation of the operation. Press the [LOAD]

button to load the Registration data.

Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation.

Exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit display by pressing the

[CLOSE] button at the top right of the display.

NOTE

If you load a Registration

while a rhythm is playing,

sequence data and User

rhythms in the Registration

data cannot be loaded.

When you select the protected song, the buttons (DATA TO BE LOADED) may

be unavailable (grayed out). For example, combining a part of one protected song

with another protected song is not allowed.

About Protected Songs

If you buy or download the song data, it may be protected so that you cannot delete

or copy, in order to prevent accidental erasure or protect copyright. This is

“Protected Song.” Protected songs can be saved to a Yamaha-conﬁrmed USB ﬂash

memory device with ID.

The protected song can be played back as well as the song you created, but it cannot

be converted to XG format, or EL format. It is not possible to edit the Registration

data in the protected song, nor to overwrite the performance data. If you want to

edit the protected song, ﬁrst copy it within one media/folder, then edit the copy.

(You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copy song (called “protected edit

song”) is available only when the original song (called “protected original song”)

exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the protected original song.

To move the protected song in a USB ﬂash memory with a computer, you’ll

need to use the Musicsoft Downloader application. If you move the song

without Musicsoft Downloader, the song cannot be played back. Musicsoft

Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address: http://

download.yamaha.com/

Folder

Protected

Original

Song

Protected

Edit Song

Copy

You cannot edit this song

You can edit this song, only when this is in the

folder that contains protected original song.

When you want to edit a

protected song, ﬁrst

initialize the Registration

Memory, then select the

desired song. If you have

not initialized the

Registration ﬁrst, the

edited song may not be

saved.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

130

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

The M.D.R. enables you to play back commercially available XG-compatible song data

and MIDI data created with a computer as well as songs recorded on the DDK-7 itself.

Select the song to be played back.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to load the

Registration data.

An hourglass icon appears, indicating the Registration data is loading. If the

song contains more than two Registration banks, the ﬁrst one will be loaded.

You can check the Registration order in the Regist (Registration) Edit display.

If the song contains no performance data, after loading the Registration data, the

LCD returns to the SONG Page.

Playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data

(the elapsed time is shown).

In general, all parts recorded to the song are played back; however, you can mute

speciﬁc parts and playback only selected parts. For more information, see

page 131.

When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback automatically

stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of the song by pressing the

[

] (Stop) button in the display.

Playing Back a Song

NOTE

When you play Electone

data, the resulting song

balance will vary according

to the speakers you are

using.

NOTE

The functions intended for

control with the Knee Lever

on the Electone must be

assigned to the Foot Pedal.

Reference Page

Next Regist Settings

(Changing the order of the

Registration data)

(page 125)

Reference Page

About the [SETTINGS] button

(page 114)

Custom Play

If you want to play back the song without resetting the Registrations, press the

[CUSTOM PLAY] button instead of the [F] (Play) button. This displays the

song time and starts playback immediately.

When you play the song using the Next Regist function, always press the [F]

(Play) button to start the song, not the [CUSTOM PLAY] button.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

131

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Playing Back the Selected Part(s)

You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts

are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part,

such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts.

To play back the selected part(s):

During playback or in the Settings display, press each part button to turn the part you

want to playback to “PLAY” and the part you want to mute to “OFF.” Each pressing of

a part button switches the status between PLAY and OFF. Pressing the [PART SAVE]

button saves each part’s playback status.

To play back the selected part(s) of XG-compatible song data:

Press the Part [XG] button while XG-compatible song data is being played back. The

following XG Part Setup display appears.

Press the appropriate channel buttons (e.g., the [CH1] button) to set each channel to

playback or mute. Each pressing of a button switches the status: PLAY and OFF. Set a

part to [PLAY] if you want to play it back and [OFF] if you do not.

The [ALL] button enables you to switch all channels to PLAY/OFF at once.

To set each channel’s volume use the sliders. Each channel’s volume can be adjusted

between 0 and 100.

The [ALL] slider adjusts the overall volume.

Reference Page

Setting a Song (page 114)

Reference Page

Converting to XG

(page 140)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

132

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause

Fast Forward and Rewind:

During playback, press the [H] (Fast forward) button or [G] (Rewind) button and

hold it down until the time reaches the desired position. Even when the button is

released, playback is paused. To resume playback from the point you’ve advanced or

reversed to, press the [F] (Play) button or [CUSTOM PLAY] button.

Pause:

If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the [K] (Pause)

button.

To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused, press the [F]

(Play) or [CUSTOM PLAY] button.

Changing the Tempo

You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing in the M.D.R. display,

either while the song is stopped or while it is playing.

To Change the Tempo:

Use the TEMPO buttons in the display to change the tempo. (The

TEMPO buttons on the panel cannot be used to change the tempo for the Music Data

Recorder.) The range is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100% and values

less than 100% indicate slower tempo; values greater than 100% indicate faster tempo.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

133

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

To reset the changed tempo:

Use the TEMPO [RESET] button in the display to reset the tempo to its original value

(100%).

Repeat Playback

This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a folder or only one

speciﬁc song.

Select the song you wish to play back.

If you wish to play back all songs on a folder, select the ﬁrst song that will be

played back. For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press the [SONG] button at the top right of the display to call up

the SONG Page.

Press the button on the panel to call up the Settings

display.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

134

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Press the REPEAT button to select the repeat mode.

Each press of the button switches the mode

SINGLE

Repeats the currently selected song again and again.

ALL

Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder in order.

RANDOM

Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder randomly.

OFF

Cancels repeat playback.

Exit from the Settings display by pressing the button at

the top right of the display.

Press the [F] (Play) button in the SONG Page to begin

playback.

REPEAT button

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

135

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

The M.D.R. display can display a music notation (score) of the performance data

recorded to media. You can change the size and the number of staffs to be displayed.

While a song is being played back, the cursor moves according to the performance and

the pages are automatically turned.

Select the song containing performance data.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press the [SCORE] button in the display.

The currently selected song score will be displayed.

Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to start playing back

the song.

As the song plays back, the cursor moves accordingly and the page is

automatically turned at the appropriate point.

In this condition, pressing the [I] (Record) button in the display lets you

record a song and have the score displayed for you.

The score size can be adjusted by pressing the [SIZE CHANGE] button in the

display. Each press of the [SIZE CHANGE] button alternates the score size in

the following sequence: normal, large, extra large, small, normal, and so on.

Please note that the size cannot be changed while a song is being recorded.

You can manually turn the page, by stopping playing back a song

using the [J] (Stop) or [K] (Pause) button, and then pressing

the PAGE [E] or [F] buttons in the display.

Pressing these buttons moves to the previous or next page. The PAGE [F]

button can be assigned to the left foot switch (page 136).

To exit the score, press the [SCORE OFF] button in the display.

Displaying the Score

NOTE

Scores for protected songs

cannot be displayed,

excepting those songs that

speciﬁcally allow score

display.

NOTE

The score size setting

cannot be stored to a

Registration Memory.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

136

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Changing the score contents and settings

The Score Settings display lets you choose the contents to be displayed. In this display,

you can also assign the Next Page function to the left foot switch:

Display the score.

Press the [SET UP] button in the display to call up the Score

Settings display.

Change the score settings.

To set whether a speciﬁc part is displayed or not in the score, press the

appropriate [ON] or [OFF] buttons of each part. Please note that at least one of

the upper keyboard, lower keyboard or pedalboard will be set to [ON].

Available settings for notes and how they will be displayed (NOTE) include [A,

B, C] (conventional C-D-E indications), [FIXED DO] (solfeggio), [MOVABLE

DO] (relative solfeggio) and [OFF].

For the CH SETTINGS, the upper keyboard, lower keyboard and pedalboard

can be assigned to the channels with the [▲] or [▼] button. You can also use the

Data Control dial to select channels after pressing the [▲] or [▼] button.

Selecting [AUTO] automatically assigns parts to the channels according to the

song data.

To set the QUANTIZE value use the [▲] or [▼] button. You can also use the

Data Control dial to select channels after pressing the [▲] or [▼] button. The

shorter the note value is selected, the more precisely the score is displayed.

Setting the NEXT PAGE L. Foot SW [ON] lets you turn the score to the next

page with the left foot switch. You can also turn the score to the next page with

the PAGE [F] button in the display. If rhythm, glide and/or rotary speaker

are assigned to the left foot switch and set on, both the assigned functions and

the Next Page function work.

Exit from the Score Settings display by pressing the [CLOSE]

button at the top right of the display.

NOTE

Please note that the score

settings cannot be changed

while the song is being

recorded. The [SET UP]

button is disabled during

recording.

NOTE

Setting the NOTE to

[MOVABLE DO] displays

each key note as “Do.”

NOTE

The score display settings

cannot be stored to a

Registration Memory. Only

the left foot switch setting

can be stored to USB ﬂash

memory as Registration

data common to all

Registration Memory

numbers.

Reference Page

About Quantize (page 168)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

137

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

The TOOLS Page in the M.D.R. display has many functions, such as song copy, song

delete, etc.

Song Copy

This function lets you copy a folder/song. You can copy and exchange the data even

between two different media. (Songs created with the EL-series Electone, such as EL-

900, one by one copy can not be executed.) Make sure to check the remaining memory

of the destination media in advance.

To copy a song:

Insert the media that contains a folder/song to be copied and the destination media.

• To copy within one media

Insert the media that contains a song to be copied.

• To copy a song from USB ﬂash memory to another

Insert both the USB ﬂash memory that contains a song to be copied and the

destination USB ﬂash memory. When there are not enough terminals available, use a

self powered USB hub.

Select the song to be copied.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up

the TOOLS Page.

Other Functions (Tools)

NOTE

In the following cases, it

may not be able to copy

even if the number of folder/

XG song has not yet

reached to the maximum

number. Destination root is

selected and song name/

path are too long.

NOTE

If the folder already contains

120 XG songs the songs

can not be copied, or if the

folder already contains 120

folders the folder can not be

copied.

NOTE

Copy operation is

automatically stopped if

there is containing

unrecognizable ﬁle in MDR.

Moving a Protected Song

A protected song can be copied within a folder, but it cannot be copied to another

folder or media. If you specify another folder or media as the copy destination, a

message appears prompting moving of the song — not copying. When the

[MOVE] button is pressed, the protected original song and all protected edit songs

which come from the same protected original song will be moved together. This

effectively “moves” a protected song, but does not “copy” it. If copy the folder which

contains both non-protected songs and protected songs, the copy operation will be

automatically executed for only non-protected songs, and protected song will be

moved (no copy).

NOTE

If you copy a protected song

to the same folder as the

source song, the copied

song will be the protected

edit song.

To avoid losing your

important data in Media.

Firmly connect the media

to the USB TO DEVICE

terminal.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

138

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Press the [COPY] button in the display to call up the Copy To

display.

(If necessary) Change the destination.

For details on changing the destination, see page 113.

Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the copy.

The folder/song name in the destination is the same as the one of the source

song. If you copy a folder/song to a folder that contains a song whose name is

the same as the source song, the copied name will be “source song name_XXX”

(XXX indicates song number). If you want to change the folder/song name, see

page 120.

If you copy an XG-compatible song to another folder or media that contains a

song with the same name as the source song, a message appears prompting

conﬁrmation of overwriting the song. Selecting [OVERWRITE] overwrites the

XG-compatible song in the destination.

Never attempt to eject the

media or turn the power

off during copying (or

moving a protected song).

Data may be lost.

NOTE

While the copy operation is

in progress, the

approximate time of copying

appears on the display;

keep in mind that the actual

time need may differ.

NOTE

If the media copy is

executed, the folder name

“#MEDIA” will be created in

the destination folder.

NOTE

If the message “The source

folder hierarchy is too deep”

is displayed, copy each

folder in the folder, one by

one manually.

If the “Path name is too

long” message is displayed,

change the hierarchy or

rename the folder name

shortly.

NOTE

The copy operation will

automatically be stopped if

an unrecognizable ﬁle is

detected in the folder.

How to cancel the folder-copy operation

If you want to cancel the folder-copy operation while the copy operation is in

progress, press the [CANCEL] button.However, the operation may take a long time

since the stop operation will be executed only after all ﬁles in current folder are

copied.If you cancel the operation, make sure to check which ﬁles have been

properly copied and which have not.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

139

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Song Delete

You can delete the data of one song. You can specify for deletion only Registration data,

only the performance data, or both of them (entire song). Also, only the songs created

on the DDK-7 and XG-compatible songs can be deleted. Songs created on the EL

series instruments such as the EL-900 cannot be deleted.

Select the song to be deleted.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up

the TOOLS Page.

Press the [DELETE] button in the display.

A message appears, prompting conﬁrmation of the operation. Conﬁrm that the

song to be deleted is shown in the display. If you want to change the song, press

the [CANCEL] button and select the desired song.

Press the button of the speciﬁc data you want to delete

(“DELETE ALL,” “ALL,” “DELETE REGIST” or “DELETE

PERFORMANCE”). The selected data will be deleted.

• DELETE ALL: Deletes the entire song.

• DELETE REGIST: Deletes only Registration data in the song.

• DELETE PERFORMANCE: Deletes only performance data in the song.

Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation.

When deleting folders, songs with only registration, songs with only

performance data, protected songs or XG-compatible songs:

Select [DELETE] to actually delete the data, or select [CANCEL] to abort the

operation.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

140

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Converting to XG

This function allows you to convert the DDK-7 song data to XG format data. You can

playback the data using XG devices. The converted XG song data may sound

differently from the original data.

Conﬁrm that the media should contain enough amount of available memory before

the conversion. The protected songs cannot be converted to XG format.

Selects a song to be converted to XG.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up

the TOOLS Page.

Press the [CONVERT] button.

A message “Which do you want to select?” appears.

Press the [CONVERT TO XG] button.

The following display appears.

(If necessary) Changes the destination to save the converted

song.

For details on changing the destination, see page 113.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A message appears indicating that the converted data is being checked and the

M.D.R. starts playback of the selected song. When playback is ﬁnished, the

display returns to the previous display.

NOTE

Playing the keyboard or

pressing the panel controls

during the conﬁrmation of

the conversion will be

recorded to the converted

XG-compatible song.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

141

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Converting to EL format

You can convert songs created on the DDK-7 to EL-series format, and save them to a

floppy disk. The converted data can be used with EL-series Electones, such as the EL-

900. This function is not available for protected songs.

You’ll need to install the optional floppy disk drive such as UD-FD01.

Select the song to be converted to EL-series format.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT] button.

A “Which do you want to select?” message appears.

Press the [CONVERT TO EL] button.

If the source song contains two or more Registration banks, you’ll need to make

ready the same number of destination songs to save the converted data.

Insert the floppy disk, then press the [EXECUTE] button in the

display.

If the remaining memory of the floppy disk is insufficient, conversion cannot be

executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.)

Reference Page

About Protected Songs

(page 129)

NOTE

Assign/Setup data of

Keyboard Percussion, User

Voices and User Rhythms

cannot be converted to EL

format.

NOTE

If the source song’s name

contains full size characters

or Japanese characters,

these characters will be

shown as question marks

(such as “????”).

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

142

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Converting from EL format

You can convert the songs in the ﬂoppy disk created with an EL-series Electone, such as

the EL-900, to the DDK-7 format, and save it to a USB ﬂash memory conﬁrmed by

Yamaha. You’ll need to install the optional ﬂoppy disk drive such as UD-FD01.

Depending on the original song, the sound or tempo of the converted song may differ

from the original song, or the Next Song function of the original song may not be

effective.

Insert the ﬂoppy disk that contains the song you want to convert

from EL format, then select the source song.

For details on selecting a song, see page 113.

In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT] button.

A message appears conﬁrming if you want to convert from the EL format to the

DDK-7 format.

Press the [CONVERT FROM EL] button in the display, then

specify the destination for the converted song.

To use the converted song on the DDK-7, the destination must be USB ﬂash

memory.

Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to start conversion.

If the remaining memory of the USB ﬂash memory is insufﬁcient, conversion

cannot be executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.)

NOTE

When you convert the

protected EL data to DDK-7

format, set the write-protect

tab of the EL disk to the

“overwrite” position (tab

closed).

NOTE

When converting a

protected EL song to the

DDK-7 format, make sure to

use a Yamaha-conﬁrmed

USB ﬂash memory device

with ID.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

143

Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.)

Checking the Remaining Memory/media ID

In the TOOLS Page, press the [INFORMATION] button. If a USB storage device is

selected, the remaining memory in the media is shown, as well as whether or not the

media has an ID. If a song is selected, the song data capacity, title, composer, etc. are

shown.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

144

Voice Edit

This DDK-7 has a Voice Edit feature that allows you to create your own Voices.

We suggest that you read through the Voice Structure below at ﬁrst to get a ﬁrmer

understanding of the Voices. Then go through the editing steps, reading Editing a Voice on

page 147 for editing of an AWM Voice.

The internal structure of the Voices of this DDK-7 is explained below.

AWM Voice structure

AWM Voices consist of up to four recorded samples of a real instrument.

Each waveform, referred to as an “Element,” can be edited, by changing the level

(volume), ﬁlter settings, and so on. A single Voice contains four boxes (AWM1 –

AWM4) in which the Elements are put. If a Voice consists of less than three Elements,

some boxes are empty. For example, Strings 1 consists of two Elements (as shown).

You can add Elements from other Voices – Brass, for example – if a box (AWM3 and/or

AWM4) is empty. This allows you to create your own original ensemble sounds. In the

Voice Edit function, you can edit not only each Element, but also assemble some

Elements from other Voices.

Contents

1 Voice Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

• AWM Voice structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

2 Editing a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

• Selecting a Voice for editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

• Editing an AWM Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

3Saving the edited Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

4 Quitting Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

5 Recalling an Edited Voice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Voice Structure

Element 1 Element 2

Strings 1

AWM1 AWM2 AWM3 AWM4

Voice Edit

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

145

Selecting a Voice for editing

Select the Voice you want to edit from the Voice Menu.

For example, if you want to edit Accordion 1, select [Accordion 1] in the Voice

Menu in any Voice section.

Mute all other Voice sections except for the targeted Voice section.

Press the [PROGRAM] button to call up the PROGRAM Display.

Select the desired voice section at the left half of this display.

Editing a Voice

Voice Edit

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

146

After you have selected the Voice section, the AWM Page (ﬁrst page of the Voice

Edit display) will appear.

Voice Edit

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

147

Editing an AWM Voice

You can edit an AWM Voice on the AWM Page and LAYER Page in the Voice Edit

display. In the AWM Page, the tonal balance of the entire Voice can be corrected by

some EQ parameters. In the LAYER Page, you can make detailed edits to each

Element.

1 Element On/Off switches

The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected

Voice. You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button.

Pressing the button again cancels the mute.

2 VOICE/ELEMENT

Indicates the Voice/Element currently being edited. For example, the screen above

shows that Element 1 of Accordion 1 is assigned to AWM1, the Element 2 of

Accordion 1 is assigned to AWM2 and no Voice is assigned to AWM3 and AWM4. You

can also call up another Element from another Voice and replace the currently selected

Element with it. Pressing the VOICE or ELEMENT button in the display calls up the

Voice or Element menu, from which you can select the desired Voice/Element (usually

Element 1). If you change Voice, the Element will automatically change to the ﬁrst

Element of the Voice (usually Element 1).

3 EQ LOW FREQ./EQ LOW GAIN

Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the low frequency band. The EQ LOW FREQ.

slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz. The EQ LOW

GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (speciﬁed by the EQ LOW FREQ.

slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB.

4 EQ HIGH FREQ./EQ HIGH GAIN

Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the high frequency band. The EQ HIGH FREQ.

slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 500 Hz – 16.0 kHz. The EQ

HIGH GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (speciﬁed by the EQ HIGH

FREQ. slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB.

233

AWM Page

Voice Edit

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

148

1 Element select buttons

Select the Element you wish to edit.

2 Element On/Off switches

The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected

Voice. You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button.

Pressing the button again cancels the mute. Muting all other Elements except for the

one you are editing lets you clearly hear that single Element for ease in editing. Note

that when some Elements are muted, playing the keyboard in certain key areas or with

certain velocities may result in no sound.

3 Display switch buttons

The LAYER Page contains three pages. The buttons are used to switch among

them.

EQ (Equalizer)

Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to

match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency

bands, then by raising or lowering the level for each band, the correction is made.

This DDK-7 has a two-band (high and low) digital equalizer that lets you adjust the

overall sound according to the type of music you play — classical music being more

reﬁned and soft, pop music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic.

LAYER Page

Voice Edit

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

149

1 LEVEL

Determines the output level of the Element.

Range: 0 – 127

2 NOTE LIMIT

Determines the lowest and highest notes in the range for which the Element sounds.

The setting of the HIGH slider cannot be set lower than that of the LOW slider. Some

Elements are not affected by this parameter.

Range: C-2 – G8

3 PAN

Determines the position of the Element in the stereo image.

Range: L64 – R63

1 NOTE SHIFT

Determines the pitch settings in semitones.

Range: -64 – +63

2 TUNE FINE

Determines the ﬁne tuning.

Range: -64 – +63

LAYER Page 1

2 31

These buttons

switch the

display.

LAYER Page 2

345 612

Voice Edit

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

150

3 ATTACK RATE

Determines how quickly the Element will reach its maximum level after the key is

played. Higher values produce a faster attack.

Range: 0 – 127

4 RELEASE RATE

Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the key is released.

Higher values make the time shorter.

Range: 1 – 127

5 CUTOFF FREQ.

Determines the cutoff frequency of the ﬁlter.

Range: 9600 – 24000 cent

6 RESONANCE

Determines the amount of resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the

cutoff frequency. Some Elements are not affected by this parameter.

Range: 16 – 140

Filter — Cutoff frequency and Resonance

Filter modiﬁes the tone by cutting the output of a speciﬁc frequency portion of the

sound. This DDK-7 is equipped with a low pass ﬁlter, which passes only those

signals below the cutoff frequency and cuts signals above the cutoff frequency.

You can produce a relatively bright or darker sound by setting the cutoff frequency.

Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the signal in the area of the cutoff

frequency. By emphasizing the overtones in this area, this can produce a distinctive

“peaky” tone.

Level

Cutoff Frequency

Frequency

Resonance

These frequencies are passed by the ﬁlter.

Voice Edit

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

151

1 LFO WAVE

Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound. For details, see page 152.

2 LFO SPEED

Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. Higher values make the speed faster.

Range: 2 – 93

3 LFO PMD (Pitch Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the pitch of the sound.

Higher values result in a greater amount of pitch change. For the minimum setting, the

pitch does not change.

Range: 0 – 400

4 LFO FMD (Frequency Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the ﬁlter cutoff frequency.

Higher values result in a greater amount of frequency change. For the minimum

setting, the frequency does not change.

Range: 0 – 4800 cent

5 LFO AMD (Amplitude Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the amplitude of the

sound. Higher values result in a greater amount of amplitude change. For the

minimum setting, the amplitude does not change.

Range: 0 – 128

When playing a User Voice you have created using the LFO parameters (above), set the

Vibrato setting in the Voice Condition display to “Preset,” not “User.” If Vibrato is set

to “User” and the Vibrato parameters (depth and/or speed) are set fairly high, you may

not be able to hear the effect of the LFO.

LAYER Page 3

34512

Reference Page

Vibrato (page 44)

Voice Edit

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

152

Edited AWM Voices can be saved as User Voices (up to sixteen).

Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up

the SAVE Page.

Select the User Voice number you wish to save to.

The message appears to prompt conﬁrmation of the operation. (Saving a new

Voice automatically erases the Voice previously stored to the selected User

number.)

(If necessary) Press the [RENAME] button to give a name to your

original Voice.

The method for editing the name is the same as the one for the song name in the

M.D.R. section. (See page 120 for more information.) Up to sixteen characters

can be entered.

Press the [SAVE] button to save the Voice, or press [CANCEL] to

abort the operation.

LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)

As its name suggests, the LFO creates waveforms of a low frequency.

These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch, ﬁlter or amplitude to create effects

such as vibrato, wah and tremolo.

The following ﬁve waveforms are available.

Saving the edited Voice

tri

squ

rnd sine

saw

Voice Edit

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

153

After saving the Voice, be sure to quit the Voice Edit function (page 153) before

turning the power off. Turning off the DDK-7 without quitting Voice Edit erases the

User Voice you have edited.

You can quit the Voice Edit function from any of its display pages.

Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel.

If your original Voice has already been saved, the Voice Edit function quits

automatically. If the edited Voice has not been saved, a message appears

prompting conﬁrmation of the operation.

Select [EXIT] to quit the Voice Edit function, or [CANCEL] to abort

the operation and return to the previous display.

Once your original AWM Voice has been saved, it can be selected from the User menu

in each Voice section. Refer to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons”

(page 27).

This operation automatically erases any Voice that had been previously

saved to the selected User Voice number. Be careful not to erase any

important data. Always save your important data in advance to a USB ﬂash

memory or other external media using the M.D.R. function.

Quitting Voice Edit

When quitting Voice Edit, the square at the top left of the display turns light

blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice you have created is

currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Voice is being

saved.

Recalling an Edited Voice

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

154

Rhythm Program

The DDK-7 includes powerful rhythm programming functions: Rhythm Pattern Program and

Rhythm Sequence Program. Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to record your own original

rhythms and save them as user rhythms. Rhythm Sequence Program lets you connect the

existing rhythms or your original rhythms to create complete rhythm tracks, which you can

automatically play back during your performance. Moreover, Rhythm Sequence Program

includes an automatic Registration Shift feature — called Registration Sequence.

Contents

1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation . 154

2Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

• Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . 155

• Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern . . . . . . . . . . 158

• Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern

– Step Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

• Editing Entered Percussion Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

• Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern

– Real Time Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

• Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

• Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts. . . 173

• Adjusting Volume and Panning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

• Effect Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

• Detailed settings for each percussion instrument . 178

• Saving Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

• Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . 181

• Recalling User Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

• Selecting Rhythm from an External Media . . . . . . . 182

• Percussion Kit List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

3Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

• Selecting a Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

• Programming a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

• Auditioning a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

• Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence . . . . . . . . . . 193

• Programming a Registration Sequence . . . . . . . . . 195

• Editing an Existing Registration Sequence. . . . . . . 196

• Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . 197

• Playing Rhythm Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

• Playing All Sequences in Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

• Copying a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

4Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence

Data to External Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation

Entering percussion sounds and/or editing them

Creating the backing (Rhythmic Chord) patterns and/or editing them

Effect settings and detailed settings for each percussion Voice (Panning, Tuning, and so on)

Saving your rhythm patterns as User rhythms

Selecting the destination of the sequence

Entering a rhythm pattern one by one

Programming the Registration Sequence

Rhythm Pattern Program (pages 155 – 180)

You can create your original rhythm patterns by entering percussion sounds or editing preset

rhythm patterns.

Rhythm Sequence Program (pages 190 – 197)

You can connect any of the rhythms together to make complete rhythm compositions. Moreover,

you can also program Registration Shift events at any point in the composition so that the

Registration Memory settings automatically change as the rhythm sequence plays back.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

155

Rhythm Program

Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use any of the different instrument sounds (drum

and percussion) assigned to each key on the Upper and Lower keyboards in creating

your own rhythms. Up to 48 of your original rhythms can be saved as User Rhythms.

Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program

There are two ways to program a User pattern: copying a preset rhythm that is similar

to the rhythm you want to create, and creating your own rhythm from scratch.

To copy a preset rhythm:

Copying a preset rhythm lets you make changes to an existing rhythm, saving you time

if you want to program a rhythm that is similar to an existing preset pattern.

To create your own rhythm from scratch:

Load a blank pattern to the Rhythm Pattern Program, then create a completely new

rhythm.

To copy a preset rhythm, select the rhythm you want to copy from

the Rhythm Menu.

Press the [PROGRAM] button to call up the Program Display.

Rhythm Pattern Program

NOTE

Pressing the [PROGRAM]

button while the rhythm is

running automatically stops

the rhythm.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

156

Rhythm Program

To copy a preset rhythm, press the [RHYTHM] button. To create

your own rhythm from scratch, press the [NEW RHYTHM] button.

To copy a preset rhythm To create your own rhythm

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

157

Rhythm Program

A Rhythm consists of 15 sections: Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Ending 1 – 3, and Break.

In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can enter or edit percussion notes one by one, or assemble each part from

other different rhythms to create your own new User Rhythm.

Case 1: Creating your own rhythm by changing a preset rhythm

Case 2: Creating your own rhythm by assembling parts from other different

rhythms

Case 3: Creating your own rhythm from scratch

Intro 1

Main A

Fill In A

Ending 1

Break

Intro 1'

Main A

Fill In A

Ending 1

Break

Preset Rhythm User Rhythm

Changing Intro 1

to Intro 1'

Save as

a User Rhythm

All Rhythm sections, including any which have not

been edited, are saved as one User Rhythm.

Intro 1

Main A

Fill In A

Ending 1

Break

Intro 1

Main A

Fill In A

Ending 1

Break'

Preset Rhythm

Intro 1'

Main A'

Fill In A'

Ending 1'

Break'

Preset Rhythm

Save as

a User Rhythm

User Rhythm

Assemble some

sections or parts

Intro 1

Main A

Fill In A

Ending 1

Break

Intro 1

Main A

Fill In A

Ending 1

Break

Blank Rhythm User Rhythm

Entering percussion

sounds into

each section

Save as

a User Rhythm

These are blank sections (no percussion sounds);

if you press ENDING [2] or [3] button, no sound is played.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

158

Rhythm Program

Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern

In the SETTING Page of the display, set the conditions of the rhythm, such as time

signature, measure length, and so on. You can also customize the part settings in this

SETTING Page — deleting any part or copying a part from another rhythm to the

currently selected rhythm.

Press the [SETTING] button in the display to call up the SETTING

Page.

Determines the time signature used for the rhythm.

You can select the time signature with the BEAT buttons.

If you start the Rhythm Pattern Program from a preset rhythm, pressing a BEAT

button that is not the same as the currently selected rhythm calls up the

following message.

Selecting [CLEAR] deletes all data in the rhythm and changes the time

signature.

Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

159

Rhythm Program

Select a section to which you want to enter or edit the rhythm

pattern.

Pressing the SECTION button on the display calls up the Section Select pop-up

menu. After selecting the desired section, the pop-up menu automatically closes.

You can play the selected section by pressing the Rhythm [START] button on

the panel. You can also change the section while the rhythm is playing. For

details on muting the accompaniment part, refer to page 174.

Sets the measure length of the rhythm pattern.

Pressing the MEASURE button on the display calls up the Measure Select pop-

up menu. Select the desired measure in the pop-up menu. If you select Break or

Fill In as the section, the measure cannot be changed.

(If necessary) Set the Metronome, Part Assemble, and Part Clear

parameters.

1 METRONOME

Turns the metronome click on or off. When set to ON, the metronome sounds on each

beat of the measure (for example, three times per measure in 3/4 time) to serve as a

rhythmic guide when programming patterns. Set to On here with Real Time Write.

Reference Pages

Step Write and Real Time

Write (page 161)

Entering Percussion Sounds

to a Rhythm Pattern – Real

Time Write (page 169)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

160

Rhythm Program

2 ASSEMBLE

Copies the part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm. You can

assemble various sections from multiple rhythms to create your original rhythm.

Pressing the [ASSEMBLE] button calls up the following display.

Select the copy source: Rhythm, Section and Part. Then select the destination. You can

copy only one part, or all parts of a rhythm.

After setting the source and destination, press [EXECUTE]. Copy is executed and

returning to the previous display.

You can also select a rhythm pattern currently being created as the COPY FROM

RHYTHM.

To create a MAIN B section based on MAIN A, you can conveniently create that

you create the MAIN A rhythm ﬁrst and copy it to MAIN B, then edit the MAIN B

rhythm.

To select the rhythm currently being created, select “Current Rhythm” on the 5th

page of the “USER” category.

Select copy source

(Rhythm, Section,

and Part)

Select the part for

the copy destination

Press here to execute the copy

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

161

Rhythm Program

3 CLEAR PART

Clears a speciﬁc part or parts from the currently selected rhythm. Pressing this button

calls up the following display.

Select the part you want to delete from the displayed parts. You cannot select a part

that contains no data (the button is grayed out). If you select [ALL] here, the

percussion and all accompaniment parts are cleared.

When selecting the desired part, a display prompting conﬁrmation of the operation

appears. Select [CLEAR] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to abort the

operation.

Reference Page

Accompaniment (page 71)

NOTE

If you select BASS here, the

bass phrase in the A.B.C. will

be cleared.

Step Write and Real Time Write

There are two different methods you can use to program rhythms: Step Write and Real

Time Write.

Step Write allows you to enter percussion sounds as individual note values. As a

method, it is very similar to writing down the notes on a sheet of music paper; each note

is entered one at a time, and though you can hear each individual note entered, you

cannot actually hear the pattern playing as you create it. Step Write is good for precision

and for entering percussion sounds whose note placement and rhythmic value has been

determined, such as a bass drum that plays every beat in a measure.

Real Time Write on the other hand, is similar to using a multi-track tape recorder; you

can hear previously recorded parts of the pattern as you record new parts on top. Real

Time Write is best for capturing the “feel” of a rhythm, because it allows you to actually

play the pattern as you are creating it.

Each method has its own advantages and uses. Which method you use depends partly

on the type of rhythm you intend to create and partly on your own personal preference.

You can switch between the two methods in editing to create a single rhythm by the use

of both methods. This would come handy, for example, in programming the basic beats

of a rhythm with Step Write, then using Real Time Write to add percussion accents and

embellishments.

Which mode of the operation is selected depends on the play status of the rhythm. If

the rhythm is stopped, Step Write is automatically selected. If the rhythm is playing,

Real Time Write is selected. See the instructions below for Step Write, and page 169 for

Real Time Write.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

162

Rhythm Program

Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Step Write

You can enter percussion sounds in the INPUT Page of the display. Before entering

percussion sounds, turn off the Upper and Lower keyboard Voices by setting each

Voice’s volume to MIN.

Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the

INPUT Page.

Select the part, MAIN DRUM or ADD DRUM, to which you want to

enter the percussion.

In general, main (or basic) drum/percussion instruments (such as Bass Drum,

Snare Drum, and so on) are entered in Main Drum part and others (such as

Tambourine, Triangle) are entered in Add Drum part.

Select the desired Drum Kit.

You can select a kit from 20 Drum kits and 5 SFX kits. For details on each kit,

see page 183. Pressing the button indicating the currently selected kit calls up

the kit Select the pop-up menu, then select the desired kit from the pop-up

menu. The selected kit is called up on the Upper and Lower keyboards.

You can select only one kit for each part (Main Drum or Add Drum). When you

want to create a rhythm pattern including two different drum kits, select one kit

for Main Drum and another for Add Drum.

NOTE

The volume of the percussion

and accompaniment sound

during use of Rhythm Pattern

Program can be controlled

with the VOLUME button of

the RHYTHM section. When

you quit Rhythm Pattern

Program, the VOLUME of the

RHYTHM section will return

to the previous selected

level.

Drum kit SFX kit

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

163

Rhythm Program

Select the percussion sound you wish to enter by pressing the

key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the

sound.

The selected instrument’s name appears on the display.

Set the appropriate Quantize value.

For details on Quantize, refer to page 168.

Set the Gate Time. (This is optional, and only necessary when

you want to enter a sustaining sound, such as a whistle.)

For a list of instruments that require a Gate Time setting, refer to the Percussion

Kit List on page 183. For details on Gate Time, refer to page 172.

Use the ACCENT buttons to enter the sound to the selected

point. Press each ACCENT button to actually enter the

percussion sounds.

You can change the rhythm clock to which the percussion sound is entered by

pressing the QUANTIZE [E][F] buttons.

1 Rhythm Clock box

Displays the current position in the pattern according to measure, beat, and number of

clicks.

A click is the smallest division of a pattern, and one beat is made up of 480 clicks.

The rhythm clock advances up to the measures set in the SETTING Page and loops

back to the beginning of the rhythm (01:01:000).

Instrument name

Selected key

NOTE

The Quantize setting can be

changed in the middle of

Step Write.

Reference Page

Basic settings for the Rhythm

Pattern (page 158)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

164

Rhythm Program

2 ACCENT buttons

Records the instrument and determines its volume or Accent level. Press one of the

ACCENT buttons you wish to set (“ppp” is softer and “fff ” is louder; “REST” is no

sound). The instrument is automatically inserted at the Accent level to the selected

position in the pattern. Selection of an Accent level automatically advances the rhythm

clock by one step, according to the current Quantize resolution value.

3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls

Each press of the buttons advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of

a single step is determined by the Quantize value.

Repeat steps #4 through #7 above to layer each instrument and

complete your own rhythm.

Editing Entered Percussion Notes

You can change the accent level, position, or gate time of the entered sound, or delete

the entered sound.

To change the accent level of an entered note:

Select the desired note for changing the accent level.

1 NEXT INSTRUMENT

Selects the entered instruments one by one, from left key to right.

2 NOTE [E][F] controls

Selects the previous/next position’s note of the currently selected instrument. In the

above notes for example, you can select notes 1, 3 and 4 one by one. Rests (2 and

5) are ignored.

3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls

Advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is

determined by the Quantize value.

213

123 4 5

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

165

Rhythm Program

Change the accent level by using the ACCENT buttons or Accent

box.

The Accent box allows for ﬁner changes.

1 Accent box

Touch on the box to enable the Accent box.

Turning the Data Control dial changes the accent level over a range of 0 – 127.

The minimum setting results in no sound.

2 ACCENT buttons

Determines the coarse accent level. Eight accent levels (from “ppp” to “fff”) are

available.

Press the desired Accent button to change the currently selected note to the selected

level.

To move an entered note:

Select the note you want to move (as in Step 1 on page 164).

Press the Rhythm Clock box to enable the box.

Turn the Data Control dial to change the position by one clock.

To change the length of an entered note:

The length of sustaining sounds such as Snare Roll and Whistle can be changed by

adjusting the Gate Time. See page 173 for more information.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

166

Rhythm Program

To erase an entered note:

Select the note you want to erase (as in Step 1 on page 164).

Press the [REST] button in the ACCENT section of the display.

The selected note is deleted and replaced with a rest.

You can also erase all notes of a single instrument, or all notes entered.

To erase one instrument:

Select the key to which the instrument that you want to erase is

assigned.

The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed.

Press [CLEAR] in the display.

The following display appears, prompting conﬁrmation of the operation.

Select [CLEAR] to erase the selected instrument.

A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.

The following method can also be used to erase one instrument.

While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the

keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.

A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.

Instrument name

Selected key

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

167

Rhythm Program

To erase all instruments:

Press [CLEAR] in the display.

The following display appears, prompting conﬁrmation of the operation.

Select [CLEAR ALL] to erase all instruments.

All instruments are instantly erased.

When you want to replace the instrument you have already entered with another

instrument, it’s not necessary to delete and re-enter. You can quickly replace the sound

with the following procedure.

To replace the instrument:

Before the operation, stop the rhythm.

Select the key to which the instrument you want to replace is

assigned.

The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed.

Simultaneously hold down the [CHANGE] button in the display

and press the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that

corresponds to the instrument you want to use.

The instrument is instantly erased and replaced with the newly selected one.

Instrument name

Selected key

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

168

Rhythm Program

About Quantize

The Quantize function is a process of rounding off timing or duration values, so

that each note plays with precise timing. You can select nine types of Quantize

value.

With Step Write

It allows you to automatically correct the length (duration) and timing of each note

you enter.

Steps Depending on the Quantize Values

With Real Time Write

It allows you to automatically correct the timing of the notes you play, according to

the speciﬁed Quantize resolution. No correction occurs when you select FREE.

Generally, you should set Quantize to be the same as the shortest note you intend to

play.

1234 5

6789 5

With this button,

change the displayed

Quantize buttons

0 120 240 360 480

(1 beat)

Clock

160

120

240

320

Setting Quantize to FREE (5) results in the ﬁnest, least amount of quantization (1/480 beat).

Original data (you play)

After applying a “ ” quantize value to the original data

Quarter note length

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

169

Rhythm Program

Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern –

Real Time Write

While you listen to the entered rhythm or metronome click, play the Upper/Lower

keyboards to enter the desired percussion sounds.

Select the desired part to which the percussion sounds are

entered, and the desired drum kit, by following Steps 1 – 3 on

page 162.

Set the appropriate Quantize value.

The positions at which the sounds are input will be corrected according to the

predetermined Quantize value in the Real Time Write operation. For details,

refer to page 168.

Press the rhythm [START] button in the panel.

The rhythm (or Metronome) starts playing, enabling the Real Time Write

operation.

While the rhythm is running, play the percussion sounds from

the Upper and/or Lower keyboards.

If you have started the Rhythm Pattern Program by copying a preset rhythm,

you can listen the selected rhythm as you play the sound. If you have started

from scratch, set the Metronome to “on” in the SETTING Page and listen to the

metronome click. The pattern will automatically repeat (or “loop”) for a certain

number of measures as set in the SETTING Page.

Repeat steps #2 through #4 above to layer each instrument and

complete your own rhythm.

Reference Page

Metronome (page 159)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

170

Rhythm Program

You can erase an instrument while rhythm is played.

To erase an instrument/key assignment:

While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the keyboard

corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. All instances of the selected

instrument will be erased from the pattern.

When you want to erase all instruments, or edit entered percussion notes, you need to

stop the rhythm then edit. See page 164, “Editing Entered Percussion Notes.”

Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function)

The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to use one of the DDK-7’s Accompaniment

patterns with your original rhythm. You can select and save the Accompaniment

pattern that best matches the rhythm that you have created. Moreover, Rhythm Pattern

Program features a Rhythmic Chord function that lets you add your own backing

patterns to the rhythms you create.

To select an appropriate Accompaniment pattern for your newly

created rhythm:

Press the [SETTING] button at the top of the display to call up the

SETTING Page.

Press the [ASSEMBLE] button.

A pop-up menu appears, letting you select the copy source and destination part.

Using the COPY FROM [RHYTHM] and [SECTION] buttons, select

the rhythm and the section which has the accompaniment you

wish to use.

Using the COPY FROM [PART] button, select the accompaniment

part you want to copy.

Using the COPY TO [PART] button, select the desired

accompaniment part (CHORD 1 or CHORD 2) to be used for the

Rhythmic Chord pattern.

Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the copy.

The desired accompaniment part (Rhythmic Chord pattern) has been copied.

Reference Page

Basic settings for the Rhythm

Pattern (page 158)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

171

Rhythm Program

To create your own backing patterns with the Rhythmic Chord

function:

The Rhythmic Chord pattern can be entered by the same methods as the rhythm: Step

Write and/or Real Time Write.

Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the

INPUT Page.

Select the part, CHORD 1 or CHORD 2, which you want to create

for the Rhythmic Chord pattern.

If the part you have select contains a preset accompaniment pattern, a message

appears prompting you to conﬁrm whether you want to clear the existing data or

not. To create your own Rhythmic Chord pattern, select [CLEAR].

Select the desired Voice.

Pressing the button showing the Voice name calls up the relevant Voice Menu.

Select the desired Voice category with the instrument icon buttons, then select

the desired Voice from the Voice Menu. The selected Voice is called up for both

the Upper and Lower keyboards.

Voices can also be changed even after entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern.

You can select only one Voice for one part (Chord 1 or Chord 2). When you

want to create a Rhythmic Chord pattern including two different Voices, select

one Voice for Chord 1 and another for Chord 2.

Set the appropriate Quantize value.

For details on the Quantize function, refer to page 168.

NOTE

The Voice menu that appears

here is not the same as the

one for the Voice Sections.

See the Rhythm Program

Voice List on page 186.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

172

Rhythm Program

Set the Gate Time.

You can adjust the Gate Time setting by using GATE TIME buttons

in the display, or Data Control dial.

Enter the Rhythmic Chord pattern.

The methods for entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern are the same as those for

entering the rhythm pattern. Any key you press sounds a C major triad chord

(C, E, and G). For information on Step Write, see page 163; for information on

Real Time Write, see page 169.

You can also edit the entered Rhythmic Chord pattern using the same method as in

“Editing Entered Percussion Notes” (page 164). To change the gate time of the notes of

the Rhythmic Chord pattern, follow the instructions below.

Gate time determines the actual length of time a note sounds. For example, a

quarter note is sometimes played as tenuto (long length) and sometimes played as

staccato (short length).

Since 1 beat is made up of 480 clocks, a quarter note played tenuto may have a gate

time between 450 – 470, and a staccato quarter note may be about 240.

DATA CONTROL

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

173

Rhythm Program

To change the Gate Time:

Select the note for which you want to change the gate time (see

Step 1 on page 164).

Press the Gate Time box to enable the box.

Turn the Data Control dial to change the Gate Time.

Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts

In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can create your original drum patterns using Main

Drum and Add Drum, and original backing patterns using Chord 1 and Chord 2.

Moreover, you can change the Voices for all accompaniment parts, including Pad,

Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.

Voices can be changed in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.

Press the [VOICE/EFFECT] button at the top of the display to call

up the VOICE/EFFECT Page.

Press the [VOICE] button in the display.

The following display will appear.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

174

Rhythm Program

Select the desired part for which you wish to change the Voice.

The Voice menu appears.

Select the desired Voice, and the Voice menu automatically

closes.

After selecting the desired Voice, customize the accompaniment to your personal

preference by adjusting the volume and pan, and setting the desired effects below.

Adjusting Volume and Panning

Volume and Pan are set in VOICE/EFFECT Page.

1 ON/OFF

Determines the on/off status of each accompaniment part. When this is set to OFF, the

part is muted.

2 Volume sliders

Determines the volume of each accompaniment part.

Range: 0 – 127

NOTE

The Voice menu that appears

here is not the same as the

one for the Voice Sections.

See the Rhythm Program

Voice List on page 186.

VOLUME Display

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

175

Rhythm Program

Determines the position of each accompaniment part in the stereo image.

Range: L64 – R63

Effect Settings

You can set Reverb, Chorus, and Variation effects as desired for your original rhythm.

Reverb adds a warm ambience to the sound, simulating the complex reﬂections of

actual performance spaces, such as a concert hall or a small club. Chorus provides a

wide variety of sound transformations and enhancements. Variation includes many

kinds of special effects for changing the sound, both subtly and radically. These effects

are set in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.

Determines the amount of reverb applied to each accompaniment part.

Range: 0 – 127

PAN Display

REVERB Display

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

176

Rhythm Program

1 CHORUS TYPE

Determines the type of the chorus effect. Pressing the CHORUS TYPE button calls up

the chorus type list.

Select the desired chorus type, and the list automatically closes.

2 Chorus sliders

Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to each accompaniment part.

Range: 0 – 127

CHORUS Display

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

177

Rhythm Program

1 VARIATION (Variation Effect Category)

Selects the effect category of the variation effect. Pressing the VARIATION button calls

up the effect category list.

Select the desired effect category, and the list automatically closes.

After changing the category, the variation type below automatically changes

corresponding to the selected category.

2 TYPE (Variation Type)

Determines the type of the variation effect. Pressing the TYPE button calls up the effect

type list.

Select the desired type, and the list automatically closes.

3 Variation sliders

Determines the amount of Variation effect applied to each accompaniment part.

Range: 0 – 127

1 2

VARIATION Display

Reference Page

Effect List (page 53)

LCD

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

178

Rhythm Program

Detailed settings for each percussion instrument

You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each

instrument.

Press the [DRUM SETUP] button at the top of the display to call

up the DRUM SETUP Page.

Select the desired part, Main Drum or Add Drum.

Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be

changed is assigned).

The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its

settings.

Adjust the parameters: Pan, Volume, Reverb and Pitch.

3 4 5 6

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

179

Rhythm Program

1 Percussion Kit Name

Indicates the currently selected kit. Pressing this button calls up the Percussion Kit list,

letting you select the desired kit. When you change the kit, the instruments you have

already entered are replaced with the instruments of the newly selected kit.

2 PAN

Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image.

Range: L63 – R63

3 VOLUME

Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument.

Range: 0 – 127

4 REVERB

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument.

Range: 0 – 127

5 PITCH COARSE

Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in semitone

(100-cent) steps.

Range: -64 – +63

6 PITCH FINE

Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in 1-cent steps,

allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than in PITCH COARSE (

5) above.

Range: -64 – +63

Saving Rhythm Patterns

You can save your newly created rhythm pattern as a User Rhythm, up to a maximum

of 48 patterns.

If necessary, conﬁrm the contents of the rhythm you want to

save.

For details, see page 180.

Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up

the SAVE Page.

If the rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped.

Select the User Rhythm number to which you wish to save.

The following display appears, prompting conﬁrmation of the operation.

Reference Page

Percussion Kit List

(page 183)

LCD

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

180

Rhythm Program

Press the [SAVE] button to save the pattern, or press [CANCEL]

to abort the operation.

After saving the Rhythm, be sure to quit Rhythm Pattern Program (page 181) before

turning the power off. Turning off the DDK-7 without quitting Rhythm Pattern

Program erases the User Rhythm you have created.

Remaining Memory (amount of memory available for storing rhythms) is shown on

the display as a percentage.

When the pattern cannot be saved because of lack of available memory space, a

“Data full” message appears. Return to the previous page by pressing [OK] in this

case.

You should periodically save your rhythm as you are creating it and check the

amount of remaining memory. If the rhythm currently being edited cannot be saved

because of a lack of memory space, erase some of the less necessary percussion

sounds with the [CLEAR] button in the INPUT Page, and try saving the pattern

again.

Conﬁrming rhythm patterns before saving

The rhythm pattern you have created will be saved with 15 sections collectively into

one rhythm. Before saving, we recommend that you conﬁrm the contents of each

section.

Example: When saving the Main A and Main B sections you have created

into one user rhythm

First select “Main A” by using the [SECTION] button on the SETTING Page,

then press the [START] button on the panel. This lets you hear the Main A pattern

you have created. Conﬁrm that the rhythm pattern is what you want to save as

Main A. Next, select “Main B” by using the [SECTION] button, then play it back

and conﬁrm that this is what you want to save as Main B.

If the Main A and/or Main B patterns contain undesired data or no data, create the

desired data by using the Assemble function (page 160).

After conﬁrming the desired section (Main A and Main B here), we recommend

that you conﬁrm that all other sections contain no data. If unnecessary data is

contained in some sections which you don’t want to save, delete that unnecessary

data. This can reduce the data size of the user rhythm.

Remaining Memory

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

181

Rhythm Program

Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program

You can quit the Rhythm Pattern Program from any of its display pages.

Press the [PROGRAM] button.

If a rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped.

If you leave Rhythm Pattern Program without having edited any patterns, this

simply quits the Rhythm Pattern Program.

If you have not saved the edited pattern, a message appears, prompting

conﬁrmation of the operation.

Select [EXIT] to leave Rhythm Pattern Program, or [CANCEL] to

abort the operation and return to the previous display.

Recalling User Rhythm Patterns

The User rhythms you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program can be selected

and played from the User menu. Refer to Chapter 5, “Selecting rhythms with the

Rhythm button” (page 61).

When you leave the Rhythm Pattern Program, the square at the top left in the

display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that data is currently

being saved. Do not turn the power off while the data is being saved.

Select the User Rhythm number.

Select “USER” category here.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

182

Rhythm Program

Selecting Rhythm from an External Media

You can load rhythms from a USB ﬂash memory, or other external media and edit and

save them as User Rhythms. Data that can be loaded includes not only that of the

DDK-7, but also all Style File Format ﬁles.

Insert the media which contains the desired pattern into the USB

TO DEVICE terminal.

Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel.

Press the [RHYTHM] or [NEW RHYTHM] in the display.

Press [FILE] at the top right in the display.

If you open the FILE Page while the rhythm is playing, the rhythm will

automatically be stopped.

Press the [SELECT] button to select the desired pattern ﬁle.

The method for selecting a ﬁle is the same as that in the M.D.R. section. See

page 113 for more information.

Press the [LOAD] button, selected button again to load the

pattern.

To edit the loaded pattern, go to the INPUT Page (page 164), then save your

created pattern(s) as a User Rhythm (page 179).

About ﬁle types that can be loaded to the DDK-7

This DDK-7 is compatible with Style File Format data. The

Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style data format,

which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-

quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of

chord types. In this format, each rhythm pattern (called a

“style”) is made up of ﬁfteen sections (Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Break,

Ending 1 – 3) as rhythm pattern variations. Each of these ﬁfteen sections in turn has

eight different parts, made up of MIDI sequence data.

You can load any patterns (styles) which have been created by an SFF-compatible

instrument. Instruments compatible with SFF have the Style File Logo on the

panel.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

183

Rhythm Program

Percussion Kit List

*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.

Standard Kit 1

Live!Std Kit

Live!Std+P Kit

Standard Kit 2

Live!Funk Kit

Live!Funk+P Kit

Hit Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit

Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute

Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open

Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q

Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap

Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H

Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L

Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap

Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise

Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click

Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell

Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L

Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H

Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap

Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl*

Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap

Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Reverse Cymbal*

Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll*

Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Hi Q 2

Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Soft Snare Noisy Snare Snap Elec

Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks

Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Tight L Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick 3

Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Snare Pitched Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot

Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Wet Kick Tight Kick 2 Kick Gate

Kick Kick Short Kick Tight H Kick Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy

Side Stick Side Stick Light Stick Ambient Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick

Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2

Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap

Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Tight Snap Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3

Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1

Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed

Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2

Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal

Low Tom Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3

Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open 2 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open

Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4

Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5

Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1

High Tom High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6

Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup

Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Light Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine

Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal

Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2

Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap

Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2

Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H

Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L

Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute

Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open

Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L

Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H

Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L

Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H

Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L

Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa

Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas

Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H*

Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L*

Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short

Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long*

Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves

Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H

Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L

Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch H 2

Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Scratch L 2

Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute

Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open

Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker

Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells

Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree

C-1

D-1

E-1

F-1

G-1

A-1

B-1



-1



-1



-1



-1



-1



Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

184

Rhythm Program

*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.

Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit Multi Kit 1

Surdo Mute Kick Dance 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Scratch

Surdo Open Kick Dance 2 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Concert BD

Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Noise Percussion

Whip Slap Whip Slap* Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Bass Drum March

Scratch H Scratch Dance 1* Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Analog BD Short

Scratch L Scratch Dance 2* Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Synth Tom 3

Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Analog BD Long

Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Synth Tom 2

Metronome Click Dance Perc 1 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Synth Bass Drum

Metronome Bell Reverse Dance 1 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Synth Tom 1

Seq Click L Dance Perc 2 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Bass Drum Attack

Seq Click H Hi Q Dance 1 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Bass Drum Heavy

Brush Tap Snare Analog 3 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Tom 4

Brush Swirl* Vinyl Noise* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Bass Drum Light

Brush Slap Snare Analog 4 Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Tom 3

Reverse Cymbal* Reverse Cymbal* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Orch Snare Drum

Snare Roll* Reverse Dance 2* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Drum Roll*

Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Castanet Castanet Castanet Tom 2

Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Snare Soft SD Brush Roll

Sticks Snare Dance 1 Sticks Sticks Sticks Tom 1

Kick 3 Kick Techno Q Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft 2 SD Brush Shot 2

Open Rim Shot Rim Gate Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Tom Brush Shot 4

Kick Anlg Short Kick Techno L Kick Tight Kick Tight Gran Cassa SD Brush Shot 1

Kick Analog Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Snare Drum Heavy

Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Light Side Stick Light Side Stick Tom Brush Shot 3

Snare Analog Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Drum Light

Hand Clap Dance Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Tom Brush Shot 2

Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 SD Accent 2

Tom Analog 1 Tom Dance 1 Floor Tom L Tom Brush 1 Floor Tom L SD Accent 1

Hat Close Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Tom Brush Shot 1

Tom Analog 2 Tom Dance 2 Floor Tom H Tom Brush 2 Floor Tom H SD Reverb 2

Hat Close Anlg 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Snare Drum Rim 2

Tom Analog 3 Tom Dance 3 Low Tom Tom Brush 3 Low Tom SD Reverb 1

Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Snare Drum Rim 1

Tom Analog 4 Tom Dance 4 Mid Tom L Tom Brush 4 Mid Tom L Synth Snare Drum

Tom Analog 5 Tom Dance 5 Mid Tom H Tom Brush 5 Mid Tom H Analog SD

Crash Analog Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal Triangle Mute

Tom Analog 6 Tom Dance 6 High Tom Tom Brush 6 High Tom Tambourine

Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal S Triangle Open

Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Castanet

Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Claves

Tambourine Tambourine Anlg Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine

Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Cabasa

Cowbell Analog Cowbell Dance Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Finger Snap

Vibraslap Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap

Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 S Hand Claps

Bongo H Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Crash Cymbal 2

Bongo L Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Hi-Hat Close

Conga Analog H Conga Analog H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Crash Cymbal 1

Conga Analog M Conga Analog M Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Hi-Hat Open

Conga Analog L Conga Analog L Conga L Conga L Conga L Crash Cym Mute

Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Ride Cymbal 2

Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Hi-Hat Pedal 2

Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Ride Cymbal 1

Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal 1

Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Ride Cymbal Cup

Maracas 2 Maracas 2 Maracas Maracas Maracas

Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Cym Brush Shot

Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Cymbal March

Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Analog HH Close

Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Orch Cymbal Roll

Claves 2 Claves 2 Claves Claves Claves Analog HH Open

Wood Block H Dance Perc 3 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Orchestra Cymbal

Wood Block L Dance Perc 4* Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Orch Cymbal Mute

Scratch H 2 Dance Breath 1 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute

Scratch L 2 Dance Breath 2* Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Tam-Tam

Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute

Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open

Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker

Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells

Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree

C-1

D-1

E-1

F-1

G-1

A-1

B-1



-1



-1



-1



-1



-1



Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

185

Rhythm Program

*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.

Multi Kit 2 Live!Studio Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit Pop Latin Kit

Maracas High Surdo Mute

Surdo Mute Surdo Open

Maracas Low Hi Q

Surdo Muff Whip Slap

Surdo Rim Scratch H

Cuica High Scratch L Hand Clap

Surdo Open Finger Snap

Cuica Middle Click Noise

Tamborim Mute Metronome Click

Cuica Low Metronome Bell Conga H Tip Conga H Tip

Tamborim Open Seq Click L Conga H Heel Conga H Heel

Pandeiro Seq Click H Nakarazan Dom Conga H Open Conga H Open

Bongo High Brush Tap Cabasa Conga H Mute Conga H Mute

Conga Slide Brush Swirl* Nakarazan Edge Conga H SlapOpen Conga H SlapOpen

Bongo Low Brush Slap Hager Dom Conga H Slap Conga H Slap

Conga Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Hager Edge Conga H SlapMute Conga H SlapMute

Conga Muff Snare Roll* Bongo H Conga L Tip Conga L Tip

Bongo Mute Castanet Bongo L Conga L Heel Conga L Heel

Conga High Snare Studio L Conga H Mute Conga L Open Conga L Open

Bongo Slap Sticks Conga H Open Conga L Mute Conga L Mute

Conga Low Kick Ambience H Conga L Conga L SlapOpen Conga L SlapOpen

Open Rim Shot Zagrouda H Conga L Slap Conga L Slap

Timbale 1 High Kick Ambience L Zagrouda L* Conga L Slide* Conga L Slide*

Timbale 1 Low Kick Studio Cutting Noise 1* Phone Call* Kick Soft Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 1 f

Side Stick Cutting Noise 2* Door Squeak* Side Stick Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Open 3 f

Timbale 2 High Snare Studio M Door Slam* Snare Soft Bongo H Rim Bongo H Rim

Hand Clap String Slap* Scratch Cut* Arabic Hand Clap Bongo H Tip Bongo H Tip

Timbale 2 Low Snare Studio L Scratch H 3* Snare Drum Bongo H Heel Bongo H Heel

Timbale 3 High Floor Tom L Wind Chime* Floor Tom L Bongo H Slap Bongo H Slap

Woodblock High Hi-Hat Closed Telephone Ring* Hi-Hat Closed Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 1 f

Timbale 3 Low Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Open 3 f

Woodblock Mid Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Bongo L Rim Bongo L Rim

Timbale 4 High Low Tom Low Tom Bongo L Tip Bongo L Tip

Woodblock Low Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Bongo L Heel Bongo L Heel

Timbale 4 Low Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Bongo L Slap Bongo L Slap

Vibraslap Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Timbale L Open Timbale L Open

Triangle Mute Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1

Tambourine High Tom High Tom

Triangle Open Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1

Castanet Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click* CarEngnIgnition* Crash Cymbal 2

Claves Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal* Duhulla Dom Paila L Paila L

Tambourine Car Passing* Tambourine Timbale H Open Timbale H Open

Cabasa Splash Cymbal Car Crash* Duhulla Tak

Cowbell Siren* Cowbell

Finger Snap Crash Cymbal 2 Train* Duhulla Sak

Vibraslap Jet Plane* Claves

Hand Claps Ride Cymbal 2 Starship* Doff Dom Paila H Paila H

Wind Bell Down Bongo H Burst* Katem Dom Cowbell Top Cowbell Top

Agogo High Bongo L Roller Coaster* Katem Tak

Wind Bell Up Conga H Mute Submarine* Katem Sak

Agogo Low Conga H Open Katem Tak

Bells Conga L Doff Tak Guiro Short Guiro Short

Cowbell 4 Timbale H Tabla Dom Guiro Long* Guiro Long*

Shaker Timbale L Tabla Tak 1

Cowbell 3 Agogo H Tabla Tik

Guiro Short Agogo L Shower* Laugh* Tabla Tak 2 Tambourine Tambourine

Cowbell 2 Cabasa Thunder* Scream* Tabla Sak

Guiro Long Maracas Wind* Punch* Tabla Roll Edge*

Cowbell 1 Samba Whistle H* Stream* Heart Beat* Tabla Flam

Taiko 2 Samba Whistle L* Bubble* Foot Steps* Sagat 1 Maracas Maracas

Ohdaiko 2 Guiro Short Feed* Tabel Dom Shaker Shaker

Taiko 1 Guiro Long* Sagat 3 Cabasa Cabasa

Ohdaiko 1 Claves Tabel Tak Cuica Mute

Ohtsuzumi 2 Wood Block H Sagat 2 Cuica Open

Ohtsuzumi 1 Wood Block L Rik Dom

Kakegoe 3 Cuica Mute Rik Tak 2

Kotsuzumi 4 Cuica Open Rik Finger 1

Kakegoe 2 Triangle Mute Rik Tak 1

Kotsuzumi 3 Triangle Open Rik Finger 2 Triangle Mute

Kakegoe 1 Shaker Rik BrassTremolo* Triangle Open

Kotsuzumi 2 Jingle Bells Rik Sak

Kotsuzumi 1 Bell Tree Dog* Machine Gun* Rik Tik Wind Chime

Horse* Laser Gun*

Bird Tweet* Explosion*

Firework*

Ghost*

Maou*

C-1

D-1

E-1

F-1

G-1

A-1

B-1



-1



-1



-1



-1



-1



Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

186

Rhythm Program

Rhythm Program Voice List

PIANO

1 Live!GrandPiano

BrightPiano

Harpsichord

GrandHarpsi

HonkyTonk

Live!WarmGrand

BalladStack

MIDIGrand

OctavePiano1

OctavePiano2

CP80

Cool!GalaxyEP

StageEP

PolarisEP

JazzChorus

HyperTines

2 Cool!E.Piano

PhaseEP

NewTines

FunkEP

DXModern

SmoothTine

ChorusBell

VintageEP

VenusEP

ModernEP

TremoloEP

SuperDX

SuitcaseEP

StereoClavi.

PhaseClavi.

Clavi.

3WahClavi.

XG GrandPiano

XG GrndPianoKSP

XG MellowGrPno

XG PianoStrings

XG Dream

XG BrightPiano

XG BritePnoKSP

XG El.GrandPiano

XG El.GrPnoKSP

XG DetunedCP80

XG LayeredCP1

XG LayeredCP2

XG Honkytonk

XG HonkytonkKSP

XG El.Piano1

4 XG El.Piano1KSP

XG MellowEP1

XG ChorusEP1

XG HardEl.Piano

XG VXfadeEl.P1

XG 60’sEl.Piano1

XG El.Piano2

XG El.Piano2KSP

XG ChorusEP2

XG DXEPHard

XG DXLegend

XG DXPhaseEP

XG DX+AnalogEP

XG DXKotoEP

XG VXfadeEl.P2

XG Harpsichord

5 XG Harpsi.KSP

XG Harpsichord2

XG Harpsichord3

XG Clavi.

XG Clavi.KSP

XG Clavi.Wah

XG PulseClavi.

XG PierceClavi.

CHROMATIC PERC.

1Vibraphone

JazzVibes

Suspense

Marimba

Xylophone

SteelDrums

Celesta

Glockenspiel

MusicBox

TubularBell

Kalimba

Dulcimer

Timpani

XG Celesta

XG Glockenspiel

XG MusicBox

2 XG Orgel

XG Vibraphone

XG VibesKSP

XG HardVibes

XG Marimba

XG MarimbaKSP

XG SineMarimba

XG Balimba

XG LogDrums

XG Xylophone

XG TubularBells

XG ChurchBells

XG Carillon

XG Dulcimer

XG Dulcimer2

XG Cimbalom

3 XG Santur

ORGAN

1 Cool!Organ

Cool!JazzOrgan

Cool!RotorOrgan

Cool!FullRocker

StadiumOrgan

RotaryDrive

PercOrgan

RockOrgan1

DanceOrgan

GospelOrg

DrawbarOrgan1

JazzOrgan1

RockOrgan2

PurpleOrgan

ElectricOrgan

DrawbarOrgan2

2 JazzOrgan2

RockOrgan3

ClickOrgan

MellowDraw

BrightDraw

60’sOrgan

JazzOrgan3

Tibia 16+4

TibiaFull

Tibia 8+4

Tibia 8

Kinura 8

Vox 8

Thtr.Trp. 8

Thtr.Trp. 16+8

Tibia+Vox

3Trp.+Kinura

ChapelOrgan1

ChapelOrgan2

ChapelOrgan3

PipeOrgan

ReedOrgan

Musette

TuttiAccrd

SmallAccrd

Accordion

TangoAccrd

Steirisch

Bandoneon

SoftAccordion

Sweet!Harmonica

ModernHarp

4 BluesHarp

XG DrawbarOrgan

XG DetunedDrawOrg

XG 60’sDrawOrg1

XG 60’sDrawOrg2

XG 70’sDrawOrg1

XG DrawbarOrgan2

XG 60’sDrawOrg3

XG EvenBarOrg

XG 16+2’2_3Org

XG OrganBass

XG 70’sDrawOrg2

XG CheezyOrgan

XG DrawbarOrgan3

XG Perc.Organ

XG 70’sPercOrg1

5 XG Det.Perc.Org

XG LightOrgan

XG Perc.Organ2

XG RockOrgan

XG RotaryOrgan

XG SlowRotary

XG FastRotary

XG ChurchOrgan

XG ChurchOrgan3

XG ChurchOrgan2

XG NotreDame

XG OrganFlute

XG Trem.OrganFl

XG ReedOrgan

XG PuffOrgan

XG Accordion

6 XG AccordIt

XG Harmonica

XG Harmonica2

XG TangoAccord

XG TangoAccord2

GUITAR

1 Live!NylonGuitar

Cool!JazzGuitar

Cool!El.Guitar

Live!SteelGuitar

Live!DynoSteel1

Sweet!Mandolin

Cool!FunkGuitar

Cool!Stratsphere

Cool!VintageLead

Cool!PowerLead

Cool!BluesGuitar

RockGuitar

VintageStrum

Live!12StrGuitar

Live!DynoSteel2

Cool!CleanGuitar

2VodooLead

PowerChord

CampﬁreGuitar

SolidGuitar

VintageAmp

AlohaGuitar

CrunchGuitar

SmoothLead

60’sClean

Live!ClassicGtr

Cool!JazzSoloGtr

VintageOpen

FolkGuitar

SolidChord

VintageMute

PedalSteel

3 LeadGuitar

ChorusGuitar

VintageTrem

OctaveGuitar

DeepChorus

TremoloGuitar

HeavyStack

BrightClean

WahGuitar

DXJazzGuitar

Distortion

El.12StrGuitar

FeedbackGuitar

18StringGuitar

MutedGuitar

FunkGuitar

4 Overdrive

Mega SteelGuitar

Mega HiStrGuitar

Mega 12StrGuitar

Mega CleanGuitar

Mega Overdrive

Mega Distortion

XG NylonGuitar

XG NylonGuitar2

XG NylonGuitar3

XG Vel.GtrHarmo

XG Ukulele

XG SteelGuitar

XG SteelGuitar2

XG 12StrGuitar

XG Nylon&Steel

5 XG Steel&Body

XG Mandolin

XG JazzGuitar

XG MellowGuitar

XG JazzAmp

XG CleanGuitar

XG ChorusGuitar

XG MutedGuitar

XG FunkGuitar1

XG MuteSteelGtr

XG FunkGuitar2

XG JazzMan

XG Overdriven

XG GuitarPinch

XG Distortion

XG FeedbackGtr

6 XG FeedbackGtr2

XG GtrHarmonics

XG GtrFeedback

XG GtrHarmonics2

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

187

Rhythm Program

BASS

1 Cool!FingerBass

AcousticBass

Cool!DynoPick

Cool!Fretless

SlapBass

SubBass

HardBass

ResoBass

HouseBass

BigDroneBass

RockBass

SuperFretles

PickBass

FusionBass

Bass&Cymbal

AnalogBass

2 DXFunkBass

DrySynBass

80’sSynBass

HiQBass

FunkBass

MellowFinger

ClickBass

PunchyBass

TBBass

Mega Aco.Bass

Mega FingerBass

Mega PickBass

Mega Fretless

XG AcousticBass

XG JazzRhythm

XG VXUprghtBass

3 XG FingerBass

XG FingerDark

XG FlangeBass

XG Bass&DistEG

XG FingerSlap

XG FingerBass2

XG ModulatedBass

XG PickBass

XG MutePickBass

XG FretlessBass

XG FretlessBass2

XG FretlessBass3

XG FretlessBass4

XG Syn.Fretless

XG SmoothFretless

XG SlapBass1

4 XG ResonantSlap

XG PunchThumb

XG SlapBass2

XG Vel.SwitchSlap

XG SynthBass1

XG SynBass1Dark

XG FastResoBass

XG AcidBass

XG Clavi.Bass

XG TechnoBass

XG Orbiter

XG SquareBass

XG RubberBass

XG Hammer

XG SynthBass2

XG MellowSyBass

5 XG SequencedBass

XG ClickSynBass

XG SynBass2Dark

XG SmoothSyBass

XG ModulrSyBass

XG DXBass

XG XWireBass

STRINGS

1 Sweet!Violin

Viola

Cello

Contrabass

Harp

Hackbrett

Fiddle

Banjo

Sitar

Koto

Shamisen

SoloViolin

TremoloStrings

PizzicatoStrings

XG Violin

XG SlwAtkViolin

2 XG Viola

XG Cello

XG Contrabass

XG Trem.Strings

XG SlwAtTremStr

XG SuspenseStr

XG PizzicatoStr

XG OrchestralHarp

XG YangChin

ENSEMBLE

1 Live!Strings

Live!Allegro

Live!Orchestra

Symphon.Str

OberStrings

OrchestraHorns

OrchestraFlute

OrchestraOboe

Tutti

Strings

Orch.Strings

StringsQuartet

ConcertStrings

AnalogStrings

ChamberStrings

BowStrings

2 SlowStrings

MarcatoStrings

SynStrings1

SynStrings2

OrchestraHit

Live!Gospel

Live!Humm

HahChoir

SweetHeaven

DreamHeaven

Live!Mmh

GothicVox

Sunbeam

BellHeaven

PanHeaven

ProHeaven

3 Choir

AirChoir

VoxHumana

Voices

UuhChoir

XG Timpani

XG Strings1

XG StereoStrings

XG SlwAtkStrings

XG ArcoStrings

XG 60’sStrings

XG Orchestra

XG Orchestra2

XG TremOrchestra

XG Vel.Strings

XG Strings2

4 XG S.SlowStrings

XG LegatoStrings

XG WarmStrings

XG Kingdom

XG 70’sStrings

XG Strings3

XG SynStrings1

XG ResoStrings

XG SynStrings4

XG SynStrings5

XG SynStrings2

XG ChoirAahs

XG StereoChoir

XG ChoirAahs2

XG MellowChoir

XG ChoirStrings

5 XG VoiceOohs

XG SynthVoice

XG SynthVoice2

XG Choral

XG AnalogVoice

XG OrchestraHit

XG OrchestraHit2

XG Impact

BRASS

1 Sweet!Trumpet

Sweet!Trombone

Sweet!MutedTrp.

Sweet!FlugelHorn

JazzTrumpet

SoloTrumpet

Trombone

SoloTrombone

SoftTrombone

MellowTrombone

MutedTrombone

BaritonHorn

BaritonHit

AlpBass

FlugelHorn

Tuba

2 Live!HyperBrass

Live!PopBrass

Live!OctaveBrass

Live!FrenchHorns

Live!Symph.Horns

BrassCombo

BrassSection

BreathBrass

HybridCompBrass

NaturalBrass

Sforzando

BigBrass

BallroomBrass

BrightBrass

MellowBrass

HybriHorn

3 Hybripad

SoftVel.Brass

80’sBrass

SoftBrass

FullHorns

SmoothTrombone

HighBrass

OberBrass

TrumpetEns

MellowHorns

BigBandBrass

PopBrass

BrassHit

AnalogBrass

TromboneSection

SmallBrass

4 SoftAnalog

FunkyAnalog

TechnoBrass

SynthBrass

OberHorns

FatSynBrass

XG Trumpet

XG Trumpet2

XG BriteTrumpet

XG WarmTrumpet

XG Trombone

XG Trombone2

XG Tuba

XG Tuba2

XG MutedTrumpet

XG FrenchHorn

5 XG FrenchHornSolo

XG FrenchHorn2

XG HornOrchestra

XG BrassSection

XG Tp&TbSection

XG BrassSection2

XG HighBrass

XG MellowBrass

XG SynthBrass1

XG QuackBrass

XG ResoSynBrass

XG PolyBrass

XG SynthBrass3

XG JumpBrass

XG AnaVel.Brass1

XG AnalogBrass1

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

188

Rhythm Program

6 XG SynthBrass2

XG SoftBrass

XG SynthBrass4

XG ChoirBrass

XG AnaVel.Brass2

XG AnalogBrass2

REED

1 Sweet!TenorSax

Sweet!AltoSax

Sweet!SopranoSax

GrowlSax

BaritoneSax

Live!SaxSection

Saxappeal

MoonLight

BalladBrass

SaxyMood

SopranoSax

TenorSax

AltoSax

SaxStack

Live!SaxSect.Sft

Live!SaxSect.Hrd

2WoodwindEns

Sweet!Clarinet

Sweet!Oboe

EnglishHorn

Bassoon

Clarinet

Oboe

XG SopranoSax

XG AltoSax

XG SaxSection

XG HyperAltoSax

XG TenorSax

XG BreathyTenor

XG SoftTenorSax

XG TenorSax2

XG BaritoneSax

3 XG Oboe

XG EnglishHorn

XG Bassoon

XG Clarinet

PIPE

1 Sweet!Flute

Sweet!PanFlute

FluteEnsemble

Flute

PanFlute

ClassicalFlute

Piccolo

EthnicFlute

Shakuhachi

Whistle

Recorder

Ocarina

XG Piccolo

XG Flute

XG Recorder

XG PanFlute

2 XG BlownBottle

XG Shakuhachi

XG Whistle

XG Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

1 Oxygen

Matrix

WireLead

HipLead

HopLead

DanceHook

TechLead

Tekkline

SoftMini

OctaveHook

TranceLead

FireWire

Analogon

Blaster

Skyline

SquareLead

2 SawtoothLead

PopLead

ProLead

BrightMini

TinyLead

FunkyLead

Paraglide

Robolead

Fargo

Portatone

BigLead

Warp

Adrenaline

Stardust

AeroLead

MiniLead

3 Impact

SunBell

UnderHeim

HiBias

Vinylead

PanLead

Stringbells

CrystalEyes

Padbells

MelodyMaker

BigTune

TrumpetSaw

AttackSaw

PercSquare

XG SquareLead

XG SquareLead2

4 XG LMSquare

XG Hollow

XG Shroud

XG Mellow

XG SoloSine

XG SineLead

XG SawtoothLead

XG SawtoothLead2

XG ThickSaw

XG DynamicSaw

XG DigitalSaw

XG BigLead

XG HeavySynth

XG WaspySynth

XG PulseSaw

XG Dr.Lead

5 XG VelocityLead

XG Seq.Analog

XG CalliopeLead

XG PurePad

XG ChiffLead

XG Rubby

XG CharangLead

XG DistortedLead

XG WireLead

XG VoiceLead

XG SynthAahs

XG VoxLead

XG FifthsLead

XG BigFive

XG Bass&Lead

XG Big&Low

6 XG Fat&Perky

XG SoftWhirl

SYNTH PAD

1 Insomnia

Skydiver

Bubblespace

HipaStringPad

MellowPad

Mediterrain

NeoWarmPad

CyberPad

OberSweep

Messenger

Wave2001

FarEast

Disclosure

BrightOber

DarkPad

Mystery

2 Sirius

S&HGroove

Velo.Ashrami

EveningStars

AngelVibes

Atmosphere

XenonPad

Equinox

GlassPad

Fantasia

DX Pad

Symbiont

Stargate

Area51

DarkMoon

Ionosphere

3GoldenAge

Solaris

TimeTravel

Millennium

Dunes

XG NewAgePad

XG Fantasy

XG WarmPad

XG ThickPad

XG SoftPad

XG SinePad

XG HornPad

XG RotaryStrings

XG PolySynthPad

XG PolyPad80

XG ClickPad

4 XG AnalogPad

XG SquarePad

XG ChoirPad

XG Heaven

XG Itopia

XG CCPad

XG BowedPad

XG Glacier

XG GlassPad

XG MetallicPad

XG TinePad

XG PanPad

XG HaloPad

XG SweepPad

XG Shwimmer

XG Converge

5 XG PolarPad

XG Celestial

SYNTH EFFECTS

1 XG Rain

XG Clavi.Pad

XG HarmoRain

XG AfricanWind

XG Carib

XG SoundTrack

XG Prologue

XG Ancestral

XG Crystal

XG SynthDr.Comp

XG Popcorn

XG TinyBells

XG RoundGlocken

XG GlockenChime

XG ClearBells

XG ChorusBells

2 XG SynthMallet

XG SoftCrystal

XG LoudGlocken

XG ChristmasBel

XG VibeBells

XG DigitalBells

XG AirBells

XG BellHarp

XG Gamelimba

XG Atmosphere

XG WarmAtmos.

XG HollowRelease

XG NylonEl.Piano

XG NylonHarp

XG HarpVox

XG Atmos.Pad

3 XG Planet

XG Brightness

XG FantasyBells

XG Smokey

XG Goblins

XG GoblinsSynth

XG Creeper

XG RingPad

XG Ritual

XG ToHeaven

XG Night

XG Glisten

XG BellChoir

XG Echoes

XG Echoes2

XG EchoPan

4 XG EchoBells

XG BigPan

XG SynthPiano

XG Creation

XG StarDust

XG Reso&Panning

XG Sci-Fi

XG Starz

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

189

Rhythm Program

ETHNIC

1 Bagpipe

XG Sitar

XG DetunedSitar

XG Sitar2

XG Tambra

XG Tamboura

XG Banjo

XG MutedBanjo

XG Rabab

XG Gopichant

XG Oud

XG Shamisen

XG Koto

XG Taisho-kin

XG Kanoon

XG Kalimba

2 XG Bagpipe

XG Fiddle

XG Shanai

XG Shanai2

XG Pungi

XG Hichiriki

XG TinkleBell

XG Bonang

XG Altair

XG GamelanGongs

XG StereoGamelan

XG RamaCymbal

XG AsianBells

PERCUSSION

1 XG Agogo

XG SteelDrums

XG GlassPerc.

XG ThaiBells

XG Woodblock

XG Castanets

XG TaikoDrum

XG GranCassa

XG MelodicTom

XG MelodicTom2

XG RealTom

XG RockTom

XG SynthDrum

XG AnalogTom

XG ElectroPerc.

XG Rev.Cymbal

SOUND EFFECTS

1 XG GtrFretNoise

XG BreathNoise

XG Seashore

XG BirdTweet

XG TelephoneRing

XG Helicopter

XG Applause

XG Gunshot

XG CuttingNoise

XG CuttingNoise2

XG StringSlap

XG Fl.KeyClick

XG Shower

XG Thunder

XG Wind

XG Stream

2 XG Bubble

XG Feed

XG Dog

XG Horse

XG BirdTweet2

XG Ghost

XG Maou

XG PhoneCall

XG DoorSqueak

XG DoorSlam

XG ScratchCut

XG ScratchSplit

XG WindChime

XG TelphoneRing2

XG CarEngineIgn

XG CarTiresSqel

3 XG CarPassing

XG CarCrash

XG Siren

XG Train

XG JetPlane

XG Starship

XG Burst

XG RollrCoaster

XG Submarine

XG Laugh

XG Scream

XG Punch

XG Heartbeat

XG FootSteps

XG MachineGun

XG LaserGun

4 XG Explosion

XG Firework

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

190

Rhythm Program

With the Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can string together any of the

DDK-7’s existing rhythms and the rhythms of your own creation together to make

complete rhythm compositions.

You can save four rhythm compositions (each can contain up to 140 bars) to the

Sequence buttons on the panel for future recall. Two or more rhythm compositions can

be played back in succession, letting you divide a song into parts and play back the

rhythm data as desired. Here are a couple of example applications:

• When you want to play more than two songs in a medley, save the rhythm

composition for each song to a separate sequence button. You can then recall each

desired song by simply pressing the corresponding sequence button to which the

song is saved.

• When you want to practice a song in separate sections (for example, separately

practicing the verse, chorus and bridge), divide the song into the relevant parts.

For example, save the intro part to the [SEQ. 1] button, the main chorus part to the

[SEQ. 2] button, the ending to the [SEQ. 3] button, and so on. Then, recall the

desired part simply by pressing the appropriate sequence button. You can also play

through a song by recalling all the parts in sequence.

Selecting a Sequence

There are two ways to program a rhythm sequence: copying an existing sequence that is

similar to the sequence you want to create, or creating your own sequence from scratch.

Press the [PROGRAM] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.

Any rhythm currently playing will automatically be stopped when you call up

the Rhythm Sequence Program function.

Rhythm Sequence Program

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

191

Rhythm Program

Press one of the Sequence buttons ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) in the

display to select the rhythm sequence number you want to edit.

The lamp of the selected numbered sequence button in the Rhythm section

lights, and the Sequence Display appears.

Instead of pressing the Sequence button on the Program display,

you can press one of the sequence buttons on the Sequence

display, or you can press the Sequence buttons in the Rhythm

section on the panel to select the sequence number.

This selects the Sequence number, to which a rhythm composition can be saved.

If you want to copy a rhythm composition from another Sequence number, go

on to the next step.

Press the Edit [COPY] button in the display to call up the copy

source location.

Press the Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) of the copy

source on the right half in the display.

A message appears, prompting conﬁrmation of the operation.

Press [COPY] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to

abort the operation.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

192

Rhythm Program

Programming a Sequence

Press the [RHYTHM] button at the top right of the display to call

up the RHYTHM Page.

Press the [CATEGORY] button to call up the Rhythm Category

Select pop-up menu, then select the Rhythm category

corresponding to the rhythm you want to enter to the sequence.

If you press User category button, you can select a rhythm of

your own creation (User rhythm).

The rhythm menu of the selected rhythm category is displayed.

Select the desired rhythm from the displayed rhythm menu.

Select a rhythm section (Main A – D, Fill in A – D, Intro 1 – 3,

Ending 1 – 3, or Break) by pressing one of the rhythm control

buttons on the panel.

The selected rhythm and section appears at the top of the display.

Press the [SET] button in the display.

One bar of the selected rhythm is entered and its name is displayed as a box in

the rhythm row on the display. When the rhythm is entered, the cursor (colored

orange) will automatically move to one step right. A maximum of 140 bars can

be entered to a single sequence. When you select an ending pattern and press the

[SET] button, an entire ending pattern (more than one bar) is entered.

You cannot enter a rhythm after an ending pattern.

Repeat steps #2 through #5 above to enter the rhythm and create

your own rhythm composition.

Turning the power off before quitting or closing the Rhythm Sequence Program erases

any sequences you have made. Before turning the power off, quit the Rhythm Sequence

Program (page 197).

NOTE

When entering an Intro

section, check the number of

bars at the top of the display.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

193

Rhythm Program

Auditioning a Sequence

You can play a sequence you are editing at any time to audition the changes.

Move the cursor to the desired position for playback.

Move the cursor by using the Data Control dial, or the POSITION buttons on

the display.

Press the rhythm [START] button on the panel.

The Sequence plays back. Pressing the [START] button again stops playback.

Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence

You can insert a new rhythm between the rhythms you have already entered, or delete

the entered rhythm from the sequence.

DATA CONTROL

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

194

Rhythm Program

1 POSITION

These are cursor controls for moving the cursor (colored orange) along the rhythm row

in the display.

Moves the cursor to the ﬁrst position.

Moves the cursor one step to the left.

Moves the cursor one step to the right.

Moves the cursor ﬁve steps to the right.

2 DATA

These are data controls for entering rhythms and deleting existing rhythms in the

rhythm row.

SET

For initially entering a rhythm to an empty position in the rhythm row, or for

replacing a pattern at the cursor position. Pressing the [SET] button enters the

rhythm selected from the rhythm menu to the cursor position.

This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern.

INSERT

For inserting a rhythm before the current cursor position. The new rhythm is

entered just before the cursor position and all other rhythms to the right of the

cursor are moved to accommodate the new number. This operation is not

available between measures of an ending pattern.

Additional rhythms cannot be entered beyond the Rhythm sequence function’s

capacity of 140. If the Insert operation results in the rhythm number going over

the capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the operation cannot be

executed.

DELETE

For deleting a rhythm at the current cursor position. When the ending pattern is

selected, pressing the [DELETE] button deletes the entire ending pattern (more

than one bar).

CLEAR

For erasing all patterns entered to the selected sequence.

After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting conﬁrmation of the

operation.

Select [CLEAR] to clear the currently selected rhythm sequence, or select

[CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display.

When you insert an ending

pattern into the editing

sequence, any existing

rhythm data that follows an

Ending pattern is

automatically deleted.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

195

Rhythm Program

Programming a Registration Sequence

The Registration Sequence feature allows you to have desired Registrations

automatically called up in sequence, when playing a Rhythm Sequence. It lets you

program the timing (bar/beat/clock) at which the Registration is changed. You can also

program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence.

A Registration Sequence is saved as a part of the corresponding Rhythm Sequence.

With this feature, you can have the sounds of the instrument change as desired

automatically to match the Rhythm Sequence playback.

Press the [REGIST] button at the top right in the display to call up

the Registration Sequence display.

The Registration Sequence is programmed from this display. The entered

Registration number is shown along the Registration row in the middle of the

display.

Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory

section.

Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial,

set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to change the

Registration (1 beat = 96 Clock).

When using the Data Control dial, ﬁrst press the number you wish to change in

the display, then turn the dial.

NOTE

If you are loading a

Registration while a rhythm is

playing, the sequence data

and User rhythms in the

Registration data cannot be

loaded.

13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.

DATA CONTROL

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

196

Rhythm Program

Press the DATA [SET] button in the display.

The Registration number appears in the display (in the timing order), indicating

that the Registration is entered. Up to 140 Registrations can be entered.

If some Registration numbers are entered to the same Bar/Beat/Clock, the last

entered one takes priority.

Repeat steps #2 through #4 above to set the Registration

Sequence.

Entering Next Regist:

When you program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence, the next

registration data in current song can be loaded automatically just by playing the

rhythm sequence.

Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control

dial, set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to enter

the Next Regist (1 beat = 96 clock).

Press the NEXT REGIST [INSERT] button in the display.

The Next Regist mark appears at the timing point you set in step #1,

indicating that the Next Regist is entered.

Editing an Existing Registration Sequence

You can move or delete the entered Registration Sequence (Registration number or

Next Regist data) from the sequence.

To move an entry:

Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data

(Registration number or Next Regist) you want to move.

Change the position by pressing the Bar/Beat/Clock buttons in

the display.

Next Regist Loading Time

• Loading Next Regist may take a few seconds (the time may differ depending on

the size of the data to be loaded).

• When using a ﬂoppy disk instead of USB ﬂash memory, the loading time will be

longer than when using USB ﬂash memory.

•Next Registration data can be loaded by two ways: using optional foot pedal/right

footswitch and programming Next Regist in the Registration Sequence. Loading

time is the same regardless of which way you load the Next Registration data.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

197

Rhythm Program

To move the Registration number timing, press the DATA [SET]

button. To move the Next Regist timing, press the NEXT REGIST

[SET] button.

The position of the Registration number or Next Regist is changed and

displayed in the proper order.

To erase an entry:

Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data

(Registration number or Next Regist) you want to delete.

Press the [DELETE] button to delete the data.

Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program

You can quit the Rhythm Sequence Program from any of its display pages. When you

quit, the sequence you have made will be automatically saved.

To quit the Rhythm Sequence Program:

Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel.

The Voice Display appears, indicating that the Rhythm Sequence Program is closed.

Playing Rhythm Sequences

To play any of the rhythm sequences you have created:

Press the appropriate Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on

the panel.

The SEQ button’s lamp lights.

When quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program, the square at the top left of

the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the sequence is

currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the sequence is being

saved.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

198

Rhythm Program

Press the rhythm [START] button.

The rhythm in the selected sequence starts playback.

The Registration Memory also changes with the Rhythm Sequence playback, if

the sequence includes a Registration Sequence.

Rhythm playback automatically stops when the sequence reaches its end. If

you’ve stopped rhythm playback in the middle of the sequence, press the

[START] button again to resume playback.

Playing All Sequences in Order

You can also have up to all four rhythm sequences automatically play in order, one after

another.

Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their

LEDs are lit.

Press the rhythm [START] button.

The rhythm sequences start from the lowest number and play in order

automatically to the highest number. (For example, if you press Sequence

buttons 4, 2 and 1 in that order, the sequences will be played back not in the

order you pressed them, but in their numeric order: 1, 2, then 4.) This function

effectively allows you to make a long rhythm sequence that exceeds the 140-

pattern memory limit of a single sequence.

Pressing one of the SEQ. buttons while a Rhythm Sequence is playing back

automatically cancels the pressed sequence, and its LED turns off. You cannot

cancel a sequence that is currently playing. The SEQ. lamp goes out when the

sequence assigned to it is ﬁnished playing.

To start a sequence using the Left Footswitch:

You can start or stop the Rhythm Sequence playback using the left footswitch.

To use the left footswitch, pedal unit must be connected to the DDK-7.

Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their

LEDs are lit.

Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel to call up the

Footswitch display, LEFT Page.

Set the control mode of the Footswitch to RHYTHM STOP.

(See page 200 for information about the Footswitch settings.)

Press the Left Footswitch with your right foot to turn the

sequence on.

Pressing the Left Footswitch again in the middle of the sequence playback

cancels the Rhythm Sequence.

When you are playing a Rhythm Sequence that is made up of several sequences

(SEQ. buttons), pressing the Left footswitch turns off the currently playing

Rhythm Sequence, and pressing it again starts the next sequence.

You can also start the Rhythm Sequence playback using the optional foot pedal.

Reference Pages

Connecting a pedal unit

(page 221)

Footswitches (page 200)

Reference Pages

Connecting a foot pedal

(page 221)

Foot pedal (page 203)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

199

Rhythm Program

Copying a Sequence

You can copy a rhythm sequence stored on a sequence button to another button. You

can also add a rhythm sequence to the end of another rhythm sequence.

Press the EDIT [COPY] or [ADD] button in the Sequence Menu

page.

The Copy From or Add From Display appears.

Select the number of the desired rhythm sequence program to

which you want to copy or to which you want to add.

A message appears prompting conﬁrmation of operation.

Press the [COPY] or [ADD] button to copy or add the rhythm

sequence.

Press [CANCEL] to abort the operation.

If necessary, edit the sequence.

Refer to the section “Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence” on page 193 and/or

“Editing an Existing Registration Sequence” on page 196.

You can save your own rhythm patterns (created in the Rhythm Pattern Program) and

Rhythm Sequence (created in the Rhythm Sequence Program) to external media, such

as USB ﬂash memory. Refer to the section “Saving Registrations as Registration Data

(File)” on page 123 for instructions.

When loading your original Rhythm data from external media back to the DDK-7, be

sure to stop the rhythm if it is playing. Loading cannot be executed when a rhythm is

running.

Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm

Sequence Data to External Media

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

200

Controllers

These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions

and switch the effect on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. In order to use

these controllers, you’ll need to connect the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit or an optional FC4/5/7/9

Foot Pedal to the DDK-7.

To use the Footswitches, connect the Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 to the DDK-7.

The Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 has two Footswitches on the main expression pedal. The

Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. The Left Footswitch can

be set to control one of the following functions: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary speaker.

See page 95 for the details of the Registration Shift function or Right Footswitch.

The explanation on the Left Footswitch is given here.

Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.

Contents

1 Footswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

• Controlling the Rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

• Controlling Glide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

• Controlling Rotary Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

2 Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

• Controlling Sustain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

• Controlling Lead Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

• Controlling Melody On Chord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

• Controlling the Solo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

• Controlling the Rhythm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

• Controlling Glide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

• Controlling Rotary Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

• Controlling Registration Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

• Controlling Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

3 Expression Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

• Controlling Pitch Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

• Controlling the Rhythm Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

Footswitches

Reference Page

Connecting a pedal unit

(page 221)

Right Footswitch

Left Footswitch

Expression Pedal

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

201

Controllers

Press the [LEFT] button at the top right of the display to call up

the LEFT Page.

In this display, you can assign the control function to the Left Footswitch: Rhythm,

Glide, and Rotary Speaker.

If you choose OFF here, the Left Footswitch will not control any function.

Controlling the Rhythm

You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections by using the Left

Footswitch.

1 STOP

Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Footswitch.

2 BREAK

When you press the Footswitch, the Break section turns on. This function corresponds

to the [BREAK] button on the panel.

3 MAIN A – MAIN D

These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the panel.

For example, when the [MAIN A] button is selected in this display and you press the

Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A.

FOOTSWITCH Display

1 2

4 5

Reference Page

Rhythm Structure (page 63)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

202

Controllers

4 INTRO 1 – INTRO 3

These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For

example, when the INTRO [1] button is selected in this display and you press the

Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1.

5 ENDING 1 – ENDING 3

These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For

example, when the ENDING [1] button is selected in this display and you press the

Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending pattern is

played, the rhythm stops.

You can also control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections by using an

optional Foot Pedal.

Controlling Glide

You can control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch.

Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by

a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original.

1 Voice Selections (UPPER1/UPPER2/LEAD1/LEAD2/LOWER1/

LOWER2)

Select the desired Voice section(s) to which the Glide function is to be applied.

2 TIME

Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other words, how gradually the pitch

returns when the Footswitch is released. Higher values make the speed slower.

Range: 1 – 5

You can also control the Glide effect by using an optional Foot Pedal.

Reference Page

Foot pedal (page 203)

1 2

Reference Page

Foot pedal (page 203)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

203

Controllers

Controlling Rotary Speaker

You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) by using the Left Footswitch.

When the [Rotary Speaker] button is selected in this display and you press the

Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds

to the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use this function, you’ll need to

make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section or Organ Flute

Voice. For details, see page 51.

You can also control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) by using an optional Foot

Pedal.

To use the Foot Pedal, you will need to connect an optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5/

FC7/FC9) to the DDK-7. The Foot Pedal then can be used to turn one of the

following functions on and off. Up to two Foot Pedals can be connected to the DDK-

7. You can assign one function for each Foot Pedal in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the

Utility display. Note that Some functions will need to be turned on or its parameters set

beforehand.

Assignable Functions

To control Expression, use the FC7/FC9. To control other functions, use the FC4/

FC5.

Reference Page

Rotary Speaker (page 51)

Foot Pedal

Sustain Lead Slide

Melody On Chord Solo

Rhythm Glide

Rotary Speaker Registration Shift

Expression

FC4 FC7

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

204

Controllers

Assigning functions to a Foot Pedal:

Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility display.

Press the [F.PEDAL] button at the top right of the display to call

up the Foot Pedal Page.

In this display, you can assign the control function to the Foot Pedal.

Select the control function to be assigned to the Foot Pedal.

Select the desired function button from the left side of the display if you've

connected the Foot Pedal to the FOOT PEDAL (1 VOLUME) terminal; select

from the right side if you’ve connected the Foot Pedal to the FOOT PEDAL (2

SUSTAIN) terminal.

The polarity of the Foot Pedal will automatically be selected depending on the

selected function; however, you can select the polarity manually.

The effect is constantly applied as long as the Foot Pedal is

pressed.

Releasing the Foot Pedal turns the effect off.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

205

Controllers

Controlling Sustain

You can control the on/off status of Sustain for each Voice Section by using the Foot

Pedal. Sustain for the Pedalboard cannot be controlled.

Press the [SUSTAIN] button to call up the Sustain display, then

turn the desired Voice section on from the display.

Select [SUSTAIN] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the UTILITY

display.

The Sustain function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.

To apply sustain, press the Foot Pedal.

Sustain is constantly applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. Releasing the

Foot Pedal turns sustain off.

Reference Page

Sustain (page 50)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

206

Controllers

Controlling Lead Slide

Call up the Voice Condition display Page 2 of the Lead Voice

section to which you want to apply the Lead Slide effect.

Press the [ON] button of the Slide section on the display.

Select [SLIDE] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display.

The Slide effect function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.

Press the Foot Pedal when you want to apply the Slide effect.

The Slide effect is applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. Releasing the Foot

Pedal, cancels the Lead Slide effect.

Reference Page

Voice Condition Display

(page 42)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

207

Controllers

Controlling Melody On Chord

Call up the Page 4 of the Voice Display.

Select one of the modes.

Select [M.O.C.] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display.

The M.O.C. function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.

Press the Foot Pedal when you want to apply the M.O.C. effect.

The M.O.C. effect is applied constantly, as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed.

When you release the Foot Pedal, the M.O.C. effect is cancelled.

Reference Page

Voice display (page 18)

VOICE Display [Page 4]

Reference Page

Melody On Chord (page 74)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

208

Controllers

Controlling the Solo Function

You can turn the Solo function on/off by using the Foot Pedal. See page 31 for more

information.

Controlling the Rhythm

You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections not only by using

the Left Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal.

Set the rhythm settings in the LEFT Page of the Footswitch

display.

Select [RHYTHM CONTROL] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the

Utility display.

The Rhythm Control function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.

Press the Foot Pedal when you want to start/stop the rhythm or

switch the rhythm sections.

Reference Page

Footswitch Display

(page 201)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

209

Controllers

Controlling Glide

You can control the Glide effect not only by using the Left Footswitch, but also the

Foot Pedal.

Set the Glide settings in the LEFT Page of the Footswitch display.

Select [GLIDE] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display.

The Glide Effect is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.

Pressing the Foot Pedal immediately lowers the pitch of the

selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it slowly

returns the pitch to the original.

Controlling Rotary Speaker

You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) not only by using the Left

Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal.

Select [ROTARY SPEAKER] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the

Utility display.

The Rotary Speaker function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.

Press the Foot Pedal when you want to switch the Rotary

Speaker effect on or off.

Pressing the Foot Pedal has the same effect as pressing the [ROTARY SP

SPEED] button. To use this function, you will need to select the Rotary Speaker

effect for the desired Voice. Refer to page 51.

Reference Page

Footswitch Display

(page 201)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

210

Controllers

Controlling Registration Shift

You can control Registration Shift not only by using the right Footswitch, but also the

Foot Pedal.

Set the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display.

Select [REGIST SHIFT] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the UTILITY

display.

The Registration Shift function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.

Press the Foot Pedal when you want to change Registrations.

Controlling Expression

You can control Expression not only by using the Expression Pedal, but also the Foot

Pedal.

Select [EXPRESSION] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility

display.

The Expression function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.

Press the Foot Pedal down to control the Expression.

Reference Page

Registration Shift (page 95)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

211

Controllers

The Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 features a expression pedal and a 2nd expression pedal.

The Expression pedal can be used to control the volume with your foot as you play.

The 2nd Expression Pedal can be used to control the Pitch Bend and the Tempo of the

Rhythm. The explanation on the 2nd Expression Pedal is given here.

Press the [UTILITY] button on the front panel.

The Utility display appears.

Press the [EXP.] button in the upper right of the display to call up

the EXP. (Expression) Page.

In this display, you can assign the Pitch Bend control or Tempo control to the

2nd Expression Pedal. If both Pitch Bend and Rhythm Tempo controls are set to

ON, both functions are applied when you press the 2nd Expression Pedal.

Generally one of them is assigned to the 2nd Expression Pedal.

Expression Pedals

Reference Page

Getting Started (page 11)

Reference Page

Connecting a Pedal Unit

(page 221)

Expression Pedal

2nd Expression Pedal

Pedal Unit

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

212

Controllers

Controlling Pitch Bend

1 MODE

Determines the range of the Pitch Bend control. Each step changes the pitch range

by a semitone.

Range: 1 – 12

The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of pitch variation (over +/- two

semitones); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of pitch variation (over

+/- one octave).

2 Voice Sections (PITCH BEND)

Selects the Voice sections to which the Pitch Bend function will be applied, and turns

the function ON. Pitch Bend can be selected independently or together for Upper

Voices 1 and 2, Lead Voice 1 and 2, Pedal Voices 1 and 2.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

213

Controllers

Controlling the Rhythm Tempo

1 MODE

Determines the range of tempo change.

Range: 1 – 12

The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of tempo change (70% – 140%);

the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of tempo change (50% – 200%).

2 TEMPO

When you want to control the tempo with the 2nd Expression Pedal, set this to “ON.”

When set to on, pressing the pedal down with your toe speeds up the tempo and

pressing it back with your heel slows it down.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

214

Transpose and Pitch Controls

There are two pitch-related controls on the DDK-7: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows

you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you ﬁnely adjust the tuning.

Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display.

Press the [UTILITY] button.

The Utility display appears.

Press the [GLOBAL] button of the display to call up the GLOBAL

Page.

In this display, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings.

1 TRANSPOSE

Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half-steps

(semitones).

Range: -6 – +6

2 PITCH

Determines the ﬁne pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by

0.2 Hz. The default Pitch is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3).

Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz

You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice

Condition display. For more information, see page 44.

NOTE

The Transpose setting here is

not applied to an XG Song.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

215

Connections

On the backside and front left side of the DDK-7 keyboard is a separate panel equipped with

various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls.

This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the DDK-7.

For details on connecting to external devices, see page 217.

1 AC INLET jack

For connecting the power cable.

2 PHONES jacks

For connection of a stereo headphone set.

3 MIC jack

For connecting a mono input, such as a microphone. The DDK-7 outputs the

microphone signal, with reverb processing, through the OUTPUT jacks or AUX OUT

jacks.

4 MIC VOLUME knob

For adjusting the level of input signal from the MIC jack.

5 USB TO DEVICE terminal

For connecting USB storage devices such as USB ﬂash memory.

Contents

1 Accessory Jacks and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

2 Connecting Headphones or External System 217

• Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

• Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an

External Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

• Using a mixer for live performance. . . . . . . . . . .218

• Selecting Outputs for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

3 Connecting a Pedal Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

4 Connecting a Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

5 Connection with Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

• Using the USB terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

• Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals . . . . . . . . . . . .223

6 Connecting External Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

• Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External

Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

• Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through

the External Speakers of the DDK-7. . . . . . . . . . 224

• Connecting a Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

• Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK-7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

• Controlling the DDK-7 from an External Device . 226

• Connecting USB storage devices . . . . . . . . . . . 226

7 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

• What is MIDI? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

• MIDI Messages of the DDK-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

• MIDI Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

8 MIDI Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Accessory Jacks and Controls

234

Reference Page

Using Headphones

(page 217)

Reference Page

Connecting a Microphone

(page 224)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

216

Connections

1 FOOT PEDAL jacks

For connecting to an optional FC4/FC5/FC7/FC9 Foot Pedal.

1 - 1 VOLUME jack

For controlling the volume and a range of other important functions.

1 - 2 SUSTAIN jack

For controlling the sustain and a range of other important functions.

2 MIDI IN/OUT terminals

For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use

these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface.

3 USB terminals

3 - 1 USB TO DEVICE terminal

For connecting USB storage devices (such as USB ﬂash memory).

3 - 2 USB TO HOST terminal

For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer,

make sure that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer.

4 OPTICAL OUT terminal

For connection using an optical-ﬁber cable. This terminal outputs a digital signal of

44.1 kHz, 24 bits.

5 TO PEDAL terminal

For connecting to the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit.

6 AUX IN (Phone; L/L+R, R) jacks

This pair of stereo phone jacks is for connection to an external device. The signal from

the connected external device sounds from external speakers connected to the DDK-7.

-2 1-1

345

-1 3-2

-1 7-2

(View from rear.)

Reference Page

Foot Pedal (page 203)

Reference Pages

Controlling External MIDI

Devices from the DDK-7

(page 225)

Controlling the DDK-7 from

an External Device

(page 226)

Connection with Computer

(page 222)

What is MIDI? (page 227)

Reference Pages

Connecting USB storage

devices (page 226)

Connection with Computer

(page 222)

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting

a computer with peripheral devices.

Reference Page

Recording the Sounds of the

DDK-7 to an External

Recorder (page 223)

Reference Page

Connecting a Pedal Unit

(page 221)

Reference Page

Outputting the Sound of an

External Device Through the

External Speakers of the

DDK-7 (page 224)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

217

Connections

7 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) jacks

7 - 1 SUB (1, 2) jacks

For connection to an external ampliﬁer/speaker system. These outputs can be

selected for each part.

The output level is ﬁxed and cannot be controlled with the MASTER

VOLUME Dial.

7 - 2 MAIN (L/L+R, R) jacks

This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external ampliﬁer/speaker. The

output level is ﬁxed and cannot be controlled.

8 OUTPUT (L/L+R, R) jacks

This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external ampliﬁer/speaker. The output

level can be controlled.

Using Headphones

To use headphones, connect to the PHONES jack.

Reference Pages

Playing the Sounds of the

DDK-7 Through an External

Audio System (page 218)

Recording the Sounds of the

DDK-7 to an External

Recorder (page 223)

Connecting Headphones or External

System

Before connecting the DDK-7 to other electronic components, turn

off the power to all the components. Before turning the power of the

components on or off, set all volume levels to minimum (0).

Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may

occur.

PHONES

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

218

Connections

Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an External

Audio System

By using the OUTPUT jacks, you can connect your DDK-7 to external powered

speakers. If you’re connecting the DDK-7 to a mono device, use only the OUTPUT L/

L+R jack.

Using a mixer for live performance

Generally, when you use the DDK-7 on stage (in concert, etc.), you should connect it

to a mixer. By using a mixer, you can easily adjust the volume and tone quality of each

component.

To connect to a mixer, use the AUX OUT jacks of the DDK-7. The DDK-7 features

two types of AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and SUB, allowing you to assign some parts of

the DDK-7's output to the SUB jacks and the other parts to the MAIN jacks. In this

way, you can apply effects to the speciﬁc parts or adjust the volume balance among the

parts with an external mixer. For details, see “Selecting Outputs for Each Part” on

page 220.

Connection example

Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right)

OUTPUT L/L+R R

Mic.

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Sound

Some Parts

Other parts

Sound

Main Speakers

(ex. Powerd-amp Speakers)

Monitor Speaker

Mixer

External Effector

Keyboards

AUX OUT

(MAIN)

L/L+R 2

AUX OUT

(SUB)

DDK-7

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

219

Connections

*The Unbalanced line is intended for line-level signals.

Power-on Procedure

Before turning the power on to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0)

then turn on the power in the following order:

(1) DDK-7 and external keyboard(s)

(2) Mixer

(3) Powered Speaker

To turn the power off, ﬁrst turn down the volume for each devices, then turn off the

power in the reverse order (3 → 2 → 1).

Jacks Output Type Location

AUX OUT MAIN jacks

L/L+R, R

Unbalanced*

LEVEL FIXED

Backside of the keyboard

AUX OUT SUB jacks

1, 2

Unbalanced

LEVEL FIXED

Backside of the keyboard

OUTPUT jacks

L/L+R, R

Unbalanced

LEVEL FIXED

Backside of the keyboard

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

220

Connections

Selecting Outputs for Each Part

You can assign each individual part of the DDK-7's sounds such as Voice, Percussion,

to be output from speciﬁc AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and/or SUB.

Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the

Utility display.

Press the [AUX OUT] button in the upper right of the display to

call up the AUX OUT Page.

You can assign individual parts to the AUX OUT MAIN and/or SUB jacks: each Voice

section, Organ Flute Voice, Main drum, Add drum, Accompaniment, Keyboard

Percussion, XG and microphone to the AUX OUT MAIN and/or SUB jacks.

Turn the desired output on for each part.

You can select these from MAIN, SUB1, SUB2 and SUB1&2.

If you select a setting other than MAIN, no sound will be heard from the headphones

and monitor speakers because the parts assigned to SUB1, SUB2 and SUB1&2 will

not be output through PHONES, OUTPUT and OPTICAL OUT jacks.

Any parts assigned to the AUX OUT MAIN or SUB1&2 will be output in stereo (1:

left, 2: right). Any parts assigned to AUX OUT SUB1 or SUB2 will be output in

mono.

NOTE

The settings in the Utility

display are automatically

saved when another display

is called up.

NOTE

Chorus and variation effects

of the Rhythm, and Reverb

are not applied to the sound

output through SUB1, SUB2

and SUB1&2.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

221

Connections

Connecting a Pedal Unit (DDKU-P7) to the DDK-7 allows you to use the Pedalboard,

right and left Footswitches, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal. These foot-

operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch

effects on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. If you connect and

disconnect the Pedal Unit, you must be sure to ﬁrst turn off the power of the DDK-7,

then use the cable to make the connection. If you connect and disconnect the cable

while the power to the DDK-7 is on, DDK-7 and the Pedal Unit can be damaged.

Connecting an optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5/FC7/FC9) to the DDK-7 allows you to

execute various performance functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your

hands from the keyboard. To do this, you must assign a desired function to the Foot

Pedal.

Connecting a Pedal Unit

Reference Pages

Voices for each keyboard

(page 25)

Footswitches (page 200)

Expression Pedals

(page 211)

Connecting a Foot Pedal

DDKU-P7

TO PEDAL

Messages

Dedicated Cable

FOOT PEDAL

2 (SUSTAIN)

Foot Pedal

1 (VOLUME)

Reference Pages

Foot Pedal (page 203)

Controlling Sustain

(page 205)

Controlling Melody On Chord

(page 207)

Controlling Lead Slide

(page 206)

Controlling the Solo Function

(page 208)

Controlling the Rhythm

(pages 201 and 208)

Controlling Rotary Speaker

(pages 203 and 209)

Controlling Expression

(page 210)

Controlling Registration Shift

(page 210)

Controlling Glide (pages 202

and 209)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

222

Connections

By using the USB TO HOST terminal or MIDI IN/OUT terminals, you can connect

your DDK-7 to a computer and receive/transmit MIDI data (for more information

about MIDI, see page 227).

Connecting your DDK-7 to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical

possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score

writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original

DDK-7 song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with

your friends. You can also control the DDK-7 from the computer, for example, by

playing a MIDI ﬁle on the computer to play back the sounds of your DDK-7.

Using the USB terminal

Using the DDK-7’s USB TO HOST terminal and a standard USB cable, connect the

DDK-7 and the computer.

MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.

Connection with Computer

Before you can actually transfer data between the DDK-7 and a computer via

the USB connection, you will need to install an appropriate MIDI driver.

Download the latest MIDI driver software from the Yamaha web site at

“http://download.yamaha.com/.”

NOTE

When you are using the

M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be

transferred to/from the

computer.

Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminal

When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the

following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the

data.

If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer

OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again.

•Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.

•Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any

power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspend, sleep, standby).

•Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB

TO HOST terminal.

•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or

plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal.

•Quit any open application software on the computer.

•Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is

transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.)

• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six

seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the

instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting

the USB cable.

Computer

USB cable

USB TO HOST

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

223

Connections

Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals

By using an optional MIDI interface such as the UX16, you can connect the DDK-7

to the computer, with the MIDI IN/OUT terminals on the instrument. Connect the

DDK-7 and the MIDI Interface with two standard MIDI cables (one connecting the

OUT terminal on the DDK-7 to the MIDI IN terminal on the interface, and the other

connecting the IN terminal on the DDK-7 to the MIDI OUT terminal on the

interface). Connect the MIDI interface to the computer with a USB cable.

Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External

Recorder

You can record your DDK-7 performance to an external recorder, such as an MD

recorder or cassette tape recorder, using the OPTICAL OUT terminal or AUX OUT

jacks. Using the OPTICAL OUT terminal allows you to record to external media with

exceptionally high-quality digital sound (providing the external recorder has an Optical

In terminal). Or you can use the AUX OUT jacks.

NOTE

Depending on your particular

MIDI interface, you may have

to connect the MIDI Interface

and the computer with a

serial cable.

Connecting External Devices

Computer

MIDI Interface

(for example, UX16)

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI

INOUT

NOTE

If you want to record the

sound input from the AUX IN

jack together with the DDK-7

sound, use the AUX OUT

MAIN jack.

OPTICAL IN

OPTICAL OUTAUX OUT MAIN L/L+R

LINE IN R

Cassette tape recorder, etc.

Audio cable Optical digital cable

Recording Recording

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

224

Connections

Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through

the External Speakers of the DDK-7

You can connect the AUX IN jacks of the DDK-7 with the LINE OUT of an external

device, such as a CD player. You can also connect the OUTPUT jacks of the DDK-7

to external speakers. The sound from the CD player is output from an external audio

system via the DDK-7.

First turn on the power of the external device(s), then that of the DDK-7. Reverse this

order when you turn the power off.

If you’re connecting the DDK-7 to a mono device, use only the AUX IN L/L+R jack.

Connecting a Microphone

By connecting a microphone to the DDK-7, you can enjoy singing along with your

own performance. The DDK-7 outputs your vocals through the external audio system

connected to the AUX OUT or OUTPUT jacks of the DDK-7.

Connect your microphone to the MIC jack.

A dynamic microphone is recommended.

Use the MIC VOLUME knob to set the microphone volume.

Speaker (Left)

Playing

AUX INOUTPUT (MAIN)

Stereo audio system

Playing

Speaker (Right)

Playing

RL+L/R RL+L/R

LINE OUT R L+L/R

MIC

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

225

Connections

To adjust the volume/reverb:

Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the Utility

display.

Using the MIC. REVERB and VOLUME sliders in the GLOBAL

Page, adjust the amount of the reverb applied to the microphone,

and the volume.

No sound from the microphone can be heard even though you raise the volume

here, unless you turn the MIC VOLUME knob to the right. Similarly, no reverb

can be heard even though you raise the reverb level here, unless you raise the

total reverb level in the REVERB display.

Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK-7

You can use the DDK-7 to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone

generator), combining them with the DDK-7 and letting you create even richer, more

multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must

match the transmit channels on your DDK-7.)

The DDK-7 transmits as digital data a variety of performance messages along with note

information, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed

down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device

responds to these messages depends on the particular device.

MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.

Reference Page

Reverb (page 49)

Reference Page

What is MIDI? (page 227)

Tone generator

MIDI cable

MIDI messages

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

NOTE

When you are using the

M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be

transmitted.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

226

Connections

Controlling the DDK-7 from an External Device

You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of

your DDK-7 and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit

channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the ﬁxed receive channels on your DDK-7.)

MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.

Connecting USB storage devices

Using the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s), you can connect USB storage devices for

saving your DDK-7 data.

When you use USB devices, refer to “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE

terminal” on page 111.

NOTE

When you are using the

M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be

received.

MIDI keyboard or synthesizer

MIDI cable

MIDI messages

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

Reference Page

Formatting External Media

(page 112)

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

227

Connections

This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use

MIDI on your DDK-7.

What is MIDI?

No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”

In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a

grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy

to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings

and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But

how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note

(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is

played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the

speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for

note production?

For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the

keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic

instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what Voice,” “with

which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.”

Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone

generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled

note.

Example of Keyboard Information

As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice

selection are handled as MIDI events. All rhythm-related data – including rhythm

patterns, auto accompaniment patterns, Rhythm Sequences, etc. – also consist of

MIDI messages.

MIDI

Voice number (with what Voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

Internal amp

Tone generator

(Electric circuit)

Playing the keyboard

Acoustic guitar note production

Digital instrument note production

Pluck a string and the body resonates

the sound.

Based on playing information from the keyboard,

a sampled note stored in the tone generator is

played through the speakers.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

228

Connections

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to

communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control

Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.

MIDI Messages of the DDK-7

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System

Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the

keyboard for a speciﬁc channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several

MIDI devices to communicate with each other.

Channel Messages

Each time you play the keyboard on the DDK-7, channel messages (indicating which

keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a speciﬁc channel. Similarly, the

DDK-7 can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard.

Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127.

The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60.

Note Off: Generated when a key is released.

Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127.

For more detailed information, see MIDI Data Format on page 240 and MIDI

Implementation Chart on page 253.

• Program Change

Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With

these messages you can change the Registrations of the DDK-7. For more detailed

information, see MIDI Data Format on page 240 and MIDI Implementation Chart on

page 253.

• Control Change

Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning,

modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through

speciﬁc Control Change numbers.

For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the DDK-

7, see MIDI Data Format on page 240 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 253.

System Messages

• System Exclusive Messages

System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration

data.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

229

Connections

MIDI Channels

MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16,

the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent

over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts

over a speciﬁc channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs

simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to

watch the desired program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI

data on a speciﬁc MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to

the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive

Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound

according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.

The receive channel of the DDK-7 is ﬁxed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard,

channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that

when you are using another MIDI device to play the DDK-7’s Voices, you must set the

MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s) of

the DDK-7. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard (Upper, Lower and

Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 230 for more information.

Weather Report

NEWS

MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2

MIDI

cable

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

230

Connections

When you connect your DDK-7 with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or

computer), you can determine how the DDK-7 controls that MIDI device, or how the

DDK-7 is controlled.

Press the [UTILITY] button in the panel to call up the Utility

Display.

Press the [MIDI] button at the top right of the display to call up

the MIDI Page.

1 OUTPUT

For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any

channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to the Upper keyboard, the Lower

keyboard, the Pedalboard, Sustain, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal. The

MIDI messages on each keyboard will be sent on the channels set here. You must set

the transmit channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device.

Pressing each OUTPUT button calls up the channel selection pop-up menu. After you

select the desired channel, the pop-up menu automatically closes.

Sustain, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal can be set to “OFF” (MIDI

information will not be transmitted.)

2 MIDI OUT FILTER

Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the DDK-7.

After Touch, second Expression and Rhythm start/stop are automatically ﬁltered. Set

the parameter for which you wish to disable transmission to ON.

MIDI Control

3-1 3-2 3-3

NOTE

If you set Second

Expression to on in the MIDI

OUT FILTER parameters, the

setting in the OUTPUT (1)

parameters will be disabled.

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

231

Connections

3 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL

Switches control over the displayed items between the DDK-7 (INTERNAL) or the

connected device (EXTERNAL).

3 - 1 LEAD 1

Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voices.

INT. (Internal): Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper keyboard of the DDK-7.

(If the To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower keyboard.)

EXT. (External): The Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI

channel 4.

3 - 2 SYNC.

To synchronize playback with an external MIDI device, you can use either the

instrument’s internal clock (int.) or MIDI clock signals from the external device

(ext.).

INT. (Internal): The instrument uses its own internal clock.

EXT. (External): The instrument uses MIDI clock signals from the external device

(midi).

3 - 3 EXPRESSION

Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this

control is set to AUTO.

AUTO: Internal and External is automatically switched.

INT. (Internal): You can manually control the expression pedal and Foot Pedal even

during M.D.R. playback.

EXT. (External): While playing the M.D.R. or receiving MIDI messages, the

expression pedal and Foot Pedal is invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded

data in a USB ﬂash memory or received MIDI data.)

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

232

Appendix

XG Voice & Drum List

Voice Number

Voice Name Category

MSB LSB PRG

001XG GrandPiano PIANO

011XG GrndPianoKSP

0181XG MellowGrPno

0401XG PianoStrings

0411XG Dream

002XG BrightPiano

012XG BritePnoKSP

003XG El.GrandPiano

013XG El.GrndPnoKSP

0323XG DetunedCP80

0403XG LayeredCP1

0413XG LayeredCP2

004XG Honkytonk

014XG HonkytonkKSP

005XG El.Piano1

015XG El.Piano1KSP

0185XG MellowEP1

0325XG ChorusEP1

0405XG HardEl.Piano

0455XG VXfadeEl.P1

0645XG 60’sEl.Piano1

006XG El.Piano2

016XG El.Piano2KSP

0326XG ChorusEP2

0336XG DXEPHard

0346XG DXLegend

0406XG DXPhaseEP

0416XG DX+AnalogEP

0426XG DXKotoEP

0456XG VXfadeEl.P2

007XG Harpsichord

017XG Harpsi.KSP

0257XG Harpsichord2

0357XG Harpsichord3

008XG Clavi.

018XG Clavi.KSP

0278XG Clavi.Wah

0648XG PulseClavi.

0658XG PierceClavi.

009XG Celesta CHROMATIC

PERC.

0010 XG Glockenspiel

0011 XG MusicBox

06411XG Orgel

0012 XG Vibraphone

0112 XG VibesKSP

04512XG HardVibes

0013 XG Marimba

0113 XG MarimbaKSP

06413XG SineMarimba

09713XG Balimba

09813XG LogDrums

0014 XG Xylophone CHROMATIC

PERC.

0015 XG TubularBells

09615XG ChurchBells

09715XG Carillon

0016 XG Dulcimer

03516XG Dulcimer2

09616XG Cimbalom

09716XG Santur

0017 XG DrawbarOrgan ORGAN

03217XG DetDrawOrg

03317XG 60’sDrawOrg1

03417XG 60’sDrawOrg2

03517XG 70’sDrawOrg1

03617XG DrawbarOrgan2

03717XG 60’sDrawOrg3

03817XG EvenBarOrg

04017XG 16+2’2_3Org

06417XG OrganBass

06517XG 70’sDrawOrg2

06617XG CheezyOrgan

06717XG DrawbarOrgan3

0018 XG Perc.Organ

02418XG 70’sPercOrg1

03218XG Det.Perc.Org

03318XG LightOrgan

03718XG Perc.Organ2

0019 XG RockOrgan

06419XG RotaryOrgan

06519XG SlowRotary

06619XG FastRotary

0020 XG ChurchOrgan

03220XG ChurchOrgan3

03520XG ChurchOrgan2

04020XG NotreDame

06420XG OrganFlute

06520XG Trem.OrganFl

0021 XG ReedOrgan

04021XG PuffOrgan

0022 XG Accordion

03222XG AccordIt

0023 XG Harmonica

03223XG Harmonica2

0024 XG TangoAccord

06424XG TangoAccord2

0025 XG NylonGuitar GUITAR

01625XG NylonGuitar2

02525XG NylonGuitar3

04325XG Vel.GtrHarmo

09625XG Ukulele

0026 XG SteelGuitar

01626XG SteelGuitar2

Voice Number

Voice Name Category

MSB LSB PRG

Only for XG song playback.

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

233

03526XG 12StrGuitar GUITAR

04026XG Nylon&Steel

04126XG Steel&Body

09626XG Mandolin

0027 XG JazzGuitar

01827XG MellowGuitar

03227XG JazzAmp

0028 XG CleanGuitar

03228XG ChorusGuitar

0029 XG MutedGuitar

04029XG FunkGuitar1

04129XG MuteSteelGtr

04329XG FunkGuitar2

04529XG JazzMan

0030 XG Overdriven

04330XG GuitarPinch

0031 XG Distortion

04031XG FeedbackGtr

04131XG FeedbackGtr2

0032 XG GtrHarmonics

06532XG GtrFeedback

06632XG GtrHarmonics2

0033 XG AcousticBass BASS

04033XG JazzRhythm

04533XG VXUprghtBass

0034 XG FingerBass

01834XG FingerDark

02734XG FlangeBass

04034XG Bass&DistEG

04334XG FingerSlap

04534XG FingerBass2

06534XG ModulatedBass

0035 XG PickBass

02835XG MutePickBass

0036 XG FretlessBass

03236XG FretlessBass2

03336XG FretlessBass3

03436XG FretlessBass4

09636XG Syn.Fretless

09736XG SmthFretless

0037 XG SlapBass1

02737XG ResonantSlap

03237XG PunchThumb

0038 XG SlapBass2

04338XG Vel.SwSlap

0039 XG SynthBass1

01839XG SynBass1Dark

02039XG FastResoBass

02439XG AcidBass

03539XG Clavi.Bass

04039XG TechnoBass

06439XG Orbiter

06539XG SquareBass

06639XG RubberBass

09639XG Hammer

0040 XG SynthBass2

0640 XG MellowSyBass

01240XG SequencedBass

Voice Number

Voice Name Category

MSB LSB PRG

01840XG ClickSynBass BASS

01940XG SynBass2Dark

03240XG SmoothSyBass

04040XG ModulrSyBass

04140XG DXBass

06440XG XWireBass

0041 XG Violin STRINGS

0841 XG SlwAtkViolin

0042 XG Viola

0043 XG Cello

0044 XG Contrabass

0045 XG Trem.Strings

0845 XG SlwAtTremStr

04045XG SuspenseStr

0046 XG PizzicatoStr

0047 XG Orch.Harp

04047XG YangChin

0048 XG Timpani ENSEMBLE

0049 XG Strings1

0349 XG StereoStrings

0849 XG SlwAtkStrings

02449XG ArcoStrings

03549XG 60’sStrings

04049XG Orchestra

04149XG Orchestra2

04249XG TremOrchestra

04549XG Vel.Strings

0050 XG Strings2

0350 XG S.SlowStrings

0850 XG LegatoStrings

04050XG WarmStrings

04150XG Kingdom

06450XG 70’sStrings

06550XG Strings3

0051 XG SynStrings1

02751XG ResoStrings

06451XG SynStrings4

06551XG SynStrings5

0052 XG SynStrings2

0053 XG ChoirAahs

0353 XG StereoChoir

01653XG ChoirAahs2

03253XG MellowChoir

04053XG ChoirStrings

0054 XG VoiceOohs

0055 XG SynthVoice

04055XG SynthVoice2

04155XG Choral

06455XG AnalogVoice

0056 XG OrchestraHit

03556XG OrchestraHit2

06456XG Impact

0057 XG Trumpet BRASS

01657XG Trumpet2

01757XG BriteTrumpet

03257XG WarmTrumpet

0058 XG Trombone

01858XG Trombone2

Voice Number

Voice Name Category

MSB LSB PRG

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

234

0059 XG Tuba BRASS

01659XG Tuba2

0060 XG MutedTrumpet

0061 XG FrenchHorn

0661 XG FrHornSolo

03261XG FrenchHorn2

03761XG HornOrchestra

0062 XG BrassSection

03562XG Tp&TbSection

04062XG BrassSection2

04162XG HighBrass

04262XG MellowBrass

0063 XG SynthBrass1

01263XG QuackBrass

02063XG ResoSynBrass

02463XG PolyBrass

02763XG SynthBrass3

03263XG JumpBrass

04563XG AnaVel.Brass1

06463XG AnalogBrass1

0064 XG SynthBrass2

01864XG SoftBrass

04064XG SynthBrass4

04164XG ChoirBrass

04564XG AnaVel.Brass2

06464XG AnalogBrass2

0065 XG SopranoSax REED

0066 XG AltoSax

04066XG SaxSection

04366XG HyperAltoSax

0067 XG TenorSax

04067XG BreathyTenor

04167XG SoftTenorSax

06467XG TenorSax2

0068 XG BaritoneSax

0069 XG Oboe

0070 XG EnglishHorn

0071 XG Bassoon

0072 XG Clarinet

0073 XG Piccolo PIPE

0074 XG Flute

0075 XG Recorder

0076 XG PanFlute

0077 XG BlownBottle

0078 XG Shakuhachi

0079 XG Whistle

0080 XG Ocarina

0081 XG SquareLead SYNTH LEAD

0681 XG SquareLead2

0881 XG LMSquare

01881XG Hollow

01981XG Shroud

06481XG Mellow

06581XG SoloSine

06681XG SineLead

0082 XG SawtoothLead

0682 XG SawtoothLead2

0882 XG ThickSaw

Voice Number

Voice Name Category

MSB LSB PRG

01882XG DynamicSaw SYNTH LEAD

01982XG DigitalSaw

02082XG BigLead

02482XG HeavySynth

02582XG WaspySynth

04082XG PulseSaw

04182XG Dr.Lead

04582XG VelocityLead

09682XG Seq.Analog

0083 XG CalliopeLead

06583XG PurePad

0084 XG ChiffLead

06484XG Rubby

0085 XG CharangLead

06485XG DistortedLead

06585XG WireLead

0086 XG VoiceLead

02486XG SynthAahs

06486XG VoxLead

0087 XG FifthsLead

03587XG BigFive

0088 XG Bass&Lead

01688XG Big&Low

06488XG Fat&Perky

06588XG SoftWhirl

0089 XG NewAgePad SYNTH PAD

06489XG Fantasy

0090 XG WarmPad

01690XG ThickPad

01790XG SoftPad

01890XG SinePad

06490XG HornPad

06590XG RotaryStrings

0091 XG PolySynthPad

06491XG PolyPad80

06591XG ClickPad

06691XG AnalogPad

06791XG SquarePad

0092 XG ChoirPad

06492XG Heaven

06692XG Itopia

06792XG CCPad

0093 XG BowedPad

06493XG Glacier

06593XG GlassPad

0094 XG MetallicPad

06494XG TinePad

06594XG PanPad

0095 XG HaloPad

0096 XG SweepPad

02096XG Shwimmer

02796XG Converge

06496XG PolarPad

06696XG Celestial

0097 XG Rain SYNTH

EFFECTS

04597XG Clavi.Pad

06497XG HarmoRain

06597XG AfricanWind

Voice Number

Voice Name Category

MSB LSB PRG

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

235

06697XG Carib SYNTH

EFFECTS

0098 XG SoundTrack

02798XG Prologue

06498XG Ancestral

0099 XG Crystal

01299XG SynthDr.Comp

01499XG Popcorn

01899XG TinyBells

03599XG RoundGlocken

04099XG GlockenChime

04199XG ClearBells

04299XG ChorusBells

06499XG SynthMallet

06599XG SoftCrystal

06699XG LoudGlocken

06799XG ChristmasBel

06899XG VibeBells

06999XG DigitalBells

07099XG AirBells

07199XG BellHarp

07299XG Gamelimba

00100 XG Atmosphere

018100 XG WarmAtmos.

019100 XG HollowRelease

040100 XG NylonEl.Piano

064100 XG NylonHarp

065100 XG HarpVox

066100 XG Atmos.Pad

067100 XG Planet

00101 XG Brightness

064101 XG FantasyBells

096101 XG Smokey

00102 XG Goblins

064102 XG GoblinsSynth

065102 XG Creeper

066102 XG RingPad

067102 XG Ritual

068102 XG ToHeaven

070102 XG Night

071102 XG Glisten

096102 XG BellChoir

00103 XG Echoes

08103 XG Echoes2

014103 XG EchoPan

064103 XG EchoBells

065103 XG BigPan

066103 XG SynthPiano

067103 XG Creation

068103 XG StarDust

069103 XG Reso&Panning

00104 XG Sci-Fi

064104 XG Starz

00105 XG Sitar ETHNIC

032105 XG DetunedSitar

035105 XG Sitar2

096105 XG Tambra

097105 XG Tamboura

00106 XG Banjo

Voice Number

Voice Name Category

MSB LSB PRG

028106 XG MutedBanjo ETHNIC

096106 XG Rabab

097106 XG Gopichant

098106 XG Oud

00107 XG Shamisen

00108 XG Koto

096108 XG Taisho-kin

097108 XG Kanoon

00109 XG Kalimba

00110 XG Bagpipe

00111 XG Fiddle

00112 XG Shanai

064112 XG Shanai2

096112 XG Pungi

097112 XG Hichiriki

00113 XG TinkleBell

096113 XG Bonang

097113 XG Altair

098113 XG GamelanGongs

099113 XG StereoGamelan

0 100 113 XG RamaCymbal

0 101 113 XG AsianBells

00114 XG Agogo

PERCUSSION

00115 XG SteelDrums

097115 XG GlassPerc.

098115 XG ThaiBells

00116 XG Woodblock

096116 XG Castanets

00117 XG TaikoDrum

096117 XG GranCassa

00118 XG MelodicTom

064118 XG MelodicTom2

065118 XG RealTom

066118 XG RockTom

00119 XG SynthDrum

064119 XG AnalogTom

065119 XG ElectroPerc.

00120 XG Rev.Cymbal

00121 XG GtrFretNoise SOUND

EFFECTS

00122 XG BreathNoise

00123 XG Seashore

00124 XG BirdTweet

00125 XG TelephoneRing

00126 XG Helicopter

00127 XG Applause

00128 XG Gunshot

64 0 1 XG CuttingNoise

64 0 2 XG CuttingNoise2

64 0 4 XG StringSlap

64 0 17 XG Fl.KeyClick

64 0 33 XG Shower

64 0 34 XG Thunder

64 0 35 XG Wind

64 0 36 XG Stream

64 0 37 XG Bubble

64 0 38 XG Feed

64 0 49 XG Dog

64 0 50 XG Horse

Voice Number

Voice Name Category

MSB LSB PRG

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

236

64 0 51 XG BirdTweet2 SOUND

EFFECTS

64 0 55 XG Ghost

64 0 56 XG Maou

64 0 65 XG PhoneCall

64 0 66 XG DoorSqueak

64 0 67 XG DoorSlam

64 0 68 XG ScratchCut

64 0 69 XG ScratchSplit

64 0 70 XG WindChime

64 0 71 XG TelphoneRing2

64 0 81 XG CarEngineIgn

64 0 82 XG CarTiresSqel

64 0 83 XG CarPassing

64 0 84 XG CarCrash

64 0 85 XG Siren

64 0 86 XG Train

64 0 87 XG JetPlane

64 0 88 XG Starship

64 0 89 XG Burst

64 0 90 XG RollrCoaster

64 0 91 XG Submarine

64 0 97 XG Laugh

64 0 98 XG Scream

64 0 99 XG Punch

64 0 100 XG Heartbeat

64 0 101 XG FootSteps

64 0 113 XG MachineGun

64 0 114 XG LaserGun

64 0 115 XG Explosion

64 0 116 XG Firework

127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 DRUM

127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 *Refer to

Drum Kit Map

127 0 5 Hit Kit

127 0 9 Room Kit

127 0 17 Rock Kit

127 0 25 Electro Kit

127 0 26 Analog Kit

127 0 28 Dance Kit

127 0 33 Jazz Kit

127 0 41 Brush Kit

127 0 49 Symphony Kit

126 0 1 SFX Kit 1

126 0 2 SFX Kit 2

Voice Number

Voice Name Category

MSB LSB PRG

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

237

XG Drum Map

MSB/LSB/PC

Note

Standard Kit 1

(127/0/1)

Key

Off

Standard Kit 2

(127/0/2)

Key

Off

Hit Kit

(127/0/5)

Key

Off

Room Kit

(127/0/9)

Key

Off

Rock Kit

(127/0/17)

Key

Off

Electro Kit

(127/0/25)

Key

Off

13 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute

14 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open

15 Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q

16 Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap

17 Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H

18 Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L

19 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap

20 Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise

21 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click

22 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell

23 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L

24 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H

25 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap

26 Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø

Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap

28 Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Reverse Cymbal Ø

Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø

Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Hi Q 2

Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Soft Snare Noisy Snare Snap Elec

Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks

33 Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Tight L Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick 3

Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Snare Pitched Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot

35 Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Wet Kick Tight Kick 2 Kick Gate

Kick Kick Short Kick Tight H Kick Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy

Side Stick Side Stick Light Stick Ambient Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick

38 Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2

Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap

40 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Tight Snap Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3

Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1

Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed

43 Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2

Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal

45 Low Tom Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3

Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open 2 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open

47 Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4

Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5

Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1

50 High Tom High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6

Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1

52 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal

53 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup

54 Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Light Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine

55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal

56 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell

57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2

58 Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap

59 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2

60 Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H

61 Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L

62 Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute

63 Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open

64 Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L

65 Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H

66 Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L

67 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H

68 Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L

69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa

70 Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas

71 Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø

Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø

Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short

74 Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø

Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves

76 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H

77 Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L

78 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch H 2

79 Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Scratch L 2

80 Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute

81 Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open

82 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker

83 Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells

84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree

85 No Sound

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

238

MSB/LSB/

PCNote

Analog Kit

(127/0/26)

Key

Off

Dance Kit

(127/0/28)

Key

Off

Jazz Kit

(127/0/33)

Key

Off

Brush Kit

(127/0/41)

Key

Off

Symphony Kit

(127/0/49)

Key

Off

SFX Kit 1

(126/0/1)

Key

Off

13 Surdo Mute Kick Dance 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute

14 Surdo Open Kick Dance 2 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open

15 Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q

16 Whip Slap Whip Slap Ø Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap

17 Scratch H Scratch Dance 1 Ø Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H

18 Scratch L Scratch Dance 2 Ø Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L

19 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap

20 Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise

21 Metronome Click Dance Perc 1 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click

22 Metronome Bell Reverse Dance 1 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell

23 Seq Click L Dance Perc 2 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L

24 Seq Click H Hi Q Dance 1 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H

25 Brush Tap Snare Analog 3 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap

26 Brush Swirl Ø Vinyl Noise Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø

27 Brush Slap Snare Analog 4 Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap

28 Reverse Cymbal Ø Reverse Cymbal Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø

29 Snare Roll Ø Reverse Dance 2 Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø

30 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Castanet Castanet Castanet

31 Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Snare Soft

32 Sticks Snare Dance 1 Sticks Sticks Sticks

33 Kick 3 Kick Techno Q Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft 2

34 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot

35 Kick Anlg Short Kick Techno L Kick Tight Kick Tight Gran Cassa

36 Kick Analog Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise 1 Ø

37 Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Light Side Stick Light

Side Stick Cutting Noise 2 Ø

38 Snare Analog Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare

39 Hand Clap Dance Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap String Slap Ø

40 Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2

41 Tom Analog 1 Tom Dance 1 Floor Tom L Tom Brush 1 Floor Tom L

42 Hat Close Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed

43 Tom Analog 2 Tom Dance 2 Floor Tom H Tom Brush 2 Floor Tom H

44 Hat Close Anlg 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal

45 Tom Analog 3 Tom Dance 3 Low Tom Tom Brush 3 Low Tom

46 Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open

47 Tom Analog 4 Tom Dance 4 Mid Tom L Tom Brush 4 Mid Tom L

48 Tom Analog 5 Tom Dance 5 Mid Tom H Tom Brush 5 Mid Tom H

49 Crash Analog Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal

50 Tom Analog 6 Tom Dance 6 High Tom Tom Brush 6 High Tom

51 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal S

52 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Ø

Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup

54 Tambourine Tambourine Anlg Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine

55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal

56 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Dance Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell

57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2

58 Vibraslap Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap

59 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 S

60 Bongo H Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H

61 Bongo L Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L

62 Conga Analog H Conga Analog H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute

63 Conga Analog M Conga Analog M Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open

64 Conga Analog L Conga Analog L Conga L Conga L Conga L

65 Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H

66 Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L

67 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H

68 Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Shower Ø

Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Thunder Ø

Maracas 2 Maracas 2 Maracas Maracas Maracas Wind Ø

Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Stream Ø

Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Bubble Ø

Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Feed Ø

Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø

75 Claves 2 Claves 2 Claves Claves Claves

76 Wood Block H Dance Perc 3 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H

77 Wood Block L Dance Perc 4 Ø Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L

78 Scratch H 2 Dance Breath 1 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute

79 Scratch L 2 Dance Breath 2 Ø Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open

80 Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute

81 Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open

82 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker

83 Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells

84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Dog Ø

Horse Ø

Bird Tweet Ø

90 Ghost Ø

Maou Ø

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

239

MSB/LSB/

PCNote

SFX Kit 2

(126/0/2)

Key

Off

36 Phone Call Ø

37 Door Squeak Ø

38 Door Slam Ø

39 Scratch Cut Ø

40 Scratch H 3 Ø

41 Wind Chime Ø

42 Telephone Ring Ø

52 CarEngnIgnition Ø

53 Car Tires Squeal Ø

54 Car Passing Ø

55 Car Crash Ø

56 Siren Ø

57 Train Ø

58 Jet Plane Ø

59 Starship Ø

60 Burst Ø

61 Roller Coaster Ø

62 Submarine Ø

68 Laugh Ø

69 Scream Ø

70 Punch Ø

71 Heart Beat Ø

72 Foot Steps Ø

84 Machine Gun Ø

85 Laser Gun Ø

86 Explosion Ø

87 Firework Ø

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

240

1. Channel Messages

1.1 DDK Mode

MIDI Data Format

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks

8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 1ch

2ch

3ch

(4ch)*

5-14ch

15ch



PEDAL

LEAD 1

Keyboard Percussion

9n, nn, 00

9n, nn, 01-7F

Note Off

Note On

1ch

2ch

3ch

(4ch)*

5-14ch

15ch

(1ch)*

(2ch)*

(3ch)*



PEDAL

LEAD 1

Keyboard Percussion

An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 00, 00-7F

Bn, 20, 00-7F

Bank select 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression 16ch

(4ch)*

16ch

(4ch)**

Control

LEAD 1

Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 06, 00-7F

Bn, 26, 00-7F

Data Entry 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression 16ch

5-14ch

(16ch)* Control

Bn, 40, 00-7F Sustain

Hold



5-14ch

(16ch)*



Control

Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 4

D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 5-14ch  XG

Bn, 60, 00-7F

Bn, 61, 00-7F

Data Increment

Data Decrement

5-14ch  XG

Bn, 62, 00-7F

Bn, 63, 00-7F

NRPN LSB

NRPN MSB

5-14ch  XG

Bn, 64, 00-7F

Bn, 65, 00-7F

RPN LSB

RPN MSB

5-14ch  XG

“” indicates “Not available.”

“

” indicates “Available.”

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

241

* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 230).

** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.

1.2 XG Mode

Bn, 78, 00

Bn, 79, 00

Bn, 7B, 00

Bn, 7C, 00

Bn, 7D, 00

Bn, 7E, 00

Bn, 7F, 00

All Sound Off

Reset All Controllers

All Note Off

Omni Off

Omni On

Mono

Poly

5-14ch ˛ XG

Cn, nn Program Change 5-14ch

16ch

Control

Dn, 00-7F After Touch 1ch

2ch

3ch

(4ch)*

5-14ch

(1ch)*

(2ch)*

PEDAL

LEAD 1

En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 1ch

2ch

(4ch)*

(1-16ch)*

LEAD 1

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks

8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 1-16ch ˛

9n, nn, 00

9n, nn, 01-7F

Note On

Note Off

1-16ch

(1ch)*

(2ch)*

(3ch)*

PEDAL

An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 00, 00-7F

Bn, 20, 00-7F

Bank select 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation

1-16ch

Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression ˛ 16ch

(4ch)**

Control

LEAD 1

Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 06, 00-7F

Bn, 26, 00-7F

Data Entry 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression

1-16ch

(16ch)* Control

Bn, 40, 00-7F Sustain

Hold

1-16ch (16ch)*

Control

Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 1-16ch ˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

242

* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 230).

** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.

2. Realtime Messages

* Received only when in the Ext. mode

3. System Exclusive Messages

3.1 Format

Universal Realtime Messages

Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 60, 00-7F

Bn, 61, 00-7F

Data Increment

Data Decrement

1-16ch ˛

Bn, 62, 00-7F

Bn, 63, 00-7F

NRPN LSB

NRPN MSB

1-16ch ˛

Bn, 64, 00-7F

Bn, 65, 00-7F

RPN LSB

RPN MSB

1-16ch ˛

Bn, 78, 00

Bn, 79, 00

Bn, 7B, 00

Bn, 7C, 00

Bn, 7D, 00

Bn, 7E, 00

Bn, 7F, 00

All Sound Off

Reset All Controllers

All Note Off

Omni Off

Omni On

Mono

Poly

1-16ch ˛

Cn, 00-7F Program Change

1-16ch

16ch Control

Dn, 00-7F After Touch

1-16ch

(1ch)*

(2ch)*

PEDAL

En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend

1-16ch

(1-16ch)*

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks

F8 Clock Ø* Ø

FA Start ØØ

FC Stop ØØ

FE Active Sensing ØØ

FF Reset ˛˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 01, SS, TT, F7

GM2 Master Volume Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 03, SS, TT, F7

GM2 Master Fine Tuning Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 04, 00, TT, F7

GM2 Master Coarse Tuning Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 01, PP, VV, ..., F7

GM2 Reverb Parameter Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 02, PP, VV, ..., F7

GM2 Chorus Parameter Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 01, 0n, PP, VV, ..., F7

GM2 After Touch Parameter Ø˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

243

Universal Non-Realtime Messages

XG Native

Clavinova Exclusive

Message Exclusive

Electone Exclusive

˛: don’t care N: Device Number (“0” on DDK-7) ID: Model ID (DDK-7 = 52H)

F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 03, 0n, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7

GM2 Control Change Parameter Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 0A, 01, 0n, KK, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7

GM2 Key-Based Controller Ø˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7

GM ON Ø˛

F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 03, F7

GM2 ON Ø˛

F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 02, F7

GM OFF Ø˛

F0, 7E, 7F, 08, 08, JJ, GG, MM, ..data.., F7

GM2 Scale/Octave Tuning Ø˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 43, 1N, 4C, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., F7 XG Parameter Change Ø˛

F0, 43, 0N, 4C, BH, BL, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., cc, F7 XG Bulk Dump Ø˛

F0, 43, 1N, 27, 30, 00, 00, MM, LL, cc, F7 XG Master Tuning Ø˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 43, 73, 01, 02, F7

Request for Internal Synch. Mode

Request for External Synch. Mode

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 43, 60, 7A, F7 Rhythm Start Ø˛

F0, 43, 60, 7D, F7 Rhythm Stop Ø˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 43, 70, ID, 00, F7 Model ID Data ˛Ø

F0, 43, 70, 70, 30, F7 Request-to-Send Model ID Data Ø˛

F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, nn(*1), 7F, F7

Switch ON

Switch OFF

F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, 50, TL, TH, F7 Tempo ØØ

F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7(*2) Panel Switch Events ØØ

F0, 43, 70, 78, 42, 3C, ..data.., F7 Current Registration Data ØØ

F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, ..data..(*3), F7 MIDI Parameters ØØ

F0, 43, 70, 70, 70, nn(*4), F7 MDR Ø˛

F0, 43, 70, 70, 73, F7 EL ON Ø˛

F0, 43, 70, 70, 78, 00, 00, F7 Bar Signal ˛Ø

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

244

*1. Switches

*2. Panel Switch Events

Selectors

Volume

Organ Flute Voice

To Lower

Solo Mode

nn Switch Receive Transmit

45H Left Footswitch ØØ

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

0F Registration Memory [1-16] Ø [00-0F] ˛ -

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

12 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

13 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

14 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

15 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

16 Lead Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

17 Pedal Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

18 Pedal Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

19 Lead Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

1A Percussion Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

1B Reverb Depth Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Depth Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

30 Upper Organ Flute Voice

[U. ORGAN FLUTES]

Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

31 Lower Organ Flute Voice

[L. ORGAN FLUTES]

Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

36 Lead Voice 1 To Lower

[TO LOWER ▼]

Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

37 Pedal Voice 1 To Lower

[TO LOWER ▲]

Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

38 Pedal Voice 2 To Lower

[TO LOWER ▲]

Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

39 Lead Voice 2 Solo (Knee)

[SOLO (FOOT PEDAL)]

Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

MIDI Exclusive Format

F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

245

Brilliance

Sustain

Solo Bar

Keyboard Percussion

Disable

Rotary Speaker

Rhythm Sequence

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

42 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW

43 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW

44 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW

45 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW

46 Lead Voice 1 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW

47 Pedal Voice 1 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW

48 Pedal Voice 2 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW

49 Lead Voice 2 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

50 Upper Sustain [UPPER (KNEE)]  [00-01]  - 00:OFF, 01:ON

51 Lower Sustain [LOWER (KNEE)]  [00-01]  - 00:OFF, 01:ON

52 Pedal Sustain [PEDAL]  [00-01]  - 00:OFF, 01:ON

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

59 Solo Bar  [00-01]  - 00:OFF, 01:ON

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

5B Keyboard Percussion [1]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

5C Keyboard Percussion [2]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

5F Disable [D.]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

60 Rotary Speaker Speed

[ROTARY SP SPEED]

 [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

61 Sequence 1 [SEQ.1]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

62 Sequence 2 [SEQ.2]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

63 Sequence 3 [SEQ.3]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

64 Sequence 4 [SEQ.4]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

246

*3. MIDI Parameter

Voice Section Parameters

Panel Voice Parameters

(Address mm: 0 – 7 = UK1

UK2

LK1

LK2

LEAD 1

LEAD 2

PEDAL 1

PEDAL 2)

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

10 00-07 00-0D 5 00-7F

00-7F

00-02

Voice Assign Number 00-7F

00-7F

00-02

Ø 00-7F

00-7F

00-02

Ø 00-7F

00-7F

10 00-07 10 1 00-0D Voice Selector Number 00-0D Ø 00-0D Ø 00-0D

10 00-07 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

10 00-07 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

10 00-07 13 1 00-7F Brilliance 00:BRILLIANT

40:CENTER

7F:MELLOW

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

10 00-07 14 1 00-04 Feet 00:PRESET

01:16'

02:8'

03:4'

04:2'

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-04

10 00-07 15 1 00-7F Pan 00:LEFT

40:CENTER

7F:RIGHT

Ø 00-7F Ø 08-78

10 00-07 16 1 00-7F Touch Tone Initial Touch 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

10 00-07 17 1 00-7F Touch Tone After Touch 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

10 00-07 18 1 00-7F Pitch After Touch 00:NARROW

7F:WIDE

Ø 00-7F Ø 32-4E

10 00-07 19 1 00-7F User Vibrato 00:PRESET

01:USER

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

10 00-07 1A 1 00-7F Vibrato Delay 00:SHORT

7F:LONG

Ø 00-7F Ø 02-1A

10 00-07 1B 1 00-7F Vibrato Depth 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-54

10 00-07 1C 1 00-7F Vibrato Speed 00:SLOW

7F:FAST

Ø 00-7F Ø 3C-6C

10 00-05 1D 1 00-7F Pitch Horizontal Touch 00:NARROW

7F:WIDE

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

10 00-07 1E 1 00-7F Touch Vibrato (On/Off) 00:OFF

7F:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

10 04-07 1F 1 00-7F TO LOWER▼/▲/SOLO (KNEE) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

10 04-05 20 1 00-02 Slide (On/Foot Pedal/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

02:Foot Pedal

Ø 00-02 Ø 00-02

10 04-05 21 1 00-7F Slide Time 00:FAST

7F:SLOW

Ø 00-7F Ø 02-7F

10 00-07 22 1 00-7F Tune/Detune 00:Down

40:Center

7F:Up

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

10 00-01/

04-07

23 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Pitch Bend 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

10 00-05 24 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Control 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

10 00-07 25 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown

40:Normal

46:KeyUp

Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46

10 06-07 28 1 00-7F Poly (On/Off) 00:Mono

01:Poly

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

10 05 29 1 00-7F Priority (Last/Top) 00:TOP

01:LAST

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

10 00-07 2A 1 00-7F Volume Mute 00:Mute OFF

01:Mute ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

MIDI Exclusive Format

F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, hh, mm, ll, ..., F7

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

247

Organ Flute Voice Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 1 = UK, LK)

10 00-07 40 3 00

00-7F

Effect 1 Type MSB/LSB 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

10 00-07 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 51 3 00

00-7F

Effect 2 Type MSB/LSB 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

10 00-07 52 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 53 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 54 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 55 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 56 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 57 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 58 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 59 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 5A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 5B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 5C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 5D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 5E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 5F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 60 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 61 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 62 1 Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

10 00-07 63 1 Length 7F:Hold

7E:Long

00:Short

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

11 00-01 00 1 00-7F Footage 16' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 01 1 00-7F Footage 8' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 02 1 00-7F Footage 5-1/3' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 03 1 00-7F Footage 4' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 04 1 00-7F Footage 2-2/3' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

248

Keyboard Parameters

Sustain Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 2 = UK, LK, PEDAL)

11 00-01 05 1 00-7F Footage 2' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 06 1 00-7F Footage 1-3/5' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 07 1 00-7F Footage 1-1/3' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 08 1 00-7F Footage 1' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 09 1 00-7F Response 00:FAST

7F:SLOW

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 0A 1 00-7F Attack 4' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 0B 1 00-7F Attack 2-2/3' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 0C 1 00-7F Attack 2' 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 0D 1 00-7F Attack Length 00:Short

7F:Long

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 10 1 00-7F Organ Flutes (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

11 00-01 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

11 00-01 13 1 00-7F Type (Sine/Vintage) 00:Sine

01:Vintage

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

11 00-01 40 3 00

00-7F

Effect Type MSB/LSB 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

11 00-01 41 2 0000-7F7F

1st:ParameterMSB

2nd:ParameterLSB

Effect1 Parameter1 MSB/LSB

Ø 0000-7F7F

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter2 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter3 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter4 MSB/LSB

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter5 MSB/LSB

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter6 MSB/LSB

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter7 MSB/LSB

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter8 MSB/LSB

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter9 MSB/LSB

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter10 MSB/LSB

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter11

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter12

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter13

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter14

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter15

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter16

0000-7F7F

11 00-01 62 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

00-7F

00-01

11 00-01 63 1 00-7F Length 7F:Hold

7E:Long

00:Short

00-7F

15-3D,7F

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

12 00-02 00 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

12 00-02 01 1 00-7F Length 00:Short

7F:Long

Ø 00-7F ˛ 15-3D

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

249

Keyboard Percussion Parameters (Address mm: 1 – 2 = K.B.P. [1], K.B.P. [2])

Rhythm

Rhythm Parameters

Rhythm Sequence Parameters

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

12 01-02 10 1 00-7F Keyboard Percussion (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

12 01-02 11 1 00-08 Keyboard Percussion Menu 00:PRESET

01:USER 1

02:USER 2

03:USER 3

04:USER 4

05:USER 5

06:USER 6

07:USER 7

08:USER 8

Ø 00-08 Ø 00-08

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 00 00-0B 2 0000-7F7F Rhythm Assign Number 0000-7F7F Ø 00-7F

00-7F

Ø 00-7F

00-7F

13 00 10 1 00-0B Rhythm Selector Number 00-0B Ø 00-0B Ø 00-0B

13 00 11 1 00-7F Percussion Volume 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

13 00 12 1 00-7F Percussion Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

13 00 13 1 00-7F 2nd Expression

Tempo Control (On/Off)

00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 14 1 00-7F Footswitch Rhythm Control 00:INTRO 1

01:INTRO 2

02:INTRO 3

08:MAIN A

09:MAIN B

0A:MAIN C

0B:MAIN D

18:BREAK

20:ENDING 1

21:ENDING 2

22:ENDING 3

7E:STOP

7F:OFF

(INTRO 1 –

STOP)

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

13 00 15 1 00-7F Add Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 16 1 00-7F Main Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 17 1 00-7F Chord 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 18 1 00-7F Chord 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 19 1 00-7F Pad (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 1A 1 00-7F Phrase 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 1B 1 00-7F Phrase 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 1C 1 00-7F Auto Fill (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 01 00-03 1 00-7F Sequence [SEQ.1] – [SEQ.4] 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

250

Accompaniment Parameters

A.B.C. Function Parameters

M.O.C. Function Parameters

Section Parameters

Keyboard Percussion Parameters

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 02 11 1 00-7F Accompaniment Volume 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

13 02 12 1 00-7F Accompaniment Reverb

(Send Level)

00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 03 00 1 00-7F Auto Bass Chord Mode 00:OFF

01:Single Finger

02:Fingered

03:Custom A.B.C.

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03

13 03 01 1 00-7F Lower Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 03 02 1 00-7F Pedal Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 04 00 1 00-7F Melody On Chord Mode 00:OFF

01:1

02:2

03:3

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03

13 04 01 1 00-7F M.O.C. Foot Pedal Control

(On/Off)

00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 05 00 1 00-7F Intro 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 01 1 00-7F Intro 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 02 1 00-7F Intro 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 08 1 00-7F Main A (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 09 1 00-7F Main B (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 0A 1 00-7F Main C (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 0B 1 00-7F Main D (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 18 1 00-7F Break (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 20 1 00-7F Ending 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 21 1 00-7F Ending 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 22 1 00-7F Ending 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 10 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

13 10 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

251

Overall

System Parameters

Effect Parameters (Overall): Reverb

Effect Parameters (Overall): Rhythm Reverb

Effect Parameters (Overall): Rotary Speaker

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

14 00 00 1 00-7F Disable (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

14 00 01 1 00-7F Organ Flute Attack Mode 00:Each

01:First

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

14 00 02 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown

40:Normal

46:KeyUp

Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46

14 00 03 1 01-0C 2nd Expression Range 01:100 C

0C:1200 C

Ø 01-0C Ø 01-0C

14 00 04 1 00-7F Footswitch Mode 00:OFF

01:Rhythm

02:Glide

03:

Rotary Speaker

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03

14 00 05 1 00-7F Pitch 00:PitchDown

40:Normal

7F:PitchUp

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

14 00 06 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Time 00:FAST

7F:SLOW

Ø 00-7F Ø 04-1C

14 00 08 1 00-7F MIDI Control Expression (INT/EXT) 00:Internal

01:External

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

14 00 09 1 00-7F MIDI Control Lead 1 (INT/EXT) 00:Internal

01:External

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

14 00 0A 3 00-04, 06

00-03

00-0B

Registration Menu 00-04, 06

00-03

00-0B

Ø 00-04, 06

00-03

00-0B

Ø 00-04, 06

00-03

00-0B

14 00 0B 1 00-01 Disable Mode 00: Normal

01: Tempo

Ø 00-01 Ø 00-01

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

14 01 00 1 00-7F Reverb Depth 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

14 01 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Panel) 00:FAST

7F:SLOW

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45

14 01 02 3 00

00-7F

Reverb Type (Panel) 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

14 02 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Rhythm) 00:FAST

7F:SLOW

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45

14 02 02 3 00

00-7F

Reverb Type (Rhythm) 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

14 03 00 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

14 03 01 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed Control

Mode

00:STOP

01:SLOW

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

14 03 02 2 0000-

007F

Rotary Speaker Speed Control

Speed

0000:SLOW

007F:FAST

Ø 0000-007F Ø 0040-007F

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

252

AUX OUT

Foot Pedal

4. MDR

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

14 04 00-13 1 00-03 AUX OUT

Address II: 00-07 = UK1, UK2,

LK1, LK2, Lead1, Lead2,

PEDAL1, PEDAL2

08 = Upper Organ Flutes, 09 =

Lower Organ Flutes, 0A = Main

Drum, 0B = Add Drum, 0C =

Accompaniment, 11 = KBP, 12 =

MIC, 13 = XG

00:MAIN

01:SUB1

02:SUB2

03:SUB1&2

Ø 00,04-7F

Ø 00

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

14 05 00 1 00-09 Foot Pedal 1 Assign 00:OFF

01:Expression

02:Sustain

03:Slide

04:MOC

05:Solo

06:Rhythm Control

07:Glide

08:Rotary Speaker

09:Regist Shift

Ø 00,0A-7F

Ø 00

14 05 01 1 00-01 Foot Pedal 1 Polarity 00:-

01:+

Ø 00

14 05 02 1 00-7F Foot Pedal 1 Data (ON/OFF) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

14 05 10 1 00-09 Foot Pedal 2 Assign 00:OFF

01:Expression

02:Sustain

03:Slide

04:MOC

05:Solo

06:Rhythm Control

07:Glide

08:Rotary Speaker

09:Regist Shift

Ø 00,0A-7F

Ø 00

14 05 11 1 00-01 Foot Pedal 2 Polarity 00:-

01:+

Ø 00

14 05 12 1 00-7F Foot Pedal 2 Data (ON/OFF) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

nn Command Receive Transmit

01H Play Start Ø˛

02H Play Stop Ø˛

03H Record Start Ø˛

04H Record Stop Ø˛

05H Fast Forward Start Ø˛

06H Fast Forward Stop Ø˛

09H Rhythm Pointer Reset Ø˛

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

253

0, 32

1, 5, 7, 10

6, 38

65-67

71-78

84, 91, 93, 94

96, 97

98-99, 100-101

:True Voice

1, 2, 3, 16

(

1-16

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

˛ 9nH, v=0

(

10)

************************

*1;

*2;

*3;

*4;

*5;

*6;

*8;

*10;

*11;

*7; CONTROL only

*9; External Mode only

1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 16ch: CONTROL

1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 4ch: LEAD1, 5-14ch: XG, 15ch: KEYBOARD PERCUSSION, 16ch: CONTROL

UK: 48-96, LK: 36-96, PEDAL: 36-60

UK, LK, PEDAL, LEAD1: 36-96, XG: 0-127, PERCUSSION: 3-127

UK: UK HorizontalTouch, LK: LK HorizontalTouch

XG only

UK only

CONTROL: 0-15

UK, LK, PEDAL, CONTROL: 0-15 XG: 0-127

Mode 3

************************

36-96

(

************************

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

(

1-3, 5-16

(

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH

(

6, 7)

(

6, 7)

(

11)

(

Ø (120)

(

Ø (121)

(

Ø (123-127)

(

Mode 3

0-127

(

Bank Select

Expression

Data Entry

Expression

VA After Touch

Sustain

Sound Controller

Data Entry SW

NRPN, RPN

(FAH, FCH)

Ø : Yes

˛ : No

Date: 6-Apr-2006

Version: 1.00

YAMAHA DDK / Model: DDK-7

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

TransmittedFunction Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Note

Number

Velocity

After

Touch

Pitch Bend

Control

Change

Program

Change

System Exclusive

System

Common

System

Real Time

Aux

Messages

Notes

Mode

Default

Changed

Note on

Note off

Key's

Ch's

:Clock

:Commands

:All Sound Off

:Reset All Cntrls

:Local On/Off

:All Notes Off

:Active Sense

:Reset

:Song Position

:Song Select

:Tune

:True number

Default

Messages

Altered

MIDI Implementation Chart

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

254

0, 32

1, 5, 7, 10

6, 38

65-67

71-78

84, 91, 93, 94

96, 97

98-99, 100-101

:True Voice

1, 2, 3, 16

1-16

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

˛ 9nH, v=0

Ø 0-15

************************

*1;

Same as that in the EL mode

Mode3

************************

36-96

************************

1-16

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH

Mode 3

0-127

Bank Select

Expression

Data Entry

Expression

VA After Touch

Sustain

Sound Controller

Data Entry SW

NRPN, RPN

Date: 6-Apr-2006

Version: 1.00

YAMAHA [XG mode] / Model: DDK-7

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Ø : Yes

˛ : No

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

Ø (120)

Ø (121)

Ø (123-127)

Transmitted

(

Function Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Note

Number

Velocity

After

Touch

Pitch Bend

Control

Change

Program

Change

System Exclusive

System

Common

System

Real Time

Aux

Messages

Notes

Mode

Default

Changed

Note on

Note off

Key's

Ch's

:Clock

:Commands

:Song Position

:Song Select

:Tune

:True number

Default

Messages

Altered

:All Sound Off

:Reset All Cntrls

:Local On/Off

:All Notes Off

:Active Sense

:Reset

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

255

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

GENERAL OPERATION

The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after

turning the power on.

This is normal; the DDK-7 takes a while to start up.

A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an

electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the DDK-7. If this

occurs, plug the DDK-7 into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from

the device that seems to be the source of the problem.

Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an

amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone.

The sound of the DDK-7 causes surrounding objects

to resonate.

Because the DDK-7 is capable of producing powerful bass sounds,

resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass

windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the DDK-7’s volume.

In the LCD display, there are some black points (unlit)

or white points (always lit).

Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs.

The sound is too small even when the volume is set to

its maximum.

• The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it

clockwise.

• The Expression Pedal or Foot Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it

down with your toe.

Foot Pedals has no effect. “OFF” is selected in the Foot Pedal display. Select function to assign it to the

Foot Pedal. (page 203)

The DDK-7 panel does not function normally or the

content of the memorized data has changed.

This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to

electrical storms or other reasons may cause the DDK-7 to malfunction and/or

alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory Set

operation to reset the DDK-7 (page 24).

The Pedal Unit does not work. A cable of the Pedal Unit is disconnected. Make sure that power is OFF when

connecting or disconnecting the pedal.

Some parts cannot be heard from the Headphones or

an external speakers.

The parts are assigned to AUX OUT SUB jacks. If you want to hear all parts

from Headphones, select AUX OUT MAIN jacks for all parts. (page 220) If you

want to hear all parts from an external speakers, use the output from the mixer.

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

256

VOICES/RHYTHMS

The pitch may sound excessively high on the

Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the

Lower and Upper keyboards.

This may occur when you compare the DDK-7’s sounds with that of a piano.

Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the

DDK-7 is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges.

Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy

sounds.

You may ﬁnd these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely

added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind

instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks.

When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes

sound.

Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower

Keyboards) is 14 notes. When you turn the Pedal Polyphonic mode to on, the

total is 14 for all keyboards, Upper, Lower and Pedalboard.

Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead

or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played.

For practical performance reasons, the DDK-7 has been designed so that

only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time. If you want,

the pedal Voice can be set to polyphonic mode (page 43).

The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the

volume is properly set.

• The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn

off the mode in the display (page 72).

• TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal Voice sections are turned on. Turn the

function off (page 30).

When selecting a Voice or rhythm, the Voice or rhythm

title at the top of the LCD does not match the selected

Voice or rhythm.

The currently assigned Voice or rhythm is displayed at the top of the LCD, and

remains until another Voice or rhythm has been selected.

When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion

instruments are also heard.

The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the

function, be sure to turn it off (page 75).

Even though a User button’s rhythm has been

selected and started, the pattern does not sound.

Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern

has not been saved to the selected User button.

EFFECTS

The Touch Tone function does not operate. Adjust the Touch Tone settings in the Voice Condition display (page 42).

The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice

sections, even when the total Reverb depth on the

panel is increased.

Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb Display

Pages 2 – 3.

The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even

when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button in the DISPLAY

SELECT section is on.

Rotary Speaker must be selected ﬁrst in Voice Condition display Pages 3 and/

or 4 (for panel Voices), or in the Organ Flute Voices ATTACK/VOLUME Page

(for Organ Flute Voices).

ACCOMPANIMENT

The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change,

even when pressing different keys of the keyboard.

Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a ﬁxed octave

interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed

outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.

While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing,

the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound,

even when the keys are played.

Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the

Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of

an Intro/Ending pattern.

The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an

appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the

rhythm has been started.

• The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the

Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 72).

• All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on

(page 71).

The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function

cannot be heard.

The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the

volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices.

The bass phrase of the Auto Bass Cord cannot be

heard.

The pedal polyphonic mode may be set to on. Turn it off in the Voice Condition

display (page 43).

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Certain functions have not been memorized to

Registration Memory.

Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 91.

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

257

VOICE EDITING

During Voice editing, the speciﬁed Voice isn’t heard,

even when the keyboard is played.

• The Element is turned to mute or its level is set to minimum. Turn it to on or

increase the volume.

•You may have played keys outside the range of Note Limit. Play only keys

within the Note Limit range.

An error message appears while the Voice name is

entered.

Voice name capacity is 16 characters. Delete the unnecessary letters or

spaces.

RHYTHM PROGRAM

During use of the Rhythm Pattern Program, no sound

is produced even when you play a certain percussion

sound.

If percussion sounds have been recorded while memory is full, no

subsequently selected instruments can be heard or recorded. If necessary,

erase some of the less necessary percussion sounds and play again.

MUSIC DATA RECORDER

Recording or playback cannot be performed. • The part buttons in the Rec Standby display or Playing display may have

been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY.

• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording

performance data is 1 MB.

• The media is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.

Recording is stopped before the performance is

ﬁnished.

• The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit.

Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs.

• When you overwrite the song, the length of a subsequently recorded part

cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the

previously recorded song, then record again (page 139).

• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording

performance data is 1 MB.

An error message appears while entering a folder

name or song name.

• The song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 letters.

• The song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 122.

• The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234 letters.

Reduce the layer or shorten the song/folder name to shorten the path.

The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a

recording, or stops in the middle of the performance.

The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very

beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time

indicator appears in the display.

The ﬂoppy disk cannot be formatted when you want to

format an unformatted disk.

Recognizing an unformatted disk takes a few seconds after it is inserted.

Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again.

The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound

continuously.

During playback, you may have removed the USB ﬂash memory or ﬂoppy

disk. Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the [J] (Stop)

button before removing the media.

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

258

Speciﬁcations

KEYBOARD Keyboard Type

UPPER: 49 Keys (C-C) Standard (FS)

LOWER: 61Keys (C-C) Standard (FS)

Touch Tone

UPPER: Initial Touch/After Touch

LOWER: Initial Touch/After Touch

TONE GENERATION

AWM2

Maximum Polyphony

Voice Sections: 128 notes

Organ/Rhythm Sections, XG: 128 notes

Multi Timbral Capacity

Wave

Voice Sections: 177MB (when converted to 16-bit linear format)

Organ/Rhythm Sections, XG: 166MB (when converted to 16-bit linear format)

Registration Memory

1-16, D. (Disable)

Basic Registration

1-16, Current Registration

Registration Menu

288 Registrations

Voice Preset Voice

Preset: 415 Voices + 25 Drum Kits

XG (Only for playing): 480 Voices + 11 Drum Kits

User Voice: 16

Voice Sections

UPPER: 2, LEAD: 2, LOWER: 2, PEDAL: 2

Voice Buttons

SECTION SELECT, VOLUME UP/DOWN,

TO LOWER (LEAD1, PEDAL1,2), SOLO (LEAD2)

Effects

Reverb: 29 Types x 2 (Voice/Rhythm), Brilliance, Sustain,

Insertion(1, 2)x 183 Types x 8

Organ Flute Voice Organ Sections

UPPER, LOWER

Type

SINE, VINTAGE

Footage

16’, 5 1/3’, 8’, 4’, 2 2/3’, 2’, 1 3/5’, 1 1/3’, 1’,

Attack: 4’, 2 2/3’, 2’, LENGTH, RESPONSE

Mode

FIRST, EACH

Organ Effect

15 Type

Control

U.ORGAN FLUTES, L.ORGAN FLUTES, ROTARY SP SPEED

Rhythm Rhythm

Preset: 274 Pattern x 7 parts x 15 Sections

User Rhythm: 48 Pattern x 7 parts x 15 Sections

Rhythm Buttons

SECTION SELECT, VOLUME UP/DOWN

Parts

Main Drum, Add Drum, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2

Rhythm Control

INTRO 1,2,3, ENDING 1,2,3, MAIN A,B,C,D, FILL IN A,B,C,D, BREAK

Tempo

40 - 240

Keyboard Percussion

Preset: 2, User: 8

Subordinate

Performance

Auto Bass Chord

3 Type, Memory (LOWER, PEDAL)

Melody On Chord

3 Type, Memory (LOWER, PEDAL)

PROGRAMS Voice Edit Layers

AWM (4)

Parameter

Element ON/OFF, EQ Low Frequency, EQ Low Gain, EQ High Frequency, EQ

High Gain, Level, Note Limit, Pan, Note Shift, Tune Fine, Attack Rate, Release

Rate, Cutoff Frequency, Resonance, LFO waveform, LFO Speed, LFO Pitch

Modulation Depth, LFO Frequency Modulation Depth, LFO Amplitude

Modulation Depth

Rhythm Pattern

Program

Sections

INTRO 1, 2, 3, ENDING 1, 2, 3, MAIN A, B, C, D, FILL IN A, B, C, D, BREAK

Note Resolution

480 ppq (parts per quarter note)

Beat

2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4

Measure

Kits

20 Drum Kits + 5 SFX Kits

Accompaniment

Chord1, 2

Voice

480 Voices

Effects

Reverb: 29 Types, Chorus:15 Types, Variations: 183 Type

Percussion Instrument

Setting

Pan, Volume, Reverb, Pitch Coarse/Fine

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

259

Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or

modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not be the same in

every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Rhythm Sequence

Program

Sequence

140 measures x 4 Sequences

Registration

Sequence Program

Sequence

140 Registration x 4 Sequence, Next Registration

Set Resolution

96 ppq (parts per quarter note)

Keyboard Percussion

Assign

Kits

16 Drum Kits

Drum Setup

Pan, Volume, Reverb, Pitch Coarse/Fine

Registration Shift Steps

80 Steps

Shift End

Stop, Top, Next Regist

Unifying parameter Parameters

Reverb (Voice/Rhythm), Volume, Pan, Brilliance, Sustain

M. D. R. Folder

Up to 100 folders can exist in one media.

Song

Up to 100 songs can exist in one folder.

Registration

Up to 50 Registrations can exist in one song.

Recording

UPPER, LOWER, PEDAL, CONTROL, LEAD, K.B.P.

Playing

UPPER, LOWER, PEDAL, CONTROL, LEAD, K.B.P., XG

Sequence Format

DDK Original format (Copy Protect), SMF format 0, 1 (Format 1 load only)

Format Conversion

Convert TO EL, Convert FROM EL, Convert to XG

CONTROLS Display Control

VOICE DISPLAY, REGIST MENU, FOOT SWITCH, MDR, UTILITY, PROGRAM,

SUSTAIN, REVERB

Foot Pedal Section

1 (Expression), 2 (Sustain)

Select

Expression, Sustain, Rhythm, Glide, Rotary speaker, Slide, M.O.C.

FootSwitch (When

DDKU-P7 is used)

Left

Rhythm, Glide, Rotary speaker

Right

Shift, Jump, User

OTHERS LCD Display Size

6.5-inch 144 (W) x 78.24 (H) mm

Liquid Crystal Display

TFT (WVGA) + touch panel

Drive Method

Active Matrix

Dots

800 x RGB x 480 dots

Connectors

PHONES, MIC, MIC VOLUME, OUTPUT L/L+R, R (Phone), AUX OUT (LEVEL

FIXED) MAIN L/L+R, R, SUB 1, 2 (Phone), AUX IN L/L+R, R (Phone), TO

PEDAL, OPTICAL OUT, USB TO DEVICE x 2, USB TO HOST, MIDI IN/OUT,

FOOT PEDAL 1 (VOLUME), 2 (SUSTAIN), AC INLET

Power Consumption

51 W

Dimensions (W x D x H), Weight

1,150 (W) x 424 (D) x 173 (H) mm, 18 kg

Supplied Accessories

Owner’s Manual, AC Power cord

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

260

Numerics

2nd Expression Pedal............................................................. 211

AC INLET jack......................................................................... 215

ACCENT.................................................................................. 164

Accompaniment........................................................................ 71

Add Drum ................................................................................. 71

AFTER touch (Pitch).................................................................. 43

AFTER touch (Touch Tone)....................................................... 42

ASSEMBLE ............................................................................. 160

ASSIGN (Keyboard Percussion)............................................... 80

ATTACK (Organ Flutes) ............................................................ 39

ATTACK RATE (Voice Edit)..................................................... 150

Auto Bass Chord....................................................................... 72

Auto Fill ..................................................................................... 65

AUX IN .................................................................................... 216

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) ....................................................... 217

AWM (Voice Edit).................................................................... 147

BAR/BEAT................................................................................. 67

BREAK ...................................................................................... 64

Channel Messages ................................................................. 228

CHORD 1 .................................................................................. 71

CHORD 2 .................................................................................. 71

CHORUS (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................... 176

Control Change....................................................................... 228

CUSTOM A.B.C. ....................................................................... 73

CUTOFF FREQ........................................................................ 150

[D.] (Disable) ............................................................................ 92

DATA CONTROL dial................................................................ 10

DELAY (Vibrato)........................................................................ 44

DEPTH (Reverb) ....................................................................... 47

DEPTH (Vibrato)........................................................................ 44

Display Select ........................................................................... 10

EACH (Organ Flutes) ................................................................ 39

EFFECT ..................................................................................... 46

Effect category (Voice) ............................................................. 46

Effect Parameters ..................................................................... 46

EFFECT TYPE (Organ Flutes) ................................................... 40

Effect type (Voice) .................................................................... 46

Element ................................................................................... 144

ENDING .................................................................................... 64

EQ (Equalizer)......................................................................... 148

EXTERNAL .............................................................................. 231

Factory Set ................................................................................24

Fast Forward............................................................................132

FEET ..........................................................................................43

File ...........................................................................................110

FILL IN .......................................................................................63

Filter.........................................................................................150

FINGERED CHORD...................................................................73

FIRST (Organ Flutes).................................................................39

Folder ......................................................................................110

Foot Pedal ...............................................................................203

FOOT PEDAL jacks .................................................................216

FOOT SWITCH ..................................................................96, 200

FOOTAGE..................................................................................38

Footswitches............................................................................200

FORMAT (MDR).......................................................................112

Gate Time ................................................................................172

Glide ........................................................................................202

Headphones............................................................................217

INITIAL touch.............................................................................42

Initialize (Factory Set) ................................................................24

Initialize (Registration Memory) .................................................95

INTERNAL ...............................................................................231

INTRO........................................................................................63

Jacks and Controls..................................................................215

JUMP .........................................................................................97

Keyboard Percussion ................................................................75

L. ORGAN FLUTES....................................................................38

LANGUAGE...............................................................................16

LAST (Lead Voice) ....................................................................43

LAYER (Voice Edit)..................................................................148

LCD BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................17

LCD Display ..............................................................................10

LEAD 1, 2 ....................................................................................8

Lead Slide .................................................................................45

Lead Voice ................................................................................25

LEVEL (Voice Edit) ..................................................................149

LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) .............................................152

LOWER 1, 2 .................................................................................8

Lower Keyboard Voice ..............................................................26

Index

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

261

[M.] (Memory) ........................................................................... 90

M.O.C........................................................................................ 74

MAIN ......................................................................................... 63

Main Drum ................................................................................ 71

MAIN/FILL IN ............................................................................ 63

MASTER VOLUME .................................................................... 12

MDR ........................................................................................ 106

Melody On Chord ..................................................................... 74

MEMORY (A.B.C.)..................................................................... 74

METRONOME ......................................................................... 159

MIC jack.................................................................................. 215

MIC VOLUME.......................................................................... 215

MIDI ........................................................................................ 227

MIDI Control............................................................................ 230

MIDI IN/OUT ........................................................................... 216

MIDI OUT FILTER ................................................................... 230

MODE (Organ Flutes) ............................................................... 39

MODE (Rotary Speaker) ........................................................... 52

Music Data Recorder.............................................................. 106

Next Regist ............................................................................. 125

NEXT REGIST (Shift End).......................................................... 98

NOTE LIMIT ............................................................................ 149

NOTE SHIFT............................................................................ 149

OPTICAL OUT......................................................................... 216

Organ Flutes ............................................................................. 38

OUTPUT (MIDI)....................................................................... 230

PAD........................................................................................... 71

PAN (Voice Edit) ..................................................................... 149

PAN (Voice) .............................................................................. 42

Part (Rhythm) ............................................................................ 71

Pause ...................................................................................... 132

PEDAL 1, 2.................................................................................. 8

Pedal polyphonic mode............................................................ 43

Pedal Unit ............................................................................... 221

Pedal Voice............................................................................... 26

PHONES ................................................................................. 215

PHRASE 1 ................................................................................. 71

PHRASE 2 ................................................................................. 71

Pitch ........................................................................................ 214

PITCH (Voice Section) .............................................................. 43

Pitch Bend .............................................................................. 212

Playback ................................................................................. 130

POLY......................................................................................... 43

Power ........................................................................................ 12

PRESET (Vibrato) ...................................................................... 44

Preset Keyboard Percussion .................................................... 75

PRESET TEMPO........................................................................ 67

PRIORITY .................................................................................. 43

PROGRAM .............................................................................. 155

Program Change .................................................................... 228

Protected Song ....................................................................... 129

Punch-in Recording ................................................................ 120

Quantize ..................................................................................168

Real Time Write ...............................................................161, 169

Recording................................................................................117

Recording (Lead Voice 1 Voice only)......................................118

Recording (Part) ......................................................................118

REGIST EDIT (MDR)................................................................123

REGIST MENU...........................................................................21

Registration Memory .................................................................90

Registration Sequence ............................................................195

Registration Shift .......................................................................95

RELEASE RATE (Voice Edit) ...................................................150

Repeat .....................................................................................133

RESONANCE...........................................................................150

RESP. (Response) .....................................................................39

Reverb .......................................................................................47

REVERB (MIC.)........................................................................225

REVERB (Panel) ........................................................................47

REVERB (Rhythm Pattern Program) ........................................175

Rewind.....................................................................................132

Rhythm ......................................................................................61

Rhythm button ...........................................................................61

Rhythm Clock ..........................................................................163

Rhythm Condition ......................................................................65

Rhythm Menu ............................................................................62

Rhythm Pattern Program .........................................................155

Rhythm Program......................................................................154

Rhythm Sequence Program ....................................................190

Rhythmic Chord.......................................................................170

ROTARY SP SPEED...................................................................52

Rotary Speaker..........................................................................51

Sections.....................................................................................63

SHIFT (Registration Shift) ..........................................................96

SHIFT END ................................................................................98

SINGLE FINGER........................................................................73

SLIDE.........................................................................................45

SLOW (Rotary Speaker) ............................................................52

SOLO.........................................................................................31

Song ................................................................................110, 113

Song Copy...............................................................................137

Song Delete.............................................................................139

Specifications ..........................................................................258

SPEED (Rotary Speaker) ...........................................................52

SPEED (Vibrato) ........................................................................44

START........................................................................................64

Step Write ................................................................................161

STOP (Rotary Speaker) .............................................................52

STOP (Shift End)........................................................................98

Style File Format ......................................................................182

Sustain.......................................................................................50

SUSTAIN (Panel) .......................................................................50

SYNCHRO START .....................................................................64

System Exclusive Messages ...................................................228

System Messages ...................................................................228

Appendix

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual

262

TEMPO (MDR) ........................................................................ 132

TEMPO (Rhythm) ...................................................................... 67

TIME (Slide) .............................................................................. 45

TO LOWER................................................................................ 30

TOP (Lead Voice) ..................................................................... 43

TOP (Shift End) ......................................................................... 98

TOUCH PANEL SOUND ........................................................... 17

TOUCH TONE........................................................................... 42

TOUCH VIBRATO ..................................................................... 45

Transpose ............................................................................... 214

TRANSPOSE (Voice section) .................................................... 45

TUNE (Voice section)................................................................ 45

TUNE FINE (Voice Edit) .......................................................... 149

U. ORGAN FLUTES .................................................................. 38

UPPER 1, 2 ................................................................................. 8

Upper Keyboard Voice ............................................................. 25

USB TO DEVICE ............................................................. 216, 226

USB TO DEVICE terminal ....................................................... 215

USB TO HOST ................................................................ 216, 222

USER (Registration Shift) .......................................................... 97

USER (Vibrato).......................................................................... 44

User Keyboard Percussion....................................................... 80

User Rhythm ........................................................................... 179

User Voice .............................................................................. 152

UTILITY ..................................................................................... 16

VARIATION (Rhythm Pattern Program) .................................. 177

Version ...................................................................................... 24

VIBRATO................................................................................... 44

Voice ......................................................................................... 25

Voice button.............................................................................. 27

Voice Condition................................................................... 29, 42

VOICE DISPLAY........................................................................ 18

Voice Edit................................................................................ 144

Voice section ............................................................................ 25

Volume (Accompaniment) ........................................................ 72

Volume (Keyboard Percussion) ................................................ 76

VOLUME (MIC.) ...................................................................... 225

VOLUME (Organ Flutes) ........................................................... 39

VOLUME (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................... 174

VOLUME (Rhythm).................................................................... 66

VOLUME (Voice)....................................................................... 29

XG ............................................................................................... 6

Manual Development Department

Published 06/2015 MWTO-D0

Printed in Japan

Yamaha Global Site

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com

WZ07700

Transcripción de documentos

DDK-7 Owner’s Manual v1.1 EN PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. (1)B-11 2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1/2 • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Saving data Saving and backing up your data • Always save data to a USB flash memory or other external media, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error. Backing up the external media • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two external media. The name plate of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. The serial number of this product may be found on or near the name plate. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Model No. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Serial No. (bottom) (1)B-11 2/2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Congratulations! You are the proud owner of a fine electronic keyboard, the DDK-7. The Yamaha DDK-7 combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical versatility. In order to make the most of your DDK-7 and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference. Accessories • Owner’s Manual • Power cord 4 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Main Features Wide Variety of Registration Menus page 21 The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 288 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the DDK-7 for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit your own performance needs. Richly textured, four-layer AWM Voices and High Quality Digital Effects pages 25 and 53 The DDK-7 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices – 415 altogether – created with the AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. The authentic touch response keyboard lets you play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there are 183 different effect types in 15 categories that you can apply to each Voice section —letting you enhance and even completely change the character of the Voices, without having to use the Voice Edit features. Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 61 The exceptionally of wide selection of 274 rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) – such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and Break – that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional. Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing basic backing as well as embellishments. Comprehensive input and output connectors ideal for live performance page 215 Since the DDK-7 is equipped with two types of AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and SUB, you can select outputs for each part. This lets you add an external effect to a specific part, or adjust the volume balance among the parts with an external mixer—allowing you to build up your own system and create just the sound you want. Large, 6.5-inch TFT-LCD with Intuitive Touch Panel Operation page 13 This large LCD display not only lets you clearly see a wide selection of settings and parameters at almost any angle, it also serves as a touch control panel — letting you intuitively make selections and adjust settings simply by touching the screen! Once you touch a setting, you can even adjust it in finer detail if necessary with the Data Control dial. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 The DDK-7 is compatible with the following formats. “GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects. The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. • Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • The pan flute and sitar, shown in the displays of the DDK-7, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments. • This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. 6 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Contents Accessories ..............................................................4 Main Features ...........................................................5 Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Front Panel ................................................................8 LCD Display/Display Select ....................................10 Overview .................................................................10 Getting Started ........................................................11 Using the LCD Display............................................13 LCD Display Settings ..............................................16 Voice Display ..........................................................18 Registration Menu ...................................................21 Confirming the Version of Your DDK-7....................24 Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7) .........................24 2 Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Voices for each keyboard .......................................25 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons .................27 Voice List.................................................................33 3 Organ Flutes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 4 Voice Controls and Effects . . . . . . . . . 41 Selecting from the Voice Condition display ............42 Selecting from the panel .........................................47 Effect List ................................................................53 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . 61 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button..............61 Rhythm List .............................................................69 Accompaniment ......................................................71 Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) ...................................................................72 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) .....................................74 Keyboard Percussion..............................................75 6 Registration Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Storing Registrations ...............................................90 Selecting Registrations ...........................................92 Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory 94 Initializing Registration Memory ..............................95 Registration Shift .....................................................95 Unifying a specific parameter ...............................101 Copying Registrations...........................................104 Quick Introductory Guide 2 Voices 3 Organ Flutes 4 Voice Controls and Effects 5 Rhythm/ Keyboard Percussion 6 Registration Memory 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 8 Voice Edit 9 Rhythm Program 8 Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Voice Structure......................................................144 Editing a Voice ......................................................145 Saving the edited Voice ........................................152 Quitting Voice Edit.................................................153 Recalling an Edited Voice .....................................153 9 Rhythm Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 1 Quick Introductory Guide . . . . . . . . . . 11 1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation ....154 Rhythm Pattern Program .......................................155 Rhythm Sequence Program ..................................190 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to External Media ..................................................199 10 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Footswitches .........................................................200 Foot Pedal .............................................................203 Expression Pedals.................................................211 11 Transpose and Pitch Controls . . . . 214 12 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Accessory Jacks and Controls .............................215 Connecting Headphones or External System .......217 Connecting a Pedal Unit .......................................221 Connecting a Foot Pedal.......................................221 Connection with Computer....................................222 Connecting External Devices................................223 MIDI .......................................................................227 MIDI Control ..........................................................230 13 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 XG Voice & Drum List............................................232 XG Drum Map .......................................................237 MIDI Data Format ..................................................240 Troubleshooting ....................................................255 Specifications........................................................258 Index .....................................................................260 10 Controllers 11 Transpose and Pitch Controls 12 Connections 13 Appendix 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) . . . . . 106 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display ..............................106 Using the LCD Display..........................................107 Formatting External Media ....................................112 Selecting a Song ...................................................113 Recording .............................................................117 Changing the Song Name ....................................120 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)...123 Recalling Recorded Registrations ........................128 Playing Back a Song .............................................130 Displaying the Score .............................................135 Other Functions (Tools).........................................137 Panel Layout Front Panel LEAD 1, 2 (page 25) LCD display/ DISPLAY SELECT (page 10) UPPER 1, 2 (page 25) PEDAL 1, 2 (page 26) LOWER 1, 2 (page 26) REGIST MENU (page 21) RHYTHM/ KEYBOARD PERCUSSION (page 61) USB TO DEVICE terminal (page 216) SUSTAIN button (page 50) REVERB button (page 47) 13 [M.] (Memory) button (page 90) 8 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 14 15 16 1 Registration memory (page 90) 2 3 POWER switch (page 12) MASTER VOLUME dial (page 12) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D. [D.] (Disable) button (page 92) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 9 LCD Display/Display Select 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 LCD display (touch-panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13 2 DATA CONTROL dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15 3 [VOICE DISPLAY] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 18 4 [REGIST MENU] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 21 5 [FOOT SWITCH] button . . . . . . . . . .pages 96, 200 6 [MDR] button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 106 7 [INTERNET] button 9 ) ! @ # $ 8 [UTILITY] button . . . . . . . pages 16, 211, 214, 230 9 [PROGRAM] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 145 ) [SUSTAIN] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50 ! [REVERB] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 47 @ [U. ORGAN FLUTES] button. . . . . . . . . . . page 38 # [L. ORGAN FLUTES] button . . . . . . . . . . . page 38 $ [ROTARY SP SPEED] button . . . . . . . . . . page 51 *The Internet Direct Connection service is only available in Japan. The DDK-7 cannot be connected to the Internet in other countries due to unavailability of the service. Overview FOOT PEDAL jacks (page 216) USB/MIDI terminals (page 216) AC INLET jack (page 215) TO PEDAL connector (page 216) I/O connectors (page 216) Upper keyboard Front Panel (page 8) Lower keyboard PHONES jack (page 215) USB TO DEVICE terminal (page 215) MIC jack (page 215) 10 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Quick Introductory Guide Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life, we recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows you in the simplest possible manner how to start playing your DDK-7. Contents 1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 2 Using the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 • Changing the Display Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 • Pressing Buttons on the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 • Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display Sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 3 LCD Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 • Selecting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 • Muting the Touch Panel Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 • Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 4 Voice Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 5 Registration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 • Selecting Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 • Registration Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 6 Confirming the Version of Your DDK-7 . . . . . . . . 24 7 Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7) . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1 Getting Started 1 Connect the power cord. First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC INLET on the DDK-7, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall. AC INLET jack Only use the voltage specified as correct for the DDK-7. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the DDK-7. Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you intend to use the instrument in another location, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage, please consult with a qualified technician. 2 Connect the speakers or headphones. Since the DDK-7 has no built-in speakers, you will need to monitor the sound of the instrument by using external equipment. Connect a set of headphones, powered speakers, or other playback equipment as required. Reference Pages Using Headphones (page 217) Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an External Audio System (page 218) Using a mixer for live performance (page 218) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 11 1 Quick Introductory Guide Do not use the instrument/ device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right) OUTPUT L/L+R R PHONES Reference Page 3 Power-on Procedure (page 219) Turn the power on. Make sure the volume settings of the DDK-7 and external devices are turned down to the minimum. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. Turn the power on by pressing the [POWER] switch on the DDK-7 front panel, then turn the power on the amplifiers. For turning the power on or off. When powering down the setup, make sure to switch off the power of the external device (or lower its volume) before switching off the DDK-7. NOTE when you connect an external audio device to the AUX OUT jacks, the output level is fixed and cannot be controlled. 4 Set the MASTER VOLUME control. The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of the entire instrument. Decreasing the volume Increasing the volume Now that you've set up the DDK-7 properly, you're ready to begin playing it. The Expression Pedal on the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit can be used to control the volume with your foot as you play. 12 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 This instrument features a special touch panel that allows you to change the parameters by simply touching the ‘virtual’ buttons or sliders on the display. (Please note that two or more parameters cannot be operated simultaneously.) You can also use the Data Control dial to make fine changes to the parameter value shown in the display. Quick Introductory Guide 2 Using the LCD Display NOTE When cleaning the display, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use any sharp or hard tools to operate the touch panel. Doing so may damage the display. Changing the Display Page There are some oval-shaped numbered buttons at the top right of the display. Pressing these buttons changes the “page” of the display. The selected page’s button turns orange. Page 1 Press this button to select Page 1 Page 2 Press this button to select Page 2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 13 1 Pressing Buttons on the Display Quick Introductory Guide There are three types of buttons: those that select a function, those that switch a function on/off, and those that open a list or menu of parameters. To select the desired function, simply press the button in the display directly. For switching on/off or opening a parameter list, see the instructions below. To switch the function on or off: Off, or mute (button is grayed out) On You can independently mute each Voice section in the Voice Display, each accompaniment part in Rhythm Menu display, and each Element in the Voice Edit display. To open the parameter list: When you press the button, a parameter list will appear in which you can select the desired parameter. 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Quick Introductory Guide Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display Sliders You can adjust some parameters such as Volume, Reverb, Pan and so on, by using the ‘virtual’ sliders in the display. There are two ways to move the slider in the display: touching it directly, and using the Data Control dial. We suggest that you touch the display slider when making coarse adjustments and use the Data Control dial for fine adjustment. Touching the display slider directly: Press a point in the slider to which you want to adjust the parameter value. The slider will move to the point you pressed. Also, by sliding your finger up or down while holding down the display slider, you can change the parameter value. or Slider will move to the point you touch Slider will follow your finger Using the Data Control dial: Touch on/above the slider in the display to enable the parameter and set a rough value, then turn the Data Control dial. Touch here to enable the parameter DATA CONTROL Blue mark To control Pan, you can move the horizontal slider in the same way as vertical sliders. DATA CONTROL DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 15 1 3 LCD Display Settings Quick Introductory Guide Here you can change the display settings: displayed language (English or Japanese), touch panel sound, and display brightness. Selecting the Display Language The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default setting is English. NOTE 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. 2 Press the [GLOBAL] button to call up the GLOBAL Page. 3 Press the desired button, The settings in the Utility Display are automatically saved when another display is called up. LANGUAGE 16 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual (Japanese) or [English]. 1 Muting the Touch Panel Sound 1 Press [UTILITY] button to call up GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. 2 Press the [OFF] button of the TOUCH PANEL SOUND to mute the sound. Quick Introductory Guide The DDK-7 is set by default with the touch panel sound turned on, giving you audio feedback when you press a button or control. If you want to mute the touch panel sound, follow the procedure below. TOUCH PANEL SOUND To turn the sound on again, select [ON] in Step #2. Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust the display brightness to a comfortable, easy-to-read level. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. 2 Move the LCD BRIGHTNESS slider by touching it directly or using the Data Control dial. Higher settings make the display brighter and lower settings make it darker. DATA CONTROL LCD BRIGHTNESS DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 17 1 4 Voice Display Quick Introductory Guide You can visually confirm the currently assigned Voices to each keyboard, currently selected rhythm, Registration Shift, and so on, in the Voice Display. How to call up the Voice Display: The Voice Display always appears when the DDK-7 is turned on. To call up the Voice Display from any other display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button. The Voice Display consists of four different pages that can be switched by pressing the [1], [2], [3] or [4] button at the top right of the display. Voice Display [Page 1] Switching the Display Pages 1 3 2 4 18 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 6 Sections Shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section. You can also mute specific Voice section by pressing its button (the button is grayed-out). 2 RHYTHM Shows the currently selected rhythm. 3 1 Reference Page Selecting a Voice (page 27) Quick Introductory Guide 1 Voice Reference Page Selecting a rhythm (page 61) A.B.C. MODE Shows the mode of the Auto Bass Chord. Reference Page Auto Bass Chord (page 72) 4 TEMPO Shows the current rhythm tempo. 5 BAR/BEAT Reference Page Adjusting the tempo (page 67) Shows the bar/beat when the rhythm is playing. 6 REGISTRATION Shows the current position of the Registration Shift. Reference Page Registration Shift (page 95) Voice Display [Page 2] You can confirm the parameter values (for example, Reverb, Volume, Pan) for each Registration Memory simultaneously. Moreover, you can unify a specific parameter used in various Registration Memories at one time. See page 101 for the details. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 19 1 Voice Display [Page 3] Quick Introductory Guide Reference Page Registration Memory (page 90) The Registrations stored to the Registration number can be copied to another Registration number for each individual section. See page 104 for the details. Voice Display [Page 4] Determines the Melody On Chord modes. See page 74 for details. 20 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 A “Registration” consists of panel settings including the selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices, Pedal Voices, rhythm and so on. The Registration Menu button includes 288 Registrations, specially suited for playing in a different music style. Quick Introductory Guide 5 Registration Menu NOTE Additional basic Registrations are preset on the Registration Memory locations from 1 to 16. See page 90 for details. Selecting Registrations 1 Press the [REGIST MENU] button to call up the Registration Menu display. 2 Select the desired registration category with the category buttons in the display. Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example, if you want to play Jazz, press the [JAZZ & LATIN] button. For details on the Registration Menu, see page 23. 1 4 2 5 3 6 1 Live Performance 2 Basic 3 Pops & Rock 4 Dance & Ballad 5 Jazz & Latin 6 Symphony & World DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 21 1 3 Quick Introductory Guide Select the desired Registration by pressing the appropriate button on the display. One display page contains 12 Registration buttons. Pressing the numbered buttons in the display changes the display pages, letting you select up to 48 Registrations from one Registration category button. Change the display pages here. Reference Page The color of the selected Registration name changes to orange, indicating that it has been selected, and the Auto Bass Chord mode is shown at the bottom of the display. Auto Bass Chord (page 72) 4 22 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Play your favorite song with the selected Registration. 1 Page 1 2 3 4 BASIC LIVE PERFORMANCE POPS & ROCK DANCE & BALLAD JAZZ & LATIN Quick Introductory Guide Registration Menu List SYMPHONY & WORLD Bell Pop Piano Simple 8 Beat 1 Dynamic 8 Beat Organ Ballad Blow On Sax Fanfare AOR Piano Simple 8 Beat 2 NY Ballad Dramatic Ballad Sax Ensemble String Orchestra Ballad Stack Light Step British Pop Love Ballad Moonlight Romantic Violin Rockin’on Piano Sunny Pop 8 Beat Modern Smooth Lead Big Band Baroque Ballad Piano Kids March 1 Rock Band Pop Ballad Clarinet Swing Flute&Harp LA Fusion Kids March 2 Detroit Pop Guitar Ballad Jazz Combo Serenade 70’s Pops Kids March 3 Techno Pop Acoustic Ballad Medium Jazz Fast March Pop E.Piano Synth. Rock Sheriff Reggae Healing Guitar Organ Session Wild West Prism E.Piano Symphonic March 1 Rock&Roll Chillout Guitar Combo Vienna Waltz Kool E.Piano Symphonic March 2 Power Rock Sweetheart 1 Tender Ballad Polka Spacey E.Piano Bluegrass 60’s Guitar Rock Sweetheart 2 Jazz Waltz Chanson Club Smooth E.Piano Sea Carnival Unplugged Slow & Easy Five-Four Theatre Organ 60’s Soul Basic Waltz Motor City Euro Trance Big Band Samba Flamenco Classic Jazz Org Brass Ensemble Lovely Shuffle 6/8 Trance Mambo Brass Pop Flamenco Organ Band Pure Waltz Gospel Shuffle Cool Hip Hop Mambo Tenor Mexican Dance Bump Organ Rococo Ensemble Joyful Gospel Latin House Montuno Mariachi Kool Dist. Organ Pop Cha Cha Frankly Soul Dance Beat Bossa Nova Celtic Dance Rock Dist. Organ Comical Rumba Soul Euro Dance Pop Pop Bossa Folk Step Organ Funk Comical Samba Gospel UK Pop Sweet Rumba Italiano Progressive Rock Toy Orchestra 6/8 Soul Jive Beguine Musette Lounge Organ Charleston Hit Pop Disco Queen Cha Cha Cha Country 60’s Cheap Organ Winter Swing New Country Disco Soul Mellow Groove Hawaiian Sunset Reggae Snow Waltz 1 Eternal Pop Pop Disco Modern R&B Chinese Nocturne Hard Rock Organ Snow Waltz 2 Ground Beat Hot Disco Dixieland Jazz Japanese Sound 70’s Crossover Alpine Polka *A Bounce Pop *A Ibiza *A Jungle Drum *A Orchestra March*A East Coast Brass Alpine Polka *B Bounce Pop *B Ibiza *B Jungle Drum *B Orchestra March*B Fat Analog Synth Alpine Polka *C Bounce Pop *C Ibiza *C Jungle Drum *C Orchestra March*C Club Jazz Alpine Polka *D Bounce Pop *D Ibiza *D Jungle Drum *D Orchestra March*D Distor. Guitar Dream Ballad *A Blues Jam *A Power House *A Jazz Club *A Pasodoble *A Tricky Guitar Dream Ballad *B Blues Jam *B Power House *B Jazz Club *B Pasodoble *B Wow Guitar Dream Ballad *C Blues Jam *C Power House *C Jazz Club *C Pasodoble *C Flange Clavi. Dream Ballad *D Blues Jam *D Power House *D Jazz Club *D Pasodoble *D Pop Fusion Lead Pops Orchestra*A Evergreen Waltz*A Dance Latino *A Afro Session *A Tango *A AOR Lead Pops Orchestra*B Evergreen Waltz*B Dance Latino *B Afro Session *B Tango *B Sweet Fusion Pops Orchestra*C Evergreen Waltz*C Dance Latino *C Afro Session *C Tango *C Retro Pop Pops Orchestra*D Evergreen Waltz*D Dance Latino *D Afro Session *D Tango *D Sweep Pad Kids On Stage *A 16 Beat Pop *A Twilight Disco*A ChaCha Grandee*A Show Time *A Pop Ballad Kids On Stage *B 16 Beat Pop *B Twilight Disco*B ChaCha Grandee*B Show Time *B Fat Pad Kids On Stage *C 16 Beat Pop *C Twilight Disco*C ChaCha Grandee*C Show Time *C Deep Pad Kids On Stage *D 16 Beat Pop *D Twilight Disco*D ChaCha Grandee*D Show Time *D Oriental Pad Galaxy March *A Top Gear Rock *A Love Song *A 3/4 Fast Jazz *A Majestic Sound*A Spacious Piano Galaxy March *B Top Gear Rock *B Love Song *B 3/4 Fast Jazz *B Majestic Sound*B Majestic Sound*C 70’s Flute Pad Galaxy March *C Top Gear Rock *C Love Song *C 3/4 Fast Jazz *C Screen Ballad Galaxy March *D Top Gear Rock *D Love Song *D 3/4 Fast Jazz *D Majestic Sound*D Brass Pad SE *A Southern Pop *A Movie Ballad *A Twilight Sax *A Orchestra Swing*A Pop Rock Brass SE *B Southern Pop *B Movie Ballad *B Twilight Sax *B Orchestra Swing*B Dance Brass SE *C Southern Pop *C Movie Ballad *C Twilight Sax *C Orchestra Swing*C World Strings SE *D Southern Pop *D Movie Ballad *D Twilight Sax *D Orchestra Swing*D DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 23 1 6 Confirming the Version of Your DDK-7 Quick Introductory Guide You can confirm the version of your DDK-7 by the following procedure. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. 2 Press the [Version] button in the display. The Version dialog appears in the display. Pressing [OK] closes the dialog. 7 Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7) Reference Page Saving Registrations (page 123) All current settings including Registration Memory, User Voices, User Rhythms, and LCD Display settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save your important data to external media, such as USB flash memory. 1 2 Reference Page Initializing Registration Memory (page 95) 24 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Turn off the power. While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back on. Release the ENDING [1] button after Voice Display appears. If you don’t want to reset the LCD Display settings, you can initialize only Registration settings. See page 95 for more information. 2 Voices The DDK-7 features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the Upper Keyboard and Lower Keyboard. If you connect the Pedal Unit to the DDK-7, you can use any of these voices also on the Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections. Voices 2 Voices for the Upper Keyboard Voices for Pedalboard Voices for the Lower Keyboard Contents 1 Voices for each keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons . . . . . . .27 • Selecting a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 • Changing the Voice volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 3 Voice List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 1 Voices for each keyboard A total of 415 voices can be selected on the display which you can call up by pressing the Voice section buttons on the front panel. Voices for the Upper Keyboard Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and Lead Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel. Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Lead Voice 1 Lead Voice 2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 25 Lead Voice 1 and 2 sound only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for “lead” or solo instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone. 2 Voices for the Lower Keyboard Voices Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel. Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Voices for Pedalboard Reference Page POLY (page 43) Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together: Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel. Pedal Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more pedals are played, by default. Pedal Voice 1 Pedal Voice 2 26 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 (UPPER 1) are given here. Voices 2 Selecting a Voice 1 Press the [UPPER 1] button. The voice menu of the currently selected category is shown in the display. Voice menu 2 Select the desired instrument category with the category buttons in the display. You can also choose the “User” category to select a User voice you have created. Reference Page Voice Edit (page 144) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 27 For example, to call up Piano 1, select the Piano category. 2 Voices The name of the selected category (Piano) is displayed on the upper left. The Voice name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned Voice and is irrelevant to the Voice menu below. Reference Page Voice List (page 33) 3 Select the desired Voice name (Piano 1, for example) from the Voice menu. The Voice menu contains many Piano Voices, more than can fit on one display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons in the display. The color of the selected Voice name changes to orange, indicating that it has been selected. Changing the Voice volume There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume slider in the display. The VOLUME buttons let you make coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control. 28 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse) Press one of the VOLUME buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired level for each Voice. The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume. Voices 2 Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine) Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again (or pressing the Voice name of the selected Voice in the display) calls up the Voice Condition Display. DATA CONTROL Volume slider To set the volume, touch the VOLUME slider in the display or use the Data Control Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume). NOTE Depending on the volume value (set by the slider), two adjacent VOLUME lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 29 Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display. Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive presses alternate between the two displays. 2 Voices CAUTION Turning the DDK-7 off erases all panel settings you have made. If you wish to keep the panel settings you have made, save them to a USB flash memory or other external media before turning the DDK-7 off (page 94). When the Voice Condition display is shown, pressing [VOICE MENU] button on the display also calls up the Voice Menu. From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as Pan, Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition display, see page 42. About the To Lower function Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also be played on the Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER] button in each section is on. When [TO LOWER] is on, the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice cannot be played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively. The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section. 30 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual The Lead Voice 2 section features an exclusive Solo function. Solo lets you instantly switch to a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance, muting all other Upper Keyboard Voices. If you connect an optional Foot Pedal to the DDK-7, you can control the solo function without taking your hands from the keyboards. 1 Select the Voice that you wish to play solo in the Lead Voice 2 section. In this condition, all the Voices for Upper Keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1 and 2, and Lead Voice 1 and 2) can be played. 2 Press the [SOLO] button in the Lead Voice 2 section. This sets Solo to standby status. 3 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility Display. Reference Page Foot Pedal (page 203) 2 Voices About the Solo function Press the [F. PEDAL] button at the top right of the display to call up the FOOT PEDAL Page. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 31 4 2 Press the [SOLO] button in the display. Select the [SOLO] button in the left side of the display if you are using the (1 VOLUME) of the FOOT PEDAL jacks, or select in the right side if you are using (2 SUSTAIN). Voices The Solo function is assigned to the Foot Pedal, and the polarity is selected automatically. In this condition (Solo on), all Voices set to the Upper Keyboard except for Lead Voice 2 are playable on the Upper Keyboard. 5 To temporarily turn Solo on as you play, press the Foot Pedal and hold down. In this condition, only the Lead Voice 2 is playable on the Upper Keyboard. (All other voices are muted.) Each time you press the Foot Pedal (Solo on) you can play only Lead Voice 2, and each time you release it (Solo off ) you can play all Voices except Lead Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard. Notes on using Solo • Some Registration Menu settings reverse the polarity of the Foot Pedal for the Solo function. In this condition, the situation described above is reversed. In other words, each time you press the Foot Pedal you can play all Voices except Lead Voice 2, and each time you release it you can play only Lead Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard. To return the polarity to its original setting, press the [-] button in the display. • Pressing the Foot Pedal while holding down a key will not turn Solo on for that key. Solo will active when the next key is played after pressing the Foot Pedal. • Lead Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more keys are played. However, in the Solo mode, Lead Voice 2 sounds for the last key played. 32 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Voice List This list shows all available Voices on the DDK-7. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Voice Menu. Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 STRINGS/VIOLIN Category/ Voice Name Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 BRASS/TRUMPET 1 Strings 1 8’ THRU THRU 1 Brass Section 1 8’ THRU THRU Strings 2 8’ THRU THRU Brass Section 2 8’ THRU THRU Strings 3 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Brass Section 3 8’ THRU THRU Strings 4 8’ THRU THRU Brass Section 4 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Strings 5 8’ THRU THRU Brass Section 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Strings 6 8’ THRU THRU Brass Section 6 8’ THRU Strings 7 8’ DELAY LR THRU Trombone Sec 1 16’/8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Strings 8 8’ THRU THRU Trombone Sec 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU THRU Strings 9 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Trombone Sec 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU Chamber Strs 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Trombone Sec 4 16’/8’ AMBIENCE THRU Chamber Strs 2 8’ THRU THRU Trombone Sec 5 16’/8’ THRU HALL 1 Chamber Strs 3 8’ THRU THRU 2 Brass1&Trp6 8’ THRU THRU THRU Chamber Strs 4 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Brass2&Trp6 8’ ST 2BAND EQ 2 Pizzicato Strs 1 8’ THRU ROOM S Horn 1&4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ HALL 1 Pizzicato Strs 2 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S Octave Brass 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Pizzicato Strs 3 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S Octave Brass 2 8’ DELAY LR THRU Pizzicato Strs 4 8’ BASEMENT ROOM S Octave Brass 3 8’ THRU THRU Tremolo Strings 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Octave Brass 4 8’ THRU THRU 8’ THRU THRU Octave Brass 5 8’ THRU THRU 8’ THRU THRU Octave Brass 6 8’ THRU THRU Octave Brass 7 3 Strings1&7 Strings2&Viola Voices Category/ Voice Name 2 Strings3&4 8’ AMBIENCE THRU 8’ ECHO THRU Strings7&Violin5 8’ THRU THRU 3 Trumpet 1 8’ THRU THRU Violin5&Cello 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Trumpet 2 8’ THRU THRU Octave Strings 1 8’ THRU THRU Trumpet 3 8’ THRU THRU Octave Strings 2 THRU 8’ THRU THRU Trumpet 4 8’ THRU 4 Violin 1 8’ THRU THRU Trumpet 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Violin 2 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Trumpet 6 8’ THRU THRU Violin 3 8’ THRU THRU Trumpet 7 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Violin 4 8’ THRU THRU Muted Trumpet 1 8’ THRU THRU Violin 5 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Muted Trumpet 2 8’ THRU THRU Violin 6 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Muted Trumpet 3 8’ PHASER 1 THRU Viola 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Flugel Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU Cello 1 8’ RESONATOR THRU 8’ Cello 2 8’ THRU THRU Pizzicato Violin 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S CONTRABASS THRU THRU 4 Trombone 1 Flugel Horn 2 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ THRU Trombone 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Trombone 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU 1 Contrabass 1 8’ THRU THRU Trombone 4 16’/8’ THRU THRU Contrabass 2 8’ THRU THRU Muted Trombone 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU Contrabass 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU Muted Trombone 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ PHASER 1 Contrabass 4 8’ THRU THRU Contrabass 5 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Acoustic Bass 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Acoustic Bass 2 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Pizzicato Bass 1 8’ THRU THRU Pizzicato Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 33 Category/ Voice Name Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 Category/ Voice Name Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 5 Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU 5 Sax Ens 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU 2 Horn 2 8’ THRU THRU Sax Ens 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Horn 3 8’ THRU THRU Sax Ens 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU Horn 4 8’ THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 1 8’ THRU THRU Voices Horn 5 8’ THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 2 8’ THRU THRU Horn 6 8’ THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 3 8’ THRU THRU Muted Horn 8’ THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 4 8’ THRU THRU 16’ 6 Tuba 1 ST 2BAND EQ THRU TUTTI Tuba 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU 1 Strings&Winds 8’ THRU THRU Euphonium 16’/8’ THRU THRU Strings&Brass 1 8’ THRU THRU Brass Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU Strings&Brass 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU Brass Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU Strings&Horn 8’ THRU THRU Brass Bass 3 8’ THRU THRU Brass&Sax 1 8’ THRU THRU Brass&Sax 2 8’ THRU THRU Brass&Sax 3 8’ THRU THRU WOODWIND/FLUTE 1 Flute 1 8’ THRU THRU Flute 2 8’ THRU THRU Brass&Winds 8’ THRU THRU Flute 3 8’ THRU THRU 2 Orchestra Hit 8’ THRU THRU Flute 4 8’ THRU THRU CHOIR Piccolo 4’ THRU THRU 1 Choir 1 8’ THRU THRU Recorder 1 4’ THRU THRU Choir 2 8’ THRU THRU Recorder 2 4’ THRU THRU Choir 3 8’ THRU THRU Ocarina 4’ THRU THRU Choir 4 8’ THRU THRU Whistle 4’ ST 2BAND EQ AMBIENCE Choir 5 8’ THRU THRU 2 Clarinet 1 8’ THRU THRU Choir 6 8’ THRU THRU Clarinet 2 8’ THRU THRU Choir 7 8’ THRU THRU Clarinet 3 8’ THRU THRU Choir 8 8’ THRU THRU Clarinet 4 8’ THRU THRU Choir 9 8’ THRU THRU 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU 16’/8’ THRU THRU 2 Vocal 3 Oboe 1 8’ THRU THRU PAD Oboe 2 8’ THRU THRU 1 Smooth Pad 1 8’ THRU THRU Oboe 3 8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 2 4’ THRU THRU Oboe 4 8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 3 8’ THRU THRU Oboe 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Smooth Pad 4 8’ DELAY LR THRU English Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 5 8’ DELAY LR THRU English Horn 2 8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 6 8’ THRU THRU Bassoon 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 7 4’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY Bassoon 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 8 8’ XG CHORUS 1 XG HM ENHNCE Bassoon 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU 2 Resonance Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE TEMPO CROSS 4 Alto Sax 1 16’/8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Resonance Pad 2 8’ XG FLANGER 3 CROSS DELAY Alto Sax 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 3 8’ ENS DETUNE CROSS DELAY Tenor Sax 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 4 4’ CELESTE 2 DELAY LR Tenor Sax 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 5 8’ SYMPHONIC DELAY LR Tenor Sax 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 6 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 CROSS DELAY Soprano Sax 1 8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 7 8’ DELAY LR PHASER 1 Soprano Sax 2 8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 8 8’ DELAY LR TEMPO CROSS 16’/8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 9 8’ V_FLANGER ECHO Resonance Pad 10 8’ DELAY LR XG CHORUS 1 Resonance Pad 11 8’ COMPRESSOR DELAY LR Bass Clarinet Baritone Sax 34 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 Category/ Voice Name Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 3 Bell Pad 1 8’ CELESTE 1 DELAY LR 4 Synth Brass 1 8’ PITCH CHANGE THRU Bell Pad 2 8’ XG CHORUS 3 CROSS DELAY Synth Brass 2 8’ THRU THRU Bell Pad 3 8’ XG CHORUS 3 DELAY LR Synth Brass 3 8’ THRU THRU Bell Pad 4 8’ XG CHORUS 4 DELAY LR Synth Brass 4 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU Bell Pad 5 8’ CHORUS 1 XG DLY LCR Synth Brass 5 8’ XG 3BAND EQ THRU Bell Pad 6 8’ XG CHORUS 2 DELAY LR Synth Brass 6 8’ XG 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 4 Bell Pad 7 8’ XG CHORUS 2 DELAY LR Synth Brass 7 8’ COMPRESSOR THRU Bell Pad 8 8’ XG AT PAN 1 DELAY LR Synth Brass 8 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR Bell Pad 9 4’ XG 3BAND EQ DELAY LR Synth Brass 9 8’ CROSS DELAY THRU 4 Space Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE DELAY LR Synth Brass 10 8’ ENS DETUNE CROSS DELAY Space Pad 2 8’ XG FLANGER 1 DELAY LR Synth Brass 11 8’ REVERS GATE DELAY LR XG FLANGER 1 Synth Brass 12 8’ ST 3BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS Synth Brass 13 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE 5 Synth Strs 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1 Space Pad 3 8’ DELAY LR Space Pad 4 16’ PITCH CHANGE DELAY LR Space Pad 5 8’ XG CHORUS 1 DELAY LR Space Pad 6 8’ V_FLANGER TALKING MOD Synth Strs 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1 5 Noisy Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE DELAY LR Synth Strs 3 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY Noisy Pad 2 8’ ENS DETUNE TALKING MOD Synth Strs 4 8’ XG 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1 Noisy Pad 3 8’ XG FLANGER 2 DELAY LR Synth Strs 5 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY Noisy Pad 4 8’ ECHO XG FLANGER 2 Synth Strs 6 8’ PHASER 1 ER 1 Noisy Pad 5 8’ EQ DISCO CANYON SYNTH Synth Strs 7 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY 6 Synth Bell 1 8’ XG CHORUS 1 TEMPO DELAY 1 Synth Lead 1 8’ CELESTE 1 TEMPO DELAY Synth Bell 2 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 THRU Synth Lead 2 8’ ODRV+DELAY PHASER 1 Synth Bell 3 8’ ST 3BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY Synth Lead 3 8’ ER 1 DELAY LR Synth Bell 4 8’ XG HM ENHNCE XG SYMPHONIC Synth Lead 4 8’ XG CHORUS 4 THRU Synth Bell 5 8’ CROSS DELAY Synth Lead 5 8’ XG CHORUS 3 TEMPO CROSS Synth Bell 6 8’ XG HM ENHNCE XG SYMPHONIC Synth Lead 6 8’ XG CHORUS 4 XG DLY LCR Synth Bell 7 8’ CROSS DELAY TUNNEL Synth Lead 7 8’ GM CHORUS 3 DELAY LR Synth Decay 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS Synth Lead 8 8’ V_DIST SOFT DELAY LR Synth Decay 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE 2 Pop Lead 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY Synth Decay 3 8’ AMBIENCE REVERS GATE Pop Lead 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE TEMPO CROSS Synth Decay 4 8’ HM ENHANCER AMP SIM Pop Lead 3 8’ CMP+OD+TDLY ENS DETUNE ORGAN Pop Lead 4 8’ PITCH CHANGE TEMPO DELAY 1 Pipe Organ 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Pop Lead 5 8’ DELAY LR THRU Pipe Organ 2 8’ THRU THRU Pop Lead 6 8’ XG HM ENHNCE ECHO Pipe Organ 3 8’ THRU THRU Pop Lead 7 16’/8’ 2 Voices Category/ Voice Name TUNNEL DELAY LCR THRU Pipe Organ 4 8’ THRU THRU 3 Synth Cla 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY Pipe Organ 5 8’ THRU THRU Synth Cla 2 8’ ENS DETUNE DELAY LR Harmonica 1 8’ THRU THRU Synth Cla 3 8’ XG 3BAND EQ DELAY LR Harmonica 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU Synth Cla 4 8’ DELAY LR ENS DETUNE Harmonica 3 8’ DELAY LR THRU Synth Cla 5 8’ ENS DETUNE XG DLY LCR Synth Cla 6 8’ XG FLANGER 3 DELAY LR Synth Sax 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR Synth Trumpet 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR Synth Violin 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LCR DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 35 Category/ Voice Name Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Category/ Voice Name HM ENHANCER Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 2 Theatre Organ 1 8’ TREMOLO 2 2 DX E.Piano 1 8’ CHORUS 2 THRU 2 Theatre Organ 2 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU DX E.Piano 2 8’ ENS DETUNE THRU Theatre Organ 3 8’ GT TREMOLO 1 HM ENHANCER DX E.Piano 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ CELESTE 4 Theatre Organ 4 8’ TREMOLO 2 HM ENHANCER DX E.Piano 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS Voices Preset Effect 2 Theatre Organ 5 8’ TREMOLO 2 XG HM ENHNCE Stage E.Piano 1 8’ THRU THRU Theatre Organ 6 8’ THRU THRU Stage E.Piano 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ CHORUS 1 Theatre Organ 7 8’ TREMOLO 2 THRU Stage E.Piano 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ EP AUTO PAN Theatre Organ 8 8’ THRU XG HM ENHNCE Stage E.Piano 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE Accordion 1 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU Stage E.Piano 5 8’ XG TREMOLO XG CMP+DIST Accordion 2 8’ THRU THRU Stage E.Piano 6 8’ ST 2BAND EQ EP PHASER 3 Accordion 3 8’ THRU THRU 3 Stack E.Piano 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG SYMPHONIC Accordion 4 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU Stack E.Piano 2 8’ HM ENHANCER ENS DETUNE Bandoneon 8’ THRU THRU Clavi 1 16’ THRU THRU Reed Organ 8’ THRU THRU Clavi 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ TOUCH WAH 2 3 Jazz Organ 1 16’ 2WAY ROT SP THRU GUITAR Jazz Organ 2 16’ ROTARY SP 1 THRU 1 Nylon Guitar 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU Jazz Organ 3 16’ TREMOLO 1 XG ROTARY SP Nylon Guitar 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU Jazz Organ 4 16’ TREMOLO 1 ROTARY SP 1 Steel Guitar 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ HM ENHANCER Jazz Organ 5 16’ ST 3BAND EQ BASEMENT Steel Guitar 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Jazz Organ 6 16’ ST 3BAND EQ XG ROTARY SP 12Str Guitar 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG HM ENHNCE Jazz Organ 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ROTARY SP 1 Jazz Guitar 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU Jazz Organ 8 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG ROTARY SP Jazz Guitar 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Jazz Organ 9 16’ ST 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 2 Harp 1 8’ THRU THRU 4 Pop Organ 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TREMOLO 1 Harp 2 8’ THRU THRU Pop Organ 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 1 Harp 3 8’ ER 1 THRU Pop Organ 3 8’ XG 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 1 2 Elec Guitar 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ SYMPHONIC Pop Organ 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DIST+2ROT SP Elec Guitar 2 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ V_DIST SOFT Pop Organ 5 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 DIST+2ROT SP Elec Guitar 3 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ ST OVERDRIVE Rock Organ 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ODRV+ROT SP Elec Guitar 4 16’/8’ ODRV+T DLY THRU Rock Organ 2 8’ V_DIST SOFT DUAL ROTSP 2 Elec Guitar 5 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ V_DIST SOFT Rock Organ 3 8’ COMP+DIST ROTARY SP 1 Muted Guitar 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY 5 Organ Bass 1 8’ THRU THRU Distortion Gtr 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ WAH+OD+T DLY Organ Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU Distortion Gtr 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ V_DST H+TDLY Organ Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU Distortion Gtr 3 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ DIST+T DLY Organ Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU THRU THRU 1 Piano 1 8’ THRU THRU Piano 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU PERCUSSION Piano 3 8’ AMBIENCE THRU 1 Vibraphone 1 Honkytonk Piano 8’ LO-FI ST 3BAND EQ Vibraphone 2 8’ HM ENHANCER AUTO PAN Harpsichord 1 8’ THRU THRU Marimba 1 8’ THRU THRU Harpsichord 2 8’ THRU THRU Marimba 2 8’ THRU THRU Clavichord 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Xylophone 4’ THRU THRU Glockenspiel 1 4’ THRU THRU Glockenspiel 2 4’ THRU THRU PIANO 36 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Banjo 8’ Mandolin 8’ THRU THRU Pedal Steel Gtr 8’ THRU THRU 8’ THRU THRU Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 Category/ Voice Name Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 2 Celesta 1 4’ HM ENHANCER THRU 3 Smooth Bass 1 16’ ST 2BAND EQ Celesta 2 4’ HM ENHANCER THRU Smooth Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU Music Box 1 4’ THRU Smooth Bass 3 16’ ST 2BAND EQ FLANGER 1 Music Box 2 4’ HM ENHANCER STAGE 2 Smooth Bass 4 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE Chime 1 4’ AMBIENCE THRU Smooth Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE Chime 2 8’ AMBIENCE HALL L Smooth Bass 6 16’ THRU THRU Chime 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ PLATE 2 Smooth Bass 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE 1 Timpani 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1 1 Pan Flute 1 8’ THRU THRU Timpani 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 2 Pan Flute 2 8’ THRU THRU Timpani Roll 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1 Bagpipe 8’ THRU THRU Timpani Roll 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 2 Dulcimer 8’ THRU THRU Timpani Roll 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1 Shakuhachi 8’ THRU THRU Yokobue 4’ THRU THRU 16’ THRU THRU Shamisen 8’ THRU THRU THRU TIMPANI 2 WORLD ELECTRIC BASS 1 Fingered Bass 1 PITCH CHANGE Voices Category/ Voice Name Fingered Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU Koto 8’ THRU THRU Fingered Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU Taishokoto 4’ THRU THRU Fingered Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU 2 Erhu 1 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Fingered Bass 5 16’ THRU THRU Erhu 2 8’ THRU THRU Slap Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU Sheng 8’ THRU THRU Slap Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU Zheng 8’ THRU THRU Slap Bass 3 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG PCH CHG 1 Pipa 8’ THRU THRU Slap Bass 4 16’ M BAND COMP THRU Nay 8’ THRU THRU 2 Picked Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU Surnay 8’ THRU THRU Picked Bass 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE Oud 8’ THRU THRU Picked Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU Sitar 8’ THRU THRU Picked Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU Kamanche 8’ THRU THRU Fretless Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU 3 Steel Drum Fretless Bass 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE SYNTH BASS 1 Funk Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU Funk Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU Funk Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU Funk Bass 4 16’ ENS DETUNE THRU Funk Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG FLANGER 1 Funk Bass 6 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE Funk Bass 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG HM ENHNCE Funk Bass 8 16’ THRU THRU Funk Bass 9 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE Funk Bass 10 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE 2 Dance Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU Dance Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU Dance Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU Dance Bass 4 16’ ST 2BAND EQ HM ENHANCER Dance Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE Dance Bass 6 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE Dance Bass 7 16’ THRU THRU Dance Bass 8 16’ HM ENHANCER FLANGER 1 8’ THRU THRU Log Drum 8’ THRU THRU Kalimba 8’ THRU THRU DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 37 3 Organ Flutes The DDK-7 has an Organ Flutes feature that allows you to create your own organ Voices, giving you access to an unlimited combination of organ sounds. With this function, you can recreate all of the classic organ sounds by adjusting the flute footage levels and the percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs. There are nine flute footage settings, with three additional footage settings for the attack sound. 3 Organ Flutes 1 Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons (UPPER or LOWER). The Flute Footage Levers appear on the display. FOOTAGE Page 38 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Press the ON/OFF button in the display to turn the Organ Flutes function on by selecting “ON”. To turn off the Organ Flutes function, press the same button a second time to select “OFF”. The lamp of the [U. ORGAN FLUTES] or [L. ORGAN FLUTES] button on the panel lights up when the Organ Flutes function is on. The lamp turns off when the function is off. 3 Select the wave type for the Organ Flute Voice. Selecting [SINE] button produces a clean, clear sound and selecting [VINTAGE] produces a gritty, slightly distorted sound. 4 Adjust flute footage settings (over a range of 0 – 8). The Flute footage levers can be adjusted by directly touching the display. The Data Control dial cannot be used. Play the keyboard and listen to the changes in the sound as you adjust the footage levels. 5 Press the [ATTACK/VOLUME] button in the upper right on the display to adjust the volume and attack settings. 3 Organ Flutes ATTACK/VOLUME Page 1 1 2 3 4 5 ATTACK Determines the level of each volume in the percussive portion of the Voice. Footage settings are 4', 2-2/3' and 2'. The LENGTH lever determines the duration of the attack sound. 2 RESP. (Response) Determines the overall speed of the keyboard response. Moving the lever downward makes the keyboard response slower, creating a pipe organ effect. 3 MODE Determines which notes in a held group of notes are given an attack sound. This parameter is common to both Upper and Lower Organ Flute Voices. FIRST: Only the first note played will have attack. All other notes played while the first is held have no attack. EACH: All notes played have an attack sound. 4 REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. When the reverb depth in the REVERB Page 1 control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. 5 Reference Page Reverb (page 47) VOLUME Determines the overall volume of the Organ Flute Voice. The volume balance of the individual footages is maintained. A minimum setting here produces no Organ Flute sound. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 39 6 Press the [EFFECT] button in the upper right on the display to adjust the Rotary Speaker settings. EFFECT Page 3 1 Organ Flutes 2 1 Reference Pages Effect List (page 53) Rotary Speaker (page 51) EFFECT TYPE Select the Rotary Speaker (tremolo) effect type. Pressing the button for which the effect type (or “OFF”) is displayed calls up a list of the effect types. Select the desired type from the list. To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button. Select the desired effect type 2 EFFECT Parameters Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type. 7 40 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Press the ON/OFF button in the FOOTAGE Page to cancel the Organ Flutes function by selecting “OFF”. 4 Voice Controls and Effects The DDK-7 is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects. Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound. However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital. The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section, independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system. Selecting from the panel Selecting from the Voice Condition display Reference page for changing the settings Upper Keyboard Upper Keyboard Voice 1, 2 Organ Flute Voice Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Lead Voice 1, 2 Lower Keyboard Voice 1, 2 Organ Flute Voice Pedalboard Pedalboard Voice 1, 2 Pan page 42 O — O O — O Touch Tone page 42 O — O O — O Pitch page 43 O — O O — O Feet page 43 O — O O — O Reverb (send level) page 43 O O O O O O Brilliance page 43 O — O O — O Volume page 43 O O O O O O Priority* page 43 — — O✻ — — — Poly (Pedal polyphonic mode) page 43 — — — — — O Vibrato page 44 O — O O — O Touch Vibrato page 45 O — O O — O Lead Slide page 45 O — O — — — Transpose page 45 O — O O — O Tune page 45 O — O O — O Effect (1/2) page 46 O (Rotary Speaker only) O O (Rotary Speaker only) O O O O Reverb page 47 Sustain page 50 Rotary Speaker page 51 4 Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied O Voice Controls and Effects Controls and Effects O O O O O O ✻ Priority is applied only for Lead Voice 2. Contents 1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2 Selecting from the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 3 Effect List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 41 1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again (or press the name of the selected Voice in the display). The Voice Condition display appears. Voice Condition Display for each Voice has four pages that can be switched by pressing [1] – [4] buttons at the top right of the display. Voice Condition [Page 1] 4 Voice Controls and Effects 1 1 2 2 2-1 2-2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2-1 2-2 3 4 5 6 7 9 In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including panning, touch tone and volume. The displays of the various Voice sections have slight differences in their functions. 1 PAN Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are available. 2 TOUCH TONE The Touch Tone function gives you expressive control over the volume and timbre of a Voice. All Voices are provided with this expressive function, making it possible to perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal changes of actual instruments. Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial Touch and After Touch. 2 -1 INITIAL touch NOTE Initial Touch may not be effective on some organ Voices. Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the keys. The harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect. Range: 0 – 14 2 -2 AFTER touch NOTE After Touch has no effect on percussive Voices (such as piano or vibraphone), percussion sounds, or some organ Voices. 42 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing them. The harder you press down on the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect. Range: 0 – 14 3 PITCH Controls pitch according to the play style of After Touch. AFTER touch Controls the pitch according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing them. The minimum setting produces no effect at all. Higher (positive) settings make the pitch higher according to the pressure and lower (negative) settings make the pitch lower. The setting of +14 or -14 results in the widest pitch change. Range: -14 – +14 4 FEET 4 5 Voice Controls and Effects Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2' setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. PRESET is the original (factory) setting. REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section. When the REVERB control in the Reverb Page 1 is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. See page 47 for details. 6 BRILLIANCE Adjustment of the Voice tone, brighter or mellower. Range is from -3 to +3. Higher settings makes the voice tone brighter. 7 VOLUME Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 29 for more information. 8 PRIORITY (only for the Lead Voice 2) Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top. LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously. TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously. When the Solo mode is on, Lead Voice 2 sounds according to Last mode, regardless of the setting made here. 9 Reference Page Solo function (page 31) POLY (only for Pedal Voices) Allows you to switch the pedal polyphonic mode on or off. Setting POLY to on switches the normally monophonic pedal Voices to polyphonic play. This makes it possible to play the Pedalboard in various expressive ways, such as playing legato or playing intervals and chords. Keep in mind that you cannot exceed the total maximum polyphony: 14 notes for all sections, Upper, Lower and Pedal. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 43 Voice Condition [Page 2] 1 1 -1 3 4 1-2 1-3 1-4 2 3-1 3-2 4 5 Voice Controls and Effects The items included in this page differ between the Lead Voice sections and the other sections. SLIDE (3) only applies to Lead Voice 1 and 2. 1 VIBRATO The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected. Selecting PRESET calls up the original (factory) vibrato settings for the Voice. When PRESET is selected, DELAY, DEPTH and SPEED parameters cannot be edited. Selecting USER lets you adjust the vibrato settings for yourself. Vibrato Control Speed Delay Depth 1 - 1 PRESET/USER 1 - 2 DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato onset. Range: 0 – 14 1 - 3 DEPTH Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect. Range: 0 – 14 1 - 4 SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of the vibrato. Range: 0 – 14 44 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 TOUCH VIBRATO Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you press down the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth cannot be controlled, no matter how hard you press the keys. 3 NOTE Touch Vibrato is not applied to the Pedal Voices. SLIDE (only for Lead Voices) Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective within a one-octave range for Lead Voices. Slide has no effect when playing notes beyond a one-octave range. By connecting an optional Foot Pedal to the DDK-7, you can use it to control the slide function. Reference Page Controlling Lead Slide (with Foot Pedal); (page 206) 4 3 - 1 ON/OFF Voice Controls and Effects On/Off switch the Slide effect. 3 - 2 TIME Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. Higher settings makes the slide speed slower. Range: 0 – 14 4 TRANSPOSE Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section. Range is from -6 to +6. 5 Reference Page Transpose (for entire instrument); (page 214) TUNE Determines the fine pitch settings (detune) for each Voice section, producing a richer sound. Each step represents a 1-cent change in pitch. Range: -64 – +63 Reference Page Pitch (for entire instrument); (page 214) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 45 Voice Condition [Page 3, 4] 2 1 4 3 Voice Controls and Effects You can edit the effect parameters from these two displays. Both displays have the same contents. You can select two effects for each Voice section with these displays (Voice Condition Pages 3 and 4). 1 Reference Page Effect List (page 53) EFFECT 1 (Page 3)/EFFECT 2 (Page 4) Selects the effect category. Pressing the effect button on the display calls up the effect category list. Select the desired effect category in the list. By selecting [PRESET] in the list, the original (factory) effect category for the selected Voice is automatically set. Selecting [THRU] bypasses the effect (no effect is added to the selected Voice). 2 TYPE 1 (Page 3)/ TYPE 2 (Page 4) Determines the type of the effect. Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the effect type list, corresponding to the selected effect category. Select the desired effect type in the list. If you have selected the [PRESET] category, the effect type cannot be edited. After changing the effect type, the effect parameter below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected effect type. 3 Effect Parameters Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type. 46 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Selecting from the panel The Reverb, Sustain and Rotary Speaker displays are called up by pressing the respective buttons on the panel. Reverb Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice sections, or adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and accompaniment separately. Voice Controls and Effects 4 To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb pages: Press the REVERB button, located to the left of the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The Reverb display appears. Use the [REVERB] button to switch the reverb on/off. The Reverb display consists of four pages. REVERB [Page 1] DEPTH: Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds. When this parameter is set to the minimum, the settings in the pages that follow have no effect. Range: 0 – 24 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 47 REVERB [Page 2] 4 1 Voice Controls and Effects Reference Page Effect List (page 53) 2 3 1 TYPE Determines the reverb type for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice. Several types can be selected: Room, Hall, Stage, and so on. Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the Reverb Type list. Press the number buttons to change the display pages. The list contains many reverb types, more than can fit on one display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons [1] or [2] in the display. Select the desired reverb type in the list. After changing the reverb type, the TIME parameter below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected reverb type. 2 TIME Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice. Higher settings increase the reverberance. Range: 0.3s – 30.0s 3 Reference Page Organ Flutes (page 38) 48 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual ORGAN Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. This parameter corresponds to the REVERB slider contained in the ATTACK/VOLUME Page of the Organ Flute display. Range: 0 – 24 REVERB [Page 3] 4 Voice Controls and Effects Determines the amount of reverb effect applied to each Voice section. Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in Voice Condition Page 1 of the respective Voices. Range: 0 – 24 REVERB [Page 4] 1 2 3 4 1 TYPE Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and microphone signal. Reference Page Connecting a Microphone (page 224) 2 TIME Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and microphone signal. Range: 0.3s – 30.0s 3 RHYTHM Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm (with PERCUSSION slider) and accompaniment (with ACCOMPANI. slider). Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in the Rhythm Condition display. Range: 0 – 24 4 Reference Pages Changing the rhythm reverb (page 68) Keyboard Percussion (page 75) KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion. Range: 0 – 24 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 49 Sustain Reference Page Foot Pedal (page 203) The sustain effect, selectable for the each Voice section, causes Voices to gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings are independent for each Voice section, providing maximum expressive control. The optional Foot Pedal can also be used to switch sustain on/off for voice sections other than Pedal Voice 1 and 2. To add sustain to the Voices and call up the Sustain page: Press the SUSTAIN button, located to the left of the panel, to set the sustain. The Sustain display appears. 4 Voice Controls and Effects The Sustain display consists of two pages. SUSTAIN Display Switches the sustain function on/off Sustain length value NOTE If you change the Voice when the sustain length is set to HOLD and the keys are released, the Voice only changes after you play another key. NOTE When the sustain length is set to HOLD, previously played note(s) may be cut off by subsequently played notes. NOTE The minimum setting results in no sustain. Turning sustain “OFF” automatically resets the sustain length to be the default setting. 50 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual The display shows the on/off status and the current sustain length values for each Voice section. The values here must be set high enough for the sustain effect to be noticeable. Press the ON/OFF button in the display to select “ON” above the Voice section name for which you want to apply sustain. To turn sustain off, press the same button a second time to select “OFF”. To adjust the sustain length value, use the display sliders. If you set the highest value (HOLD), some Voices such as organ or synth will sound continuously even when the keys are released. The lamp of the [SUSTAIN] button lights up when you turn on the Sustain effect for one of the Voice sections in the Sustain display. When you turn off the Sustain effect for all Voice sections in the Sustain display, the lamp turns off. Remember to check whether the sustain effects are on or off in the Sustain display before you start to play. Range: 0 – 12, HOLD Rotary Speaker Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect. The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with either the front panel button. The Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by turning on the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button. The following procedure is needed to use the Rotary Speaker effect. Select the Rotary Speaker effect from the desired Voice. When you want to set Rotary Speaker to one of the Voice section, you can select the effect category of Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition Display Page 3 or 4. See page 46 for details. 4 Select “Rotary Speaker” here. Voice Controls and Effects 1 When you want to set Rotary Speaker for the Organ Flute Voice, select the effect type in the EFFECT Page. See page 40 for details. Select an effect type other than [OFF]. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 51 2 Adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker. Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. The ROTARY SPEAKER display appears. The settings in this display are common to all Voice sections. ROTARY SPEAKER Display 4 Voice Controls and Effects 1 1 2 SPEED Determines the speed of the speaker rotation. Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz 2 MODE Determines the slow/stop mode when [ROTARY SP SPEED] button is off. If [SLOW] is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button on the panel. If [STOP] is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off when you turn off the button on the panel. Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect in real time from the panel. Reference Page Footswitches (page 200) Foot Pedal (page 203) 52 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel. You can control Rotary Speaker on/off from the panel. An optional Foot Pedal, or the Footswitch on the Pedal Unit can also be used to switch the effect on/off. See page 203 for details. 3 Effect List Parameter Value Description Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound, recreating the subtle ambience and depth of actual performance spaces and rooms. L DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Echo: 0.1 - 371.5 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the left channel. R DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Echo: 0.1 - 371.5 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the right channel. C DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Echo: 0.1 - 371.5 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the center of the stereo image. L>R Delay Time 0.1 - 743.0 msec 32nd - 4th Determines the time for the sound to move from left to right (when using Cross Delay). When using Tempo Cross, this determines the time (in note values) to match the tempo of the rhythm/ song. R>L Delay Time 0.1 - 743.0 msec 32nd - 4th Determines the time for the sound to move from right to left (when using Cross Delay). When using Tempo Cross, this determines the time (in note values) to match the tempo of the rhythm/ song. DelayTime 16th - 2nd Echo: 32nd - 4th When using Tempo Delay, this sets the time between delayed repeats to match the tempo of the rhythm/song. InputSelect L, R, L&R Determines the input configuration. Feedback Delay Time 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the feedback time of the delayed repeats. The larger the value, the longer the time between delayed repeats. (For Delay LR, the left and right channels can be set independently.) Feedback Delay 1 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the first feedback delay time of the L/R delay. Feedback Delay 2 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the second feedback delay time of the L/R delay. Feedback Level -63 - +63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. When this is set to 0%, the delayed repeat from the second time will not sound. L Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the feedback level in the left channel. R Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the feedback level in the right channel. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. Effect Type Effect Type HALL 1 PLATE 2 HALL 2 WHITE ROOM HALL 3 TUNNEL HALL M CANYON HALL L BASEMENT ROOM 1 XG HALL 1 ROOM 2 XG HALL 2 ROOM 3 XG ROOM 1 ROOM 4 XG ROOM 2 ROOM S XG ROOM 3 ROOM M XG STAGE 1 ROOM L XG STAGE 2 STAGE 1 XG PLATE STAGE 2 GM PLATE PLATE 1 Parameter Value Description Time 0.3 - 30.0 s Determines the decay time of the reverb. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound (dry) and the effect sound (wet). DELAY Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or echoes. This is also useful for creating rhythmic repeats in the sound. Effect Type DELAY LCR XG DLY LCR DELAY LR ECHO CROSS DELAY TEMPO DELAY TEMPO ECHO TEMPO CROSS DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 Voice Controls and Effects REVERB 53 ER/KARAOKE Parameter Value Description Produces early reflections without the subsequent reverb, or a deep echo effect like that used in Karaoke sing-along applications. LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of oscillation, or the speed of the wavering effect. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of oscillation, or the amount of the wavering effect. Input Mode Mono, Stereo Determines the input configuration. Detune -50 - +50 cent Determines the amount of detuning (or pitch shifting) is applied to the delayed repeats. L DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the left channel. R DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the right channel. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. Effect Type ER 1 ER 2 GATE REVERB REVERS GATE KARAOKE 1 4 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3 Voice Controls and Effects Parameter Value Description Type S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr Determines the early reflection type. The response of the early reflections varies depending on the type. Room Size 0.1 - 7.0 Determines the room size. The higher the value the longer the ER. Type Type A, Type B Determines the reverse gate type. DelayTime 0.1 - 400 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat. Feedback Level -63 - +63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. When this is set to 0%, the delayed repeat from the second time will not sound. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and effect sound. FLANGER This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect, similar to Chorus but with a brighter more resonant sound. Effect Type FLANGER 1 FLANGER 2 XG FLANGER 1 XG FLANGER 2 XG FLANGER 3 GM FLANGER V_FLANGER TEMP FLANGER CHORUS DYNA FLANGER Creates a warm effect as if several of the same sound were playing at once. Makes the overall sound richer, “fatter” and more animated. 54 Effect Type Effect Type CHORUS 1 GM CHORUS 4 CHORUS 2 FB CHORUS XG CHORUS 1 CELESTE 1 XG CHORUS 2 CELESTE 2 XG CHORUS 3 CELESTE 3 XG CHORUS 4 CELESTE 4 GM CHORUS 1 SYMPHONIC GM CHORUS 2 XG SYMPHONIC GM CHORUS 3 ENS DETUNE DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Parameter Value Description LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz 16th - 4th*8 Determines the frequency of oscillation, or the speed of the wavering effect. When using Tempo Flanger, this determines the speed (in note values) to match the tempo of the rhythm/song. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of oscillation, or the amount of the wavering effect. FEEDBACK LEVEL -63 - +63 -100% - +100% Determines the amount of output sound (with the flanging effect) that is returned to the input. The larger the value, the more complex and pronounced the flanging effect becomes. Parameter Value Description TREMOLO/AUTO PAN LFO Wave Triangle, Sine, Random Determines the waveform: triangular wave, sine wave or random. Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity. The higher the value the greater the change. This periodically changes the volume and has the effect of moving the sound image both front and back, and left and right. Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at which effect begins to be applied. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the original sound and the effect sound. Effect Type Effect Type TREMOLO 1 ORGAN TREMOLO TREMOLO 2 AUTO PAN XG TREMOLO XG AT PAN 1 EP TREMOLO XG AT PAN 2 GT TREMOLO 1 EP AUTO PAN 4 GT TREMOLO 2 Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre changes and a pronounced up/down filter sweep effect. Effect Type Parameter Value Description LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the tremolo speed. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of the Tremolo effect. AM Depth 0 - 127 Determines the amount of volume change. PM Depth 0 - 127 Determines the amount of pitch change in the sound. Input Mode Mono, Stereo Determines the input configuration. L/R Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of panning between the left and right channels. F/R Depth 0 - 127 Front/rear. Determines the depth of the front and rear panning effect. This controls both level and pitch at the same time. Pan L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Lturn, Rturn, L/R Determines the Auto Pan type. (“L<->R” is a sine wave and “L/R” is a sawtooth wave.) Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. PHASER 1 PHASER 2 EP PHASER 1 EP PHASER 2 EP PHASER 3 TEMPO PHASER DYNA PHASER Parameter Value Description LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz 16th - 4th*8 Determines the frequency of oscillation, or the speed of the wavering effect. When using Tempo Phaser, this determines the speed (in note values) to match the tempo of the rhythm/song. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of oscillation, or the amount of the wavering effect. Phase Shift 0 - 127 Determines the phase relationship between the processed signal and the original. This changes the sound characteristics of the Phaser effect. Feedback Level -63 - +63 Determines the amount of output sound (with the phasing effect) that is returned to the input. The larger the value, the more complex and pronounced the phasing effect becomes. Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity. The higher the value the greater the change. Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at which effect begins to be applied. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Voice Controls and Effects PHASER 55 ROTARY SPEAKER DISTORTION This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ sounds) recreates the rich, animated pulsing sound of a rotating speaker horn. This effect adds distortion to the sound. Effect Type Effect Type DIST HARD 1 V_DIST HARD Effect Type DIST HARD 2 V_DIST SOFT XG ROTARY SP DUAL ROTSP 2 DIST SOFT 1 COMP+DIST ROTARY SP 1 DIST+ROT SP DIST SOFT 2 XG CMP+DIST ROTARY SP 2 ODRV+ROT SP ST DIST HARD AMP SIM AMP+ROT SP ST DIST SOFT XG AMP SIM ROTARY SP 4 DIST+2ROT SP OVERDRIVE ST AMP SIM 1 ROTARY SP 5 ODRV+2ROT SP ST OVERDRIVE ST AMP SIM 2 2WAY ROT SP AMP+2ROT SP XG DIST XG ST AMP Effect Type ROTARY SP 3 4 XG ST DIST DUAL ROTSP 1 Voice Controls and Effects Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description EQ Low Freq. 32 - 2.0k Hz Determines the central frequency of the low frequency range that is boosted or cut. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount or degree of distortion in the sound. Amp. Type EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over which the low frequency range is boosted or cut. Off, Stack, Combo, Tube Determines the type of amplifier that is simulated. LPF Cutoff 1.0 - 18kHz, Thru Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter. Frequencies above this value are cut or filtered out. OutputLevel 0 - 127 Determines the amount over which the middle frequency range is boosted or cut. Determines the level or volume of the processed sound. EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the central frequency of the high frequency range that is boosted or cut. Determines the amount of EQ boost or cut in the low frequency range. EQ Middle Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount of EQ boost or cut in the mid frequency range. Overdrive 0 - 100% Determines the depth of overdrive. The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion. Device Transistor, Vintage, Dist 1, Dist 2, Fuzz Determines the device that will create distortion: Transistor, VintageTube, Distortion, Fuzz and so on. EQ Middle Freq. 56 100 - 10k Hz EQ Middle Gain -12 - +12 dB EQ Hi.Freq. 500 - 16k Hz Determines the central frequency of the middle frequency range that is boosted or cut. EQ Hi.Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over which the high frequency range is boosted or cut. Low/High Balance L63>H - L<H63 Determines the volume balance between low and high speakers. MIC L-R Angle 0 - 180deg Determines the L/R angle of the apparent microphone. Dist. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of distortion. The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion. Speaker Flat, Stack, Combo, Twin, Radio, Megaphone Determines the simulated speaker type: Flat, Stack, Combo, Twin, Radio, Megaphone and so on. Amp. Type Off, Stack, Combo, Tube Determines the amplifier type simulated. Presence 0 - 20 Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount of distortion. Values in the higher range can give vocals more presence. Comp. Threshold -48 - -6 db Determines the input level at which compression begins to be applied. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual WAH A combination of Distortion and Delay. This uses an automatic up/down filter sweep to change the timbre of the sound, producing a “wahwah” sound. Effect Type Effect Type DIST+DELAY V_DIST H+DLY ODRV+DELAY V_DIST S+DLY Effect Type Effect Type XG DIST+DLY DIST+T DLY AUTO WAH TC WAH+ODRV XG ODRV+DLY ODRV+T DLY XG AUTO WAH XG TC WAH+OD CMP+DIST+DLY CMP+DST+TDLY TOUCH WAH 1 CLAVI TC WAH CMP+ODRV+DLY CMP+OD+TDLY TOUCH WAH 2 EP TOUCH WAH XG CMP+DT+DL V_DST H+TDLY AT WAH+DIST WAH+DST+TDLY XG CMP+OD+DL V_DST S+TDLY XG AT WH+DST WAH+OD+T DLY AT WAH+ODRV WAH+DIST+DLY XG AT WAH+OD XG WH+DST+DL TC WAH+DIST WAH+ODRV+DLY XG TC WH+DST XG WH+OD+DLY Parameter Value Description Dist. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of distortion. The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion. Dist. Out Level L DelayTime R DelayTime 0 - 127 0.1 - 1486.0 msec 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the output level of the distorted sound. Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the left channel. Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the right channel. Delay Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. Comp. Threshold -48 - -6db Determines the input level at which compression begins to be applied. DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec 16th - 2nd Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat. When using Tempo Delay series such as DIST+T DLY, this determines the speed (in note values) to match the tempo of the rhythm/song. Overdrive 0 - 100% Determines the depth of overdrive. The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion. Device Transistor, Vintage, Dist 1, Dist 2, Fuzz Determines the device that will create distortion: Transistor, VintageTube, Distortion, Fuzz and so on. Speaker Flat, Stack, Combo, Twin, Radio, Megaphone Determines the simulated speaker type: Flat, Stack, Combo, Twin, Radio, Megaphone and so on. Presence 0 - 20 Values in the higher range can give vocals more presence. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. Parameter Value Description LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the speed of the Wah effect. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of the Wah effect. Cutoff 0 - 127 Determines the central frequency that the wah filter acts upon. Resonance 1.0 - 12.0 Determines the frequency bandwidth (around the central frequency set in Cutoff above) that the wah filter affects. Dist. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of distortion. The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of distortion. The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion. Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the degree to which the wah filter is affected by your playing touch. DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec 16th - 2nd Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat. When using Tempo Delay series, this determines the time (in note values) to match the tempo of the rhythm/song. Delay Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. Dist. Out Level 0 - 127 Determines the output level of the distorted sound. Output Level 0 - 127 Determines the output level of the effect-applied sound. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 Voice Controls and Effects DISTORTION+ 57 DYNAMIC EQ/ENHANCER This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the overall dynamic range of the sound, and has a gain control–letting you make soft sounds louder, and thus give more “punch” to the sound. This effect boosts or cuts specific frequency bands, allowing you to shape the tone of the sound as required by the mix. Effect Type Effect Type ST 2BAND EQ M BAND COMP ST 3BAND EQ COMPRESSOR XG 3BAND EQ NOISE GATE EQ DISCO EQ TEL 4 HM ENHANCER Voice Controls and Effects Parameter Value Type Determines the compressor Normal, Low, Mid, type. High, Low/High, Low/Mid, Mid/High, FullBit, Wild, Attacky, LowEnd, Hard, Basic EQ Low Gain -63 - +63 Determines the amount of low-frequency gain (boost or cut). EQ Middle Gain -63 - +63 Determines the amount of mid-frequency gain (boost or cut). EQ Hi.Gain -63 - +63 Determines the amount of high-frequency gain (boost or cut). Attack 1 - 40 msec Determines how soon the compression effect is applied, once the compressor has been triggered (as a result of Threshold below). Release 10 - 680 msec Determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain, once the trigger signal drops below the Threshold point. Threshold multi-band compressor: -32 - +32 compressor: -48 - -6 dB Noise Gate: -72 - -30 dB Determines the level of the input signal required to trigger the compressor. Signals at a level below the Threshold pass through unaffected; signals at and above the Threshold are compressed. 1.0 - 20.0 Determines the amount of compression of the sound (for signals passing the Threshold). This is expressed as a ratio–the change in output signal relative to the change in input. The range here is 1/1 (no change in output signal, hence no compression) to 20/1. Higher ratios result in greater compression. Ratio OutputLevel 58 Description 0 - 127 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Determines the overall output of the compressed signal. Use this to bring up the overall level after you've reduced the dynamic range with compression. XG HM ENHNCE Parameter Value Description EQ LowFreq. 50 - 2.0k Hz ST2BandEQ: 32 - 2.0k Hz Determines the central frequency of the low frequency range that is to be boosted or cut. EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over which the low frequency range is boosted or cut. EQ Middle Freq. 100 - 16k Hz Determines the central frequency of the middle frequency range that is to be boosted or cut. EQ Middle Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over which the middle frequency range is boosted or cut. EQ M Width 0.1 - 12.0 Determines the bandwidth or the range of frequencies around the specific middle frequency that is to be boosted or cut. Lower values let you narrow in on a specific frequency, while higher values select a broader range of frequencies to be affected. EQ Hi.Freq. 500Hz - 16 kHz Determines the central frequency of the high frequency range that is to be boosted or cut. EQ Hi.Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines how much increase/ decrease the wave frequency point of EQ high frequency. HPF Cutoff 500Hz - 16 k Hz Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter. Frequencies above this value are cut or filtered out. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount or depth of the Enhancer effect. Mix Level 0 - 127 Determines how much of the processed enhanced sound is mixed together with the original sound. PITCH CHANGE IMPULSE EXP This effect changes the pitch. Effect Type PITCH CHANGE Parameter Value Description Density 0.159 - 22.61 msec Determines the density. Dispersion 4.028 msec - 4.000 sec Determines the resonance time. Wet Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the effected sound. XG PCH CHG 1 XG PCH CHG 2 RESONATOR Value Description Value Description Type Type1 - 6 Determines the type. Pitch -24 - +24 Determines the amount of pitch change in semitones. Decay Time 4.028 msec - 4.000 sec Determines the length of reverberation. Pitch Fine 1 -50 - +50 Fine pitch adjustment to detune the sound and create a chorus effect. LPF Cutoff 28.5Hz 21.6 kHz (Thru) Pitch Fine 2 -50 - +50 Fine pitch adjustment to detune the sound and create a chorus effect. Determines the cutoff frequency of the Low Pass Filter. The portion of the signal above the specified frequency is cut. Dispersion 0 - 16 Initial Delay 0.1 - 400 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the early reflections. Determines the resonance time. Wet Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the effected sound. Feedback Level Dry/Wet -63 - +63 D63>W - D<W63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. When this is set to 0%, the delayed repeat from the second time will not sound. Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. 4 Voice Controls and Effects Parameter Parameter VOICE CANCEL Parameter Value Description Low Adjust 0 - 26 Determines the frequencies in the lower portion of the middle range that are attenuated. High Adjust 0 - 26 Determines the frequencies in the upper portion of the middle range that are attenuated. Parameter Value Description Vowel a, i, u, e, o Determines the specific vowel used for the “talking” effect. TALKING MOD MISCELLANEOUS Creates special effects. Effect Type Drive 0 - 127 Determines the effect depth. AMBIENCE OutputLevel 0 - 127 Determines the output level of the effect-processed sound. Description IMPULSE EXP RESONATOR LO-FI VOICE CANCEL TALKING MOD Parameter Value LO-FI Sampling Control 44.1 kHz - 345.0 Hz Determines the sampling frequency. Word Length 1 - 127 Determines the resolution or roughness of the sound. Filter Type Thru, PwrBass, Radio, Tel, Clean, Low Determines the filter type. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. DYNA FILTER DYNA RINGMOD RING MOD ISOLATOR AMBIENCE Parameter Value Description DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the delay time. Output Phase Normal, Invers Determines the phase of the effect sound. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. DYNA FILTER Parameter Value Description Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity. The higher the value the greater the change. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 59 4 Parameter Value Description THRU Level Offset 0 - 127 Determines the offset values of the filter frequency. The offset value affects the filter frequency when no control signals are received. Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing. Filter Type LPF (12 dB), LPF (18 dB), LPF (24 dB), HPF, BPF, BEF Determines the filter type. Resonance -16 - +111 The higher the value, the more sharp the frequency response curve is. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. DYNA RINGMOD Voice Controls and Effects Parameter Value Description Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the modulation sensitivity for the input change. Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at which effect begins to be applied. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. RING MOD Parameter Value Description Frequency 0.7 - 5002.6 Hz Determines the frequency for the Amplitude Modulation. Frequency Fine 0 - 127 Determines detailed adjustment of the Amplitude Modulation. LFO Wave Triangle, Sine Selects a triangular wave or sine wave as the wave for modulation. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the wave depth. The higher the value, the greater the effect. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. ISOLATOR 60 Parameter Value Description On/Off Off, On Determines the on/off status for the effect. Low Mute Off, On Mute switch for the low frequency range. Middle Mute Off, On Mute switch for the mid frequency range. High Mute Off, On Mute switch for the high frequency range. Low Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the low frequencies. Middle Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the mid frequencies. High Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the high frequencies. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Effect Type Thru Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion This DDK-7 features 274 different real rhythms featuring actual drum and percussion sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the DDK-7 has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the Upper, Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 Contents 1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button . . . .61 • Selecting a rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 • Operating the rhythm from the panel . . . . . . . . . .64 • Changing the rhythm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 • Adjusting the tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 • Changing the rhythm reverb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 2 Rhythm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 3 Accompaniment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 4 Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 5 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 6 Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 • Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . 75 • Preset Keyboard Percussion List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 • Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 • Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings . . . . . . 82 • Detailed settings for each percussion instrument 84 • Kit Assign List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button A total of 274 rhythms can be instantly selected from the Rhythm Menu Display which is called up by pressing the RHYTHM button. Selecting a rhythm In the explanation below, 16Beat 1 in the POPS category is selected as an example. 1 Press the Rhythm button in the RHYTHM section on the front panel. Rhythm button The Rhythm Menu is displayed. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 61 2 Select the desired Rhythm category with the category buttons in the display. You can also choose the “User” category to select a User rhythm you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program. Rhythm category 5 For example, to call up 16Beat 1, select the POPS category. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion The name of the selected category (Pops) is displayed on the upper left. The Rhythm name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned Rhythm and is irrelevant to the Rhythm menu below. 3 Select the desired rhythm name from the Rhythm menu. The Rhythm menu contains many Pops rhythms, more than can fit on the display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons in the display. Reference Page Rhythm Pattern Program (page 155) The color of the selected rhythm name changes to orange, indicating that it has been selected. 62 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Rhythm Structure Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm is played back. INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section. 5 Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that can be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several measures repeats indefinitely. Selected Main section’s lamp is lit FILL IN This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure pattern of Fill In finishes playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section. Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 63 BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break section is selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break pattern finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section. The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. There are three Ending sections that can be selected with the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons. When the ending is finished, the rhythm automatically stops. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit Operating the rhythm from the panel You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic interest and “spice” to your performance. To start/stop the rhythm: START The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed. To stop the rhythm, press the button again. SYNCHRO START The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.” The rhythm starts when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, pressing this button again stops the rhythm. 64 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual INTRO Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm. First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the rhythm. ENDING Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm. When you press the Ending button while rhythm is playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the ending phrase is played. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again, while the ending is playing. NOTE When an Intro or Ending pattern is playing, the Lower Keyboard cannot be played. NOTE Pressing the ENDING [1] button during playback of the Main section will first call up the fill in pattern, then the Ending 1 pattern. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern. For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern in 4/4 time, the display at right appears: To switch the rhythm sections: You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN/ FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section’s lamp (above the button) is lit. To use the Fill In patterns: As you play the DDK-7 along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected MAIN/ FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes. When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The Auto Fill In function is set in the Rhythm Condition display. Pressing the [RHYTHM] button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in the display again) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display. When Auto Fill is set to ON in the left side of the display, the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 65 To use the Break patterns: As you play the DDK-7 along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK] button. Moreover, you can start/stop the rhythm and switch the sections by using the Footswitch or optional footpedal. See page 201 for details. Changing the rhythm volume 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion There are two ways to set the rhythm volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume slider in the display. The volume buttons let you make coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control. Using VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse): Press the VOLUME buttons of the rhythm on the panel to set the desired level. The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume. Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine): Pressing the rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in the display again) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display. DATA CONTROL NOTE Depending on the volume value (set by the slider), two adjacent VOLUME lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. 66 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual To set the volume, touch the PERCUSSION VOLUME slider in the display or use the Data Control Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume). Adjusting the tempo You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing the TEMPO buttons. Pressing the right button increases the tempo and pressing the left button decreases it. Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press the TEMPO buttons simultaneously to restore the tempo to the original setting. TEMPO Indicator Decreasing the tempo Increasing the tempo TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per minute. The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press [PRESET TEMPO] button in the display to restore the tempo to the original setting. When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator changes function to a BAR/ BEAT indicator. BAR/BEAT Indicator Bar (measure) Beat On the BAR/BEAT indicator, the number on the left indicates the current bar or measure and the one on the right indicates the number of the beat in each bar. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 67 Reference Page You can also see the Tempo and Bar/Beat indications in the Voice Display. In the Voice Display, both Tempo and Bar/Beat can be seen in one display. Voice Display (page 18) 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Changing the rhythm reverb Reference Page You can adjust the amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the percussion sounds used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display. Reverb (page 47) DATA CONTROL When the Reverb depth for the entire instrument in Reverb Display Page 1 is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. Range: 0 – 24 68 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Rhythm List This list shows all available rhythms on the DDK-7. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu. Fast Jazz Combo Swing Cool Combo Light Swing 2 Afro Cuban 1 Afro Cuban 2 Bebop Five-Four Jazz Ballad 1 Jazz Ballad 2 Movie Swing Piano Trio Midnight Swing 3 Slow Jazz Moonlight 1 Moonlight 2 Winter Song 1 Winter Song 2 Foxtrot Slowfox Quickstep Dixieland 1 4 Dixieland 2 Dixieland Jazz Ragtime Charleston Guitar Swing POPS 8Beat Light 1 8Beat Light 2 8Beat Light 3 8Beat Light 4 Folk Rock 1 Folk Rock 2 1 60’s 8Beat Asian Pops Unplugged 1 Unplugged 2 Unplugged 3 8Beat Adria Bubblegum Pop 70’s 8Beat Tijuana SingerSongWriter 2 Surfin’ 8Beat Finger Pickin’ Heart Beat Guitar Pop 2 British 16Beat 16Beat 1 16Beat 2 16Beat 3 16Beat 4 3 Fusion Shuffle 1 Fusion Shuffle 2 Jazz Pop 16Beat Shuffle 1 16Beat Shuffle 2 Pop Shuffle Eurovision Pop British Pop 4 Sing Along Simple Shuffle 1 Simple Shuffle 2 Simple Shuffle 3 R&B Blues Rock Motor City Soul 1 Soul 2 16Beat Soul Frankly Soul 1 Gospel Funk Jazz Funk Funk Beat 1 Funk Beat 2 Detroit Pop 1 Detroit Pop 2 New R&B Modern R&B New Gospel Cool Blues Gospel Shuffle 2 Gospel Sisters Amazing Gospel 6/8 Blues Slow Blues 6/8 Soul Blues Shuffle LATIN Samba Big Band Samba Light Samba 1 1 Light Samba 2 Pop Samba 1 Pop Samba 2 Bossa Nova 1 Bossa Nova 2 1 Bossa Nova 3 Pop Bossa Mambo 1 Mambo 2 Salsa 1 Salsa 2 2 Montuno Calypso Cha Cha Cha Big Band Cha Cha Pop Cha Cha Rumba Pop Rumba Fast Rumba Guitar Rumba Beguine 1 3 Beguine 2 Cuban Bolero Tango 1 Tango 2 Tango Orchestra Tango Milonga WORLD MUSIC Bolero Flamenco Pop Flamenco Pasodoble Polka 1 1 Polka 2 Banda Polka Irish Dance Tarantella Sirtaki Enka Reggae Happy Reggae Sheriff Reggae Shuffle Reggae Bluegrass 1 Bluegrass 2 2 Hoedown Country 2/4 Country Shuffle Country Band Hawaiian Mexican Dance DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion MARCH Marching Band 1 Marching Band 2 Marching Band 3 Alpine March 6/8 March 1 6/8 March 2 1 6/8 Kids 6/8 Organ March Broadway SF March Wild West Baroque WALTZ Vienna Waltz Orchestra Waltz Simple Waltz Gentle Waltz Guitar Serenade 1 Snow Waltz Classic Waltz Mariachi Alpine Waltz Musette Jazz Waltz 1 Jazz Waltz 2 Jazz Waltz 3 2 Jazz Waltz 4 Modern Waltz Pop Waltz Country Waltz SWING&JAZZ Big Band 1 Big Band 2 Big Band 3 Big Band 4 Big Band 5 Big Band 6 1 Big Band 7 Big Band Bop Orch. Big Band Orchestra Swing Movie Panther Jungle Drum Jazz Club Simple Swing 2 Acoustic Jazz Medium Jazz 69 BALLAD Power Ballad Dramatic Ballad Movie Ballad 1 Movie Ballad 2 Secret Service Carpenters Pop 1 Romantic Ballad Love Song 16Beat Ballad 1 16Beat Ballad 2 16Beat Ballad 3 Easy Ballad Guitar Ballad 1 Guitar Ballad 2 Guitar Ballad 3 Organ Ballad Chart Ballad 2 Analog Ballad Pop Ballad 8Beat Modern Chillout Slow&Easy 6/8 Slow Rock 1 6/8 Slow Rock 2 6/8 Orchestra 1 3 6/8 Orchestra 2 6/8 Ballad Acoustic Ballad ROCK Power Rock Southern Rock 60’s Rock 1 60’s Rock 2 Hard Rock 1 Hard Rock 2 1 Rock Shuffle 1 Rock Shuffle 2 Tears Rock 1 Tears Rock 2 Soft Rock British Rock Country Rock 1 Country Rock 2 New Country Cowboy Rock Rock&Roll 1 2 Rock&Roll 2 Skiffle Caribbean Rock R&R Shuffle Jive Boogie Woogie 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 70 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual DANCE Ibiza 1 Ibiza 2 Euro Trance Disco Teens Techno Party 1 Club Dance Dream Dance Club House UK Pop US Disco Swing House US Pop US Hip Hop Classic Hip Hop Trip Hop Chart Pop 2 Ground Beat Hip Hop Groove Hip Hop Pop Hip Hop Light Euro Hip Hop Latin DJ’s Club Latin Latin Disco 1 Latin Disco 2 Garage 3 6/8 Trance 80’s Dance Pop Beat 1 Pop Beat 2 Funky Dance Disco Philly 1 Disco Philly 2 70’s Disco 1 4 70’s Disco 2 Disco Funk Disco Chocolate Dance Pop Certain rhythms created for use with slow, soft Songs or for Songs that do not use a bass part at the Table 1: not have drum sections. To use beginning, may these rhythms, refer to the following information. Some sections of the following nine rhythms are configured with accompaniment only; they do not • contain any drum or percussion. Category Rhythm Section 6/8 Organ March Main A, Main B Baroque All sections except Intro 1 Simple Waltz Ending 1 Guitar Serenade All sections except Intro 1 Banda Polka Main A, Fill In A Hoedown Ending 1 Mexican Dance Main A, Fill In A BALLAD Dramatic Ballad Main A ROCK R&R Shuffle Ending 1 MARCH WALTZ WORLD MUSIC Some sections of the following five rhythms do not contain an Auto Bass part. This means that even though the Auto Bass Chord is turned on, the bass part will not sound. • • • • • Guitar Serenade in the WALTZ category Folk Rock 1 in the POPS category Unplugged 1 in the POPS category Pop Flamenco in WORLD MUSIC category New Country in the ROCK category 3 Accompaniment The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental embellishments when rhythms are used. Accompaniment controls are selected from the Rhythm Menu and Rhythm Condition display. 1 Select the desired rhythm name in the display. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 Accompaniment parts At the bottom of the display, there are seven part buttons, such as Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, and so on. These parts, with the exception of Main Drum and Add Drum, are Accompaniment parts. 2 Turn the desired parts on. The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1, and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding button in the display. If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound. CHORD 1/CHORD 2: These are the rhythmic chord backing parts. PAD: This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings and organ. PHRASE 1/PHRASE 2: These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios. Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending on the selected rhythm and rhythm section. Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do not sound. Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add drum has additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 71 3 Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Accompaniment. Pressing the rhythm button on the panel again calls up the Rhythm Condition display. The two sliders at the right side of the display can control the Accompaniment volume and reverb. Touch the slider in the display or use the Data Control dial to adjust the volume/reverb. DATA CONTROL 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 4 Reference Page POLY (page 43) Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the DDK-7 to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment patterns. Before using the A.B.C. function, turn Pedal Poly off. If Pedal Poly is set to on, the bass pattern of the A.B.C. will not sound. To set the A.B.C. function: Rhythm Condition Display 1 Select the A.B.C. modes in the Rhythm Condition Display. 72 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 A.B.C. MODE OFF: Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function. SINGLE FINGER: The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass combinations. You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The chord produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower keyboard. Key of C C Major chords: Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s name). Cm Minor chords: 5 Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it. C7 7th chords: Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it. Cm7 Minor 7th chords: Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white key to the left of it. Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance. FINGERED CHORD: The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the basis of the previously played chord. Key of C C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7 Cm maj7 Caug Cdim Cdim7 Csus4 C7sus4 Cm7-5 C6 Cm6 Cadd9 NOTE When playing certain chords (aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and m6), make sure to play the root of the chord as the lowest note in that chord. Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance. CUSTOM A.B.C.: The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode. It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing a note on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 73 2 MEMORY LOWER: When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while the rhythm plays. PEDAL: When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays. (In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard. When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard stops the rhythm. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords you play on the Lower keyboard – or from the chords that are played for you, if you use Automatic Accompaniment. Melody On Chord has three different modes, each providing a different set of harmonics to accompany the melody played. Melody On Chord can also be controlled with the Footpedal. To set the M.O.C. function: Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button, then call up the Page 4 by using the Page buttons. Voice Display [Page 4] The Melody On Chord display appears. 74 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual M.O.C. MODE OFF: Cancels the Melody On Chord function. Mode 1: Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played. Mode 2: Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range close to the melody played. Mode 3: Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range relatively distant from the melody played. Reference Page Controlling Melody On Chord (with Footpedal); (page 207) Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s volume is set to the appropriate value. Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voices. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 6 Keyboard Percussion The Keyboard Percussion function features many types of drum and percussion sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard. Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned beforehand to the keys), while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any key or pedal you wish. Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion 1 Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each Voice’s volume to MIN. 2 Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the [K.B.P.1] or [K.B.P.2] button. The Keyboard Percussion (K.B.P.) Display appears. NOTE In the Voice Display, each Voice section can be muted (page 19). NOTE Two Keyboard Percussion sets, [K.B.P.1] and [K.B.P.2], can be played at the same time by setting both buttons to on. Reference Page Pressing the [K.B.P.1] button calls up the Preset 1 kit on the Upper/Lower keyboards, and pressing [K.B.P.2] button calls up the Preset 2 kit on the Pedalboard. Connecting a Pedal Unit (page 221) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 75 3 Select the desired percussion kit. As a default, Multi Kit is assigned to the keyboards but you can change the kit from a total of 16 different kits. Pressing the Kit button on the display calls up the Percussion Kit List. Choose the desired Kit within the list. 5 For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the Preset Keyboard Percussion List on page 77. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion The message “Are you sure you want to clear all assignments and setup data?” may appear when you change the kit. Select [CLEAR] to clear all assignments (made in the ASSIGN Page) and detailed settings (made in the SETUP Page) and call up the selected kit on the panel. Select [CANCEL] to call up the selected kit without erasing the assignments and detailed settings. 4 Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion. Two sliders in the K.B.P. display determine the reverb and volume settings. DATA CONTROL The settings here determine the reverb/volume for the entire Keyboard Percussion setup, not for each percussion instrument. You can, however, adjust each percussion instrument’s reverb/volume (page 84). 5 76 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Play some notes on the keyboards. Preset Keyboard Percussion List Standard Kit 1 - Symphony Kit Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Bass Drum Heavy - Kick - SD Brush Roll - Side Stick Surdo Mute Snare Drum Heavy - Snare Surdo Open SD Brush Shot 1 Claves Hand Clap Hi Q SD Reverb 1 - Snare Tight Whip Slap Snare Drum Light - Floor Tom L Scratch H Tom 3 Synth Tom 3 Hi-Hat Closed Scratch L Snare Drum Rim 1 Concert BD Floor Tom H Finger Snap Tom 2 Synth Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Click Noise Hi-Hat Close Bass Drum Heavy Low Tom Metronome Click Tom 1 Synth Tom 1 Hi-Hat Open Metronome Bell B1 Hi-Hat Open Bass Drum Light Mid Tom L Seq Click L C2 Ride Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - Mid Tom H Seq Click H - Synth Tom 3 SD Brush Roll - Crash Cymbal 1 Brush Tap - Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - High Tom Brush Swirl - Synth Tom 2 SD Brush Shot 1 - Ride Cymbal 1 Brush Slap - E2 Orchestra Cymbal SD Reverb 1 - Chinese Cymbal Brush Tap Swirl - F2 - Snare Drum Light - Ride Cymbal Cup Snare Roll - Synth Tom 1 Tom 3 - Tambourine Castanet - - Snare Drum Rim 1 - Splash Cymbal Snare Soft - Tom 2 - Sticks - Hi-Hat Close - Kick Soft - Tom 1 - Open Rim Shot - B2 Hi-Hat Open - Kick Tight - C3 Ride Cymbal 1 - Kick Bongo H Orch Snare Drum - Side Stick Bongo L Crash Cymbal 1 - Snare Conga H Mute Snare Drum Roll - Hand Clap Conga H Open E3 Orchestra Cymbal - Snare Tight Conga L F3 Orch Cymbal Roll - Floor Tom L Timbale H Triangle Mute - Hi-Hat Closed Timbale L Tambourine - Floor Tom H Agogo H Triangle Open - Hi-Hat Pedal Agogo L Castanet - Low Tom Cabasa Cowbell 1 - Hi-Hat Open Maracas B3 Timbale 1 Low - Mid Tom L Samba Whistle H C4 Timbale 1 High - Mid Tom H Samba Whistle L Wood Block Low - Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short Conga Low - High Tom Guiro Long Wood Block High - Ride Cymbal 1 Claves E4 Conga High - Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H F4 Bongo Low - Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L Agogo Low - Tambourine Cuica Mute Bongo High - Splash Cymbal Cuica Open Agogo High - Cowbell Triangle Mute Cuica Low - Crash Cymbal 2 Triangle Open Hand Claps - Vibraslap Shaker Cuica High - Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells Shaker - - Bell Tree C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 C2 D2 D2 F2 G2 G2 A2 A2 C3 D3 D3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 C4 D4 D4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B5 - - C6 - - D5 D5 E5 F5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Multi Kit Preset 2(PK) : Indicates the keys of the DDK-7 keyboard and DDKU-P7. *The 10 kits, Standard Kit 2 – Symphony Kit, have the same sound assignments as Standard Kit 1. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 77 SFX Kit 1 Preset 2(PK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) - Phone Call - Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak - - - Door Slam - String Slap - Scratch Cut - E1 - - Scratch H 3 - F1 - - Wind Chime - - - Telephone Ring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Flute Key Click - - CarEngnIgnition - - - - - Car Tires Squeal - - - - - Car Passing - - - - - Car Crash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call Burst Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak Roller Coaster - - Door Slam Submarine String Slap - Scratch Cut - - - Scratch H 3 - - - Wind Chime - - - Telephone Ring - - - - - - Shower - Laugh - Thunder - Scream - Wind - Punch - Stream - Heart Beat - Bubble - Foot Steps - Feed - - - - - - - - - - Flute Key Click - CarEngnIgnition - - - Car Tires Squeal - - - Car Passing - - - Car Crash - - - Siren - - - Train - - - Jet Plane - - - Starship - - Dog - Machine Gun C1 D1 D1 F1 G1 G 1 A1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 F2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion G2 G 2 A2 A2 B2 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 B3 C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 Horse Laser Gun Bird Tweet Explosion - Firework - - - - Ghost - Maou - - - - - - - B5 - - C6 - - D5 D5 E5 F5 F5 G5 G 5 A5 A5 78 Preset 1(UK) Cutting Noise 1 C1 5 SFX Kit 2 Preset 1(LK) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Pop Latin Kit Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Kick Soft - Bongo H Open 1 f - Side Stick - Bongo H Open 3 f - Snare Soft - Bongo H Rim - Arabic Hand Clap - Bongo H Tip - E1 Snare Drum - Bongo H Heel - F1 Floor Tom L - Bongo H Slap - Hi-Hat Closed - Bongo L Open 1 f Hand Clap Floor Tom H - Bongo L Open 3 f - Hi-Hat Pedal - Bongo L Rim - Low Tom - Bongo L Tip - Hi-Hat Open - Bongo L Heel Conga H Tip Mid Tom L - Bongo L Slap Conga H Heel Mid Tom H Nakarazan Dom - Timbale L Open Conga H Open - Crash Cymbal 1 Cabasa - - Conga H Mute - High Tom Nakarazan Edge - - Conga H SlapOpen - Ride Cymbal 1 Hager Dom - - Conga H Slap - Crash Cymbal 2 Hager Edge - - Conga H SlapMute - Duhulla Dom Bongo H - Paila L Conga L Tip - Tambourine Bongo L - Timbale H Open Conga L Heel - Duhulla Tak Conga H Mute - - Conga L Open - Conga H Open - Conga L Mute - Conga L - Conga L SlapOpen - Zagrouda H - Conga L Slap - Zagrouda L - Conga L Slide - Kick Soft Katem Dom Bongo H Open 1 f Cowbell Top Side Stick Katem Tak Bongo H Open 3 f - Snare Soft Katem Sak Bongo H Rim - Arabic Hand Clap Katem Tak Bongo H Tip - Snare Drum Doff Tak Bongo H Heel Guiro Short Floor Tom L Tabla Dom Bongo H Slap Guiro Long Hi-Hat Closed Tabla Tak 1 Bongo L Open 1 f - Floor Tom H Tabla Tik Bongo L Open 3 f - Hi-Hat Pedal Tabla Tak 2 Bongo L Rim Tambourine Low Tom Tabla Sak Bongo L Tip - Hi-Hat Open Tabla Roll Edge Bongo L Heel - Mid Tom L Tabla Flam Bongo L Slap - Mid Tom H Sagat 1 Timbale L Open Maracas Crash Cymbal 1 Tabel Dom - Shaker High Tom Sagat 3 - Cabasa Ride Cymbal 1 Tabel Tak - Cuica Mute Crash Cymbal 2 Sagat 2 - Cuica Open Duhulla Dom Rik Dom Paila L - Tambourine Rik Tak 2 Timbale H Open - Duhulla Tak Rik Finger 1 - - Cowbell Rik Tak 1 - - Duhulla Sak Rik Finger 2 - Triangle Mute Claves Rik BrassTremolo - Triangle Open Doff Dom Rik Sak Paila H - - Rik Tik - Wind Chime C1 C1 D1 D1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 F2 G2 G2 A2 A2 B2 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 B3 C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B5 - - C6 - - D5 D5 E5 F5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Arabic Kit Preset 2(PK) 79 Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 8. The User setting saved in User memory location can be called up by using the [K.B.P.1] or [K.B.P.2] buttons. In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with [K.B.P.1] button. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Reference Page Kit Assign List (page 86) 1 Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the [K.B.P.1] button. The K.B.P. display appears. 2 Press [USER 1] on the display. This procedure assigns User 1 to the [K.B.P.1] button. You can call up the User 1 setting the next time you press the [K.B.P.1] button. 3 Select the desired percussion kit. See page 76 for selecting the kit. 4 Press the [ASSIGN] button at the top right of the display to call up the ASSIGN Page. In the ASSIGN Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys. 5 Select the desired drum instrument that you wish to assign to a key. Select the desired drum instrument category with the category buttons in the display. The drum instrument menu of the selected category appears. Drum Instrument Category Drum Instrument Menu 80 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 6 Assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal by simultaneously holding down the desired instrument name in the display and pressing the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be assigned. The key to which the instrument is to be assigned Instrument Name NOTE Though eight User Keyboard Percussion setups can be created, they cannot be memorized to Registration Memory. Only on/off data and the Keyboard Percussion Menu are memorized to Registration Memory. 5 Press the key. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Hold down the Instrument name… When the assignment is complete, the key name and instrument name is displayed at the top of the display. The assignments are saved to the User memory selected in Step 2 (in this example, User 1). 7 Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your own User Keyboard Percussion set. To erase one instrument: Simultaneously hold down the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page) and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is automatically saved when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds. Do not turn the power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being saved. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 81 To erase all instruments: You can clear all assignments using the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page). 1 Press, then release the [CLEAR] button. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 2 Press [CLEAR] in the display to erase all data. When [CLEAR] is selected, a “Completed” message momentarily appears on the display. Press [CANCEL] in the display to abort the operation. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings You can copy the Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the User locations, or copy from one User location to another. In the instructions below, Preset 1 is copied to User 1. 82 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Press the [K.B.P.1] button to copy Preset 1. To copy Preset 1, select the [K.B.P.1] button; to copy Preset 2, select the [K.B.P.2] button. To copy either User location, select button [K.B.P.1] or [K.B.P.2]. 2 Press the [MENU] button at the top right of the display to call up the MENU Page. Within the Menu buttons, select the User location as the destination — for example, User 1. 4 Press the COPY [FROM] button in the display. A list appears, letting you select the copy source location. 5 Select the copy source (Preset 1 here) from the list. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 6 Press the [COPY] button in the display to copy Preset 1. When [COPY] is selected, a “Completed” message momentarily appears in the display. Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 3 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 83 Detailed settings for each percussion instrument You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each instrument. The settings here are system settings that cannot be memorized to Registration memory. 5 1 Turn off the volume of the relevant keyboard (the keyboard to which the instrument to be changed is assigned). 2 Press the [SETUP] button at the top right of the K.B.P. display to call up the SETUP Page. 3 Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be changed is assigned). The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its settings. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion The name of the selected instrument 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 PAN Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are available. 2 PITCH COARSE Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by 100 cents. Range: -64 – +63 3 PITCH FINE Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by one cent, allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than PITCH COARSE (2). Range: -64 – +63 4 REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 24 5 VOLUME Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 24 84 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 6 RESET Initializes settings such as pan, pitch, and reverb to their default values. Pressing the [EXECUTE] button calls up the following display, prompting confirmation of the operation. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to restore (initialize) the default settings. When [EXECUTE] is selected, a “Complete” message momentarily appears on the display. Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 85 Kit Assign List Multi Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cym Mute Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Orchestra Cymbal Orch Cymbal Roll Orch Cymbal Mute Cymbal March Cym Brush Shot Tam-Tam HI-HAT Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Close Hi-Hat Pedal 1 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Analog HH Open Analog HH Close SNARE DRUM Snare Drum Light Snare Drum Heavy Snare Drum Rim 1 Snare Drum Rim 2 SD Accent 1 SD Accent 2 SD Reverb 1 SD Reverb 2 Synth Snare Drum Orch Snare Drum Snare Drum Roll Analog SD SNARE BRUSH SD Brush Shot 1 SD Brush Shot 2 SD Brush Roll TOM Tom 1 Tom 2 Tom 3 Tom 4 Tom Brush Shot 1 Tom Brush Shot 2 Tom Brush Shot 3 Tom Brush Shot 4 Synth Tom 1 Synth Tom 2 Synth Tom 3 BASS DRUM Bass Drum Light Bass Drum Heavy Bass Drum Attack Synth Bass Drum Bass Drum March Concert BD Analog BD Short Analog BD Long CONGA/BONGO Conga High Conga Low Conga Slap Conga Muff Conga Slide Bongo High Bongo Low Bongo Slap Bongo Mute CUICA/SURDO Cuica High Cuica Middle Cuica Low Tamborim Open Tamborim Mute Surdo Open Surdo Mute Surdo Rim Surdo Muff TIMBALES/COWBELL Timbale 1 High 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 86 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Timbale 1 Low Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 Low Timbale 3 High Timbale 3 Low Timbale 4 High Timbale 4 Low Cowbell 1 Cowbell 2 Cowbell 3 Cowbell 4 PERCUSSION 1 Cabasa Shaker Maracas High Maracas Low Guiro Short Guiro Long Wood Block High Wood Block Mid Wood Block Low Claves Castanet Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Agogo High Agogo Low Triangle Open Triangle Mute Windbell Down Windbell Up Tambourine Pandeiro Bells Hand Claps Finger Snap Scratch Noise Percussion PERCUSSION 3 Kotsuzumi 1 Kotsuzumi 2 Kotsuzumi 3 Kotsuzumi 4 Ohtsuzumi 1 Ohtsuzumi 2 Taiko 1 Taiko 2 Ohdaiko 1 Ohdaiko 2 Kakegoe 1 Kakegoe 2 Kakegoe 3 Standard Kit 1 CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Snare Tight Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Standard Kit 2 CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Short Snare Tight H Snare Soft 2 Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot H Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Short Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Hit Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open 2 Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 SNARE DRUM Snare Ambient Snare Tight 2 Snare Electro Snare Roll Stick Ambient Snare Pitched Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Hybrid Tom 1 Hybrid Tom 2 Room Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Snappy Snare Tight Snap Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Tom Room 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Room 6 BASS DRUM Kick Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Rock Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Rock Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Tom Rock 1 Tom Rock 2 Tom Rock 3 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Rock 6 BASS DRUM Kick Gate Kick 2 Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Electro Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Noisy 2 Snare Noisy 3 Snare Snap Elec Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Reverse Cymbal TOM Tom Electro 1 Tom Electro 2 Tom Electro 3 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Electro 6 BASS DRUM Kick Gate Heavy Kick Gate Kick 3 PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Hybrid Tom 3 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Hybrid Tom 6 BASS DRUM Kick Tight H Kick Wet Kick Tight L PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Light Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Analog Kit CYMBAL Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hat Open Analog Hat Close Analog Hat Close Anlg 2 SNARE DRUM Snare Analog Snare Analog 2 Snare Noisy 4 Snare Roll Side Stick Anlg Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Reverse Cymbal TOM Tom Analog 1 Tom Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Tom Analog 6 BASS DRUM Kick Analog Kick Anlg Short Kick 3 PERCUSSION 1 Conga Analog M Conga Analog L DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 87 Conga Analog H Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Analog Claves 2 Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas 2 Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Dance Kit CYMBAL Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hat Close Anlg 3 SNARE DRUM Snare Clap Snare Dry Snare Techno Reverse Dance 2 Side Stick Anlg Rim Gate Snare Analog 3 Snare Analog 4 Vinyl Noise Reverse Cymbal TOM Tom Dance 1 Tom Dance 2 Tom Dance 3 Tom Dance 4 Tom Dance 5 Tom Dance 6 BASS DRUM Kick Techno Kick Techno L Kick Techno Q PERCUSSION 1 Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Conga Analog H Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog L 88 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Dance Claves 2 Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas 2 Vibraslap Analog PERCUSSION 2 Kick Dance 1 Kick Dance 2 Dance Breath 1 Dance Breath 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Anlg Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Dance Perc 3 Dance Perc 4 Snare Dance 1 Whip Slap Finger Snap Dance Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch Dance 1 Scratch Dance 2 Dance Perc 2 Hi Q Dance 1 Dance Perc 1 Reverse Dance 1 Jazz Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Jazz L Snare Jazz M Snare Jazz H Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Jazz Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Brush Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Brush Slap 3 Brush Tap 2 Brush Slap 2 Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Tom Brush 1 Tom Brush 2 Tom Brush 3 Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Brush 6 BASS DRUM Kick Jazz Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Symphony Kit CYMBAL Hand Cymbal Hand Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Hand Cymbal S Hand Cymbal 2 S Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Band Snare Band Snare 2 Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Gran Cassa Mute Gran Cassa Kick Soft 2 PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap SFX Kit 1 SFX Cutting Noise 1 Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Flute Key Click Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Ghost Maou Dog Horse Bird Tweet SFX Kit 2 SFX 1 Phone Call Telephone Ring Wind Chime Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Laugh Scream Punch Heart Beat Foot Steps SFX 2 CarEngnIgnition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Arabic Kit ARABIC 1 Nakarazan Dom Nakarazan Edge Hager Dom Hager Edge Zagrouda H Zagrouda L Arabic Hand Clap Duhulla Dom Duhulla Tak Duhulla Sak Doff Dom Doff Tak ARABIC 2 Katem Dom Katem Tak Katem Sak Tabla Dom Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Sak Tabla Tik Tabla Roll Edge Tabla Flam Tabel Dom Tabel Tak ARABIC 3 Sagat 1 Sagat 2 Sagat 3 Rik Dom Rik Tak 1 Rik Tak 2 Rik Sak Rik Tik Rik Finger 1 Rik Finger 2 Rik BrassTremolo CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal Snare Drum Snare Soft Side Stick TOM/BASS DRUM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom Kick Soft PERCUSSION Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Cowbell Claves Cabasa Tambourine BONGO Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap PERCUSSION 1 Timbale H Open Timbale L Open Paila H Paila L Cowbell Top Tambourine Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Cuica Open Cuica Mute Cabasa Shaker PERCUSSION 2 Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wind Chime Hand Clap 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Pop Latin Kit CONGA Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Slap Conga H SlapMute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 89 6 Registration Memory Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, providing a convenient way to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you’re playing, with the simple touch of a single button on the Registration Memory panel. The buttons are conveniently located between the Upper and Lower keyboards for easy access while playing. Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch on the Pedal Unit, or optional Foot Pedal. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash memory or other external media. 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D Various types of basic Registrations have been programmed to the numbered Registration Memory buttons, 1 – 16. When you record your own Registration settings to a numbered button, the preset Registration for that button will be overwritten and erased as a result. When you initialize the Registration Memory (page 95), the preset settings will be recalled and your own Registration setting(s) will be erased and replaced with the factory defaults. 6 Contents Registration Memory 1 Storing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 2 Selecting Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 3 Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 4 Initializing Registration Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 5 Registration Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 • Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 • Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 6 Unifying a specific parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 7 Copying Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 1 Storing Registrations Newly created Registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory panel buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash memory or other external media for future recall. Reference Pages 1 2 Selecting a Voice (page 27) Selecting a Rhythm (page 61) Voice Controls and Effects (page 41) Create your original Registration. While holding down the [M.] (Memory) button in the Registration Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to save your Registration. 1. While holding down [M.] button... 13 14 15 16 2. Press desired numbered button. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D. When the Registration is stored, the numbered button flashes momentarily. When recording Registration settings, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Registration is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved. 90 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Functions and settings that cannot be memorized: The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number. • Pitch (page 214) • MIDI Control settings (fpage 230) • Mic. Volume (page 225) • AUX OUT settings (page 220) • Mic. Reverb (page 225) • LCD related settings (page 16) • Score related settings except Next Page (page 125) Reference Page Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) (page 123) 6 Registration Memory The following settings common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and cannot be stored individually for each number. • Transpose (page 214) • Attack mode in Organ Flute Voices (page 39) • Registration Shift (page 95) • Auto Fill setting (page 65) • Reverb type (page 48) • User Voices (page 152) • User rhythms (page 179) • User Keyboard Percussion (page 80) • Rhythm Sequences (page 190) • Disable setting (page 92) • Disable mode (page 93) • Next Page setting of score setting (page 125) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 91 2 Selecting Registrations Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select. Reference Page Controlling the Registration Shift (page 210) • You can also recall Registrations by using the Foot Controllers. This function is called “Registration Shift” (page 95). • You can also program the Registrations to change automatically at specific points within the Rhythm Sequence. This function is called “Registration Sequence” (page 195). Using the [D.] (Disable) button: Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you select different Registration Memory buttons. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button allows you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on throughout all your Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if you want to. 6 Registration Memory Disable button 7 8 9 10 11 12 D. The particular settings that do not change when the [D.] (disable) button is on depend on the Disable mode setting. For details on the Disable mode, see “Selecting Disable Mode” on page 93. 92 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Selecting Disable Mode: The Disable mode enables you to select what is to be disabled when the [D.] (Disable) button is on. There are two Disable modes: NORMAL (rhythm menu, tempo, etc. are disabled) and TEMPO (only tempo is disabled). 1 2 3 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. Press the [GLOBAL] button to call up the GLOBAL Page. Press the DISABLE MODE [NORMAL] or [TEMPO] button. Registration Memory 6 Disable Mode NORMAL When the Electone is set to the NORMAL mode and the [D.] (Disable) button is on, the following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory number. • Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm reverb • Rhythm reverb time • Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of Accompaniment parts • A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory • M.O.C. mode • Second expression pedal control for rhythm tempo TEMPO When the Electone is set to the TEMPO mode and the [D.] (Disable) button is on, the rhythm tempo will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory number. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 93 Saving the Registration data to USB flash 3 memory Reference Page Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File); (page 123) You can save your Registration Memory settings to an external storage device, such as USB flash memory, with sixteen Registrations comprising a single file. The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB flash memory. For details about using other external storage devices, see chapter 7, Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.). 1 2 Insert a USB flash memory into the USB TO DEVICE terminal on the left side of the DDK-7. 3 Select the song to which you want to save the Registration data (page 113). 4 Press [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Registration Edit display. 5 Press the [SAVE] button in the display. A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved. When the operation is completed, the message closes. Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. 6 Registration Memory Reference Page Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 128) Reference Page Changing the Song Name (page 120) 94 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 Initializing Registration Memory Deleting all Registration data (including Registration Memory and Registration Shift settings, User rhythms, Rhythm Sequence data, and User Voices) in Registration Memory initializes the Registration Memory. Be careful when using this operation, since it erases all your existing data. In order to avoid inadvertently losing your important data, save it to an external storage device. 1 Reference Page Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7); (page 24) Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the GLOBAL Page in the Utility display. Registration Memory 6 2 Press the [INITIALIZE] button on the top left in the display. The message “Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data?” appears. Press [INITIALIZE] to actually initialize the data. When the operation is complete, the DDK-7 will be restarted. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation. 5 Registration Shift The Registration Shift function allows you to change Registrations without taking your hands from the keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, or optional Foot Pedal, you can “jump” to a specified Registration or step through the panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you specify. Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the Regist Shift display. You can also view and check the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 95 Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display Reference Pages Footswitches (page 200) Foot Pedal (page 203) Connect the Pedal Unit (DDKU-P7) or optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5) to the instrument. DDKU-P7 FC4 FC5 If you want to use the Foot Pedal, set the desired parameters in the Regist Shift display explained in this section, then assign the Regist Shift function to the Foot Pedal. Refer to the section “Controlling Registration Shift” on page 210. 6 Registration Memory Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display 1 2 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel. Press the [RIGHT] button at the top right of the display to call up the RIGHT Page (Regist Shift display). REGIST SHIFT Display 1 1 2 3 4 OFF Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When you select OFF, you cannot change Registrations by using the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal. 2 SHIFT In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the function ‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The numbered buttons light up as they are selected. 96 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 JUMP Pressing the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal jumps to select the designated panel Registration. You can set the Jump “destination” with buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. Registration number of the destination 4 USER 6 Registration Memory In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified. To set the User Registration order: 1 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory section. 2 Press the [SET] button in the display. The Registration number appears in the display, indicating that the Registration is entered. 3 Repeat the above procedure #1 through #2 to set the Registration order. NOTE When the cursor is positioned at “-”, Footswitch, or an optional Foot Pedal does not work. Registration row 3 1 2 1 POSITION These are cursor controls used to move the cursor (colored orange) along the Registration row in the display. Entered Registration numbers are shown in boxes, while the numbers in the row above indicate the position in the sequence (in other words, the number of successive presses of the Right Footswitch). Up to 80 steps (Registrations) can be memorized. Moves the cursor to the first position. Moves the cursor one step to the left. Moves the cursor one step to the right. Moves the cursor five steps to the right. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 97 2 DATA These are data controls used to enter and delete Registration numbers in the Registration row. SET: For initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the Registration row, or for replacing a number at the current cursor position. To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will light), then press [SET] in the display. The entered Registration number will appear in the Registration row. After using SET to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among the numbers. INSERT: For inserting a Registration number just before the current cursor position. To perform the operation, first move the cursor to a numbered position. Then, press the desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will light), and press [INSERT] in the display. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers. Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s capacity of 80. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the operation cannot be executed. DELETE: For deleting a Registration number at the current cursor position. To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and press [DELETE] in the display. 6 CLEAR: For erasing all current user Registration Shift settings. After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. Registration Memory Select [CLEAR] to clear all data. The message “Clear all data” momentarily appears in the display and returns to the previous display. Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Reference Page Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song (page 124) 3 SHIFT END Determines how to end the Registration shift function. STOP: Selects the last Registration and quits the operation. TOP: After the last preset is reached, the first preset is called up again, starting the sequence over again from the beginning. NOTE When you play the song using Next Regist. function, always press the [F] (Play) button in the M.D.R. display to start the song and activate these functions. The [CUSTOM] (Custom Play) button will not activate the Next Regist. function. NOTE If the next Registration data contains User voices, the DDK-7 may produce no sound for a few seconds while loading the Registration. 98 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual NEXT REGIST: After the last preset is reached, the next Registration data in the Song is called up. This function is available only when two or more Registration data sets are saved in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a song with more than sixteen Registrations. The Shift End mark ( ) will automatically be put at the end of the Registrations you entered when Top or Next Regist is selected as the Shift End. Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice Display You can confirm the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display, Page 1. Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call up the Voice Display. The Registration Shift mode is shown at the bottom right of the display. Registration Memory 6 Registration Shift, OFF: The current Registration number is displayed. Registration Shift, in “SHIFT” mode: Current Registration Next Registration The current Registration number (left) and the next number (right) are displayed. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 99 Registration Shift, in “JUMP” mode: Destination number can be changed. The current Registration number (left) and the destination number (right) will be displayed. You can change the destination number even in the middle of the performance by using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. Registration Shift, in “USER” mode: 6 Registration Memory Indicates the current position of the Registration Shift. You can change the Registration by moving the cursor (in orange) right/left, using the displayed buttons or the Data Control dial. This is handy if you’ve inadvertently advanced the shift setting in the middle of your performance. The user Registration settings cannot be edited here. Moves the cursor to the first position. Moves the cursor one step to the left and selects the next Registration. Moves the cursor one step to the right and selects the previous Registration. Moves the cursor five step to the right and selects the Registration. 100 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 6 Unifying a specific parameter In the Voice Display, Page 2, you can conveniently “unify” a specific parameter used in different Voice groups at one time. This is useful when you are changing, for example, the Voice Brilliance setting for the Upper Keyboard and want the same setting to be applied to the entire instrument. Available parameters • Reverb • Panning 1 2 • Rhythm Reverb • Brilliance • Volume • Sustain Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel. Press the [2] button at the top right of the display to select Page 2. Registration Memory 6 3 Press the PARAMETER button (indicates the currently selected parameter) in the display to select the desired parameter for changing. The Parameter Select pop-up menu appears, letting you select the desired parameter. Parameter Part DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 101 Select the parameter and part in the Parameter Select pop-up menu. After selecting the desired parameter, the pop-up menu automatically closes. The amount of the selected parameter for each Registration is shown in the display. Parameter value for each Registration Selected parameter 4 6 Select the targeted Registration numbers and turn them on. Parameters in Registrations set to ON will be changed. Registration Memory Press the targeted Registration in the display and turn it on with the SETTINGS buttons: ALL ON, ALL OFF, ON, OFF, and SELECT. ALL ON: Selects all Registration memory numbers. ALL OFF: Cancels all Registration memory numbers. ON: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “ON.” OFF: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “OFF.” SELECT: Turns on the Registration memory numbers that contain the same Voice as the one which is currently set in the Registration at the cursor position. The targeted Registration numbers are underlined. 102 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values. You unify the relevant parameter values in each Registration memory number or offset them. Keep in mind that you cannot restore the original data once you change the parameter’s value. Unifying the currently turned-on parameter’s value: Pressing [SET] unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values to the one in the currently selected Registration (at the cursor position). A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation. 6 Registration Memory 5 To continue the operation, select [UNIFY]. Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Offsetting the currently turned-on parameter’s value. Pressing the [+]/[-] buttons in the display or using the Data Control dial offsets the currently turned-on parameter’s value. If you select Pan as the parameter, [E]/[F] buttons are shown instead of [+]/[-]. If you change the value, and if parameter values for some Registration memory number reach the maximum or minimum, the following message appears. In this case, pressing [OK] continues the operation, ignoring those parameters at maximum or minimum value. Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 103 7 Copying Registrations In the Voice Display, Page 3, you can copy a Registration stored to a specific Registration Memory number to another number on a specific section basis (Voices, rhythm, keyboard percussion). (The function is called Regist Section Copy.) This is useful, for example, when you want the upper keyboard Voice 2 in Registration number 2 to be the same as the upper keyboard Voice 1 in Registration number 1. 1 Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call up the Voice Display. 2 Press the [3] button at the top right of the display to call up Page 3. 3 Press the COPY FROM [REGIST] number button and select the Registration number that you wish to copy. To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button. 6 Registration Memory Registration number 104 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 Press the COPY FROM [SECTION] button and select the Regist Section that you wish to copy. To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button. Section In the same way, select the COPY TO Registration number and Regist Section. The COPY TO Regist Section depends on the Regist Section selected for COPY FROM. 6 Press the [COPY EXECUTE] button at the bottom right in the display. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 7 Press the [COPY] button in the display to copy the Registration and a message momentarily appears in the display indicating that the Registration has been copied. Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. NOTE If you change the source Regist Section after changing the destination Regist Section the destination may automatically change to the section selected as the source Regist Section. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 6 Registration Memory 5 105 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) The Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) is a sophisticated recording system built into the DDK-7 that lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash memory or other external media. If you install the optional floppy disk drive such as the UD-FD01 to the DDK-7, you can record your performances/settings to floppy disks. Before using an external media such as USB flash memory, carefully read “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 111. Contents 1 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 2 Using the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 8 Recalling Recorded Registrations. . . . . . . . . . . 128 9 Playing Back a Song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 • Song Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 • Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 • Using USB Storage Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 • Playing Back the Selected Part(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 • Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 • Changing the Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 • Repeat Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 3 Formatting External Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 4 Selecting a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 10 Displaying the Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 • Search a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 11 Other Functions (Tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 5 Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 • Song Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 • Song Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 • Converting to XG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 • Converting to EL format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 • Converting from EL format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 • Checking the Remaining Memory/media ID . . . . . . 143 • Recording Your Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 • Re-recording (Retry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 • Recording each part separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 • Punch-in Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 6 Changing the Song Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 7 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) 123 7 • Changing the score contents and settings. . . . . . . 136 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) • Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song 124 • Replacing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 • Next Regist (Registration) Settings (Changing the order of the Registration data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 1 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display NOTE The items shown in the display and their order differ depending on the connected external media. 106 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. All operations related to the M.D.R., such as recording and playing your performances, can be done in the M.D.R. display. Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the M.D.R. display is open exits from the M.D.R. display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the [MDR] button again to recall the M.D.R. display. All the instructions in this chapter are related to the M.D.R. display. To call up the M.D.R. functions and the M.D.R. display, press the [MDR] button. 2 Using the LCD Display The M.D.R. display consists of two display pages: the SONG Page and the TOOLS Page. In the SONG Page, you can select a song, then play it back or record it. The TOOLS Page has a variety of song utility operations, such as copy, delete, rename, etc. Pressing the [SONG] or [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display switches between the SONG Page and the TOOLS Page. SONG Page 1 TOOLS Page 2 3 5 47 5 67 8 1 9 ) ! @ # $ % ^ & Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 7 * Current Media/Folder Displays the currently selected media and folder(s). The left side of the indication (before “:/”) shows the particular media and the right side shows the path with currently selected folder name at the end. For example, “USB 01:/Folder1/” indicates that the folder named “Folder1” contained in the USB flash memory is selected. 2 Media/Folder/Song List Displays the media, folders or songs. Up to 120 folders can be displayed (5 folders at once). 3 Scroll Buttons If the Media/folder/Song List contains more than 5 media/folders/songs, you can scroll through the display with these buttons. 4 SETTINGS Displays/changes the settings for the currently selected song. 5 Reference Page Setting a Song (page 114) UP Selects the higher layer folder or media. For example, when “USB 01:/Folder1/” (Folder1 in the USB flash memory) is selected, pressing the [UP] button selects “USB 01:/” (USB flash memory). DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 107 6 IN Selects the next lower (or deeper) layer folder or media. For example, when “USB 01:/ Folder1/” (Folder1 in the USB flash memory) is selected, pressing the [IN] button selects “USB 01:/Folder1/SONG/” (the SONG folder contained in Folder1 of the USB flash memory. Reference Page Search a Song (page 114) 7 SEARCH Search for the song/folder in the selected media. 8 Elapsed Time Displays the elapsed time when recording/playing back a song (up to 59 min. 59 sec.). Reference Pages Recording Your Performance (page 117) Playing Back a Song (page 130) Reference Page Displaying the Score (page 135) 9 Controls song recording, playback, etc. ) 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) (page 123) Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 128) CUSTOM PLAY Records/plays back only the performance data of the selected songs. Using this button does not recall the Registration data. ! SCORE Displays the selected song’s score. @ Reference Pages Song Control REGIST EDIT Displays the Regist (Registration) Edit display for the selected song’s Registration data. # CREATE FOLDER Creates a new folder in the Media/Folder/Song List. Up to 120 folders can exist in one media or within a single upper folder. Pressing this button calls up the New Folder display in which you can enter the desired name. Enter the name and press the [OK] button to create a new folder. The method for entering a folder name is the same as that of the song name. See page 120. Reference Page Changing the Song Name (page 120) Reference Page Song Copy (page 137) Reference Page Song Delete (page 139) $ CHANGE NAME Changes the folder/song name. % COPY Copies the selected media/folder/song. ^ DELETE Deletes the selected folder/song. Reference Pages Converting to XG (page 140) Converting to EL format (page 141) Converting from EL format (page 142) & Converts the selected song for use on the EL-series Electone, such as EL-900 or other instruments, or converts songs recorded on EL-series Electone for use on the DDK-7. Songs can be converted to XG format, EL format, or from EL format. * Reference Pages Checking the Remaining Memory/media ID (page 143) About Protected Songs (page 129) 108 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual CONVERT INFORMATION Displays remaining memory in the media is shown, as well as whether or not the media has an ID when a USB storage device is selected and displays information such as the title and composer when a song is selected. The information to be displayed depends on the songs. If media cannot be found: 1 Press the button until the button is grayed out. The Media List will be displayed. If there are more than five media selections, scroll through the display with the Scroll buttons (page 107) to display the desired media. If songs cannot be found: 1 2 Check the current media/folder (page 107). If the desired song is stored in the currently displayed folder, use the Scroll buttons (page 107) to display the song. If the desired song is stored in a different folder, use the and buttons to select the folder in which the desired song is stored. If you are not sure of the folder in which the desired song is stored, search a song by using SEARCH function. NOTE If the message “Registration data will be initialized” is displayed when you select a folder, press [OK] button (media is not initialized). The message will appear when recalling the protected song. Song Icons 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) These icons are shown when you select a media, folder, and song. Indicates media such as a USB flash memory or floppy disk. This icon is displayed in the Media/Folder List. Indicates a folder. Indicates that write-protect or copy-protect is effective for the media. Indicates that performance data is contained in the song. Indicates an XG-compatible song. Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 129 for more information. Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 129 for more information. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 109 Media Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files Folders: A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple songs in groups. If you’ve saved hundreds of songs to a USB flash memory, it may be difficult to find the desired song quickly. Organizing your songs in folders, with similar songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier to find the songs you want. Song 1 Song 2 Song 3 Song 4 Song 5 Song 6 Song 1 2 Song 3 Folder A Creating folders Song Song Song USB flash memory Song 4 5 6 Folder B USB flash memory Songs: A song is the DDK-7 data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single song can contain a variety of data, including the recorded performance, Registrations, and so on. 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) Files: A file is an element of data in a song. For example, a single song consists of various files, such as Registration files and performance files. The following files are created with the M.D.R. (The extension will not appear in the DDK-7 display. They will, however, be displayed on a computer.) Files in the song File Explanation Extension Performance data This file contains performance data, played on the keyboards and pedals of the DDK-7. .mid Registration data This file contains Registration settings, User Voices, User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences. .b00 XG-converted data This file contains XG song data, for which Electone performance data is converted to XG-compatible format. .mid In addition, one file (extension: .name) is automatically created in each folder for organization/maintenance of the folder contents. It does not appear on the DDK-7 display. 110 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. ■ Compatible USB devices • USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, etc.) • USB hub The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://download.yamaha.com/ NOTE Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. ■ Connecting USB device • When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. • When connecting a USB cable, Use it less than 3 meters. • If you intend to connect two or three devices at the same time to a terminal, you should use a USB hub device. The USB hub must be self-powered (with its own power source) and the power must be on. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. 7 Using USB Storage Devices ■ The number of USB storage device to be used Up to two USB storage devices can be connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The number of USB storage devices that can be used simultaneously with musical instruments even when a USB hub is used is a maximum of two.) ■ Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/ media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 112). The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage media. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device (external media), you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. ■ To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. ■ Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations). Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Copy, Delete, and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 111 3 Formatting External Media NOTE Before purchasing a USB flash memory device, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice, or see the Yamaha website (http:// download.yamaha.com/). If you find that you are unable to use new, blank external media (such as floppy disks or USB flash memory) or old one that have been used with other devices, you may need to format them. Formatting erases all the data in the media and makes it ready to record. The data erased by formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the media contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage media. 1 2 3 NOTE The indications USB 1, USB 2, etc. will be displayed depending on the number of the connected media. 7 Connect the media to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. Press the button repeatedly if necessary until the is grayed out. button 4 Select the desired media you want to format. To format a USB flash memory, select [USB XX] (USB 01, USB 02, etc.). To format a floppy disk, select [USB-FD01]. 5 Press the [FORMAT] button in the display. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [FORMAT] to format the media, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) NOTE “USB-FD01” appears in the display only when a floppy disk drive has been installed to the DDK-7. Do not remove the media while formatting. 112 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 Selecting a Song In the M.D.R. display, you can select a blank song to which you want to record your performance or save the Registration settings, or you can select a desired song for playback. In the M.D.R. display, songs in the currently selected media are displayed. First call up the desired media (and folder, if necessary) in the display, then select the desired song. 1 Check the currently selected media at the top of the display. Confirm that the desired media is displayed at the top of the display. Currently selected media/folder Do not remove the media while the instrument is accessing the media. (If you are using a USB flash memory which has a lamp, the lamp will flash when the instrument is accessing the USB flash memory.) 7 2 Press desired song button in the display. Referring to the song name and icons, select the desired song. The selected song button is highlighted in orange. Song containing data Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) For information on selecting the desired media, see page 109. Reference Pages Changing the Song Name (page 120) Song Icons (page 109) Blank song (containing no data) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 113 About the [SETTINGS] button Reference Pages Playing Back the Selected Part(s) (page 131) Changing the Tempo (page 132) Pressing the button calls up a display of the currently selected song, letting you confirm the tempo and parts that are played when playing the song. When playing back the song (by pressing the [F] button), only those parts that are set to “PLAY” in the display actually play at the indicated tempo (over a range of 50% to 200% of the original tempo when recording). If the song contains no performance data, all parts are set to “OFF.” Pressing the [PART SAVE] button saves each part playback setting (the tempo is not saved). 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) Search a Song Search for a desired song by using the Search function. 114 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Insert the media containing the desired song/folder. 2 Select the desired media and/or folder in the Media/Folder List. 3 Press the [SEARCH] button in the display. NOTE Previous searched data can be shown on the display. However, the data does not appear if you’ve turned off the power, removed the media or saved the song after performing the search operation. 4 Press the [KEYWORD] button. Previous key word 5 6 Enter the folder/song name for searching. If necessary, press the [DELETE] button so that the previous key word can be deleted, then enter the new key word. (See page 120 for instructions on changing the song name.) Press the [OK] button. The search will begin, and the detected folder/song name will be shown on the display. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 7 NOTE This function does not distinguish between capital and lowercase letters. NOTE When searching for XG songs, entering the extension “.mid” is unnecessary. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 115 7 Confirm the detected folder/song name. Detected folder/song list 8 Detected number Displayed data number Press the desired folder/song. The display will automatically exit from the SEARCH display and the selected folder/song appears. If nothing is detected, try the search again by using another name (see step 4 above). 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 116 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 Recording Recording Your Performance Set the desired Registrations on the DDK-7. Make all the DDK-7 settings necessary for the song you will record. This means entering the all Registrations you will need for the entire performance in the Registration Memory. Make sure also to select the Registration that you will use at the beginning of the song. 1 2 Insert a media to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 3 Press the [SONG] button at the top right of the display to call up the SONG Page, then select the [I] (Record) button. The following display appears, indicating that you can record your performance. 4 5 6 Never attempt to eject the media or turn the power off during recording, reading and playing back. Select a blank song for recording your performance. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. If you want to overwrite an existing song already containing performance data, you will need to delete it beforehand. NOTE If a message appears indicating there is not enough free space in media, press the [CANCEL] button, then delete any unnecessary songs if possible or insert new media. To continue recording your performance on media that does not have enough space, press the [CONTINUE] button. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 7 Press the [F] (Play) button. An hourglass icon appears at the bottom left of the display, indicating that Registration data is currently being read. After the hourglass disappears, begin playing. When you finish playing, press the [J] (Stop) button in the display. The recording is finished and the LCD returns to the M.D.R. display. The song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named “SONG_XXX” (XXX indicates song number). You can change the song name as desired. (For details, see page 120.) Do not remove the media from the DDK-7 while data is being recorded (while the hourglass icon or other message is shown). DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 117 Re-recording (Retry) If you make a mistake during recording, you can re-record the song from the beginning. NOTE 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) Pressing the [J] (Stop) button cancels the rerecording and records the previous performance. 1 Press the [I] (Record) button while the song is still running. This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the song. 2 Press the [F] (Play) or [CUSTOM PLAY] button to begin rerecording the song. Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously recorded performance with the newly recorded performance. Recording each part separately You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the song. Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 Voices can be recorded separately, though, the Lead Voice 2 Voices will be included in the performance data of the Upper Keyboard. The following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to the song using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper Keyboard. NOTE When you record the Keyboard Percussion, make sure that the [K.B.P.1] or [K.B.P.2] button is set to on. 118 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Follow steps 1 – 3 on page 117 to call up the Rec Standby display. 2 Select the parts for recording. Each pressing of a part button switches the status: PLAY, OFF, and REC. PLAY: Playback the parts that have been recorded. OFF: Recording or playback is not active. REC: Records the part. If you set the Upper part to “REC,” the performance on the Upper Keyboard (including Lead Voice 1 Voices) is recorded. Setting Lead to “REC,” however, records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to “REC” at the same time; neither can the Lower and Keyboard Percussion parts be recorded at the same time. The following setting lets you record only Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard parts. NOTE You should also set the Control button to “REC,” in order to record Registration changes and expression pedal operation. 4 Press the [J] (Stop) button when you are finished with your performance to stop recording. Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance. 5 Press the [I] (Record) button to set up recording of the next part—Upper part in this case. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. Select [OVERWRITE] to overwrite and the Rec Standby display appears. 6 Select the parts for recording. Set the next parts you want to record (in this case, the Upper part) to “REC.” Also set the part already recorded (in this case Lower and Pedal parts) to “PLAY,” so you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones. 7 Change the playback tempo for the selected part. The playback tempo can be set over a range of 50% to 200% of the original. The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower tempo while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo. 8 Press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button to start recording of the new part or parts (Upper part). Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The [CUSTOM PLAY] button is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for recording, and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback. While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the Upper Keyboard. 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 3 Press the [F] (Play) button, and start playing after the hourglass icon disappears. NOTE Use the TEMPO [RESET] button in the display to reset the tempo to its original value (100%). When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 119 Punch-in Recording NOTE This function is best used when the phrase to be rerecorded has definite beginning and end points, with slight pauses before and after. 7 This lets you re-record a specific phrase or section which you don’t want to use, either that of a specific part(s) or all parts. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 1 2 3 Select the song which contains the phrase you want to change. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 4 Press the [I] (Record) button. The recording display appears, indicating that the Music Data Recorder is ready to record. 5 Set the parts which you want to change to “REC” status and other parts to “PLAY.” 6 Press the [F] (Play) button to start punch-in recording. Play the new phrase, as you want it to be changed. 7 Press the [J] (Stop) button to quit the punch-in recording as soon as you reach the end of the phrase. Press the [F] (Play) button to start playback of the song. Press the [K] (Pause) button at the point you want to execute punch-in recording. 6 Changing the Song Name NOTE When you change the name of an XG song, the extension (.mid) cannot be changed. 120 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual You can name the song, such as giving it a title or indicating the date on which it was recorded. However, song names of the EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900, cannot be changed. 1 Select the song whose name you want to change. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. 3 Press the [CHANGE NAME] button. The following display appears. 4 Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [E][F] buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. Cursor DATA CONTROL or 5 Select the desired character type: alphabet, upper or lowercase, or symbol. 6 Select the desired character for entry. A song name can contain up to 50 characters. 7 After finished, select [OK] to actually enter the name. The LCD will return to the TOOLS Page display. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 7 NOTE If you select Japanese as the Language in the Utility display (page 16), you can also select Japanese language characters (hiragana and kanji, normal size katakana, half size katakana, full size alphabet, and full size symbols). NOTE An XG song name can contain up to 46 characters. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 121 To delete the entered character: 1 Move the cursor to the character you want to delete. Cursor DATA CONTROL or 2 7 Press the [DELETE] button at the bottom right in the display. The character is deleted. To convert into kanji (Japanese language): This applies only if you are using the Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) NOTE Songs are ordered in the following sequence: symbol, number, alphabet, hiragana, kanji, other symbols. Names with an asterisk (*) at the top are exceptions to this rule. 122 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual (Kana-Kan) button in Japanese. 1 When the input “Hiragana” characters are shown in the reverse display (highlighted), press the (kanji-conversion) button one or several times to convert to the characters into the appropriate kanji. • The reversed area can be changed by the [E][F] buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. • The converted area can be cleared at once by pressing the (cancel) button. 2 To actually enter the change, press the [OK] button or enter the next character. To enter the hiragana character itself (without converting it), press the (delete) button. A “name is not available” message may appear when you press the [OK] button to finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and you should enter another name. The following names cannot be used. (“xx” indicates numbers.) MDR_xx.EVT MDR_xx.MID MDR_xx.Bxx MDR_xx.Vxx SONG.NAM ELS_SONG.NAM MDR_xxx.MID REG_xxx.B00 SONG_xxx MDR_xxx.TMP REG_xxx.TMP ELS_SONG.TMP SONG_xxx.C02 TMP TMP.E02 7 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) You can also record Registrations by themselves, without recording a performance. Bulk data, including Registration Memory and Registration Shift settings, Rhythm Patterns (User rhythms) Rhythm Sequence data, and User Voices, are also saved in the operation. Registrations 1 – 16 stored to the numbered buttons are saved together as a bank. 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D. Save Registrations new song 2 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Regist (Registration) Edit display. 3 Press the [SAVE] button in the display. A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved. After the message disappears, exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE] button and return to the SONG SELECT Page. The song to which the Registration is recorded is automatically named “SONG XXX” (XXX indicates song number). 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 1 First create your original settings you want to save then select the destination (blank song). For details on selecting a song, see page 113. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 123 Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song Reference Pages When you want to use more than 16 Registration numbers, you can save additional Registration banks to a single song, with the following procedure. Next Regist. (page 98) Programming a Registration Sequence (page 195) REG:01 Registration 13 14 15 5 6 7 16 1 8 9 2 3 4 10 11 12 16 1 7 8 9 13 14 15 16 1 8 9 13 14 15 Add REG:02 Registration to be added REG:50 Registration to be added 5 5 7 7 3 4 2 3 4 10 11 12 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 1 2 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Regist (Registration) Edit display. The Registration data which has previously been saved to the song is shown. 4 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 6 2 10 11 12 First create the original settings you want to save, then select the destination song. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 3 124 6 Press the lowest blank (empty) Registration button. Press the [SAVE] button. The Registration data will be added. When you play back this song, the top Registration bank in this display will be loaded to the DDK-7. You can also change the order of the Registration bank. See page 125. Replacing Registrations The M.D.R. also lets you change the Registrations of an existing song without changing the performance data. In advance, you need to create the original Registration that will replace the old one. 1 Select the song for which you wish to replace the Registrations. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 2 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Regist (Registration) Edit display. The Registration bank which has been saved to the song is shown. 3 4 Select the Registration data you wish to replace. Press the [SAVE] button. A message appears, prompting confirmation of overwriting the Registration bank. Select [OVERWRITE] to overwrite (replace), or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) Next Regist (Registration) Settings (Changing the order of the Registration data) When playing back a song which uses more than 16 Registration numbers, you can use two or more Registration banks saved in a single song and recall them one by one as you play the song. This function is called Next Regist (Registration). M1 M16 REG_001 M1 M16 REG_002 If you want to use the Next Regist (Registration) function, you’ll have to make one of the following settings in advance: • Set the Registration Shift mode to User, and select Next Regist (Registration) as the Shift End, in advance. See page 95 for the details. • Enter the Next Regist (Registration) data in the Registration Sequence. See page 196 for the details. 1 2 Save the desired Registrations to a song. For instructions on saving two or more Registration banks to a song, see page 124. Select the song containing the Registrations for which you want to change the order. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. NOTE If the next Registration data contains User voices, the DDK-7 may produce no sound for a few seconds while the Registration is being loaded. NOTE If the Next Regist (Registration) function is used while the rhythm is being played back, the sequence data and User rhythm will not change. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 125 3 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG Page to call up the Regist (Registration) Edit display. 4 Change the Registration order, in the order you want to recall. First select the specific Registration bank you want to edit, then move, copy or delete the selected data as needed to change the order. 4 7 1 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 5 6 7 2 1 3 Registration Data List From this list, select the Registration you want to move, copy or delete. The selected Registration is highlighted in orange. When more than five Registration banks are saved in the song, a scroll button is available for scrolling through the Registration Data List. 2 MOVE Moves the selected Registration bank up or down. 3 DATA TO BE LOADED When loading the Registration bank to the panel, select the desired data you want to load. For more information, see page 128. 4 LOAD Loads the selected Registration bank to the panel/keyboards. After loading, press one of the Registration Memory button and play the keyboard to check the Registration. 126 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 SAVE Saves the current panel settings as a Registration bank in the song. The currently selected Registration in the Registration Data List (1) will become the destination location. 6 COPY Copies the currently selected Registration to the lowest blank location in the Registration Data List. 7 DELETE Deletes the currently selected Registration bank in the Registration Data List. Exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the display. 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 5 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 127 8 Recalling Recorded Registrations Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers can be easily loaded back to the DDK-7 by the following procedure. The M.D.R. independently recalls the following five types of data: • REGIST • USER VOICE • K.B.P. • USER RHYTHM • SEQUENCE You can select and recall the desired data independently. 7 1 Insert the appropriate media and select the song you want to load back to the DDK-7. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 2 3 Press [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Regist (Registration) Edit display. 4 Using the five “DATA TO BE LOADED” buttons, select the desired data you want to load. Select the Registration you want to load to the DDK-7. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) NOTE When you load the Registration data by using the Next Regist function, all data will be loaded no matter which buttons you select here. 128 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 6 Press the [LOAD] button. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Press the [LOAD] button to load the Registration data. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation. Exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the display. NOTE If you load a Registration while a rhythm is playing, sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration data cannot be loaded. When you select the protected song, the buttons (DATA TO BE LOADED) may be unavailable (grayed out). For example, combining a part of one protected song with another protected song is not allowed. About Protected Songs When you want to edit a protected song, first initialize the Registration Memory, then select the desired song. If you have not initialized the Registration first, the edited song may not be saved. 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) If you buy or download the song data, it may be protected so that you cannot delete or copy, in order to prevent accidental erasure or protect copyright. This is “Protected Song.” Protected songs can be saved to a Yamaha-confirmed USB flash memory device with ID. The protected song can be played back as well as the song you created, but it cannot be converted to XG format, or EL format. It is not possible to edit the Registration data in the protected song, nor to overwrite the performance data. If you want to edit the protected song, first copy it within one media/folder, then edit the copy. (You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copy song (called “protected edit song”) is available only when the original song (called “protected original song”) exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the protected original song. Folder Protected Original Song Protected Edit Song Copy You can edit this song, only when this is in the folder that contains protected original song. You cannot edit this song To move the protected song in a USB flash memory with a computer, you’ll need to use the Musicsoft Downloader application. If you move the song without Musicsoft Downloader, the song cannot be played back. Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address: http:// download.yamaha.com/ DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 129 9 Playing Back a Song NOTE When you play Electone data, the resulting song balance will vary according to the speakers you are using. NOTE The functions intended for control with the Knee Lever on the Electone must be assigned to the Foot Pedal. The M.D.R. enables you to play back commercially available XG-compatible song data and MIDI data created with a computer as well as songs recorded on the DDK-7 itself. 1 Select the song to be played back. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 2 Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to load the Registration data. An hourglass icon appears, indicating the Registration data is loading. If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the first one will be loaded. You can check the Registration order in the Regist (Registration) Edit display. If the song contains no performance data, after loading the Registration data, the LCD returns to the SONG Page. 3 Playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data (the elapsed time is shown). In general, all parts recorded to the song are played back; however, you can mute specific parts and playback only selected parts. For more information, see page 131. When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback automatically stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of the song by pressing the [J] (Stop) button in the display. Reference Page Next Regist Settings (Changing the order of the Registration data) (page 125) Reference Page About the [SETTINGS] button (page 114) 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) Custom Play If you want to play back the song without resetting the Registrations, press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button instead of the [F] (Play) button. This displays the song time and starts playback immediately. When you play the song using the Next Regist function, always press the [F] (Play) button to start the song, not the [CUSTOM PLAY] button. 130 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Playing Back the Selected Part(s) You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part, such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts. To play back the selected part(s): To play back the selected part(s) of XG-compatible song data: Press the Part [XG] button while XG-compatible song data is being played back. The following XG Part Setup display appears. Reference Page Setting a Song (page 114) 7 Reference Page Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) During playback or in the Settings display, press each part button to turn the part you want to playback to “PLAY” and the part you want to mute to “OFF.” Each pressing of a part button switches the status between PLAY and OFF. Pressing the [PART SAVE] button saves each part’s playback status. Converting to XG (page 140) Press the appropriate channel buttons (e.g., the [CH1] button) to set each channel to playback or mute. Each pressing of a button switches the status: PLAY and OFF. Set a part to [PLAY] if you want to play it back and [OFF] if you do not. The [ALL] button enables you to switch all channels to PLAY/OFF at once. To set each channel’s volume use the sliders. Each channel’s volume can be adjusted between 0 and 100. The [ALL] slider adjusts the overall volume. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 131 Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause Fast Forward and Rewind: During playback, press the [H] (Fast forward) button or [G] (Rewind) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired position. Even when the button is released, playback is paused. To resume playback from the point you’ve advanced or reversed to, press the [F] (Play) button or [CUSTOM PLAY] button. Pause: If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the [K] (Pause) button. To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused, press the [F] (Play) or [CUSTOM PLAY] button. Changing the Tempo You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing in the M.D.R. display, either while the song is stopped or while it is playing. 7 To Change the Tempo: Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) Use the TEMPO buttons in the display to change the tempo. (The TEMPO buttons on the panel cannot be used to change the tempo for the Music Data Recorder.) The range is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100% and values less than 100% indicate slower tempo; values greater than 100% indicate faster tempo. 132 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual To reset the changed tempo: Use the TEMPO [RESET] button in the display to reset the tempo to its original value (100%). Repeat Playback This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a folder or only one specific song. Select the song you wish to play back. If you wish to play back all songs on a folder, select the first song that will be played back. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 2 Press the [SONG] button at the top right of the display to call up the SONG Page. 3 Press the display. 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 1 button on the panel to call up the Settings DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 133 4 Press the REPEAT button to select the repeat mode. Each press of the button switches the mode REPEAT button SINGLE Repeats the currently selected song again and again. ALL Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder in order. RANDOM Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder randomly. 7 OFF Cancels repeat playback. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 134 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 Exit from the Settings display by pressing the the top right of the display. button at 6 Press the [F] (Play) button in the SONG Page to begin playback. 10 Displaying the Score The M.D.R. display can display a music notation (score) of the performance data recorded to media. You can change the size and the number of staffs to be displayed. While a song is being played back, the cursor moves according to the performance and the pages are automatically turned. 1 Select the song containing performance data. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 2 Press the [SCORE] button in the display. The currently selected song score will be displayed. 3 Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to start playing back the song. As the song plays back, the cursor moves accordingly and the page is automatically turned at the appropriate point. In this condition, pressing the [I] (Record) button in the display lets you record a song and have the score displayed for you. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 7 NOTE The score size setting cannot be stored to a Registration Memory. NOTE The score size can be adjusted by pressing the [SIZE CHANGE] button in the display. Each press of the [SIZE CHANGE] button alternates the score size in the following sequence: normal, large, extra large, small, normal, and so on. Please note that the size cannot be changed while a song is being recorded. 4 5 Scores for protected songs cannot be displayed, excepting those songs that specifically allow score display. You can manually turn the page, by stopping playing back a song using the [J] (Stop) or [K] (Pause) button, and then pressing the PAGE [E] or [F] buttons in the display. Pressing these buttons moves to the previous or next page. The PAGE [F] button can be assigned to the left foot switch (page 136). To exit the score, press the [SCORE OFF] button in the display. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 135 Changing the score contents and settings NOTE Please note that the score settings cannot be changed while the song is being recorded. The [SET UP] button is disabled during recording. 7 NOTE The Score Settings display lets you choose the contents to be displayed. In this display, you can also assign the Next Page function to the left foot switch: 1 Display the score. 2 Press the [SET UP] button in the display to call up the Score Settings display. 3 Change the score settings. To set whether a specific part is displayed or not in the score, press the appropriate [ON] or [OFF] buttons of each part. Please note that at least one of the upper keyboard, lower keyboard or pedalboard will be set to [ON]. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) The score display settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory. Only the left foot switch setting can be stored to USB flash memory as Registration data common to all Registration Memory numbers. Available settings for notes and how they will be displayed (NOTE) include [A, B, C] (conventional C-D-E indications), [FIXED DO] (solfeggio), [MOVABLE DO] (relative solfeggio) and [OFF]. For the CH SETTINGS, the upper keyboard, lower keyboard and pedalboard can be assigned to the channels with the [▲] or [▼] button. You can also use the Data Control dial to select channels after pressing the [▲] or [▼] button. Selecting [AUTO] automatically assigns parts to the channels according to the song data. NOTE Setting the NOTE to [MOVABLE DO] displays each key note as “Do.” To set the QUANTIZE value use the [▲] or [▼] button. You can also use the Data Control dial to select channels after pressing the [▲] or [▼] button. The shorter the note value is selected, the more precisely the score is displayed. Reference Page About Quantize (page 168) Setting the NEXT PAGE L. Foot SW [ON] lets you turn the score to the next page with the left foot switch. You can also turn the score to the next page with the PAGE [F] button in the display. If rhythm, glide and/or rotary speaker are assigned to the left foot switch and set on, both the assigned functions and the Next Page function work. 4 136 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Exit from the Score Settings display by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the display. 11 Other Functions (Tools) The TOOLS Page in the M.D.R. display has many functions, such as song copy, song delete, etc. Song Copy This function lets you copy a folder/song. You can copy and exchange the data even between two different media. (Songs created with the EL-series Electone, such as EL900, one by one copy can not be executed.) Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. NOTE If the folder already contains 120 XG songs the songs can not be copied, or if the folder already contains 120 folders the folder can not be copied. NOTE A protected song can be copied within a folder, but it cannot be copied to another folder or media. If you specify another folder or media as the copy destination, a message appears prompting moving of the song — not copying. When the [MOVE] button is pressed, the protected original song and all protected edit songs which come from the same protected original song will be moved together. This effectively “moves” a protected song, but does not “copy” it. If copy the folder which contains both non-protected songs and protected songs, the copy operation will be automatically executed for only non-protected songs, and protected song will be moved (no copy). In the following cases, it may not be able to copy even if the number of folder/ XG song has not yet reached to the maximum number. Destination root is selected and song name/ path are too long. NOTE 7 Copy operation is automatically stopped if there is containing unrecognizable file in MDR. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) Moving a Protected Song To copy a song: Insert the media that contains a folder/song to be copied and the destination media. • To copy within one media Insert the media that contains a song to be copied. • To copy a song from USB flash memory to another Insert both the USB flash memory that contains a song to be copied and the destination USB flash memory. When there are not enough terminals available, use a self powered USB hub. 1 Select the song to be copied. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. NOTE If you copy a protected song to the same folder as the source song, the copied song will be the protected edit song. To avoid losing your important data in Media. Firmly connect the media to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 137 Never attempt to eject the media or turn the power off during copying (or moving a protected song). Data may be lost. NOTE 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) While the copy operation is in progress, the approximate time of copying appears on the display; keep in mind that the actual time need may differ. NOTE If the media copy is executed, the folder name “#MEDIA” will be created in the destination folder. NOTE If the message “The source folder hierarchy is too deep” is displayed, copy each folder in the folder, one by one manually. If the “Path name is too long” message is displayed, change the hierarchy or rename the folder name shortly. NOTE The copy operation will automatically be stopped if an unrecognizable file is detected in the folder. 138 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Press the [COPY] button in the display to call up the Copy To display. 4 (If necessary) Change the destination. For details on changing the destination, see page 113. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the copy. The folder/song name in the destination is the same as the one of the source song. If you copy a folder/song to a folder that contains a song whose name is the same as the source song, the copied name will be “source song name_XXX” (XXX indicates song number). If you want to change the folder/song name, see page 120. If you copy an XG-compatible song to another folder or media that contains a song with the same name as the source song, a message appears prompting confirmation of overwriting the song. Selecting [OVERWRITE] overwrites the XG-compatible song in the destination. How to cancel the folder-copy operation If you want to cancel the folder-copy operation while the copy operation is in progress, press the [CANCEL] button.However, the operation may take a long time since the stop operation will be executed only after all files in current folder are copied.If you cancel the operation, make sure to check which files have been properly copied and which have not. Song Delete You can delete the data of one song. You can specify for deletion only Registration data, only the performance data, or both of them (entire song). Also, only the songs created on the DDK-7 and XG-compatible songs can be deleted. Songs created on the EL series instruments such as the EL-900 cannot be deleted. 1 2 3 Select the song to be deleted. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 4 Press the button of the specific data you want to delete (“DELETE ALL,” “ALL,” “DELETE REGIST” or “DELETE PERFORMANCE”). The selected data will be deleted. Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. Press the [DELETE] button in the display. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Confirm that the song to be deleted is shown in the display. If you want to change the song, press the [CANCEL] button and select the desired song. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 7 • DELETE ALL: Deletes the entire song. • DELETE REGIST: Deletes only Registration data in the song. • DELETE PERFORMANCE: Deletes only performance data in the song. Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation. When deleting folders, songs with only registration, songs with only performance data, protected songs or XG-compatible songs: Select [DELETE] to actually delete the data, or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 139 Converting to XG This function allows you to convert the DDK-7 song data to XG format data. You can playback the data using XG devices. The converted XG song data may sound differently from the original data. Confirm that the media should contain enough amount of available memory before the conversion. The protected songs cannot be converted to XG format. 1 Selects a song to be converted to XG. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. 3 Press the [CONVERT] button. A message “Which do you want to select?” appears. 4 Press the [CONVERT TO XG] button. The following display appears. 5 (If necessary) Changes the destination to save the converted song. For details on changing the destination, see page 113. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A message appears indicating that the converted data is being checked and the M.D.R. starts playback of the selected song. When playback is finished, the display returns to the previous display. 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) NOTE Playing the keyboard or pressing the panel controls during the confirmation of the conversion will be recorded to the converted XG-compatible song. 140 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Converting to EL format You can convert songs created on the DDK-7 to EL-series format, and save them to a floppy disk. The converted data can be used with EL-series Electones, such as the EL900. This function is not available for protected songs. You’ll need to install the optional floppy disk drive such as UD-FD01. 1 Select the song to be converted to EL-series format. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 2 In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT] button. A “Which do you want to select?” message appears. Reference Page About Protected Songs (page 129) NOTE Assign/Setup data of Keyboard Percussion, User Voices and User Rhythms cannot be converted to EL format. 3 Press the [CONVERT TO EL] button. If the source song contains two or more Registration banks, you’ll need to make ready the same number of destination songs to save the converted data. 4 Insert the floppy disk, then press the [EXECUTE] button in the display. If the remaining memory of the floppy disk is insufficient, conversion cannot be executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.) Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 7 NOTE If the source song’s name contains full size characters or Japanese characters, these characters will be shown as question marks (such as “????”). DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 141 NOTE When you convert the protected EL data to DDK-7 format, set the write-protect tab of the EL disk to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). NOTE When converting a protected EL song to the DDK-7 format, make sure to use a Yamaha-confirmed USB flash memory device with ID. Converting from EL format You can convert the songs in the floppy disk created with an EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900, to the DDK-7 format, and save it to a USB flash memory confirmed by Yamaha. You’ll need to install the optional floppy disk drive such as UD-FD01. Depending on the original song, the sound or tempo of the converted song may differ from the original song, or the Next Song function of the original song may not be effective. 1 Insert the floppy disk that contains the song you want to convert from EL format, then select the source song. For details on selecting a song, see page 113. 2 In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT] button. A message appears confirming if you want to convert from the EL format to the DDK-7 format. 3 Press the [CONVERT FROM EL] button in the display, then specify the destination for the converted song. To use the converted song on the DDK-7, the destination must be USB flash memory. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to start conversion. If the remaining memory of the USB flash memory is insufficient, conversion cannot be executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.) 7 Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 142 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Checking the Remaining Memory/media ID In the TOOLS Page, press the [INFORMATION] button. If a USB storage device is selected, the remaining memory in the media is shown, as well as whether or not the media has an ID. If a song is selected, the song data capacity, title, composer, etc. are shown. Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) 7 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 143 8 Voice Edit This DDK-7 has a Voice Edit feature that allows you to create your own Voices. We suggest that you read through the Voice Structure below at first to get a firmer understanding of the Voices. Then go through the editing steps, reading Editing a Voice on page 147 for editing of an AWM Voice. Contents 1 Voice Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 • AWM Voice structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 2 Editing a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 • Selecting a Voice for editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 • Editing an AWM Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 3 Saving the edited Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 4 Quitting Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 5 Recalling an Edited Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 1 Voice Structure The internal structure of the Voices of this DDK-7 is explained below. AWM Voice structure AWM Voices consist of up to four recorded samples of a real instrument. Each waveform, referred to as an “Element,” can be edited, by changing the level (volume), filter settings, and so on. A single Voice contains four boxes (AWM1 – AWM4) in which the Elements are put. If a Voice consists of less than three Elements, some boxes are empty. For example, Strings 1 consists of two Elements (as shown). 8 Voice Edit Strings 1 Element 1 Element 2 AWM1 AWM2 AWM3 AWM4 You can add Elements from other Voices – Brass, for example – if a box (AWM3 and/or AWM4) is empty. This allows you to create your own original ensemble sounds. In the Voice Edit function, you can edit not only each Element, but also assemble some Elements from other Voices. 144 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Editing a Voice Selecting a Voice for editing 1 Select the Voice you want to edit from the Voice Menu. For example, if you want to edit Accordion 1, select [Accordion 1] in the Voice Menu in any Voice section. Mute all other Voice sections except for the targeted Voice section. 2 Press the [PROGRAM] button to call up the PROGRAM Display. 3 Voice Edit 8 Select the desired voice section at the left half of this display. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 145 After you have selected the Voice section, the AWM Page (first page of the Voice Edit display) will appear. 8 Voice Edit 146 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Editing an AWM Voice You can edit an AWM Voice on the AWM Page and LAYER Page in the Voice Edit display. In the AWM Page, the tonal balance of the entire Voice can be corrected by some EQ parameters. In the LAYER Page, you can make detailed edits to each Element. AWM Page 1 1 2 3 3 Element On/Off switches The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected Voice. You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute. 2 VOICE/ELEMENT 8 3 Voice Edit Indicates the Voice/Element currently being edited. For example, the screen above shows that Element 1 of Accordion 1 is assigned to AWM1, the Element 2 of Accordion 1 is assigned to AWM2 and no Voice is assigned to AWM3 and AWM4. You can also call up another Element from another Voice and replace the currently selected Element with it. Pressing the VOICE or ELEMENT button in the display calls up the Voice or Element menu, from which you can select the desired Voice/Element (usually Element 1). If you change Voice, the Element will automatically change to the first Element of the Voice (usually Element 1). EQ LOW FREQ./EQ LOW GAIN Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the low frequency band. The EQ LOW FREQ. slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz. The EQ LOW GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ LOW FREQ. slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB. 4 EQ HIGH FREQ./EQ HIGH GAIN Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the high frequency band. The EQ HIGH FREQ. slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 500 Hz – 16.0 kHz. The EQ HIGH GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ HIGH FREQ. slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 147 EQ (Equalizer) Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, then by raising or lowering the level for each band, the correction is made. This DDK-7 has a two-band (high and low) digital equalizer that lets you adjust the overall sound according to the type of music you play — classical music being more refined and soft, pop music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic. LAYER Page 1 3 2 1 8 Element select buttons Select the Element you wish to edit. Voice Edit 2 Element On/Off switches The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected Voice. You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute. Muting all other Elements except for the one you are editing lets you clearly hear that single Element for ease in editing. Note that when some Elements are muted, playing the keyboard in certain key areas or with certain velocities may result in no sound. 3 Display switch buttons The LAYER Page contains three pages. The them. 148 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual buttons are used to switch among LAYER Page 1 These buttons switch the display. 1 1 2 3 LEVEL Determines the output level of the Element. Range: 0 – 127 2 NOTE LIMIT Determines the lowest and highest notes in the range for which the Element sounds. The setting of the HIGH slider cannot be set lower than that of the LOW slider. Some Elements are not affected by this parameter. Range: C-2 – G8 3 PAN Determines the position of the Element in the stereo image. Range: L64 – R63 Voice Edit 8 LAYER Page 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 NOTE SHIFT Determines the pitch settings in semitones. Range: -64 – +63 2 TUNE FINE Determines the fine tuning. Range: -64 – +63 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 149 3 ATTACK RATE Determines how quickly the Element will reach its maximum level after the key is played. Higher values produce a faster attack. Range: 0 – 127 4 RELEASE RATE Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the key is released. Higher values make the time shorter. Range: 1 – 127 5 CUTOFF FREQ. Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter. Range: 9600 – 24000 cent 6 RESONANCE Determines the amount of resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency. Some Elements are not affected by this parameter. Range: 16 – 140 Filter — Cutoff frequency and Resonance Filter modifies the tone by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the sound. This DDK-7 is equipped with a low pass filter, which passes only those signals below the cutoff frequency and cuts signals above the cutoff frequency. 8 Cutoff Frequency Level Voice Edit Frequency These frequencies are passed by the filter. Level Resonance Cutoff Frequency Frequency You can produce a relatively bright or darker sound by setting the cutoff frequency. Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the signal in the area of the cutoff frequency. By emphasizing the overtones in this area, this can produce a distinctive “peaky” tone. 150 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual LAYER Page 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 LFO WAVE Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound. For details, see page 152. 2 LFO SPEED Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. Higher values make the speed faster. Range: 2 – 93 3 LFO PMD (Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the pitch of the sound. Higher values result in a greater amount of pitch change. For the minimum setting, the pitch does not change. Range: 0 – 400 8 LFO FMD (Frequency Modulation Depth) Voice Edit 4 Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the filter cutoff frequency. Higher values result in a greater amount of frequency change. For the minimum setting, the frequency does not change. Range: 0 – 4800 cent 5 LFO AMD (Amplitude Modulation Depth) Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the amplitude of the sound. Higher values result in a greater amount of amplitude change. For the minimum setting, the amplitude does not change. Range: 0 – 128 When playing a User Voice you have created using the LFO parameters (above), set the Vibrato setting in the Voice Condition display to “Preset,” not “User.” If Vibrato is set to “User” and the Vibrato parameters (depth and/or speed) are set fairly high, you may not be able to hear the effect of the LFO. Reference Page Vibrato (page 44) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 151 LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) As its name suggests, the LFO creates waveforms of a low frequency. These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude to create effects such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. The following five waveforms are available. saw tri rnd sine squ 3 Saving the edited Voice Edited AWM Voices can be saved as User Voices (up to sixteen). 8 Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up the SAVE Page. 2 Select the User Voice number you wish to save to. The message appears to prompt confirmation of the operation. (Saving a new Voice automatically erases the Voice previously stored to the selected User number.) 3 (If necessary) Press the [RENAME] button to give a name to your original Voice. The method for editing the name is the same as the one for the song name in the M.D.R. section. (See page 120 for more information.) Up to sixteen characters can be entered. 4 Press the [SAVE] button to save the Voice, or press [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Voice Edit 1 152 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual This operation automatically erases any Voice that had been previously saved to the selected User Voice number. Be careful not to erase any important data. Always save your important data in advance to a USB flash memory or other external media using the M.D.R. function. After saving the Voice, be sure to quit the Voice Edit function (page 153) before turning the power off. Turning off the DDK-7 without quitting Voice Edit erases the User Voice you have edited. 4 Quitting Voice Edit You can quit the Voice Edit function from any of its display pages. 1 Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel. If your original Voice has already been saved, the Voice Edit function quits automatically. If the edited Voice has not been saved, a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. 2 Select [EXIT] to quit the Voice Edit function, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display. When quitting Voice Edit, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice you have created is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Voice is being saved. Voice Edit 8 5 Recalling an Edited Voice Once your original AWM Voice has been saved, it can be selected from the User menu in each Voice section. Refer to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons” (page 27). DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 153 9 Rhythm Program The DDK-7 includes powerful rhythm programming functions: Rhythm Pattern Program and Rhythm Sequence Program. Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to record your own original rhythms and save them as user rhythms. Rhythm Sequence Program lets you connect the existing rhythms or your original rhythms to create complete rhythm tracks, which you can automatically play back during your performance. Moreover, Rhythm Sequence Program includes an automatic Registration Shift feature — called Registration Sequence. Contents 1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation . 154 2 Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 • Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . 155 • Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern . . . . . . . . . . 158 • Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Step Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 • Editing Entered Percussion Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 • Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Real Time Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 • Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 • Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts. . . 173 • Adjusting Volume and Panning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 • Effect Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 • Detailed settings for each percussion instrument . 178 • Saving Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 • Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . 181 • Recalling User Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 • Selecting Rhythm from an External Media . . . . . . . 182 • Percussion Kit List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 3 Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 • Selecting a Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 • Programming a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 • Auditioning a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 • Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence . . . . . . . . . . 193 • Programming a Registration Sequence . . . . . . . . . 195 • Editing an Existing Registration Sequence. . . . . . . 196 • Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . 197 • Playing Rhythm Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 • Playing All Sequences in Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 • Copying a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 4 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to External Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation Rhythm Pattern Program (pages 155 – 180) You can create your original rhythm patterns by entering percussion sounds or editing preset rhythm patterns. 9 Entering percussion sounds and/or editing them Rhythm Program Creating the backing (Rhythmic Chord) patterns and/or editing them Effect settings and detailed settings for each percussion Voice (Panning, Tuning, and so on) Saving your rhythm patterns as User rhythms Rhythm Sequence Program (pages 190 – 197) You can connect any of the rhythms together to make complete rhythm compositions. Moreover, you can also program Registration Shift events at any point in the composition so that the Registration Memory settings automatically change as the rhythm sequence plays back. Selecting the destination of the sequence Entering a rhythm pattern one by one Programming the Registration Sequence 154 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Rhythm Pattern Program Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use any of the different instrument sounds (drum and percussion) assigned to each key on the Upper and Lower keyboards in creating your own rhythms. Up to 48 of your original rhythms can be saved as User Rhythms. Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program There are two ways to program a User pattern: copying a preset rhythm that is similar to the rhythm you want to create, and creating your own rhythm from scratch. To copy a preset rhythm: Copying a preset rhythm lets you make changes to an existing rhythm, saving you time if you want to program a rhythm that is similar to an existing preset pattern. To create your own rhythm from scratch: Load a blank pattern to the Rhythm Pattern Program, then create a completely new rhythm. 2 To copy a preset rhythm, select the rhythm you want to copy from the Rhythm Menu. Press the [PROGRAM] button to call up the Program Display. NOTE Pressing the [PROGRAM] button while the rhythm is running automatically stops the rhythm. 9 Rhythm Program 1 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 155 3 To copy a preset rhythm, press the [RHYTHM] button. To create your own rhythm from scratch, press the [NEW RHYTHM] button. To copy a preset rhythm 9 Rhythm Program 156 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual To create your own rhythm A Rhythm consists of 15 sections: Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Ending 1 – 3, and Break. In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can enter or edit percussion notes one by one, or assemble each part from other different rhythms to create your own new User Rhythm. Case 1: Creating your own rhythm by changing a preset rhythm Preset Rhythm User Rhythm Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 B B 3 C C D D Changing Intro 1 to Intro 1' Save as a User Rhythm Fill In A Intro 1' Main A 2 B B 3 C C D D Ending 1 Ending 1 Break 2 Break 2 3 3 All Rhythm sections, including any which have not been edited, are saved as one User Rhythm. Case 2: Creating your own rhythm by assembling parts from other different rhythms Preset Rhythm Fill In A Intro 1 Main A 2 B B 3 C C Ending 1 D D User Rhythm Break 3 Save as a User Rhythm Preset Rhythm Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 B B 3' C' C' D' D' Ending 1 Intro 1' Main A' Fill In A' 2 2' B' B' 3 3' C' C' Ending 1' D' D' 2' 3' Break' 9 Break' Rhythm Program 2 Assemble some sections or parts Case 3: Creating your own rhythm from scratch Blank Rhythm Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 B B 3 C C D D 3 Save as a User Rhythm User Rhythm Fill In A Intro 1 Main A 2 B B 3 C C D D Ending 1 Ending 1 2 Entering percussion sounds into each section Break 2 Break 3 These are blank sections (no percussion sounds); if you press ENDING [2] or [3] button, no sound is played. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 157 Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern In the SETTING Page of the display, set the conditions of the rhythm, such as time signature, measure length, and so on. You can also customize the part settings in this SETTING Page — deleting any part or copying a part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm. 1 Press the [SETTING] button in the display to call up the SETTING Page. 2 Determines the time signature used for the rhythm. You can select the time signature with the BEAT buttons. 9 Rhythm Program If you start the Rhythm Pattern Program from a preset rhythm, pressing a BEAT button that is not the same as the currently selected rhythm calls up the following message. Selecting [CLEAR] deletes all data in the rhythm and changes the time signature. Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. 158 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Select a section to which you want to enter or edit the rhythm pattern. Pressing the SECTION button on the display calls up the Section Select pop-up menu. After selecting the desired section, the pop-up menu automatically closes. You can play the selected section by pressing the Rhythm [START] button on the panel. You can also change the section while the rhythm is playing. For details on muting the accompaniment part, refer to page 174. 4 Sets the measure length of the rhythm pattern. Pressing the MEASURE button on the display calls up the Measure Select popup menu. Select the desired measure in the pop-up menu. If you select Break or Fill In as the section, the measure cannot be changed. 5 (If necessary) Set the Metronome, Part Assemble, and Part Clear parameters. 9 Rhythm Program 2 3 1 1 METRONOME Turns the metronome click on or off. When set to ON, the metronome sounds on each beat of the measure (for example, three times per measure in 3/4 time) to serve as a rhythmic guide when programming patterns. Set to On here with Real Time Write. Reference Pages Step Write and Real Time Write (page 161) Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Real Time Write (page 169) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 159 2 ASSEMBLE Copies the part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm. You can assemble various sections from multiple rhythms to create your original rhythm. Pressing the [ASSEMBLE] button calls up the following display. Select copy source (Rhythm, Section, and Part) Select the part for the copy destination Press here to execute the copy Select the copy source: Rhythm, Section and Part. Then select the destination. You can copy only one part, or all parts of a rhythm. After setting the source and destination, press [EXECUTE]. Copy is executed and returning to the previous display. You can also select a rhythm pattern currently being created as the COPY FROM RHYTHM. To create a MAIN B section based on MAIN A, you can conveniently create that you create the MAIN A rhythm first and copy it to MAIN B, then edit the MAIN B rhythm. To select the rhythm currently being created, select “Current Rhythm” on the 5th page of the “USER” category. 9 Rhythm Program 160 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 CLEAR PART Clears a specific part or parts from the currently selected rhythm. Pressing this button calls up the following display. Select the part you want to delete from the displayed parts. You cannot select a part that contains no data (the button is grayed out). If you select [ALL] here, the percussion and all accompaniment parts are cleared. When selecting the desired part, a display prompting confirmation of the operation appears. Select [CLEAR] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Reference Page Accompaniment (page 71) NOTE If you select BASS here, the bass phrase in the A.B.C. will be cleared. Step Write and Real Time Write There are two different methods you can use to program rhythms: Step Write and Real Time Write. Step Write allows you to enter percussion sounds as individual note values. As a method, it is very similar to writing down the notes on a sheet of music paper; each note is entered one at a time, and though you can hear each individual note entered, you cannot actually hear the pattern playing as you create it. Step Write is good for precision and for entering percussion sounds whose note placement and rhythmic value has been determined, such as a bass drum that plays every beat in a measure. Rhythm Program 9 Real Time Write on the other hand, is similar to using a multi-track tape recorder; you can hear previously recorded parts of the pattern as you record new parts on top. Real Time Write is best for capturing the “feel” of a rhythm, because it allows you to actually play the pattern as you are creating it. Each method has its own advantages and uses. Which method you use depends partly on the type of rhythm you intend to create and partly on your own personal preference. You can switch between the two methods in editing to create a single rhythm by the use of both methods. This would come handy, for example, in programming the basic beats of a rhythm with Step Write, then using Real Time Write to add percussion accents and embellishments. Which mode of the operation is selected depends on the play status of the rhythm. If the rhythm is stopped, Step Write is automatically selected. If the rhythm is playing, Real Time Write is selected. See the instructions below for Step Write, and page 169 for Real Time Write. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 161 Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Step Write NOTE The volume of the percussion and accompaniment sound during use of Rhythm Pattern Program can be controlled with the VOLUME button of the RHYTHM section. When you quit Rhythm Pattern Program, the VOLUME of the RHYTHM section will return to the previous selected level. 9 You can enter percussion sounds in the INPUT Page of the display. Before entering percussion sounds, turn off the Upper and Lower keyboard Voices by setting each Voice’s volume to MIN. 1 Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the INPUT Page. 2 Select the part, MAIN DRUM or ADD DRUM, to which you want to enter the percussion. In general, main (or basic) drum/percussion instruments (such as Bass Drum, Snare Drum, and so on) are entered in Main Drum part and others (such as Tambourine, Triangle) are entered in Add Drum part. 3 Select the desired Drum Kit. You can select a kit from 20 Drum kits and 5 SFX kits. For details on each kit, see page 183. Pressing the button indicating the currently selected kit calls up the kit Select the pop-up menu, then select the desired kit from the pop-up menu. The selected kit is called up on the Upper and Lower keyboards. Drum kit SFX kit Rhythm Program You can select only one kit for each part (Main Drum or Add Drum). When you want to create a rhythm pattern including two different drum kits, select one kit for Main Drum and another for Add Drum. 162 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 Select the percussion sound you wish to enter by pressing the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the sound. The selected instrument’s name appears on the display. Selected key Instrument name 5 Set the appropriate Quantize value. For details on Quantize, refer to page 168. 6 Set the Gate Time. (This is optional, and only necessary when you want to enter a sustaining sound, such as a whistle.) For a list of instruments that require a Gate Time setting, refer to the Percussion Kit List on page 183. For details on Gate Time, refer to page 172. 7 Use the ACCENT buttons to enter the sound to the selected point. Press each ACCENT button to actually enter the percussion sounds. You can change the rhythm clock to which the percussion sound is entered by pressing the QUANTIZE [E][F] buttons. NOTE The Quantize setting can be changed in the middle of Step Write. 9 2 1 Rhythm Program 1 3 Rhythm Clock box Displays the current position in the pattern according to measure, beat, and number of clicks. A click is the smallest division of a pattern, and one beat is made up of 480 clicks. The rhythm clock advances up to the measures set in the SETTING Page and loops back to the beginning of the rhythm (01:01:000). Reference Page Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern (page 158) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 163 2 ACCENT buttons Records the instrument and determines its volume or Accent level. Press one of the ACCENT buttons you wish to set (“ppp” is softer and “fff ” is louder; “REST” is no sound). The instrument is automatically inserted at the Accent level to the selected position in the pattern. Selection of an Accent level automatically advances the rhythm clock by one step, according to the current Quantize resolution value. 3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls Each press of the buttons advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is determined by the Quantize value. 8 Repeat steps #4 through #7 above to layer each instrument and complete your own rhythm. Editing Entered Percussion Notes You can change the accent level, position, or gate time of the entered sound, or delete the entered sound. To change the accent level of an entered note: 1 Select the desired note for changing the accent level. 9 Rhythm Program 1 1 1 2 23 4 5 3 NEXT INSTRUMENT Selects the entered instruments one by one, from left key to right. 2 NOTE [E][F] controls Selects the previous/next position’s note of the currently selected instrument. In the above notes for example, you can select notes 1, 3 and 4 one by one. Rests (2 and 5) are ignored. 3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls Advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is determined by the Quantize value. 164 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Change the accent level by using the ACCENT buttons or Accent box. The Accent box allows for finer changes. 1 2 1 Accent box Touch on the box to enable the Accent box. Turning the Data Control dial changes the accent level over a range of 0 – 127. The minimum setting results in no sound. 2 ACCENT buttons Determines the coarse accent level. Eight accent levels (from “ppp” to “fff ”) are available. Press the desired Accent button to change the currently selected note to the selected level. To move an entered note: 1 2 Select the note you want to move (as in Step 1 on page 164). 3 Turn the Data Control dial to change the position by one clock. 9 Rhythm Program Press the Rhythm Clock box to enable the box. To change the length of an entered note: The length of sustaining sounds such as Snare Roll and Whistle can be changed by adjusting the Gate Time. See page 173 for more information. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 165 To erase an entered note: 1 2 Select the note you want to erase (as in Step 1 on page 164). Press the [REST] button in the ACCENT section of the display. The selected note is deleted and replaced with a rest. You can also erase all notes of a single instrument, or all notes entered. To erase one instrument: 1 Select the key to which the instrument that you want to erase is assigned. The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed. Selected key 9 Instrument name 3 Select [CLEAR] to erase the selected instrument. A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased. Rhythm Program 2 Press [CLEAR] in the display. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. The following method can also be used to erase one instrument. While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased. 166 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual To erase all instruments: 1 Press [CLEAR] in the display. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 2 Select [CLEAR ALL] to erase all instruments. All instruments are instantly erased. When you want to replace the instrument you have already entered with another instrument, it’s not necessary to delete and re-enter. You can quickly replace the sound with the following procedure. To replace the instrument: Before the operation, stop the rhythm. 1 Select the key to which the instrument you want to replace is assigned. The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed. 9 2 Instrument name Rhythm Program Selected key Simultaneously hold down the [CHANGE] button in the display and press the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the instrument you want to use. The instrument is instantly erased and replaced with the newly selected one. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 167 About Quantize The Quantize function is a process of rounding off timing or duration values, so that each note plays with precise timing. You can select nine types of Quantize value. With this button, change the displayed Quantize buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 With Step Write It allows you to automatically correct the length (duration) and timing of each note you enter. Steps Depending on the Quantize Values 1 2 240 3 120 4 60 6 320 7 9 160 8 80 9 40 Rhythm Program Clock 0 120 240 360 480 (1 beat) Setting Quantize to FREE (5) results in the finest, least amount of quantization (1/480 beat). With Real Time Write It allows you to automatically correct the timing of the notes you play, according to the specified Quantize resolution. No correction occurs when you select FREE. Generally, you should set Quantize to be the same as the shortest note you intend to play. Original data (you play) After applying a “ ” quantize value to the original data 168 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Quarter note length Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Real Time Write While you listen to the entered rhythm or metronome click, play the Upper/Lower keyboards to enter the desired percussion sounds. 1 Select the desired part to which the percussion sounds are entered, and the desired drum kit, by following Steps 1 – 3 on page 162. 2 Set the appropriate Quantize value. The positions at which the sounds are input will be corrected according to the predetermined Quantize value in the Real Time Write operation. For details, refer to page 168. 3 Press the rhythm [START] button in the panel. The rhythm (or Metronome) starts playing, enabling the Real Time Write operation. Rhythm Program 9 4 5 While the rhythm is running, play the percussion sounds from the Upper and/or Lower keyboards. If you have started the Rhythm Pattern Program by copying a preset rhythm, you can listen the selected rhythm as you play the sound. If you have started from scratch, set the Metronome to “on” in the SETTING Page and listen to the metronome click. The pattern will automatically repeat (or “loop”) for a certain number of measures as set in the SETTING Page. Reference Page Metronome (page 159) Repeat steps #2 through #4 above to layer each instrument and complete your own rhythm. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 169 You can erase an instrument while rhythm is played. To erase an instrument/key assignment: While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. All instances of the selected instrument will be erased from the pattern. When you want to erase all instruments, or edit entered percussion notes, you need to stop the rhythm then edit. See page 164, “Editing Entered Percussion Notes.” Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function) The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to use one of the DDK-7’s Accompaniment patterns with your original rhythm. You can select and save the Accompaniment pattern that best matches the rhythm that you have created. Moreover, Rhythm Pattern Program features a Rhythmic Chord function that lets you add your own backing patterns to the rhythms you create. To select an appropriate Accompaniment pattern for your newly created rhythm: Reference Page Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern (page 158) 9 1 Press the [SETTING] button at the top of the display to call up the SETTING Page. 2 3 Press the [ASSEMBLE] button. A pop-up menu appears, letting you select the copy source and destination part. 4 Using the COPY FROM [PART] button, select the accompaniment part you want to copy. 5 Using the COPY TO [PART] button, select the desired accompaniment part (CHORD 1 or CHORD 2) to be used for the Rhythmic Chord pattern. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the copy. Using the COPY FROM [RHYTHM] and [SECTION] buttons, select the rhythm and the section which has the accompaniment you wish to use. Rhythm Program The desired accompaniment part (Rhythmic Chord pattern) has been copied. 170 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual To create your own backing patterns with the Rhythmic Chord function: The Rhythmic Chord pattern can be entered by the same methods as the rhythm: Step Write and/or Real Time Write. 1 Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the INPUT Page. 2 Select the part, CHORD 1 or CHORD 2, which you want to create for the Rhythmic Chord pattern. If the part you have select contains a preset accompaniment pattern, a message appears prompting you to confirm whether you want to clear the existing data or not. To create your own Rhythmic Chord pattern, select [CLEAR]. NOTE The Voice menu that appears here is not the same as the one for the Voice Sections. See the Rhythm Program Voice List on page 186. 9 Rhythm Program 3 Select the desired Voice. Pressing the button showing the Voice name calls up the relevant Voice Menu. Select the desired Voice category with the instrument icon buttons, then select the desired Voice from the Voice Menu. The selected Voice is called up for both the Upper and Lower keyboards. Voices can also be changed even after entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern. You can select only one Voice for one part (Chord 1 or Chord 2). When you want to create a Rhythmic Chord pattern including two different Voices, select one Voice for Chord 1 and another for Chord 2. 4 Set the appropriate Quantize value. For details on the Quantize function, refer to page 168. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 171 5 Set the Gate Time. You can adjust the Gate Time setting by using GATE TIME in the display, or Data Control dial. buttons DATA CONTROL Gate time determines the actual length of time a note sounds. For example, a quarter note is sometimes played as tenuto (long length) and sometimes played as staccato (short length). Since 1 beat is made up of 480 clocks, a quarter note played tenuto may have a gate time between 450 – 470, and a staccato quarter note may be about 240. 6 Enter the Rhythmic Chord pattern. The methods for entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern are the same as those for entering the rhythm pattern. Any key you press sounds a C major triad chord (C, E, and G). For information on Step Write, see page 163; for information on Real Time Write, see page 169. You can also edit the entered Rhythmic Chord pattern using the same method as in “Editing Entered Percussion Notes” (page 164). To change the gate time of the notes of the Rhythmic Chord pattern, follow the instructions below. 9 Rhythm Program 172 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual To change the Gate Time: 1 2 3 Select the note for which you want to change the gate time (see Step 1 on page 164). Press the Gate Time box to enable the box. Turn the Data Control dial to change the Gate Time. Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can create your original drum patterns using Main Drum and Add Drum, and original backing patterns using Chord 1 and Chord 2. Moreover, you can change the Voices for all accompaniment parts, including Pad, Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. Voices can be changed in the VOICE/EFFECT Page. Press the [VOICE/EFFECT] button at the top of the display to call up the VOICE/EFFECT Page. 2 Press the [VOICE] button in the display. The following display will appear. 9 Rhythm Program 1 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 173 NOTE The Voice menu that appears here is not the same as the one for the Voice Sections. See the Rhythm Program Voice List on page 186. 3 Select the desired part for which you wish to change the Voice. The Voice menu appears. 4 Select the desired Voice, and the Voice menu automatically closes. After selecting the desired Voice, customize the accompaniment to your personal preference by adjusting the volume and pan, and setting the desired effects below. Adjusting Volume and Panning Volume and Pan are set in VOICE/EFFECT Page. VOLUME Display 9 1 Rhythm Program 2 1 ON/OFF Determines the on/off status of each accompaniment part. When this is set to OFF, the part is muted. 2 Volume sliders Determines the volume of each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 174 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual PAN Display Determines the position of each accompaniment part in the stereo image. Range: L64 – R63 Effect Settings You can set Reverb, Chorus, and Variation effects as desired for your original rhythm. Reverb adds a warm ambience to the sound, simulating the complex reflections of actual performance spaces, such as a concert hall or a small club. Chorus provides a wide variety of sound transformations and enhancements. Variation includes many kinds of special effects for changing the sound, both subtly and radically. These effects are set in the VOICE/EFFECT Page. REVERB Display Rhythm Program 9 Determines the amount of reverb applied to each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 175 CHORUS Display 1 2 1 CHORUS TYPE Determines the type of the chorus effect. Pressing the CHORUS TYPE button calls up the chorus type list. Select the desired chorus type, and the list automatically closes. 2 Chorus sliders Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 9 Rhythm Program 176 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual VARIATION Display 1 2 3 1 VARIATION (Variation Effect Category) Selects the effect category of the variation effect. Pressing the VARIATION button calls up the effect category list. Reference Page Effect List (page 53) Select the desired effect category, and the list automatically closes. After changing the category, the variation type below automatically changes corresponding to the selected category. 2 TYPE 9 (Variation Type) Rhythm Program Determines the type of the variation effect. Pressing the TYPE button calls up the effect type list. LCD Select the desired type, and the list automatically closes. 3 Variation sliders Determines the amount of Variation effect applied to each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 177 Detailed settings for each percussion instrument You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each instrument. 1 2 Press the [DRUM SETUP] button at the top of the display to call up the DRUM SETUP Page. 3 Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be changed is assigned). The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its settings. Select the desired part, Main Drum or Add Drum. 9 Rhythm Program 4 Adjust the parameters: Pan, Volume, Reverb and Pitch. 1 2 3 178 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 5 6 1 Percussion Kit Name Indicates the currently selected kit. Pressing this button calls up the Percussion Kit list, letting you select the desired kit. When you change the kit, the instruments you have already entered are replaced with the instruments of the newly selected kit. 2 Reference Page Percussion Kit List (page 183) PAN Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image. Range: L63 – R63 3 VOLUME Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 127 4 REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 127 5 PITCH COARSE Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in semitone (100-cent) steps. Range: -64 – +63 6 PITCH FINE Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in 1-cent steps, allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than in PITCH COARSE ( 5) above. Range: -64 – +63 Saving Rhythm Patterns You can save your newly created rhythm pattern as a User Rhythm, up to a maximum of 48 patterns. 2 Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up the SAVE Page. If the rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped. 3 Select the User Rhythm number to which you wish to save. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Rhythm Program 1 If necessary, confirm the contents of the rhythm you want to save. For details, see page 180. 9 LCD DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 179 4 Press the [SAVE] button to save the pattern, or press [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Remaining Memory (amount of memory available for storing rhythms) is shown on the display as a percentage. Remaining Memory When the pattern cannot be saved because of lack of available memory space, a “Data full” message appears. Return to the previous page by pressing [OK] in this case. You should periodically save your rhythm as you are creating it and check the amount of remaining memory. If the rhythm currently being edited cannot be saved because of a lack of memory space, erase some of the less necessary percussion sounds with the [CLEAR] button in the INPUT Page, and try saving the pattern again. After saving the Rhythm, be sure to quit Rhythm Pattern Program (page 181) before turning the power off. Turning off the DDK-7 without quitting Rhythm Pattern Program erases the User Rhythm you have created. 9 Confirming rhythm patterns before saving Rhythm Program The rhythm pattern you have created will be saved with 15 sections collectively into one rhythm. Before saving, we recommend that you confirm the contents of each section. Example: When saving the Main A and Main B sections you have created into one user rhythm First select “Main A” by using the [SECTION] button on the SETTING Page, then press the [START] button on the panel. This lets you hear the Main A pattern you have created. Confirm that the rhythm pattern is what you want to save as Main A. Next, select “Main B” by using the [SECTION] button, then play it back and confirm that this is what you want to save as Main B. If the Main A and/or Main B patterns contain undesired data or no data, create the desired data by using the Assemble function (page 160). After confirming the desired section (Main A and Main B here), we recommend that you confirm that all other sections contain no data. If unnecessary data is contained in some sections which you don’t want to save, delete that unnecessary data. This can reduce the data size of the user rhythm. 180 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program You can quit the Rhythm Pattern Program from any of its display pages. 1 Press the [PROGRAM] button. If a rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped. If you leave Rhythm Pattern Program without having edited any patterns, this simply quits the Rhythm Pattern Program. If you have not saved the edited pattern, a message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 2 Select [EXIT] to leave Rhythm Pattern Program, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display. When you leave the Rhythm Pattern Program, the square at the top left in the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the data is being saved. Recalling User Rhythm Patterns The User rhythms you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program can be selected and played from the User menu. Refer to Chapter 5, “Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button” (page 61). Select “USER” category here. Rhythm Program 9 Select the User Rhythm number. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 181 Selecting Rhythm from an External Media You can load rhythms from a USB flash memory, or other external media and edit and save them as User Rhythms. Data that can be loaded includes not only that of the DDK-7, but also all Style File Format files. 9 Rhythm Program 1 2 3 4 Insert the media which contains the desired pattern into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 5 Press the [SELECT] button to select the desired pattern file. The method for selecting a file is the same as that in the M.D.R. section. See page 113 for more information. 6 Press the [LOAD] button, selected button again to load the pattern. To edit the loaded pattern, go to the INPUT Page (page 164), then save your created pattern(s) as a User Rhythm (page 179). Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel. Press the [RHYTHM] or [NEW RHYTHM] in the display. Press [FILE] at the top right in the display. If you open the FILE Page while the rhythm is playing, the rhythm will automatically be stopped. About file types that can be loaded to the DDK-7 This DDK-7 is compatible with Style File Format data. The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style data format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide highquality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. In this format, each rhythm pattern (called a “style”) is made up of fifteen sections (Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Break, Ending 1 – 3) as rhythm pattern variations. Each of these fifteen sections in turn has eight different parts, made up of MIDI sequence data. You can load any patterns (styles) which have been created by an SFF-compatible instrument. Instruments compatible with SFF have the Style File Logo on the panel. 182 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Percussion Kit List C-1 C-1 D-1 D-1 E-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 B-1 C0 C0 D0 D0 E0 F0 G0 Lower Keyboard A0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 F3 G3 A3 B3 Upper Keyboard C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 C5 D5 D5 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Standard Kit 2 Live!Funk Kit Live!Funk+P Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot H Kick Tight Kick Short Side Stick Light Snare Short Hand Clap Snare Tight H Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Hit Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Electro Sticks Kick Tight L Snare Pitched Kick Wet Kick Tight H Stick Ambient Snare Ambient Hand Clap Snare Tight 2 Hybrid Tom 1 Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hybrid Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hybrid Tom 3 Hi-Hat Open 2 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Hybrid Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Light Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Room Kit Rock Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Snappy Hand Clap Snare Tight Snap Tom Room 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Room 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Room 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Room 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Noisy Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick 2 Kick Gate Side Stick Snare Rock Hand Clap Snare Rock Tight Tom Rock 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Rock 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Rock 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Rock 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Electro Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal* Snare Roll* Hi Q 2 Snare Snap Elec Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Side Stick Snare Noisy 2 Hand Clap Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Electro 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Electro 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Electro 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree 9 Rhythm Program Standard Kit 1 Live!Std Kit Live!Std+P Kit E5 F5 F5 G5 *: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 183 Analog Kit C-1 C-1 D-1 D-1 E-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 B-1 C0 C0 D0 D0 E0 F0 G0 Lower Keyboard A0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 9 F2 G2 A2 B2 Rhythm Program C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 F3 G3 A3 B3 Upper Keyboard C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 C5 D5 D5 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal* Snare Roll* Hi Q 2 Snare Noisy 4 Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Anlg Short Kick Analog Side Stick Anlg Snare Analog Hand Clap Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hat Close Analog Tom Analog 2 Hat Close Anlg 2 Tom Analog 3 Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves 2 Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Kick Dance 1 Kick Dance 2 Hi Q Whip Slap* Scratch Dance 1* Scratch Dance 2* Finger Snap Click Noise Dance Perc 1 Reverse Dance 1 Dance Perc 2 Hi Q Dance 1 Snare Analog 3 Vinyl Noise* Snare Analog 4 Reverse Cymbal* Reverse Dance 2* Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Snare Dance 1 Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Anlg Snare Clap Dance Clap Snare Dry Tom Dance 1 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Tom Dance 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Tom Dance 3 Hi-Hat Open 3 Tom Dance 4 Tom Dance 5 Crash Analog Tom Dance 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Anlg Splash Cymbal Cowbell Dance Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Analog Ride Analog Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves 2 Dance Perc 3 Dance Perc 4* Dance Breath 1 Dance Breath 2* Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Jazz H Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Snare Jazz L Hand Clap Snare Jazz M Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Brush Slap 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Brush Slap 3 Hand Clap Brush Tap 2 Tom Brush 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Brush 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Brush 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Brush 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Symphony Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft 2 Open Rim Shot Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Side Stick Band Snare Hand Clap Band Snare 2 Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Hand Cymbal High Tom Hand Cymbal S Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Hand Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Hand Cymbal 2 S Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Multi Kit 1 Scratch Concert BD Noise Percussion Bass Drum March Analog BD Short Synth Tom 3 Analog BD Long Synth Tom 2 Synth Bass Drum Synth Tom 1 Bass Drum Attack Bass Drum Heavy Tom 4 Bass Drum Light Tom 3 Orch Snare Drum Snare Drum Roll* Tom 2 SD Brush Roll Tom 1 SD Brush Shot 2 Tom Brush Shot 4 SD Brush Shot 1 Snare Drum Heavy Tom Brush Shot 3 Snare Drum Light Tom Brush Shot 2 SD Accent 2 SD Accent 1 Tom Brush Shot 1 SD Reverb 2 Snare Drum Rim 2 SD Reverb 1 Snare Drum Rim 1 Synth Snare Drum Analog SD Triangle Mute Tambourine Triangle Open Castanet Claves Cabasa Finger Snap Hand Claps Crash Cymbal 2 Hi-Hat Close Crash Cymbal 1 Hi-Hat Open Crash Cym Mute Ride Cymbal 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hi-Hat Pedal 1 Ride Cymbal Cup Cym Brush Shot Cymbal March Analog HH Close Orch Cymbal Roll Analog HH Open Orchestra Cymbal Orch Cymbal Mute Tam-Tam E5 F5 F5 G5 *: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting. 184 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual C-1 C-1 D-1 D-1 E-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 B-1 C0 C0 D0 D0 E0 F0 G0 Lower Keyboard A0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 F3 G3 A3 B3 Upper Keyboard C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 C5 D5 D5 Maracas High Surdo Mute Maracas Low Surdo Muff Surdo Rim Cuica High Surdo Open Cuica Middle Tamborim Mute Cuica Low Tamborim Open Pandeiro Bongo High Conga Slide Bongo Low Conga Slap Conga Muff Bongo Mute Conga High Bongo Slap Conga Low Timbale 1 High Timbale 1 Low Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 Low Timbale 3 High Woodblock High Timbale 3 Low Woodblock Mid Timbale 4 High Woodblock Low Timbale 4 Low Vibraslap Triangle Mute Tambourine Triangle Open Castanet Claves Cabasa Finger Snap Hand Claps Wind Bell Down Agogo High Wind Bell Up Agogo Low Bells Cowbell 4 Shaker Cowbell 3 Guiro Short Cowbell 2 Guiro Long Cowbell 1 Taiko 2 Ohdaiko 2 Taiko 1 Ohdaiko 1 Ohtsuzumi 2 Ohtsuzumi 1 Kakegoe 3 Kotsuzumi 4 Kakegoe 2 Kotsuzumi 3 Kakegoe 1 Kotsuzumi 2 Kotsuzumi 1 Live!Studio Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Studio L Sticks Kick Ambience H Open Rim Shot Kick Ambience L Kick Studio Side Stick Snare Studio M Hand Clap Snare Studio L Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit Pop Latin Kit Hand Clap Cutting Noise 1* Cutting Noise 2* String Slap* Flute Key Click* Shower* Thunder* Wind* Stream* Bubble* Feed* Dog* Horse* Bird Tweet* Phone Call* Door Squeak* Door Slam* Scratch Cut* Scratch H 3* Wind Chime* Telephone Ring* CarEngnIgnition* Car Tires Squeal* Car Passing* Car Crash* Siren* Train* Jet Plane* Starship* Burst* Roller Coaster* Submarine* Laugh* Scream* Punch* Heart Beat* Foot Steps* Machine Gun* Laser Gun* Explosion* Firework* Nakarazan Dom Cabasa Nakarazan Edge Hager Dom Hager Edge Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Zagrouda H Zagrouda L* Kick Soft Side Stick Snare Soft Arabic Hand Clap Snare Drum Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Duhulla Dom Tambourine Duhulla Tak Cowbell Duhulla Sak Claves Doff Dom Katem Dom Katem Tak Katem Sak Katem Tak Doff Tak Tabla Dom Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tik Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Sak Tabla Roll Edge* Tabla Flam Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 3 Tabel Tak Sagat 2 Rik Dom Rik Tak 2 Rik Finger 1 Rik Tak 1 Rik Finger 2 Rik BrassTremolo* Rik Sak Rik Tik Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Slap Conga H SlapMute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide* Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Slap Conga H SlapMute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide* Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Paila L Timbale H Open Paila L Timbale H Open Paila H Cowbell Top Paila H Cowbell Top Guiro Short Guiro Long* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Tambourine Tambourine Maracas Shaker Cabasa Maracas Shaker Cabasa Cuica Mute Cuica Open 9 Rhythm Program Multi Kit 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Wind Chime E5 F5 G5 F5 Ghost* Maou* *: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 185 Rhythm Program Voice List PIANO 1 Live!GrandPiano BrightPiano Harpsichord GrandHarpsi HonkyTonk Live!WarmGrand BalladStack MIDIGrand OctavePiano1 OctavePiano2 CP80 Cool!GalaxyEP StageEP PolarisEP JazzChorus HyperTines 2 Cool!E.Piano PhaseEP NewTines FunkEP DXModern SmoothTine ChorusBell VintageEP VenusEP ModernEP TremoloEP SuperDX SuitcaseEP StereoClavi. PhaseClavi. Clavi. 3 WahClavi. XG GrandPiano XG GrndPianoKSP XG MellowGrPno XG PianoStrings XG Dream XG BrightPiano XG BritePnoKSP XG El.GrandPiano XG El.GrPnoKSP XG DetunedCP80 XG LayeredCP1 XG LayeredCP2 XG Honkytonk XG HonkytonkKSP XG El.Piano1 4 XG El.Piano1KSP XG MellowEP1 XG ChorusEP1 XG HardEl.Piano XG VXfadeEl.P1 XG 60’sEl.Piano1 XG El.Piano2 XG El.Piano2KSP XG ChorusEP2 XG DXEPHard XG DXLegend XG DXPhaseEP XG DX+AnalogEP XG DXKotoEP XG VXfadeEl.P2 XG Harpsichord 5 XG Harpsi.KSP XG Harpsichord2 XG Harpsichord3 XG Clavi. XG Clavi.KSP XG Clavi.Wah XG PulseClavi. XG PierceClavi. 9 Rhythm Program 186 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual CHROMATIC PERC. 1 Vibraphone JazzVibes Suspense Marimba Xylophone SteelDrums Celesta Glockenspiel MusicBox TubularBell Kalimba Dulcimer Timpani XG Celesta XG Glockenspiel XG MusicBox 2 XG Orgel XG Vibraphone XG VibesKSP XG HardVibes XG Marimba XG MarimbaKSP XG SineMarimba XG Balimba XG LogDrums XG Xylophone XG TubularBells XG ChurchBells XG Carillon XG Dulcimer XG Dulcimer2 XG Cimbalom 3 XG Santur ORGAN 1 Cool!Organ Cool!JazzOrgan Cool!RotorOrgan Cool!FullRocker StadiumOrgan RotaryDrive PercOrgan RockOrgan1 DanceOrgan GospelOrg DrawbarOrgan1 JazzOrgan1 RockOrgan2 PurpleOrgan ElectricOrgan DrawbarOrgan2 2 JazzOrgan2 RockOrgan3 ClickOrgan MellowDraw BrightDraw 60’sOrgan JazzOrgan3 Tibia 16+4 TibiaFull Tibia 8+4 Tibia 8 Kinura 8 Vox 8 Thtr.Trp. 8 Thtr.Trp. 16+8 Tibia+Vox 3 Trp.+Kinura ChapelOrgan1 ChapelOrgan2 ChapelOrgan3 PipeOrgan ReedOrgan Musette TuttiAccrd SmallAccrd Accordion TangoAccrd Steirisch Bandoneon SoftAccordion Sweet!Harmonica ModernHarp 4 BluesHarp XG DrawbarOrgan XG DetunedDrawOrg XG 60’sDrawOrg1 XG 60’sDrawOrg2 XG 70’sDrawOrg1 XG DrawbarOrgan2 XG 60’sDrawOrg3 XG EvenBarOrg XG 16+2’2_3Org XG OrganBass XG 70’sDrawOrg2 XG CheezyOrgan XG DrawbarOrgan3 XG Perc.Organ XG 70’sPercOrg1 5 XG Det.Perc.Org XG LightOrgan XG Perc.Organ2 XG RockOrgan XG RotaryOrgan XG SlowRotary XG FastRotary XG ChurchOrgan XG ChurchOrgan3 XG ChurchOrgan2 XG NotreDame XG OrganFlute XG Trem.OrganFl XG ReedOrgan XG PuffOrgan XG Accordion 6 XG AccordIt XG Harmonica XG Harmonica2 XG TangoAccord XG TangoAccord2 GUITAR 1 Live!NylonGuitar Cool!JazzGuitar Cool!El.Guitar Live!SteelGuitar Live!DynoSteel1 Sweet!Mandolin Cool!FunkGuitar Cool!Stratsphere Cool!VintageLead Cool!PowerLead Cool!BluesGuitar RockGuitar VintageStrum Live!12StrGuitar Live!DynoSteel2 Cool!CleanGuitar 2 3 4 5 6 VodooLead PowerChord CampfireGuitar SolidGuitar VintageAmp AlohaGuitar CrunchGuitar SmoothLead 60’sClean Live!ClassicGtr Cool!JazzSoloGtr VintageOpen FolkGuitar SolidChord VintageMute PedalSteel LeadGuitar ChorusGuitar VintageTrem OctaveGuitar DeepChorus TremoloGuitar HeavyStack BrightClean WahGuitar DXJazzGuitar Distortion El.12StrGuitar FeedbackGuitar 18StringGuitar MutedGuitar FunkGuitar Overdrive Mega SteelGuitar Mega HiStrGuitar Mega 12StrGuitar Mega CleanGuitar Mega Overdrive Mega Distortion XG NylonGuitar XG NylonGuitar2 XG NylonGuitar3 XG Vel.GtrHarmo XG Ukulele XG SteelGuitar XG SteelGuitar2 XG 12StrGuitar XG Nylon&Steel XG Steel&Body XG Mandolin XG JazzGuitar XG MellowGuitar XG JazzAmp XG CleanGuitar XG ChorusGuitar XG MutedGuitar XG FunkGuitar1 XG MuteSteelGtr XG FunkGuitar2 XG JazzMan XG Overdriven XG GuitarPinch XG Distortion XG FeedbackGtr XG FeedbackGtr2 XG GtrHarmonics XG GtrFeedback XG GtrHarmonics2 STRINGS 1 Sweet!Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Harp Hackbrett Fiddle Banjo Sitar Koto Shamisen SoloViolin TremoloStrings PizzicatoStrings XG Violin XG SlwAtkViolin 2 XG Viola XG Cello XG Contrabass XG Trem.Strings XG SlwAtTremStr XG SuspenseStr XG PizzicatoStr XG OrchestralHarp XG YangChin ENSEMBLE 1 Live!Strings Live!Allegro Live!Orchestra Symphon.Str OberStrings OrchestraHorns OrchestraFlute OrchestraOboe Tutti Strings Orch.Strings StringsQuartet ConcertStrings AnalogStrings ChamberStrings BowStrings 2 SlowStrings MarcatoStrings SynStrings1 SynStrings2 OrchestraHit Live!Gospel Live!Humm HahChoir SweetHeaven DreamHeaven Live!Mmh GothicVox Sunbeam BellHeaven PanHeaven ProHeaven 3 Choir AirChoir VoxHumana Voices UuhChoir XG Timpani XG Strings1 XG StereoStrings XG SlwAtkStrings XG ArcoStrings XG 60’sStrings XG Orchestra XG Orchestra2 XG TremOrchestra XG Vel.Strings XG Strings2 4 XG S.SlowStrings XG LegatoStrings XG WarmStrings XG Kingdom XG 70’sStrings XG Strings3 XG SynStrings1 XG ResoStrings XG SynStrings4 XG SynStrings5 XG SynStrings2 XG ChoirAahs XG StereoChoir XG ChoirAahs2 XG MellowChoir XG ChoirStrings 5 XG VoiceOohs XG SynthVoice XG SynthVoice2 XG Choral XG AnalogVoice XG OrchestraHit XG OrchestraHit2 XG Impact BRASS 1 Sweet!Trumpet Sweet!Trombone Sweet!MutedTrp. Sweet!FlugelHorn JazzTrumpet SoloTrumpet Trombone SoloTrombone SoftTrombone MellowTrombone MutedTrombone BaritonHorn BaritonHit AlpBass FlugelHorn Tuba 2 Live!HyperBrass Live!PopBrass Live!OctaveBrass Live!FrenchHorns Live!Symph.Horns BrassCombo BrassSection BreathBrass HybridCompBrass NaturalBrass Sforzando BigBrass BallroomBrass BrightBrass MellowBrass HybriHorn 3 Hybripad SoftVel.Brass 80’sBrass SoftBrass FullHorns SmoothTrombone HighBrass OberBrass TrumpetEns MellowHorns BigBandBrass PopBrass BrassHit AnalogBrass TromboneSection SmallBrass 4 SoftAnalog FunkyAnalog TechnoBrass SynthBrass OberHorns FatSynBrass XG Trumpet XG Trumpet2 XG BriteTrumpet XG WarmTrumpet XG Trombone XG Trombone2 XG Tuba XG Tuba2 XG MutedTrumpet XG FrenchHorn 5 XG FrenchHornSolo XG FrenchHorn2 XG HornOrchestra XG BrassSection XG Tp&TbSection XG BrassSection2 XG HighBrass XG MellowBrass XG SynthBrass1 XG QuackBrass XG ResoSynBrass XG PolyBrass XG SynthBrass3 XG JumpBrass XG AnaVel.Brass1 XG AnalogBrass1 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 9 Rhythm Program BASS 1 Cool!FingerBass AcousticBass Cool!DynoPick Cool!Fretless SlapBass SubBass HardBass ResoBass HouseBass BigDroneBass RockBass SuperFretles PickBass FusionBass Bass&Cymbal AnalogBass 2 DXFunkBass DrySynBass 80’sSynBass HiQBass FunkBass MellowFinger ClickBass PunchyBass TBBass Mega Aco.Bass Mega FingerBass Mega PickBass Mega Fretless XG AcousticBass XG JazzRhythm XG VXUprghtBass 3 XG FingerBass XG FingerDark XG FlangeBass XG Bass&DistEG XG FingerSlap XG FingerBass2 XG ModulatedBass XG PickBass XG MutePickBass XG FretlessBass XG FretlessBass2 XG FretlessBass3 XG FretlessBass4 XG Syn.Fretless XG SmoothFretless XG SlapBass1 4 XG ResonantSlap XG PunchThumb XG SlapBass2 XG Vel.SwitchSlap XG SynthBass1 XG SynBass1Dark XG FastResoBass XG AcidBass XG Clavi.Bass XG TechnoBass XG Orbiter XG SquareBass XG RubberBass XG Hammer XG SynthBass2 XG MellowSyBass 5 XG SequencedBass XG ClickSynBass XG SynBass2Dark XG SmoothSyBass XG ModulrSyBass XG DXBass XG XWireBass 187 6 XG SynthBrass2 XG SoftBrass XG SynthBrass4 XG ChoirBrass XG AnaVel.Brass2 XG AnalogBrass2 REED 1 Sweet!TenorSax Sweet!AltoSax Sweet!SopranoSax GrowlSax BaritoneSax Live!SaxSection Saxappeal MoonLight BalladBrass SaxyMood SopranoSax TenorSax AltoSax SaxStack Live!SaxSect.Sft Live!SaxSect.Hrd 2 WoodwindEns Sweet!Clarinet Sweet!Oboe EnglishHorn Bassoon Clarinet Oboe XG SopranoSax XG AltoSax XG SaxSection XG HyperAltoSax XG TenorSax XG BreathyTenor XG SoftTenorSax XG TenorSax2 XG BaritoneSax 3 XG Oboe XG EnglishHorn XG Bassoon XG Clarinet PIPE 1 Sweet!Flute Sweet!PanFlute FluteEnsemble Flute PanFlute ClassicalFlute Piccolo EthnicFlute Shakuhachi Whistle Recorder Ocarina XG Piccolo XG Flute XG Recorder XG PanFlute 2 XG BlownBottle XG Shakuhachi XG Whistle XG Ocarina 9 Rhythm Program 188 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual SYNTH LEAD 1 Oxygen Matrix WireLead HipLead HopLead DanceHook TechLead Tekkline SoftMini OctaveHook TranceLead FireWire Analogon Blaster Skyline SquareLead 2 SawtoothLead PopLead ProLead BrightMini TinyLead FunkyLead Paraglide Robolead Fargo Portatone BigLead Warp Adrenaline Stardust AeroLead MiniLead 3 Impact SunBell UnderHeim HiBias Vinylead PanLead Stringbells CrystalEyes Padbells MelodyMaker BigTune TrumpetSaw AttackSaw PercSquare XG SquareLead XG SquareLead2 4 XG LMSquare XG Hollow XG Shroud XG Mellow XG SoloSine XG SineLead XG SawtoothLead XG SawtoothLead2 XG ThickSaw XG DynamicSaw XG DigitalSaw XG BigLead XG HeavySynth XG WaspySynth XG PulseSaw XG Dr.Lead 5 XG VelocityLead XG Seq.Analog XG CalliopeLead XG PurePad XG ChiffLead XG Rubby XG CharangLead XG DistortedLead XG WireLead XG VoiceLead XG SynthAahs XG VoxLead XG FifthsLead XG BigFive XG Bass&Lead XG Big&Low 6 XG Fat&Perky XG SoftWhirl SYNTH PAD 1 Insomnia Skydiver Bubblespace HipaStringPad MellowPad Mediterrain NeoWarmPad CyberPad OberSweep Messenger Wave2001 FarEast Disclosure BrightOber DarkPad Mystery 2 Sirius S&HGroove Velo.Ashrami EveningStars AngelVibes Atmosphere XenonPad Equinox GlassPad Fantasia DX Pad Symbiont Stargate Area51 DarkMoon Ionosphere 3 GoldenAge Solaris TimeTravel Millennium Dunes XG NewAgePad XG Fantasy XG WarmPad XG ThickPad XG SoftPad XG SinePad XG HornPad XG RotaryStrings XG PolySynthPad XG PolyPad80 XG ClickPad 4 XG AnalogPad XG SquarePad XG ChoirPad XG Heaven XG Itopia XG CCPad XG BowedPad XG Glacier XG GlassPad XG MetallicPad XG TinePad XG PanPad XG HaloPad XG SweepPad XG Shwimmer XG Converge 5 XG PolarPad XG Celestial SYNTH EFFECTS 1 XG Rain XG Clavi.Pad XG HarmoRain XG AfricanWind XG Carib XG SoundTrack XG Prologue XG Ancestral XG Crystal XG SynthDr.Comp XG Popcorn XG TinyBells XG RoundGlocken XG GlockenChime XG ClearBells XG ChorusBells 2 XG SynthMallet XG SoftCrystal XG LoudGlocken XG ChristmasBel XG VibeBells XG DigitalBells XG AirBells XG BellHarp XG Gamelimba XG Atmosphere XG WarmAtmos. XG HollowRelease XG NylonEl.Piano XG NylonHarp XG HarpVox XG Atmos.Pad 3 XG Planet XG Brightness XG FantasyBells XG Smokey XG Goblins XG GoblinsSynth XG Creeper XG RingPad XG Ritual XG ToHeaven XG Night XG Glisten XG BellChoir XG Echoes XG Echoes2 XG EchoPan 4 XG EchoBells XG BigPan XG SynthPiano XG Creation XG StarDust XG Reso&Panning XG Sci-Fi XG Starz 3 4 XG CarPassing XG CarCrash XG Siren XG Train XG JetPlane XG Starship XG Burst XG RollrCoaster XG Submarine XG Laugh XG Scream XG Punch XG Heartbeat XG FootSteps XG MachineGun XG LaserGun XG Explosion XG Firework 9 Rhythm Program ETHNIC 1 Bagpipe XG Sitar XG DetunedSitar XG Sitar2 XG Tambra XG Tamboura XG Banjo XG MutedBanjo XG Rabab XG Gopichant XG Oud XG Shamisen XG Koto XG Taisho-kin XG Kanoon XG Kalimba 2 XG Bagpipe XG Fiddle XG Shanai XG Shanai2 XG Pungi XG Hichiriki XG TinkleBell XG Bonang XG Altair XG GamelanGongs XG StereoGamelan XG RamaCymbal XG AsianBells PERCUSSION 1 XG Agogo XG SteelDrums XG GlassPerc. XG ThaiBells XG Woodblock XG Castanets XG TaikoDrum XG GranCassa XG MelodicTom XG MelodicTom2 XG RealTom XG RockTom XG SynthDrum XG AnalogTom XG ElectroPerc. XG Rev.Cymbal SOUND EFFECTS 1 XG GtrFretNoise XG BreathNoise XG Seashore XG BirdTweet XG TelephoneRing XG Helicopter XG Applause XG Gunshot XG CuttingNoise XG CuttingNoise2 XG StringSlap XG Fl.KeyClick XG Shower XG Thunder XG Wind XG Stream 2 XG Bubble XG Feed XG Dog XG Horse XG BirdTweet2 XG Ghost XG Maou XG PhoneCall XG DoorSqueak XG DoorSlam XG ScratchCut XG ScratchSplit XG WindChime XG TelphoneRing2 XG CarEngineIgn XG CarTiresSqel DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 189 3 Rhythm Sequence Program With the Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can string together any of the DDK-7’s existing rhythms and the rhythms of your own creation together to make complete rhythm compositions. You can save four rhythm compositions (each can contain up to 140 bars) to the Sequence buttons on the panel for future recall. Two or more rhythm compositions can be played back in succession, letting you divide a song into parts and play back the rhythm data as desired. Here are a couple of example applications: • When you want to play more than two songs in a medley, save the rhythm composition for each song to a separate sequence button. You can then recall each desired song by simply pressing the corresponding sequence button to which the song is saved. • When you want to practice a song in separate sections (for example, separately practicing the verse, chorus and bridge), divide the song into the relevant parts. For example, save the intro part to the [SEQ. 1] button, the main chorus part to the [SEQ. 2] button, the ending to the [SEQ. 3] button, and so on. Then, recall the desired part simply by pressing the appropriate sequence button. You can also play through a song by recalling all the parts in sequence. Selecting a Sequence There are two ways to program a rhythm sequence: copying an existing sequence that is similar to the sequence you want to create, or creating your own sequence from scratch. 1 Press the [PROGRAM] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. 9 Rhythm Program Any rhythm currently playing will automatically be stopped when you call up the Rhythm Sequence Program function. 190 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Press one of the Sequence buttons ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) in the display to select the rhythm sequence number you want to edit. The lamp of the selected numbered sequence button in the Rhythm section lights, and the Sequence Display appears. Instead of pressing the Sequence button on the Program display, you can press one of the sequence buttons on the Sequence display, or you can press the Sequence buttons in the Rhythm section on the panel to select the sequence number. This selects the Sequence number, to which a rhythm composition can be saved. If you want to copy a rhythm composition from another Sequence number, go on to the next step. 4 Press the Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) of the copy source on the right half in the display. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 5 Press [COPY] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Rhythm Program 3 Press the Edit [COPY] button in the display to call up the copy source location. 9 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 191 Programming a Sequence 1 2 Press the [RHYTHM] button at the top right of the display to call up the RHYTHM Page. 3 Select the desired rhythm from the displayed rhythm menu. 4 Select a rhythm section (Main A – D, Fill in A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, or Break) by pressing one of the rhythm control buttons on the panel. The selected rhythm and section appears at the top of the display. 5 Press the [SET] button in the display. One bar of the selected rhythm is entered and its name is displayed as a box in the rhythm row on the display. When the rhythm is entered, the cursor (colored orange) will automatically move to one step right. A maximum of 140 bars can be entered to a single sequence. When you select an ending pattern and press the [SET] button, an entire ending pattern (more than one bar) is entered. You cannot enter a rhythm after an ending pattern. 6 Repeat steps #2 through #5 above to enter the rhythm and create your own rhythm composition. Press the [CATEGORY] button to call up the Rhythm Category Select pop-up menu, then select the Rhythm category corresponding to the rhythm you want to enter to the sequence. If you press User category button, you can select a rhythm of your own creation (User rhythm). The rhythm menu of the selected rhythm category is displayed. 9 Rhythm Program NOTE When entering an Intro section, check the number of bars at the top of the display. Turning the power off before quitting or closing the Rhythm Sequence Program erases any sequences you have made. Before turning the power off, quit the Rhythm Sequence Program (page 197). 192 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Auditioning a Sequence You can play a sequence you are editing at any time to audition the changes. 1 Move the cursor to the desired position for playback. Move the cursor by using the Data Control dial, or the POSITION buttons on the display. DATA CONTROL 2 Press the rhythm [START] button on the panel. The Sequence plays back. Pressing the [START] button again stops playback. 9 Rhythm Program Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence You can insert a new rhythm between the rhythms you have already entered, or delete the entered rhythm from the sequence. 1 2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 193 1 POSITION These are cursor controls for moving the cursor (colored orange) along the rhythm row in the display. Moves the cursor to the first position. Moves the cursor one step to the left. Moves the cursor one step to the right. Moves the cursor five steps to the right. 2 DATA These are data controls for entering rhythms and deleting existing rhythms in the rhythm row. When you insert an ending pattern into the editing sequence, any existing rhythm data that follows an Ending pattern is automatically deleted. SET For initially entering a rhythm to an empty position in the rhythm row, or for replacing a pattern at the cursor position. Pressing the [SET] button enters the rhythm selected from the rhythm menu to the cursor position. This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern. INSERT For inserting a rhythm before the current cursor position. The new rhythm is entered just before the cursor position and all other rhythms to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new number. This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern. Additional rhythms cannot be entered beyond the Rhythm sequence function’s capacity of 140. If the Insert operation results in the rhythm number going over the capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the operation cannot be executed. DELETE For deleting a rhythm at the current cursor position. When the ending pattern is selected, pressing the [DELETE] button deletes the entire ending pattern (more than one bar). 9 Rhythm Program CLEAR For erasing all patterns entered to the selected sequence. After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [CLEAR] to clear the currently selected rhythm sequence, or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display. 194 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Programming a Registration Sequence The Registration Sequence feature allows you to have desired Registrations automatically called up in sequence, when playing a Rhythm Sequence. It lets you program the timing (bar/beat/clock) at which the Registration is changed. You can also program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence. A Registration Sequence is saved as a part of the corresponding Rhythm Sequence. With this feature, you can have the sounds of the instrument change as desired automatically to match the Rhythm Sequence playback. 1 NOTE If you are loading a Registration while a rhythm is playing, the sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration data cannot be loaded. Press the [REGIST] button at the top right in the display to call up the Registration Sequence display. The Registration Sequence is programmed from this display. The entered Registration number is shown along the Registration row in the middle of the display. 13 3 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 9 D. Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial, set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to change the Registration (1 beat = 96 Clock). Rhythm Program 2 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory section. DATA CONTROL When using the Data Control dial, first press the number you wish to change in the display, then turn the dial. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 195 4 Press the DATA [SET] button in the display. The Registration number appears in the display (in the timing order), indicating that the Registration is entered. Up to 140 Registrations can be entered. If some Registration numbers are entered to the same Bar/Beat/Clock, the last entered one takes priority. 5 Repeat steps #2 through #4 above to set the Registration Sequence. Entering Next Regist: When you program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence, the next registration data in current song can be loaded automatically just by playing the rhythm sequence. 1 Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial, set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to enter the Next Regist (1 beat = 96 clock). 2 Press the NEXT REGIST [INSERT] button in the display. The Next Regist mark appears at the timing point you set in step #1, indicating that the Next Regist is entered. Next Regist Loading Time • Loading Next Regist may take a few seconds (the time may differ depending on the size of the data to be loaded). • When using a floppy disk instead of USB flash memory, the loading time will be longer than when using USB flash memory. • Next Registration data can be loaded by two ways: using optional foot pedal/right footswitch and programming Next Regist in the Registration Sequence. Loading time is the same regardless of which way you load the Next Registration data. 9 Rhythm Program Editing an Existing Registration Sequence You can move or delete the entered Registration Sequence (Registration number or Next Regist data) from the sequence. To move an entry: 196 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data (Registration number or Next Regist) you want to move. 2 Change the position by pressing the Bar/Beat/Clock buttons in the display. 3 To move the Registration number timing, press the DATA [SET] button. To move the Next Regist timing, press the NEXT REGIST [SET] button. The position of the Registration number or Next Regist is changed and displayed in the proper order. To erase an entry: 1 2 Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data (Registration number or Next Regist) you want to delete. Press the [DELETE] button to delete the data. Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program You can quit the Rhythm Sequence Program from any of its display pages. When you quit, the sequence you have made will be automatically saved. To quit the Rhythm Sequence Program: Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel. The Voice Display appears, indicating that the Rhythm Sequence Program is closed. When quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the sequence is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the sequence is being saved. Rhythm Program 9 Playing Rhythm Sequences To play any of the rhythm sequences you have created: 1 Press the appropriate Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on the panel. The SEQ button’s lamp lights. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 197 2 Press the rhythm [START] button. The rhythm in the selected sequence starts playback. The Registration Memory also changes with the Rhythm Sequence playback, if the sequence includes a Registration Sequence. Rhythm playback automatically stops when the sequence reaches its end. If you’ve stopped rhythm playback in the middle of the sequence, press the [START] button again to resume playback. Playing All Sequences in Order You can also have up to all four rhythm sequences automatically play in order, one after another. 1 Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their LEDs are lit. 2 Press the rhythm [START] button. The rhythm sequences start from the lowest number and play in order automatically to the highest number. (For example, if you press Sequence buttons 4, 2 and 1 in that order, the sequences will be played back not in the order you pressed them, but in their numeric order: 1, 2, then 4.) This function effectively allows you to make a long rhythm sequence that exceeds the 140pattern memory limit of a single sequence. Pressing one of the SEQ. buttons while a Rhythm Sequence is playing back automatically cancels the pressed sequence, and its LED turns off. You cannot cancel a sequence that is currently playing. The SEQ. lamp goes out when the sequence assigned to it is finished playing. 9 To start a sequence using the Left Footswitch: Reference Pages Rhythm Program Connecting a pedal unit (page 221) Footswitches (page 200) Reference Pages Connecting a foot pedal (page 221) Foot pedal (page 203) 198 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual You can start or stop the Rhythm Sequence playback using the left footswitch. To use the left footswitch, pedal unit must be connected to the DDK-7. 1 Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their LEDs are lit. 2 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel to call up the Footswitch display, LEFT Page. 3 4 Set the control mode of the Footswitch to RHYTHM STOP. (See page 200 for information about the Footswitch settings.) Press the Left Footswitch with your right foot to turn the sequence on. Pressing the Left Footswitch again in the middle of the sequence playback cancels the Rhythm Sequence. When you are playing a Rhythm Sequence that is made up of several sequences (SEQ. buttons), pressing the Left footswitch turns off the currently playing Rhythm Sequence, and pressing it again starts the next sequence. You can also start the Rhythm Sequence playback using the optional foot pedal. Copying a Sequence You can copy a rhythm sequence stored on a sequence button to another button. You can also add a rhythm sequence to the end of another rhythm sequence. Press the EDIT [COPY] or [ADD] button in the Sequence Menu page. The Copy From or Add From Display appears. 2 Select the number of the desired rhythm sequence program to which you want to copy or to which you want to add. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. 3 Press the [COPY] or [ADD] button to copy or add the rhythm sequence. Press [CANCEL] to abort the operation. 4 If necessary, edit the sequence. Refer to the section “Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence” on page 193 and/or “Editing an Existing Registration Sequence” on page 196. 4 9 Rhythm Program 1 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to External Media You can save your own rhythm patterns (created in the Rhythm Pattern Program) and Rhythm Sequence (created in the Rhythm Sequence Program) to external media, such as USB flash memory. Refer to the section “Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)” on page 123 for instructions. When loading your original Rhythm data from external media back to the DDK-7, be sure to stop the rhythm if it is playing. Loading cannot be executed when a rhythm is running. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 199 10 Controllers These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch the effect on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. In order to use these controllers, you’ll need to connect the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit or an optional FC4/5/7/9 Foot Pedal to the DDK-7. Contents 1 Footswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 • Controlling the Rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 • Controlling Glide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 • Controlling Rotary Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 2 Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 • Controlling Sustain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 • Controlling Lead Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 • Controlling Melody On Chord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 • Controlling the Solo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 1 Reference Page Connecting a pedal unit (page 221) • Controlling the Rhythm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 • Controlling Glide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 • Controlling Rotary Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 • Controlling Registration Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 • Controlling Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 3 Expression Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 • Controlling Pitch Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 • Controlling the Rhythm Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Footswitches To use the Footswitches, connect the Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 to the DDK-7. The Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 has two Footswitches on the main expression pedal. The Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. The Left Footswitch can be set to control one of the following functions: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary speaker. See page 95 for the details of the Registration Shift function or Right Footswitch. The explanation on the Left Footswitch is given here. Right Footswitch Left Footswitch 10 Expression Pedal Controllers 1 200 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button. 2 Press the [LEFT] button at the top right of the display to call up the LEFT Page. FOOTSWITCH Display In this display, you can assign the control function to the Left Footswitch: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary Speaker. If you choose OFF here, the Left Footswitch will not control any function. Controlling the Rhythm You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections by using the Left Footswitch. 1 2 3 10 1 5 STOP Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Footswitch. 2 Controllers 4 Reference Page Rhythm Structure (page 63) BREAK When you press the Footswitch, the Break section turns on. This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on the panel. 3 MAIN A – MAIN D These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the panel. For example, when the [MAIN A] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 201 4 INTRO 1 – INTRO 3 These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For example, when the INTRO [1] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1. 5 ENDING 1 – ENDING 3 These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For example, when the ENDING [1] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending pattern is played, the rhythm stops. Reference Page Foot pedal (page 203) You can also control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections by using an optional Foot Pedal. Controlling Glide You can control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch. 1 2 Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original. 10 1 Voice Selections (UPPER1/UPPER2/LEAD1/LEAD2/LOWER1/ LOWER2) Controllers Select the desired Voice section(s) to which the Glide function is to be applied. 2 TIME Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other words, how gradually the pitch returns when the Footswitch is released. Higher values make the speed slower. Range: 1 – 5 Reference Page Foot pedal (page 203) 202 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual You can also control the Glide effect by using an optional Foot Pedal. Controlling Rotary Speaker You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off ) by using the Left Footswitch. Reference Page Rotary Speaker (page 51) When the [Rotary Speaker] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds to the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use this function, you’ll need to make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section or Organ Flute Voice. For details, see page 51. You can also control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off ) by using an optional Foot Pedal. 2 Foot Pedal To use the Foot Pedal, you will need to connect an optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5/ FC7/FC9) to the DDK-7. The Foot Pedal then can be used to turn one of the following functions on and off. Up to two Foot Pedals can be connected to the DDK7. You can assign one function for each Foot Pedal in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. Note that Some functions will need to be turned on or its parameters set beforehand. 10 Sustain Lead Slide Melody On Chord Solo Rhythm Glide Rotary Speaker Registration Shift Controllers Assignable Functions Expression To control Expression, use the FC7/FC9. To control other functions, use the FC4/ FC5. FC4 FC7 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 203 Assigning functions to a Foot Pedal: 1 2 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility display. Press the [F.PEDAL] button at the top right of the display to call up the Foot Pedal Page. In this display, you can assign the control function to the Foot Pedal. 3 Select the control function to be assigned to the Foot Pedal. Select the desired function button from the left side of the display if you've connected the Foot Pedal to the FOOT PEDAL (1 VOLUME) terminal; select from the right side if you’ve connected the Foot Pedal to the FOOT PEDAL (2 SUSTAIN) terminal. 10 Controllers The polarity of the Foot Pedal will automatically be selected depending on the selected function; however, you can select the polarity manually. 4 204 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual The effect is constantly applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. Releasing the Foot Pedal turns the effect off. Controlling Sustain You can control the on/off status of Sustain for each Voice Section by using the Foot Pedal. Sustain for the Pedalboard cannot be controlled. 1 Press the [SUSTAIN] button to call up the Sustain display, then turn the desired Voice section on from the display. Reference Page Sustain (page 50) 2 Select [SUSTAIN] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the UTILITY display. The Sustain function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. Controllers 10 3 To apply sustain, press the Foot Pedal. Sustain is constantly applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. Releasing the Foot Pedal turns sustain off. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 205 Controlling Lead Slide Reference Page Voice Condition Display (page 42) 10 Controllers 206 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 2 Call up the Voice Condition display Page 2 of the Lead Voice section to which you want to apply the Lead Slide effect. 3 Select [SLIDE] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The Slide effect function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. 4 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to apply the Slide effect. The Slide effect is applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. Releasing the Foot Pedal, cancels the Lead Slide effect. Press the [ON] button of the Slide section on the display. Controlling Melody On Chord 1 Call up the Page 4 of the Voice Display. VOICE Display [Page 4] Reference Page Voice display (page 18) 2 Select one of the modes. Reference Page Melody On Chord (page 74) 3 Select [M.O.C.] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The M.O.C. function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. Controllers 10 4 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to apply the M.O.C. effect. The M.O.C. effect is applied constantly, as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. When you release the Foot Pedal, the M.O.C. effect is cancelled. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 207 Controlling the Solo Function You can turn the Solo function on/off by using the Foot Pedal. See page 31 for more information. Controlling the Rhythm You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections not only by using the Left Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal. Reference Page Footswitch Display (page 201) 10 Controllers 208 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Set the rhythm settings in the LEFT Page of the Footswitch display. 2 Select [RHYTHM CONTROL] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The Rhythm Control function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. 3 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to start/stop the rhythm or switch the rhythm sections. Controlling Glide You can control the Glide effect not only by using the Left Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal. 1 2 3 Set the Glide settings in the LEFT Page of the Footswitch display. Select [GLIDE] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The Glide Effect is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. Reference Page Footswitch Display (page 201) Pressing the Foot Pedal immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original. Controlling Rotary Speaker You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off ) not only by using the Left Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal. Select [ROTARY SPEAKER] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The Rotary Speaker function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. 10 Controllers 1 2 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to switch the Rotary Speaker effect on or off. Pressing the Foot Pedal has the same effect as pressing the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button. To use this function, you will need to select the Rotary Speaker effect for the desired Voice. Refer to page 51. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 209 Controlling Registration Shift You can control Registration Shift not only by using the right Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal. Reference Page Registration Shift (page 95) 1 2 3 Set the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display. Select [REGIST SHIFT] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the UTILITY display. The Registration Shift function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. Press the Foot Pedal when you want to change Registrations. Controlling Expression You can control Expression not only by using the Expression Pedal, but also the Foot Pedal. 1 10 Select [EXPRESSION] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The Expression function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. Controllers 2 210 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Press the Foot Pedal down to control the Expression. 3 Expression Pedals The Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 features a expression pedal and a 2nd expression pedal. The Expression pedal can be used to control the volume with your foot as you play. The 2nd Expression Pedal can be used to control the Pitch Bend and the Tempo of the Rhythm. The explanation on the 2nd Expression Pedal is given here. Reference Page Connecting a Pedal Unit (page 221) Reference Page Expression Pedal Getting Started (page 11) 2nd Expression Pedal Pedal Unit Press the [UTILITY] button on the front panel. The Utility display appears. Press the [EXP.] button in the upper right of the display to call up the EXP. (Expression) Page. 10 In this display, you can assign the Pitch Bend control or Tempo control to the 2nd Expression Pedal. If both Pitch Bend and Rhythm Tempo controls are set to ON, both functions are applied when you press the 2nd Expression Pedal. Generally one of them is assigned to the 2nd Expression Pedal. Controllers 1 2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 211 Controlling Pitch Bend 1 1 2 MODE Determines the range of the Pitch Bend control. Each step changes the pitch range by a semitone. Range: 1 – 12 The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of pitch variation (over +/- two semitones); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of pitch variation (over +/- one octave). 2 Voice Sections (PITCH BEND) Selects the Voice sections to which the Pitch Bend function will be applied, and turns the function ON. Pitch Bend can be selected independently or together for Upper Voices 1 and 2, Lead Voice 1 and 2, Pedal Voices 1 and 2. 10 Controllers 212 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Controlling the Rhythm Tempo 1 1 2 MODE Determines the range of tempo change. Range: 1 – 12 The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of tempo change (70% – 140%); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of tempo change (50% – 200%). 2 TEMPO When you want to control the tempo with the 2nd Expression Pedal, set this to “ON.” When set to on, pressing the pedal down with your toe speeds up the tempo and pressing it back with your heel slows it down. Controllers 10 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 213 11 Transpose and Pitch Controls There are two pitch-related controls on the DDK-7: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning. Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button. The Utility display appears. 2 Press the [GLOBAL] button of the display to call up the GLOBAL Page. 1 2 In this display, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings. 1 TRANSPOSE NOTE The Transpose setting here is not applied to an XG Song. 11 Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half-steps (semitones). Range: -6 – +6 Transpose and Pitch Controls 2 PITCH Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by 0.2 Hz. The default Pitch is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3). Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice Condition display. For more information, see page 44. 214 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 12 Connections On the backside and front left side of the DDK-7 keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls. Contents 1 Accessory Jacks and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 2 Connecting Headphones or External System 217 • Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 • Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an External Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 • Using a mixer for live performance. . . . . . . . . . .218 • Selecting Outputs for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 3 Connecting a Pedal Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 4 Connecting a Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 5 Connection with Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 • Using the USB terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 • Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals . . . . . . . . . . . .223 6 Connecting External Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 • Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 • Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the External Speakers of the DDK-7. . . . . . . . . . 224 • Connecting a Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 • Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 • Controlling the DDK-7 from an External Device . 226 • Connecting USB storage devices . . . . . . . . . . . 226 7 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 • What is MIDI? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 • MIDI Messages of the DDK-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 • MIDI Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 8 MIDI Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 1 Accessory Jacks and Controls This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the DDK-7. For details on connecting to external devices, see page 217. 1 5 2 1 3 4 AC INLET jack For connecting the power cable. 2 PHONES jacks For connection of a stereo headphone set. 3 Reference Page Using Headphones (page 217) 12 MIC jack 4 MIC VOLUME knob For adjusting the level of input signal from the MIC jack. 5 USB TO DEVICE terminal Connections For connecting a mono input, such as a microphone. The DDK-7 outputs the microphone signal, with reverb processing, through the OUTPUT jacks or AUX OUT jacks. Reference Page Connecting a Microphone (page 224) For connecting USB storage devices such as USB flash memory. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 215 1 2 3 1-2 1-1 4 5 6 3-1 3-2 7 7-1 8 7-2 (View from rear.) Reference Page Foot Pedal (page 203) 1 FOOT PEDAL jacks For connecting to an optional FC4/FC5/FC7/FC9 Foot Pedal. 1 - 1 VOLUME jack For controlling the volume and a range of other important functions. Reference Pages Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK-7 (page 225) Controlling the DDK-7 from an External Device (page 226) Connection with Computer (page 222) 1 - 2 SUSTAIN jack For controlling the sustain and a range of other important functions. 2 MIDI IN/OUT terminals For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface. 3 USB terminals What is MIDI? (page 227) 3 - 1 USB TO DEVICE terminal For connecting USB storage devices (such as USB flash memory). Reference Pages 3 - 2 USB TO HOST terminal Connecting USB storage devices (page 226) For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer, make sure that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer. Connection with Computer (page 222) USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. Reference Page Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External Recorder (page 223) 12 Reference Page Connections Connecting a Pedal Unit (page 221) Reference Page Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the External Speakers of the DDK-7 (page 224) 216 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 OPTICAL OUT terminal For connection using an optical-fiber cable. This terminal outputs a digital signal of 44.1 kHz, 24 bits. 5 TO PEDAL terminal For connecting to the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit. 6 AUX IN (Phone; L/L+R, R) jacks This pair of stereo phone jacks is for connection to an external device. The signal from the connected external device sounds from external speakers connected to the DDK-7. 7 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) jacks 7 - 1 SUB (1, 2) jacks For connection to an external amplifier/speaker system. These outputs can be selected for each part. The output level is fixed and cannot be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME Dial. 7 - 2 MAIN (L/L+R, R) jacks Reference Pages Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an External Audio System (page 218) Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External Recorder (page 223) This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The output level is fixed and cannot be controlled. 8 OUTPUT (L/L+R, R) jacks This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The output level can be controlled. Connecting Headphones or External 2 System Before connecting the DDK-7 to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power of the components on or off, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. Using Headphones To use headphones, connect to the PHONES jack. PHONES Connections 12 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 217 Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an External Audio System By using the OUTPUT jacks, you can connect your DDK-7 to external powered speakers. If you’re connecting the DDK-7 to a mono device, use only the OUTPUT L/ L+R jack. Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right) OUTPUT L/L+R R Using a mixer for live performance Generally, when you use the DDK-7 on stage (in concert, etc.), you should connect it to a mixer. By using a mixer, you can easily adjust the volume and tone quality of each component. To connect to a mixer, use the AUX OUT jacks of the DDK-7. The DDK-7 features two types of AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and SUB, allowing you to assign some parts of the DDK-7's output to the SUB jacks and the other parts to the MAIN jacks. In this way, you can apply effects to the specific parts or adjust the volume balance among the parts with an external mixer. For details, see “Selecting Outputs for Each Part” on page 220. Connection example Main Speakers (ex. Powerd-amp Speakers) Monitor Speaker Sound Sound External Effector Sound Keyboards Other parts MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Some Parts AUX OUT (MAIN) L/L+R 12 AUX OUT (SUB) R 1 Connections Mic. Sound 218 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Mixer DDK-7 2 Jacks Output Type Location AUX OUT MAIN jacks L/L+R, R Unbalanced* LEVEL FIXED Backside of the keyboard AUX OUT SUB jacks 1, 2 Unbalanced LEVEL FIXED Backside of the keyboard OUTPUT jacks L/L+R, R Unbalanced LEVEL FIXED Backside of the keyboard *The Unbalanced line is intended for line-level signals. Power-on Procedure Before turning the power on to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0) then turn on the power in the following order: (1) DDK-7 and external keyboard(s) (2) Mixer (3) Powered Speaker To turn the power off, first turn down the volume for each devices, then turn off the power in the reverse order (3 → 2 → 1). Connections 12 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 219 Selecting Outputs for Each Part You can assign each individual part of the DDK-7's sounds such as Voice, Percussion, to be output from specific AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and/or SUB. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility display. 2 Press the [AUX OUT] button in the upper right of the display to call up the AUX OUT Page. You can assign individual parts to the AUX OUT MAIN and/or SUB jacks: each Voice section, Organ Flute Voice, Main drum, Add drum, Accompaniment, Keyboard Percussion, XG and microphone to the AUX OUT MAIN and/or SUB jacks. 3 Turn the desired output on for each part. You can select these from MAIN, SUB1, SUB2 and SUB1&2. NOTE Chorus and variation effects of the Rhythm, and Reverb are not applied to the sound output through SUB1, SUB2 and SUB1&2. NOTE 12 Connections The settings in the Utility display are automatically saved when another display is called up. 220 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual If you select a setting other than MAIN, no sound will be heard from the headphones and monitor speakers because the parts assigned to SUB1, SUB2 and SUB1&2 will not be output through PHONES, OUTPUT and OPTICAL OUT jacks. Any parts assigned to the AUX OUT MAIN or SUB1&2 will be output in stereo (1: left, 2: right). Any parts assigned to AUX OUT SUB1 or SUB2 will be output in mono. 3 Connecting a Pedal Unit Connecting a Pedal Unit (DDKU-P7) to the DDK-7 allows you to use the Pedalboard, right and left Footswitches, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal. These footoperated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. If you connect and disconnect the Pedal Unit, you must be sure to first turn off the power of the DDK-7, then use the cable to make the connection. If you connect and disconnect the cable while the power to the DDK-7 is on, DDK-7 and the Pedal Unit can be damaged. Reference Pages Voices for each keyboard (page 25) Footswitches (page 200) Expression Pedals (page 211) Dedicated Cable Messages TO PEDAL DDKU-P7 4 Connecting a Foot Pedal FOOT PEDAL 1 (VOLUME) 2 (SUSTAIN) Foot Pedal Reference Pages Foot Pedal (page 203) Controlling Sustain (page 205) Controlling Melody On Chord (page 207) Controlling Lead Slide (page 206) Controlling the Solo Function (page 208) Controlling the Rhythm (pages 201 and 208) Controlling Rotary Speaker (pages 203 and 209) Controlling Expression (page 210) Controlling Registration Shift (page 210) Controlling Glide (pages 202 and 209) 12 Connections Connecting an optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5/FC7/FC9) to the DDK-7 allows you to execute various performance functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. To do this, you must assign a desired function to the Foot Pedal. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 221 5 Connection with Computer By using the USB TO HOST terminal or MIDI IN/OUT terminals, you can connect your DDK-7 to a computer and receive/transmit MIDI data (for more information about MIDI, see page 227). Before you can actually transfer data between the DDK-7 and a computer via the USB connection, you will need to install an appropriate MIDI driver. Download the latest MIDI driver software from the Yamaha web site at “http://download.yamaha.com/.” NOTE When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be transferred to/from the computer. Connecting your DDK-7 to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original DDK-7 song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with your friends. You can also control the DDK-7 from the computer, for example, by playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your DDK-7. Using the USB terminal Using the DDK-7’s USB TO HOST terminal and a standard USB cable, connect the DDK-7 and the computer. USB cable USB TO HOST Computer MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used. Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminal When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspend, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. 12 Connections 222 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals By using an optional MIDI interface such as the UX16, you can connect the DDK-7 to the computer, with the MIDI IN/OUT terminals on the instrument. Connect the DDK-7 and the MIDI Interface with two standard MIDI cables (one connecting the OUT terminal on the DDK-7 to the MIDI IN terminal on the interface, and the other connecting the IN terminal on the DDK-7 to the MIDI OUT terminal on the interface). Connect the MIDI interface to the computer with a USB cable. NOTE Depending on your particular MIDI interface, you may have to connect the MIDI Interface and the computer with a serial cable. MIDI Interface (for example, UX16) MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT IN Computer 6 Connecting External Devices Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External Recorder You can record your DDK-7 performance to an external recorder, such as an MD recorder or cassette tape recorder, using the OPTICAL OUT terminal or AUX OUT jacks. Using the OPTICAL OUT terminal allows you to record to external media with exceptionally high-quality digital sound (providing the external recorder has an Optical In terminal). Or you can use the AUX OUT jacks. Audio cable Optical digital cable Recording LINE IN R L Cassette tape recorder, etc. If you want to record the sound input from the AUX IN jack together with the DDK-7 sound, use the AUX OUT MAIN jack. Recording R OPTICAL OUT 12 OPTICAL IN Connections AUX OUT MAIN L/L+R NOTE Cassette tape recorder, etc. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 223 Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the External Speakers of the DDK-7 You can connect the AUX IN jacks of the DDK-7 with the LINE OUT of an external device, such as a CD player. You can also connect the OUTPUT jacks of the DDK-7 to external speakers. The sound from the CD player is output from an external audio system via the DDK-7. First turn on the power of the external device(s), then that of the DDK-7. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Playing Playing Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right) Playing OUTPUT (MAIN) L+L/R AUX IN R L+L/R R LINE OUT R L+L/R Stereo audio system If you’re connecting the DDK-7 to a mono device, use only the AUX IN L/L+R jack. Connecting a Microphone By connecting a microphone to the DDK-7, you can enjoy singing along with your own performance. The DDK-7 outputs your vocals through the external audio system connected to the AUX OUT or OUTPUT jacks of the DDK-7. 1 Connect your microphone to the MIC jack. A dynamic microphone is recommended. MIC 12 Connections 2 224 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Use the MIC VOLUME knob to set the microphone volume. To adjust the volume/reverb: 1 Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the Utility display. 2 Using the MIC. REVERB and VOLUME sliders in the GLOBAL Page, adjust the amount of the reverb applied to the microphone, and the volume. Reference Page Reverb (page 49) No sound from the microphone can be heard even though you raise the volume here, unless you turn the MIC VOLUME knob to the right. Similarly, no reverb can be heard even though you raise the reverb level here, unless you raise the total reverb level in the REVERB display. Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK-7 You can use the DDK-7 to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone generator), combining them with the DDK-7 and letting you create even richer, more multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the transmit channels on your DDK-7.) The DDK-7 transmits as digital data a variety of performance messages along with note information, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device responds to these messages depends on the particular device. MIDI messages Reference Page What is MIDI? (page 227) NOTE When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be transmitted. MIDI cable MIDI OUT MIDI IN 12 Connections Tone generator MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 225 Controlling the DDK-7 from an External Device NOTE When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be received. You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of your DDK-7 and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your DDK-7.) MIDI cable MIDI messages MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI keyboard or synthesizer MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used. Connecting USB storage devices Reference Page Formatting External Media (page 112) Using the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s), you can connect USB storage devices for saving your DDK-7 data. When you use USB devices, refer to “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” on page 111. 12 Connections 226 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 7 MIDI This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use MIDI on your DDK-7. What is MIDI? No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.” In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Digital instrument note production Acoustic guitar note production L Internal amp Tone generator Internal amp (Electric circuit) R Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. Example of Keyboard Information 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) 12 Connections Voice number (with what Voice) As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice selection are handled as MIDI events. All rhythm-related data – including rhythm patterns, auto accompaniment patterns, Rhythm Sequences, etc. – also consist of MIDI messages. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 227 MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. MIDI Messages of the DDK-7 MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several MIDI devices to communicate with each other. Channel Messages Each time you play the keyboard on the DDK-7, channel messages (indicating which keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel. Similarly, the DDK-7 can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard. Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127. The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60. Note Off: Generated when a key is released. Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127. For more detailed information, see MIDI Data Format on page 240 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 253. • Program Change Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With these messages you can change the Registrations of the DDK-7. For more detailed information, see MIDI Data Format on page 240 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 253. • Control Change Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through specific Control Change numbers. For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the DDK7, see MIDI Data Format on page 240 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 253. System Messages 12 Connections • System Exclusive Messages System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration data. 228 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual MIDI Channels MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. Weather Report NEWS 1 2 NEWS 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI cable MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2 The receive channel of the DDK-7 is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard, channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that when you are using another MIDI device to play the DDK-7’s Voices, you must set the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s) of the DDK-7. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard (Upper, Lower and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 230 for more information. Connections 12 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 229 8 MIDI Control When you connect your DDK-7 with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or computer), you can determine how the DDK-7 controls that MIDI device, or how the DDK-7 is controlled. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button in the panel to call up the Utility Display. 2 Press the [MIDI] button at the top right of the display to call up the MIDI Page. 1 2 3 3-1 1 3 -2 3 -3 OUTPUT For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to the Upper keyboard, the Lower keyboard, the Pedalboard, Sustain, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal. The MIDI messages on each keyboard will be sent on the channels set here. You must set the transmit channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device. Pressing each OUTPUT button calls up the channel selection pop-up menu. After you select the desired channel, the pop-up menu automatically closes. Sustain, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal can be set to “OFF” (MIDI information will not be transmitted.) NOTE If you set Second Expression to on in the MIDI OUT FILTER parameters, the setting in the OUTPUT (1) parameters will be disabled. 12 Connections 230 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 MIDI OUT FILTER Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the DDK-7. After Touch, second Expression and Rhythm start/stop are automatically filtered. Set the parameter for which you wish to disable transmission to ON. 3 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL Switches control over the displayed items between the DDK-7 (INTERNAL) or the connected device (EXTERNAL). 3 - 1 LEAD 1 Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voices. INT. (Internal): Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper keyboard of the DDK-7. (If the To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower keyboard.) EXT. (External): The Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI channel 4. 3 - 2 SYNC. To synchronize playback with an external MIDI device, you can use either the instrument’s internal clock (int.) or MIDI clock signals from the external device (ext.). INT. (Internal): The instrument uses its own internal clock. EXT. (External): The instrument uses MIDI clock signals from the external device (midi). 3 - 3 EXPRESSION Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this control is set to AUTO. AUTO: Internal and External is automatically switched. INT. (Internal): You can manually control the expression pedal and Foot Pedal even during M.D.R. playback. EXT. (External): While playing the M.D.R. or receiving MIDI messages, the expression pedal and Foot Pedal is invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in a USB flash memory or received MIDI data.) Connections 12 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 231 13 Appendix XG Voice & Drum List Only for XG song playback. Voice Number 13 Appendix 232 MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 18 40 41 0 1 0 1 32 40 41 0 1 0 1 18 32 40 45 64 0 1 32 33 34 40 41 42 45 0 1 25 35 0 1 27 64 65 0 0 0 64 0 1 45 0 1 64 97 98 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 Voice Name XG GrandPiano XG GrndPianoKSP XG MellowGrPno XG PianoStrings XG Dream XG BrightPiano XG BritePnoKSP XG El.GrandPiano XG El.GrndPnoKSP XG DetunedCP80 XG LayeredCP1 XG LayeredCP2 XG Honkytonk XG HonkytonkKSP XG El.Piano1 XG El.Piano1KSP XG MellowEP1 XG ChorusEP1 XG HardEl.Piano XG VXfadeEl.P1 XG 60’sEl.Piano1 XG El.Piano2 XG El.Piano2KSP XG ChorusEP2 XG DXEPHard XG DXLegend XG DXPhaseEP XG DX+AnalogEP XG DXKotoEP XG VXfadeEl.P2 XG Harpsichord XG Harpsi.KSP XG Harpsichord2 XG Harpsichord3 XG Clavi. XG Clavi.KSP XG Clavi.Wah XG PulseClavi. XG PierceClavi. XG Celesta XG Glockenspiel XG MusicBox XG Orgel XG Vibraphone XG VibesKSP XG HardVibes XG Marimba XG MarimbaKSP XG SineMarimba XG Balimba XG LogDrums DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Category PIANO CHROMATIC PERC. Voice Number MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 96 97 0 35 96 97 0 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 40 64 65 66 67 0 24 32 33 37 0 64 65 66 0 32 35 40 64 65 0 40 0 32 0 32 0 64 0 16 25 43 96 0 16 14 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 Voice Name XG Xylophone XG TubularBells XG ChurchBells XG Carillon XG Dulcimer XG Dulcimer2 XG Cimbalom XG Santur XG DrawbarOrgan XG DetDrawOrg XG 60’sDrawOrg1 XG 60’sDrawOrg2 XG 70’sDrawOrg1 XG DrawbarOrgan2 XG 60’sDrawOrg3 XG EvenBarOrg XG 16+2’2_3Org XG OrganBass XG 70’sDrawOrg2 XG CheezyOrgan XG DrawbarOrgan3 XG Perc.Organ XG 70’sPercOrg1 XG Det.Perc.Org XG LightOrgan XG Perc.Organ2 XG RockOrgan XG RotaryOrgan XG SlowRotary XG FastRotary XG ChurchOrgan XG ChurchOrgan3 XG ChurchOrgan2 XG NotreDame XG OrganFlute XG Trem.OrganFl XG ReedOrgan XG PuffOrgan XG Accordion XG AccordIt XG Harmonica XG Harmonica2 XG TangoAccord XG TangoAccord2 XG NylonGuitar XG NylonGuitar2 XG NylonGuitar3 XG Vel.GtrHarmo XG Ukulele XG SteelGuitar XG SteelGuitar2 Category CHROMATIC PERC. ORGAN GUITAR LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 35 40 41 96 0 18 32 0 32 0 40 41 43 45 0 43 0 40 41 0 65 66 0 40 45 0 18 27 40 43 45 65 0 28 0 32 33 34 96 97 0 27 32 0 43 0 18 20 24 35 40 64 65 66 96 0 6 12 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 28 28 29 29 29 29 29 30 30 31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 35 35 36 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 38 38 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 40 40 40 Voice Name XG 12StrGuitar XG Nylon&Steel XG Steel&Body XG Mandolin XG JazzGuitar XG MellowGuitar XG JazzAmp XG CleanGuitar XG ChorusGuitar XG MutedGuitar XG FunkGuitar1 XG MuteSteelGtr XG FunkGuitar2 XG JazzMan XG Overdriven XG GuitarPinch XG Distortion XG FeedbackGtr XG FeedbackGtr2 XG GtrHarmonics XG GtrFeedback XG GtrHarmonics2 XG AcousticBass XG JazzRhythm XG VXUprghtBass XG FingerBass XG FingerDark XG FlangeBass XG Bass&DistEG XG FingerSlap XG FingerBass2 XG ModulatedBass XG PickBass XG MutePickBass XG FretlessBass XG FretlessBass2 XG FretlessBass3 XG FretlessBass4 XG Syn.Fretless XG SmthFretless XG SlapBass1 XG ResonantSlap XG PunchThumb XG SlapBass2 XG Vel.SwSlap XG SynthBass1 XG SynBass1Dark XG FastResoBass XG AcidBass XG Clavi.Bass XG TechnoBass XG Orbiter XG SquareBass XG RubberBass XG Hammer XG SynthBass2 XG MellowSyBass XG SequencedBass Category GUITAR BASS Voice Number MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 19 32 40 41 64 0 8 0 0 0 0 8 40 0 0 40 0 0 3 8 24 35 40 41 42 45 0 3 8 40 41 64 65 0 27 64 65 0 0 3 16 32 40 0 0 40 41 64 0 35 64 0 16 17 32 0 18 40 40 40 40 40 40 41 41 42 43 44 45 45 45 46 47 47 48 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 51 51 51 51 52 53 53 53 53 53 54 55 55 55 55 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 58 58 Voice Name XG ClickSynBass XG SynBass2Dark XG SmoothSyBass XG ModulrSyBass XG DXBass XG XWireBass XG Violin XG SlwAtkViolin XG Viola XG Cello XG Contrabass XG Trem.Strings XG SlwAtTremStr XG SuspenseStr XG PizzicatoStr XG Orch.Harp XG YangChin XG Timpani XG Strings1 XG StereoStrings XG SlwAtkStrings XG ArcoStrings XG 60’sStrings XG Orchestra XG Orchestra2 XG TremOrchestra XG Vel.Strings XG Strings2 XG S.SlowStrings XG LegatoStrings XG WarmStrings XG Kingdom XG 70’sStrings XG Strings3 XG SynStrings1 XG ResoStrings XG SynStrings4 XG SynStrings5 XG SynStrings2 XG ChoirAahs XG StereoChoir XG ChoirAahs2 XG MellowChoir XG ChoirStrings XG VoiceOohs XG SynthVoice XG SynthVoice2 XG Choral XG AnalogVoice XG OrchestraHit XG OrchestraHit2 XG Impact XG Trumpet XG Trumpet2 XG BriteTrumpet XG WarmTrumpet XG Trombone XG Trombone2 Category BASS STRINGS ENSEMBLE 13 BRASS DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Appendix Voice Number MSB 233 Voice Number 13 Appendix 234 MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 6 32 37 0 35 40 41 42 0 12 20 24 27 32 45 64 0 18 40 41 45 64 0 0 40 43 0 40 41 64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 8 18 19 64 65 66 0 6 8 59 59 60 61 61 61 61 62 62 62 62 62 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 64 64 64 64 64 64 65 66 66 66 67 67 67 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 82 82 82 Voice Name XG Tuba XG Tuba2 XG MutedTrumpet XG FrenchHorn XG FrHornSolo XG FrenchHorn2 XG HornOrchestra XG BrassSection XG Tp&TbSection XG BrassSection2 XG HighBrass XG MellowBrass XG SynthBrass1 XG QuackBrass XG ResoSynBrass XG PolyBrass XG SynthBrass3 XG JumpBrass XG AnaVel.Brass1 XG AnalogBrass1 XG SynthBrass2 XG SoftBrass XG SynthBrass4 XG ChoirBrass XG AnaVel.Brass2 XG AnalogBrass2 XG SopranoSax XG AltoSax XG SaxSection XG HyperAltoSax XG TenorSax XG BreathyTenor XG SoftTenorSax XG TenorSax2 XG BaritoneSax XG Oboe XG EnglishHorn XG Bassoon XG Clarinet XG Piccolo XG Flute XG Recorder XG PanFlute XG BlownBottle XG Shakuhachi XG Whistle XG Ocarina XG SquareLead XG SquareLead2 XG LMSquare XG Hollow XG Shroud XG Mellow XG SoloSine XG SineLead XG SawtoothLead XG SawtoothLead2 XG ThickSaw DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Category BRASS REED PIPE SYNTH LEAD Voice Number MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 19 20 24 25 40 41 45 96 0 65 0 64 0 64 65 0 24 64 0 35 0 16 64 65 0 64 0 16 17 18 64 65 0 64 65 66 67 0 64 66 67 0 64 65 0 64 65 0 0 20 27 64 66 0 45 64 65 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 83 84 84 85 85 85 86 86 86 87 87 88 88 88 88 89 89 90 90 90 90 90 90 91 91 91 91 91 92 92 92 92 93 93 93 94 94 94 95 96 96 96 96 96 97 97 97 97 Voice Name XG DynamicSaw XG DigitalSaw XG BigLead XG HeavySynth XG WaspySynth XG PulseSaw XG Dr.Lead XG VelocityLead XG Seq.Analog XG CalliopeLead XG PurePad XG ChiffLead XG Rubby XG CharangLead XG DistortedLead XG WireLead XG VoiceLead XG SynthAahs XG VoxLead XG FifthsLead XG BigFive XG Bass&Lead XG Big&Low XG Fat&Perky XG SoftWhirl XG NewAgePad XG Fantasy XG WarmPad XG ThickPad XG SoftPad XG SinePad XG HornPad XG RotaryStrings XG PolySynthPad XG PolyPad80 XG ClickPad XG AnalogPad XG SquarePad XG ChoirPad XG Heaven XG Itopia XG CCPad XG BowedPad XG Glacier XG GlassPad XG MetallicPad XG TinePad XG PanPad XG HaloPad XG SweepPad XG Shwimmer XG Converge XG PolarPad XG Celestial XG Rain XG Clavi.Pad XG HarmoRain XG AfricanWind Category SYNTH LEAD SYNTH PAD SYNTH EFFECTS LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 66 0 27 64 0 12 14 18 35 40 41 42 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 0 18 19 40 64 65 66 67 0 64 96 0 64 65 66 67 68 70 71 96 0 8 14 64 65 66 67 68 69 0 64 0 32 35 96 97 0 97 98 98 98 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 101 101 101 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 104 104 105 105 105 105 105 106 Voice Name XG Carib XG SoundTrack XG Prologue XG Ancestral XG Crystal XG SynthDr.Comp XG Popcorn XG TinyBells XG RoundGlocken XG GlockenChime XG ClearBells XG ChorusBells XG SynthMallet XG SoftCrystal XG LoudGlocken XG ChristmasBel XG VibeBells XG DigitalBells XG AirBells XG BellHarp XG Gamelimba XG Atmosphere XG WarmAtmos. XG HollowRelease XG NylonEl.Piano XG NylonHarp XG HarpVox XG Atmos.Pad XG Planet XG Brightness XG FantasyBells XG Smokey XG Goblins XG GoblinsSynth XG Creeper XG RingPad XG Ritual XG ToHeaven XG Night XG Glisten XG BellChoir XG Echoes XG Echoes2 XG EchoPan XG EchoBells XG BigPan XG SynthPiano XG Creation XG StarDust XG Reso&Panning XG Sci-Fi XG Starz XG Sitar XG DetunedSitar XG Sitar2 XG Tambra XG Tamboura XG Banjo Category SYNTH EFFECTS ETHNIC Voice Number MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 28 96 97 98 0 0 96 97 0 0 0 0 64 96 97 0 96 97 98 99 100 101 0 0 97 98 0 96 0 96 0 64 65 66 0 64 65 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 106 106 106 106 107 108 108 108 109 110 111 112 112 112 112 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 116 116 117 117 118 118 118 118 119 119 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 1 2 4 17 33 34 35 36 37 38 49 50 Voice Name XG MutedBanjo XG Rabab XG Gopichant XG Oud XG Shamisen XG Koto XG Taisho-kin XG Kanoon XG Kalimba XG Bagpipe XG Fiddle XG Shanai XG Shanai2 XG Pungi XG Hichiriki XG TinkleBell XG Bonang XG Altair XG GamelanGongs XG StereoGamelan XG RamaCymbal XG AsianBells XG Agogo XG SteelDrums XG GlassPerc. XG ThaiBells XG Woodblock XG Castanets XG TaikoDrum XG GranCassa XG MelodicTom XG MelodicTom2 XG RealTom XG RockTom XG SynthDrum XG AnalogTom XG ElectroPerc. XG Rev.Cymbal XG GtrFretNoise XG BreathNoise XG Seashore XG BirdTweet XG TelephoneRing XG Helicopter XG Applause XG Gunshot XG CuttingNoise XG CuttingNoise2 XG StringSlap XG Fl.KeyClick XG Shower XG Thunder XG Wind XG Stream XG Bubble XG Feed XG Dog XG Horse Category ETHNIC PERCUSSION SOUND EFFECTS DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 13 Appendix Voice Number MSB 235 Voice Number MSB LSB PRG 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 126 126 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 51 55 56 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 97 98 99 100 101 113 114 115 116 1 2 5 9 17 25 26 28 33 41 49 1 2 Voice Name XG BirdTweet2 XG Ghost XG Maou XG PhoneCall XG DoorSqueak XG DoorSlam XG ScratchCut XG ScratchSplit XG WindChime XG TelphoneRing2 XG CarEngineIgn XG CarTiresSqel XG CarPassing XG CarCrash XG Siren XG Train XG JetPlane XG Starship XG Burst XG RollrCoaster XG Submarine XG Laugh XG Scream XG Punch XG Heartbeat XG FootSteps XG MachineGun XG LaserGun XG Explosion XG Firework Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Hit Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 13 Appendix 236 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Category SOUND EFFECTS DRUM *Refer to Drum Kit Map XG Drum Map 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Standard Kit 1 (127/0/1) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree No Sound Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Standard Kit 2 (127/0/2) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot H Kick Tight Kick Short Side Stick Light Snare Short Hand Clap Snare Tight H Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Hit Kit (127/0/5) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Electro Sticks Kick Tight L Snare Pitched Kick Wet Kick Tight H Stick Ambient Snare Ambient Hand Clap Snare Tight 2 Hybrid Tom 1 Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hybrid Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hybrid Tom 3 Hi-Hat Open 2 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Hybrid Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Light Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Room Kit (127/0/9) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Snappy Hand Clap Snare Tight Snap Tom Room 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Room 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Room 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Room 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Rock Kit (127/0/17) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Noisy Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick 2 Kick Gate Side Stick Snare Rock Hand Clap Snare Rock Tight Tom Rock 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Rock 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Rock 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Rock 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Electro Kit (127/0/25) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll Hi Q 2 Snare Snap Elec Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Side Stick Snare Noisy 2 Hand Clap Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Electro 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Electro 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Electro 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø 13 Appendix MSB/LSB/PC Note DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 237 MSB/LSB/ PCNote 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 13 Appendix 238 Analog Kit (127/0/26) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll Hi Q 2 Snare Noisy 4 Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Anlg Short Kick Analog Side Stick Anlg Snare Analog Hand Clap Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hat Close Analog Tom Analog 2 Hat Close Anlg 2 Tom Analog 3 Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves 2 Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Dance Kit (127/0/28) Kick Dance 1 Kick Dance 2 Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Dance 1 Scratch Dance 2 Finger Snap Click Noise Dance Perc 1 Reverse Dance 1 Dance Perc 2 Hi Q Dance 1 Snare Analog 3 Vinyl Noise Snare Analog 4 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Dance 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Snare Dance 1 Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Anlg Snare Clap Dance Clap Snare Dry Tom Dance 1 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Tom Dance 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Tom Dance 3 Hi-Hat Open 3 Tom Dance 4 Tom Dance 5 Crash Analog Tom Dance 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Anlg Splash Cymbal Cowbell Dance Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Analog Ride Analog Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves 2 Dance Perc 3 Dance Perc 4 Dance Breath 1 Dance Breath 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Jazz Kit (127/0/33) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Jazz H Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Snare Jazz L Hand Clap Snare Jazz M Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Brush Kit (127/0/41) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Brush Slap 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Brush Slap 3 Hand Clap Brush Tap 2 Tom Brush 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Brush 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Brush 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Brush 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Symphony Kit (127/0/49) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft 2 Open Rim Shot Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Side Stick Band Snare Hand Clap Band Snare 2 Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Hand Cymbal High Tom Hand Cymbal S Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Hand Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Hand Cymbal 2 S Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off SFX Kit 1 (126/0/1) Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Cutting Noise 1 Cutting Noise 2 Ø Ø String Slap Ø Flute Key Click Ø Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Dog Horse Bird Tweet Ø Ø Ø Ghost Maou Ø Ø Ø 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 SFX Kit 2 (126/0/2) Key Off Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø CarEngnIgnition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Laugh Scream Punch Heart Beat Foot Steps Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Ø Ø Ø Ø 13 Appendix MSB/LSB/ PCNote DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 239 MIDI Data Format 1. Channel Messages 1.1 DDK Mode “” indicates “Not available.” “” indicates “Available.” Code (Hexadecimal) 13 Appendix 240 Function Receive Transmit Remarks 8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* 5-14ch 15ch       UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG Keyboard Percussion 9n, nn, 00 9n, nn, 01-7F Note Off Note On 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* 5-14ch 15ch (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)*    UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG Keyboard Percussion An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 5-14ch  XG Bn, 00, 00-7F Bn, 20, 00-7F Bank select 5-14ch  XG Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation 5-14ch  XG Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression 16ch (4ch)* 16ch (4ch)** Control LEAD 1 Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 5-14ch  XG Bn, 06, 00-7F Bn, 26, 00-7F Data Entry 5-14ch  XG Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 5-14ch  XG Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 5-14ch  Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression 16ch 5-14ch (16ch)* Control XG Bn, 40, 00-7F Sustain Hold  5-14ch (16ch)*  Control XG Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 5-14ch  XG XG Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 5-14ch  XG Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 5-14ch  XG Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 5-14ch  XG Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 5-14ch  XG Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 5-14ch  XG Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 5-14ch  XG Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 5-14ch  XG Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 5-14ch  XG Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 5-14ch  XG Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 5-14ch  XG Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 5-14ch  XG Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 5-14ch  XG Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 5-14ch  XG Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 5-14ch  XG Bn, 60, 00-7F Bn, 61, 00-7F Data Increment Data Decrement 5-14ch  XG Bn, 62, 00-7F Bn, 63, 00-7F NRPN LSB NRPN MSB 5-14ch  XG Bn, 64, 00-7F Bn, 65, 00-7F RPN LSB RPN MSB 5-14ch  XG DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks Bn, 78, 00 Bn, 79, 00 Bn, 7B, 00 Bn, 7C, 00 Bn, 7D, 00 Bn, 7E, 00 Bn, 7F, 00 All Sound Off Reset All Controllers All Note Off Omni Off Omni On Mono Poly 5-14ch ˛ XG Cn, nn Program Change 5-14ch 16ch ˛ 16ch XG Control Dn, 00-7F After Touch 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* 5-14ch (1ch)* (2ch)* ˛ UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 1ch 2ch (4ch)* ˛ ˛ ˛ (1-16ch)* ˛ UK LK LEAD 1 XG * Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 230). ** Can be output when assigned to channel 4. 1.2 XG Mode Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive 1-16ch Transmit 8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 9n, nn, 00 9n, nn, 01-7F Note On Note Off An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 00, 00-7F Bn, 20, 00-7F Bank select 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation Remarks ˛ (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)* UK LK PEDAL 1-16ch ˛ 1-16ch Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 06, 00-7F Bn, 26, 00-7F Data Entry 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 1-16ch Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression ˛ 16ch (4ch)** Control LEAD 1 ˛ (16ch)* Control Control 1-16ch Sustain Hold 1-16ch (16ch)* ˛ Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 1-16ch ˛ 13 Appendix Bn, 40, 00-7F DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 241 Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 60, 00-7F Bn, 61, 00-7F Data Increment Data Decrement 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 62, 00-7F Bn, 63, 00-7F NRPN LSB NRPN MSB 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 64, 00-7F Bn, 65, 00-7F RPN LSB RPN MSB 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 78, 00 Bn, 79, 00 Bn, 7B, 00 Bn, 7C, 00 Bn, 7D, 00 Bn, 7E, 00 Bn, 7F, 00 All Sound Off Reset All Controllers All Note Off Omni Off Omni On Mono Poly 1-16ch ˛ Cn, 00-7F Program Change Remarks 16ch Control (1ch)* (2ch)* ˛ UK LK PEDAL 1-16ch Dn, 00-7F After Touch 1-16ch En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 1-16ch ˛ ˛ ˛ (1-16ch)* UK LK * Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 230). ** Can be output when assigned to channel 4. 2. Realtime Messages Receive Transmit F8 Code (Hexadecimal) Clock Function Ø* Ø FA Start Ø Ø FC Stop Ø Ø FE Active Sensing Ø Ø FF Reset ˛ ˛ Remarks * Received only when in the Ext. mode 3. System Exclusive Messages 3.1 Format Universal Realtime Messages Code (Hexadecimal) 13 Appendix 242 Message Receive Transmit F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 01, SS, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Volume Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 03, SS, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Fine Tuning Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 04, 00, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Coarse Tuning Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 01, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Reverb Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 02, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Chorus Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 01, 0n, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 After Touch Parameter Ø ˛ DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 03, 0n, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Control Change Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 0A, 01, 0n, KK, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Key-Based Controller Ø ˛ Universal Non-Realtime Messages Receive Transmit F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7 XN Code (Hexadecimal) GM ON Message Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 03, F7 XN GM2 ON Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 02, F7 XN GM OFF Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 08, 08, JJ, GG, MM, ..data.., F7 XN GM2 Scale/Octave Tuning Ø ˛ XG Native Receive Transmit F0, 43, 1N, 4C, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., F7 Code (Hexadecimal) XG Parameter Change Message Ø ˛ F0, 43, 0N, 4C, BH, BL, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., cc, F7 XG Bulk Dump Ø ˛ F0, 43, 1N, 27, 30, 00, 00, MM, LL, cc, F7 XG Master Tuning Ø ˛ Receive Transmit Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Clavinova Exclusive Code (Hexadecimal) F0, 43, 73, 01, 02, F7 03 Message Request for Internal Synch. Mode Request for External Synch. Mode Message Exclusive Receive Transmit F0, 43, 60, 7A, F7 Code (Hexadecimal) Rhythm Start Message Ø ˛ F0, 43, 60, 7D, F7 Rhythm Stop Ø ˛ Receive Transmit ˛ Ø Electone Exclusive Code (Hexadecimal) Message F0, 43, 70, ID, 00, F7 Model ID Data F0, 43, 70, 70, 30, F7 Request-to-Send Model ID Data Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, nn(*1), 7F, F7 00 Switch ON Switch OFF Ø Ø Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, 50, TL, TH, F7 Tempo Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7(*2) Panel Switch Events Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 42, 3C, ..data.., F7 Current Registration Data Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, ..data..(*3), F7 MIDI Parameters Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 70, 70, nn(*4), F7 MDR Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, 70, 73, F7 EL ON Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, 70, 78, 00, 00, F7 Bar Signal ˛ Ø N: Device Number (“0” on DDK-7) ID: Model ID (DDK-7 = 52H) 13 Appendix ˛: don’t care DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 243 *1. Switches nn Switch 45H *2. Receive Transmit Ø Ø Left Footswitch Panel Switch Events MIDI Exclusive Format F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7 Selectors cc Switch Code 0F Registration Memory [1-16] dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-0F] ˛ - Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Volume cc Switch Code dd Remarks 12 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 13 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 14 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 15 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 16 Lead Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 17 Pedal Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 18 Pedal Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 19 Lead Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 1A Percussion Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 1B Reverb Depth Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Depth Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Organ Flute Voice cc Switch Code dd Remarks 30 Upper Organ Flute Voice [U. ORGAN FLUTES] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 31 Lower Organ Flute Voice [L. ORGAN FLUTES] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON To Lower cc Switch Code dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 36 Lead Voice 1 To Lower [TO LOWER ▼] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 37 Pedal Voice 1 To Lower [TO LOWER ▲] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 38 Pedal Voice 2 To Lower [TO LOWER ▲] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Solo Mode cc Switch Code 39 Lead Voice 2 Solo (Knee) [SOLO (FOOT PEDAL)] 13 Appendix 244 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Brilliance cc Switch Code 42 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 43 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 44 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 45 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 46 Lead Voice 1 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 47 Pedal Voice 1 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 48 Pedal Voice 2 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 49 Lead Voice 2 Brilliance  [00-06]  [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW Sustain cc Switch Code 50 Upper Sustain [UPPER (KNEE)] dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range  [00-01]  - 00:OFF, 01:ON 51 Lower Sustain [LOWER (KNEE)]  [00-01]  - 00:OFF, 01:ON 52 Pedal Sustain [PEDAL]  [00-01]  - 00:OFF, 01:ON Solo Bar cc Switch Code 59 Solo Bar dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range  [00-01]  - Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:OFF, 01:ON Keyboard Percussion cc Switch Code dd Remarks 5B Keyboard Percussion [1]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 5C Keyboard Percussion [2]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Disable cc Switch Code 5F Disable [D.] dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range  [00-01]  [00-01] Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Rotary Speaker cc Switch Code 60 Rotary Speaker Speed [ROTARY SP SPEED] dd Remarks 00:OFF, 01:ON Rhythm Sequence cc Switch Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 61 Sequence 1 [SEQ.1]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 62 Sequence 2 [SEQ.2]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 63 Sequence 3 [SEQ.3]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 64 Sequence 4 [SEQ.4]  [00-01]  [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 13 Appendix Code dd DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 245 *3. MIDI Parameter Voice Section Parameters MIDI Exclusive Format F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, hh, mm, ll, ..., F7 Panel Voice Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 7 = UK1, UK2, LK1, LK2, LEAD 1, LEAD 2, PEDAL 1, PEDAL 2) Address 13 Appendix 246 Size Data Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00-0D 5 00-7F 00-7F 00-02 00 00 Voice Assign Number 00-7F 00-7F 00-02 00 00 Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00-02 00 00 Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00 00 00 00-07 10 1 00-0D Voice Selector Number 00-0D Ø 00-0D Ø 00-0D 10 00-07 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F ˛ - 10 00-07 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 13 1 00-7F Brilliance 00:BRILLIANT 40:CENTER 7F:MELLOW Ø 00-7F ˛ - 10 00-07 14 1 00-04 Feet 00:PRESET 01:16' 02:8' 03:4' 04:2' Ø 00-7F Ø 00-04 10 00-07 15 1 00-7F Pan 00:LEFT 40:CENTER 7F:RIGHT Ø 00-7F Ø 08-78 10 00-07 16 1 00-7F Touch Tone Initial Touch 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 17 1 00-7F Touch Tone After Touch 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 18 1 00-7F Pitch After Touch 00:NARROW 7F:WIDE Ø 00-7F Ø 32-4E 10 00-07 19 1 00-7F User Vibrato 00:PRESET 01:USER Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-07 1A 1 00-7F Vibrato Delay 00:SHORT 7F:LONG Ø 00-7F Ø 02-1A 10 00-07 1B 1 00-7F Vibrato Depth 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-54 10 00-07 1C 1 00-7F Vibrato Speed 00:SLOW 7F:FAST Ø 00-7F Ø 3C-6C 10 00-05 1D 1 00-7F Pitch Horizontal Touch 00:NARROW 7F:WIDE Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 1E 1 00-7F Touch Vibrato (On/Off) 00:OFF 7F:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 04-07 1F 1 00-7F TO LOWER▼/▲/SOLO (KNEE) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 10 04-05 20 1 00-02 Slide (On/Foot Pedal/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON 02:Foot Pedal Ø 00-02 Ø 00-02 10 04-05 21 1 00-7F Slide Time 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 02-7F 10 00-07 22 1 00-7F Tune/Detune 00:Down 40:Center 7F:Up Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-01/ 04-07 23 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Pitch Bend 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-05 24 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Control 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-07 25 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown 40:Normal 46:KeyUp Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46 10 06-07 28 1 00-7F Poly (On/Off) 00:Mono 01:Poly Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 05 29 1 00-7F Priority (Last/Top) 00:TOP 01:LAST Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-07 2A 1 00-7F Volume Mute 00:Mute OFF 01:Mute ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 hh mm ll 10 00-07 10 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Parameter Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 40 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Effect 1 Type MSB/LSB 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F 00-07 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 00-07 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 51 3 00 00-7F 00-7F 10 00-07 52 2 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 53 2 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 54 2 10 00-07 55 10 00-07 56 10 00-07 10 00-07 10 10 hh mm ll 10 00-07 10 10 Effect 2 Type MSB/LSB 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Effect 2 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 57 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 58 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 00-07 59 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 00-07 5A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 60 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 61 2 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 62 1 Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 63 1 Length 7F:Hold 7E:Long 00:Short Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Effect 2 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F Organ Flute Voice Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 1 = UK, LK) Size Data 00 1 00-7F Footage 16' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00-01 01 1 00-7F Footage 8' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 02 1 00-7F Footage 5-1/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 03 1 00-7F Footage 4' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 04 1 00-7F Footage 2-2/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F mm ll 11 00-01 11 Parameter Data DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 13 Appendix Address hh 247 Address Size Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 05 1 00-7F Footage 2' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00-01 06 1 00-7F Footage 1-3/5' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 07 1 00-7F Footage 1-1/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 08 1 00-7F Footage 1' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 09 1 00-7F Response 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0A 1 00-7F Attack 4' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0B 1 00-7F Attack 2-2/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0C 1 00-7F Attack 2' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0D 1 00-7F Attack Length 00:Short 7F:Long Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 10 1 00-7F Organ Flutes (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 11 00-01 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 13 1 00-7F Type (Sine/Vintage) 00:Sine 01:Vintage Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 11 00-01 40 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Effect Type MSB/LSB 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F hh mm ll 11 00-01 11 Parameter Data 1st:ParameterMSB 2nd:ParameterLSB 11 00-01 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter1 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter2 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter3 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter4 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 11 00-01 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter5 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter6 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter7 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter8 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 11 00-01 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter9 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter10 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter11 Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter12 Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 11 00-01 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter13 Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter14 Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter15 Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter16 Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 50 2 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F Ø 11 00-01 62 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 11 00-01 63 1 00-7F Length 7F:Hold 7E:Long 00:Short Ø 00-7F Ø 15-3D,7F Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Keyboard Parameters Sustain Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 2 = UK, LK, PEDAL) 13 Address Appendix 248 Size Data Parameter Data hh mm ll 12 00-02 00 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 12 00-02 01 1 00-7F Length 00:Short 7F:Long Ø 00-7F ˛ 15-3D DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Keyboard Percussion Parameters (Address mm: 1 – 2 = K.B.P. [1], K.B.P. [2]) Address Size Data 10 1 00-7F Keyboard Percussion (On/Off) 11 1 00-08 Keyboard Percussion Menu hh mm ll 12 01-02 12 01-02 Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 00:PRESET 01:USER 1 02:USER 2 03:USER 3 04:USER 4 05:USER 5 06:USER 6 07:USER 7 08:USER 8 Ø 00-08 Ø 00-08 Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 0000-7F7F Ø 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00-0B Rhythm Rhythm Parameters Address Size Data 00-0B 2 0000-7F7F 00 10 1 00-0B Rhythm Selector Number Ø 00-0B Ø 00-0B 00 11 1 00-7F Percussion Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F ˛ - 13 00 12 1 00-7F Percussion Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 13 00 13 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Tempo Control (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 14 1 00-7F Footswitch Rhythm Control 00:INTRO 1 01:INTRO 2 02:INTRO 3 08:MAIN A 09:MAIN B 0A:MAIN C 0B:MAIN D 18:BREAK 20:ENDING 1 21:ENDING 2 22:ENDING 3 7E:STOP 7F:OFF (INTRO 1 – STOP) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 13 00 15 1 00-7F Add Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 16 1 00-7F Main Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 17 1 00-7F Chord 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 18 1 00-7F Chord 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 19 1 00-7F Pad (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1A 1 00-7F Phrase 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1B 1 00-7F Phrase 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1C 1 00-7F Auto Fill (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø 00-7F ˛ - hh mm ll 13 00 13 13 Parameter Rhythm Assign Number Rhythm Sequence Parameters mm ll 13 01 00-03 Size Data 1 00-7F Parameter Sequence [SEQ.1] – [SEQ.4] Data 00:OFF 01:ON 13 Appendix Address hh DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 249 Accompaniment Parameters Address Size Data 11 1 00-7F Accompaniment Volume 12 1 00-7F Accompaniment Reverb (Send Level) hh mm ll 13 02 13 02 Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F A.B.C. Function Parameters Address Size Data Parameter 00 1 00-7F 03 01 1 03 02 1 hh mm ll 13 03 13 13 Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Auto Bass Chord Mode 00:OFF 01:Single Finger 02:Fingered 03:Custom A.B.C. Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03 00-7F Lower Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 00-7F Pedal Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 M.O.C. Function Parameters Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 13 04 00 1 00-7F Melody On Chord Mode 00:OFF 01:1 02:2 03:3 Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03 13 04 01 1 00-7F M.O.C. Foot Pedal Control (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 Size Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Section Parameters Address Parameter Data hh mm ll 13 05 00 1 00-7F Intro 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 01 1 00-7F Intro 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 02 1 00-7F Intro 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 08 1 00-7F Main A (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 09 1 00-7F Main B (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 0A 1 00-7F Main C (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 0B 1 00-7F Main D (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 18 1 00-7F Break (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 20 1 00-7F Ending 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 21 1 00-7F Ending 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 22 1 00-7F Ending 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Keyboard Percussion Parameters Address 13 Appendix 250 Size Data 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F hh mm ll 13 10 13 10 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Parameter Data Overall System Parameters Address Size Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00 1 00-7F Disable (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 00 01 1 00-7F Organ Flute Attack Mode 00:Each 01:First Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 14 00 02 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown 40:Normal 46:KeyUp Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46 14 00 03 1 01-0C 2nd Expression Range 01:100 C 0C:1200 C Ø 01-0C Ø 01-0C 14 00 04 1 00-7F Footswitch Mode 00:OFF 01:Rhythm 02:Glide 03:Rotary Speaker Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03 14 00 05 1 00-7F Pitch 00:PitchDown 40:Normal 7F:PitchUp Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 14 00 06 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Time 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 04-1C 14 00 08 1 00-7F MIDI Control Expression (INT/EXT) 00:Internal 01:External Ø 00-7F ˛ - 14 00 09 1 00-7F MIDI Control Lead 1 (INT/EXT) 00:Internal 01:External Ø 00-7F ˛ - 14 00 0A 3 00-04, 06 00-03 00-0B Registration Menu 00-04, 06 00-03 00-0B Ø 00-04, 06 00-03 00-0B Ø 00-04, 06 00-03 00-0B 14 00 0B 1 00-01 Disable Mode 00: Normal 01: Tempo Ø 00-01 Ø 00-01 Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 14 00 14 Parameter Data Effect Parameters (Overall): Reverb Address Size Data 00 1 00-7F Reverb Depth 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F ˛ - 01 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Panel) 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45 01 02 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Reverb Type (Panel) 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 14 01 14 14 Parameter Data Effect Parameters (Overall): Rhythm Reverb Address Size Data Parameter Data hh mm ll 14 02 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Rhythm) 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45 14 02 02 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Reverb Type (Rhythm) 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Effect Parameters (Overall): Rotary Speaker Size Data 00 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 03 01 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed Control Mode 00:STOP 01:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 03 02 2 0000007F Rotary Speaker Speed Control Speed 0000:SLOW 007F:FAST Ø 0000-007F Ø 0040-007F mm ll 14 03 14 14 Parameter Data 13 Appendix Address hh DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 251 AUX OUT Address hh mm ll 14 04 00-13 Size Data 1 00-03 Size Data Parameter AUX OUT Address II: 00-07 = UK1, UK2, LK1, LK2, Lead1, Lead2, PEDAL1, PEDAL2 08 = Upper Organ Flutes, 09 = Lower Organ Flutes, 0A = Main Drum, 0B = Add Drum, 0C = Accompaniment, 11 = KBP, 12 = MIC, 13 = XG Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø 00,04-7F 01 02 03 Ø 00 01 02 03 Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:MAIN 01:SUB1 02:SUB2 03:SUB1&2 Foot Pedal Address mm ll 14 05 00 1 00-09 Foot Pedal 1 Assign 00:OFF 01:Expression 02:Sustain 03:Slide 04:MOC 05:Solo 06:Rhythm Control 07:Glide 08:Rotary Speaker 09:Regist Shift Ø 00,0A-7F 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Ø 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 14 05 01 1 00-01 Foot Pedal 1 Polarity 00:01:+ Ø 00 01 Ø 00 01 14 05 02 1 00-7F Foot Pedal 1 Data (ON/OFF) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 14 05 10 1 00-09 Foot Pedal 2 Assign 00:OFF 01:Expression 02:Sustain 03:Slide 04:MOC 05:Solo 06:Rhythm Control 07:Glide 08:Rotary Speaker 09:Regist Shift Ø 00,0A-7F 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Ø 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 14 05 11 1 00-01 Foot Pedal 2 Polarity 00:01:+ Ø 00 01 Ø 00 01 14 05 12 1 00-7F Foot Pedal 2 Data (ON/OFF) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F *4. MDR nn Command Receive Transmit 01H Play Start Ø ˛ 02H Play Stop Ø ˛ 03H Record Start Ø ˛ 04H Record Stop Ø ˛ 05H Fast Forward Start Ø ˛ 06H Fast Forward Stop Ø ˛ 09H Rhythm Pointer Reset Ø ˛ 13 Appendix 252 Parameter hh DDK-7 Owner’s Manual MIDI Implementation Chart Date: 6-Apr-2006 Version: 1.00 YAMAHA DDK / Model: DDK-7 Transmitted Recognized Basic Channel Default Changed 1, 2, 3, 16 (*1) 1-16 1-3, 5-16 (*2) 4 Mode Default Messages Altered Mode 3 ˛ ************************ Mode 3 ˛ ˛ 0-127 (*4) :True Voice 36-96 (*3) ************************ Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH ˛ Ø Ø (*6) Ø Ø (*5) Ø ˛ ˛ Ø (*7) ˛ Ø (*7) ˛ Ø (*7) ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*7) Ø (*6) Ø (*6, 7) ˛ Ø (*6, 7) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*10) ************************ Ø (*11) Ø Ø Note Number Velocity Note on Note off After Touch Key's Ch's Pitch Bend Control Change Program Change 0, 32 1, 5, 7, 10 4 6, 38 11 16 64 65-67 71-78 84, 91, 93, 94 96, 97 98-99, 100-101 :True number System Exclusive System Common :Song Position :Song Select :Tune ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ System Real Time :Clock :Commands Ø Ø Ø (*9) Ø :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local On/Off :All Notes Off :Active Sense :Reset ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø (120) (*6) Ø (121) (*6) ˛ Ø (123-127) (*6) Ø ˛ Aux Messages Notes Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY *1; *2; *3; *4; *5; *6; *8; *10; *11; Remarks Bank Select 2nd Expression Data Entry Expression VA After Touch Sustain Sound Controller Data Entry SW NRPN, RPN (FAH, FCH) 13 1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 16ch: CONTROL 1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 4ch: LEAD1, 5-14ch: XG, 15ch: KEYBOARD PERCUSSION, 16ch: CONTROL UK: 48-96, LK: 36-96, PEDAL: 36-60 UK, LK, PEDAL, LEAD1: 36-96, XG: 0-127, PERCUSSION: 3-127 UK: UK HorizontalTouch, LK: LK HorizontalTouch XG only *7; CONTROL only UK only *9; External Mode only CONTROL: 0-15 UK, LK, PEDAL, CONTROL: 0-15 XG: 0-127 Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Appendix Function Ø : Yes ˛ : No DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 253 Date: 6-Apr-2006 Version: 1.00 YAMAHA [XG mode] / Model: DDK-7 Function Transmitted (*1) Basic Channel Default Changed 1, 2, 3, 16 1-16 1-16 1-16 Mode Default Messages Altered Mode3 ˛ ************************ Mode 3 ˛ ˛ 36-96 ************************ 0-127 :True Voice Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH ˛ Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø Ø ˛ Ø Ø ˛ Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø 0-15 ************************ Ø System Exclusive Ø Ø System Common :Song Position :Song Select :Tune ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ System Real Time :Clock :Commands Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Aux Messages :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local On/Off :All Notes Off :Active Sense :Reset ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø (120) Ø (121) ˛ Ø (123-127) Ø ˛ Note Number Note on Note off Velocity Key's Ch's After Touch Pitch Bend Control Change Program Change 13 Recognized 0, 32 1, 5, 7, 10 4 6, 38 11 16 64 65-67 71-78 84, 91, 93, 94 96, 97 98-99, 100-101 :True number Notes *1; Remarks Bank Select 2nd Expression Data Entry Expression VA After Touch Sustain Sound Controller Data Entry SW NRPN, RPN Same as that in the EL mode Appendix Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY 254 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Ø : Yes ˛ : No Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution GENERAL OPERATION The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after turning the power on. This is normal; the DDK-7 takes a while to start up. A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the DDK-7. If this occurs, plug the DDK-7 into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from the device that seems to be the source of the problem. Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone. The sound of the DDK-7 causes surrounding objects to resonate. Because the DDK-7 is capable of producing powerful bass sounds, resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the DDK-7’s volume. In the LCD display, there are some black points (unlit) or white points (always lit). Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs. The sound is too small even when the volume is set to its maximum. • The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it clockwise. • The Expression Pedal or Foot Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your toe. Foot Pedals has no effect. “OFF” is selected in the Foot Pedal display. Select function to assign it to the Foot Pedal. (page 203) The DDK-7 panel does not function normally or the content of the memorized data has changed. This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to electrical storms or other reasons may cause the DDK-7 to malfunction and/or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory Set operation to reset the DDK-7 (page 24). The Pedal Unit does not work. A cable of the Pedal Unit is disconnected. Make sure that power is OFF when connecting or disconnecting the pedal. Some parts cannot be heard from the Headphones or an external speakers. The parts are assigned to AUX OUT SUB jacks. If you want to hear all parts from Headphones, select AUX OUT MAIN jacks for all parts. (page 220) If you want to hear all parts from an external speakers, use the output from the mixer. Appendix 13 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 255 Problem Possible Cause and Solution VOICES/RHYTHMS The pitch may sound excessively high on the Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the Lower and Upper keyboards. This may occur when you compare the DDK-7’s sounds with that of a piano. Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the DDK-7 is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges. Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely sounds. added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks. When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes sound. Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower Keyboards) is 14 notes. When you turn the Pedal Polyphonic mode to on, the total is 14 for all keyboards, Upper, Lower and Pedalboard. Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played. For practical performance reasons, the DDK-7 has been designed so that only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time. If you want, the pedal Voice can be set to polyphonic mode (page 43). The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the volume is properly set. • The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn off the mode in the display (page 72). • TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal Voice sections are turned on. Turn the function off (page 30). When selecting a Voice or rhythm, the Voice or rhythm title at the top of the LCD does not match the selected Voice or rhythm. The currently assigned Voice or rhythm is displayed at the top of the LCD, and remains until another Voice or rhythm has been selected. When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion instruments are also heard. The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the function, be sure to turn it off (page 75). Even though a User button’s rhythm has been selected and started, the pattern does not sound. Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern has not been saved to the selected User button. EFFECTS The Touch Tone function does not operate. Adjust the Touch Tone settings in the Voice Condition display (page 42). The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice sections, even when the total Reverb depth on the panel is increased. Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb Display Pages 2 – 3. The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section is on. Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display Pages 3 and/ or 4 (for panel Voices), or in the Organ Flute Voices ATTACK/VOLUME Page (for Organ Flute Voices). ACCOMPANIMENT The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change, even when pressing different keys of the keyboard. Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch. While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing, the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound, even when the keys are played. Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of an Intro/Ending pattern. The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the rhythm has been started. • The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 72). • All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on (page 71). The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function cannot be heard. The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices. The bass phrase of the Auto Bass Cord cannot be heard. The pedal polyphonic mode may be set to on. Turn it off in the Voice Condition display (page 43). REGISTRATION MEMORY 13 Certain functions have not been memorized to Registration Memory. Appendix 256 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 91. Problem Possible Cause and Solution VOICE EDITING During Voice editing, the specified Voice isn’t heard, even when the keyboard is played. • The Element is turned to mute or its level is set to minimum. Turn it to on or increase the volume. • You may have played keys outside the range of Note Limit. Play only keys within the Note Limit range. An error message appears while the Voice name is entered. Voice name capacity is 16 characters. Delete the unnecessary letters or spaces. RHYTHM PROGRAM During use of the Rhythm Pattern Program, no sound is produced even when you play a certain percussion sound. If percussion sounds have been recorded while memory is full, no subsequently selected instruments can be heard or recorded. If necessary, erase some of the less necessary percussion sounds and play again. MUSIC DATA RECORDER Recording or playback cannot be performed. • The part buttons in the Rec Standby display or Playing display may have been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY. • The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB. • The media is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect. Recording is stopped before the performance is finished. • The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit. Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs. • When you overwrite the song, the length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the previously recorded song, then record again (page 139). • The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB. An error message appears while entering a folder name or song name. • The song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 letters. • The song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 122. • The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234 letters. Reduce the layer or shorten the song/folder name to shorten the path. The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a recording, or stops in the middle of the performance. The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time indicator appears in the display. The floppy disk cannot be formatted when you want to Recognizing an unformatted disk takes a few seconds after it is inserted. format an unformatted disk. Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again. During playback, you may have removed the USB flash memory or floppy disk. Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the [J] (Stop) button before removing the media. 13 Appendix The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound continuously. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 257 Specifications KEYBOARD Keyboard Type UPPER: 49 Keys (C-C) Standard (FS) LOWER: 61Keys (C-C) Standard (FS) Touch Tone UPPER: Initial Touch/After Touch LOWER: Initial Touch/After Touch TONE GENERATION AWM2 Maximum Polyphony Voice Sections: 128 notes Organ/Rhythm Sections, XG: 128 notes Multi Timbral Capacity 16 Wave Registration Voice Voice Sections: 177MB (when converted to 16-bit linear format) Organ/Rhythm Sections, XG: 166MB (when converted to 16-bit linear format) Memory Basic Registration 1-16, Current Registration Registration Menu 288 Registrations Preset Voice UPPER: 2, LEAD: 2, LOWER: 2, PEDAL: 2 Voice Buttons SECTION SELECT, VOLUME UP/DOWN, TO LOWER (LEAD1, PEDAL1,2), SOLO (LEAD2) Reverb: 29 Types x 2 (Voice/Rhythm), Brilliance, Sustain, Insertion(1, 2)x 183 Types x 8 Organ Sections UPPER, LOWER Type SINE, VINTAGE Footage Mode Organ Effect Rhythm FIRST, EACH 15 Type Control U.ORGAN FLUTES, L.ORGAN FLUTES, ROTARY SP SPEED Preset: 274 Pattern x 7 parts x 15 Sections User Rhythm: 48 Pattern x 7 parts x 15 Sections Parts Rhythm Control Tempo Keyboard Percussion SECTION SELECT, VOLUME UP/DOWN Main Drum, Add Drum, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2 INTRO 1,2,3, ENDING 1,2,3, MAIN A,B,C,D, FILL IN A,B,C,D, BREAK 40 - 240 Preset: 2, User: 8 Subordinate Performance Auto Bass Chord 3 Type, Memory (LOWER, PEDAL) Melody On Chord 3 Type, Memory (LOWER, PEDAL) Voice Edit Layers Parameter Rhythm Pattern Program Sections Note Resolution Beat Measure 13 Kits Accompaniment Appendix DDK-7 Owner’s Manual AWM (4) Element ON/OFF, EQ Low Frequency, EQ Low Gain, EQ High Frequency, EQ High Gain, Level, Note Limit, Pan, Note Shift, Tune Fine, Attack Rate, Release Rate, Cutoff Frequency, Resonance, LFO waveform, LFO Speed, LFO Pitch Modulation Depth, LFO Frequency Modulation Depth, LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth INTRO 1, 2, 3, ENDING 1, 2, 3, MAIN A, B, C, D, FILL IN A, B, C, D, BREAK 480 ppq (parts per quarter note) 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4 32 20 Drum Kits + 5 SFX Kits Chord1, 2 Voice 480 Voices Effects Reverb: 29 Types, Chorus:15 Types, Variations: 183 Type Percussion Instrument Setting 258 16’, 5 1/3’, 8’, 4’, 2 2/3’, 2’, 1 3/5’, 1 1/3’, 1’, Attack: 4’, 2 2/3’, 2’, LENGTH, RESPONSE Rhythm Rhythm Buttons PROGRAMS Preset: 415 Voices + 25 Drum Kits XG (Only for playing): 480 Voices + 11 Drum Kits User Voice: 16 Voice Sections Effects Organ Flute Voice 1-16, D. (Disable) Pan, Volume, Reverb, Pitch Coarse/Fine Rhythm Sequence Program Sequence 140 measures x 4 Sequences Registration Sequence Program Sequence 140 Registration x 4 Sequence, Next Registration Keyboard Percussion Assign Kits Registration Shift Steps Set Resolution Drum Setup Shift End Unifying parameter M. D. R. Parameters Folder Song Registration Recording 80 Steps Stop, Top, Next Regist Reverb (Voice/Rhythm), Volume, Pan, Brilliance, Sustain Up to 100 folders can exist in one media. Up to 100 songs can exist in one folder. Up to 50 Registrations can exist in one song. UPPER, LOWER, PEDAL, CONTROL, LEAD, K.B.P., XG Sequence Format DDK Original format (Copy Protect), SMF format 0, 1 (Format 1 load only) Format Conversion Convert TO EL, Convert FROM EL, Convert to XG Display Control Foot Pedal OTHERS 16 Drum Kits Pan, Volume, Reverb, Pitch Coarse/Fine UPPER, LOWER, PEDAL, CONTROL, LEAD, K.B.P. Playing CONTROLS 96 ppq (parts per quarter note) VOICE DISPLAY, REGIST MENU, FOOT SWITCH, MDR, UTILITY, PROGRAM, SUSTAIN, REVERB Section 1 (Expression), 2 (Sustain) Select Expression, Sustain, Rhythm, Glide, Rotary speaker, Slide, M.O.C. FootSwitch (When DDKU-P7 is used) Left Right Shift, Jump, User LCD Display Size 6.5-inch 144 (W) x 78.24 (H) mm Liquid Crystal Display Drive Method Dots Connectors Power Consumption Dimensions (W x D x H), Weight Supplied Accessories Rhythm, Glide, Rotary speaker TFT (WVGA) + touch panel Active Matrix 800 x RGB x 480 dots PHONES, MIC, MIC VOLUME, OUTPUT L/L+R, R (Phone), AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) MAIN L/L+R, R, SUB 1, 2 (Phone), AUX IN L/L+R, R (Phone), TO PEDAL, OPTICAL OUT, USB TO DEVICE x 2, USB TO HOST, MIDI IN/OUT, FOOT PEDAL 1 (VOLUME), 2 (SUSTAIN), AC INLET 51 W 1,150 (W) x 424 (D) x 173 (H) mm, 18 kg Owner’s Manual, AC Power cord Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Appendix 13 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 259 Index Numerics F 2nd Expression Pedal............................................................. 211 Factory Set ................................................................................24 Fast Forward............................................................................132 FEET ..........................................................................................43 File ...........................................................................................110 FILL IN .......................................................................................63 Filter.........................................................................................150 FINGERED CHORD...................................................................73 FIRST (Organ Flutes).................................................................39 Folder ......................................................................................110 Foot Pedal ...............................................................................203 FOOT PEDAL jacks .................................................................216 FOOT SWITCH ..................................................................96, 200 FOOTAGE..................................................................................38 Footswitches............................................................................200 FORMAT (MDR).......................................................................112 A AC INLET jack......................................................................... 215 ACCENT.................................................................................. 164 Accompaniment........................................................................ 71 Add Drum ................................................................................. 71 AFTER touch (Pitch).................................................................. 43 AFTER touch (Touch Tone)....................................................... 42 ASSEMBLE ............................................................................. 160 ASSIGN (Keyboard Percussion)............................................... 80 ATTACK (Organ Flutes) ............................................................ 39 ATTACK RATE (Voice Edit)..................................................... 150 Auto Bass Chord....................................................................... 72 Auto Fill ..................................................................................... 65 AUX IN .................................................................................... 216 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) ....................................................... 217 AWM (Voice Edit).................................................................... 147 G Gate Time ................................................................................172 Glide ........................................................................................202 B BAR/BEAT................................................................................. 67 BREAK ...................................................................................... 64 H C I Channel Messages ................................................................. 228 CHORD 1 .................................................................................. 71 CHORD 2 .................................................................................. 71 CHORUS (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................... 176 Control Change....................................................................... 228 CUSTOM A.B.C. ....................................................................... 73 CUTOFF FREQ........................................................................ 150 INITIAL touch.............................................................................42 Initialize (Factory Set) ................................................................24 Initialize (Registration Memory) .................................................95 INTERNAL ...............................................................................231 INTRO........................................................................................63 D [D.] (Disable) ............................................................................ 92 DATA CONTROL dial................................................................ 10 DELAY (Vibrato)........................................................................ 44 DEPTH (Reverb) ....................................................................... 47 DEPTH (Vibrato)........................................................................ 44 Display Select ........................................................................... 10 E EACH (Organ Flutes) ................................................................ 39 EFFECT ..................................................................................... 46 Effect category (Voice) ............................................................. 46 Effect Parameters ..................................................................... 46 EFFECT TYPE (Organ Flutes) ................................................... 40 Effect type (Voice) .................................................................... 46 Element ................................................................................... 144 ENDING .................................................................................... 64 EQ (Equalizer)......................................................................... 148 EXTERNAL .............................................................................. 231 13 Appendix 260 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Headphones............................................................................217 J Jacks and Controls..................................................................215 JUMP .........................................................................................97 K Keyboard Percussion ................................................................75 L L. ORGAN FLUTES....................................................................38 LANGUAGE...............................................................................16 LAST (Lead Voice) ....................................................................43 LAYER (Voice Edit)..................................................................148 LCD BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................17 LCD Display ..............................................................................10 LEAD 1, 2 ....................................................................................8 Lead Slide .................................................................................45 Lead Voice ................................................................................25 LEVEL (Voice Edit) ..................................................................149 LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) .............................................152 LOWER 1, 2 .................................................................................8 Lower Keyboard Voice ..............................................................26 M Q [M.] (Memory) ........................................................................... 90 M.O.C........................................................................................ 74 MAIN ......................................................................................... 63 Main Drum ................................................................................ 71 MAIN/FILL IN ............................................................................ 63 MASTER VOLUME .................................................................... 12 MDR ........................................................................................ 106 Melody On Chord ..................................................................... 74 MEMORY (A.B.C.)..................................................................... 74 METRONOME ......................................................................... 159 MIC jack.................................................................................. 215 MIC VOLUME.......................................................................... 215 MIDI ........................................................................................ 227 MIDI Control............................................................................ 230 MIDI IN/OUT ........................................................................... 216 MIDI OUT FILTER ................................................................... 230 MODE (Organ Flutes) ............................................................... 39 MODE (Rotary Speaker) ........................................................... 52 Music Data Recorder.............................................................. 106 Quantize ..................................................................................168 Next Regist ............................................................................. 125 NEXT REGIST (Shift End).......................................................... 98 NOTE LIMIT ............................................................................ 149 NOTE SHIFT............................................................................ 149 O OPTICAL OUT......................................................................... 216 Organ Flutes ............................................................................. 38 OUTPUT (MIDI)....................................................................... 230 P PAD........................................................................................... 71 PAN (Voice Edit) ..................................................................... 149 PAN (Voice) .............................................................................. 42 Part (Rhythm) ............................................................................ 71 Pause ...................................................................................... 132 PEDAL 1, 2.................................................................................. 8 Pedal polyphonic mode............................................................ 43 Pedal Unit ............................................................................... 221 Pedal Voice............................................................................... 26 PHONES ................................................................................. 215 PHRASE 1 ................................................................................. 71 PHRASE 2 ................................................................................. 71 Pitch ........................................................................................ 214 PITCH (Voice Section) .............................................................. 43 Pitch Bend .............................................................................. 212 Playback ................................................................................. 130 POLY......................................................................................... 43 Power ........................................................................................ 12 PRESET (Vibrato) ...................................................................... 44 Preset Keyboard Percussion .................................................... 75 PRESET TEMPO........................................................................ 67 PRIORITY .................................................................................. 43 PROGRAM .............................................................................. 155 Program Change .................................................................... 228 Protected Song ....................................................................... 129 Punch-in Recording ................................................................ 120 Real Time Write ...............................................................161, 169 Recording................................................................................117 Recording (Lead Voice 1 Voice only)......................................118 Recording (Part) ......................................................................118 REGIST EDIT (MDR)................................................................123 REGIST MENU...........................................................................21 Registration Memory .................................................................90 Registration Sequence ............................................................195 Registration Shift .......................................................................95 RELEASE RATE (Voice Edit) ...................................................150 Repeat .....................................................................................133 RESONANCE...........................................................................150 RESP. (Response) .....................................................................39 Reverb .......................................................................................47 REVERB (MIC.)........................................................................225 REVERB (Panel) ........................................................................47 REVERB (Rhythm Pattern Program) ........................................175 Rewind.....................................................................................132 Rhythm ......................................................................................61 Rhythm button ...........................................................................61 Rhythm Clock ..........................................................................163 Rhythm Condition ......................................................................65 Rhythm Menu ............................................................................62 Rhythm Pattern Program .........................................................155 Rhythm Program......................................................................154 Rhythm Sequence Program ....................................................190 Rhythmic Chord.......................................................................170 ROTARY SP SPEED...................................................................52 Rotary Speaker..........................................................................51 S Sections.....................................................................................63 SHIFT (Registration Shift) ..........................................................96 SHIFT END ................................................................................98 SINGLE FINGER........................................................................73 SLIDE.........................................................................................45 SLOW (Rotary Speaker) ............................................................52 SOLO.........................................................................................31 Song ................................................................................110, 113 Song Copy...............................................................................137 Song Delete.............................................................................139 Specifications ..........................................................................258 SPEED (Rotary Speaker) ...........................................................52 SPEED (Vibrato) ........................................................................44 START........................................................................................64 Step Write ................................................................................161 STOP (Rotary Speaker) .............................................................52 STOP (Shift End)........................................................................98 Style File Format ......................................................................182 Sustain.......................................................................................50 SUSTAIN (Panel) .......................................................................50 SYNCHRO START .....................................................................64 System Exclusive Messages ...................................................228 System Messages ...................................................................228 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 13 Appendix N R 261 T TEMPO (MDR) ........................................................................ 132 TEMPO (Rhythm) ...................................................................... 67 TIME (Slide) .............................................................................. 45 TO LOWER................................................................................ 30 TOP (Lead Voice) ..................................................................... 43 TOP (Shift End) ......................................................................... 98 TOUCH PANEL SOUND ........................................................... 17 TOUCH TONE........................................................................... 42 TOUCH VIBRATO ..................................................................... 45 Transpose ............................................................................... 214 TRANSPOSE (Voice section) .................................................... 45 TUNE (Voice section)................................................................ 45 TUNE FINE (Voice Edit) .......................................................... 149 U U. ORGAN FLUTES .................................................................. 38 UPPER 1, 2 ................................................................................. 8 Upper Keyboard Voice ............................................................. 25 USB TO DEVICE ............................................................. 216, 226 USB TO DEVICE terminal ....................................................... 215 USB TO HOST ................................................................ 216, 222 USER (Registration Shift) .......................................................... 97 USER (Vibrato).......................................................................... 44 User Keyboard Percussion....................................................... 80 User Rhythm ........................................................................... 179 User Voice .............................................................................. 152 UTILITY ..................................................................................... 16 V VARIATION (Rhythm Pattern Program) .................................. 177 Version ...................................................................................... 24 VIBRATO................................................................................... 44 Voice ......................................................................................... 25 Voice button.............................................................................. 27 Voice Condition................................................................... 29, 42 VOICE DISPLAY........................................................................ 18 Voice Edit................................................................................ 144 Voice section ............................................................................ 25 Volume (Accompaniment) ........................................................ 72 Volume (Keyboard Percussion) ................................................ 76 VOLUME (MIC.) ...................................................................... 225 VOLUME (Organ Flutes) ........................................................... 39 VOLUME (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................... 174 VOLUME (Rhythm).................................................................... 66 VOLUME (Voice)....................................................................... 29 X XG ............................................................................................... 6 13 Appendix 262 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com Manual Development Department © 2006 Yamaha Corporation Published 06/2015 MWTO-D0 Printed in Japan WZ07700